Attachment 3323

PURCHASING CONTRACT NUMBER_______________
APPROVED AS TO FORM AND CONTENT:

____________________________________
Department Date

____________________________________
Purchasing Agent Date

____________________________________
Legal Department Date

____________________________________
Risk Management Date

CITY OF BOISE

APPROVED BY:

____________________________________
David H. Bieter, Mayor Date

ATTEST: CONTRACT AMOUNT:
$(Insert Dollar Amount)

____________________________________
City Clerk Date

PW/WBG/475883 TABLE OF CONTENTS
JANUARY 2014 00 01 10 - 1
COPYRIGHT 2014 CH2M HILL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 11 00 Summary of Work
Supplement:
Construction Schedule (To be provided by Addendum)
01 31 13 Project Coordination
Supplements:
Fire Marshal Requirements
FM Global Tag-Out Brochure
FM Global Hot Work Permit Procedure Brochure
01 31 19 Project Meetings
01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation
01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Supplement:
Transmittal of Contractors Submittal
01 42 13 Abbreviations and Acronyms
01 43 33 Manufacturers Field Services
Supplement:
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation
01 45 33 Special Inspection and Testing
01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 61 00 Common Products Requirements
01 77 00 Closeout Procedures
DIVISION 2EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 00 Demolition
Supplement:
Asbestos Survey Report
DIVISION 3CONCRETE
03 01 32 Repair of Vertical and Overhead Concrete Surfaces
03 01 33 Repair of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces
03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories
03 15 00 Concrete Joints and Accessories
03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel
03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
03 39 00 Concrete Curing

TABLE OF CONTENTS PW/WBG/475883
00 01 10 - 2 JANUARY 2014
03 62 00 Nonshrink Grouting
Supplement:
24-Hour Evaluation of Nonshrink Grout Test
Form and Grout Testing Procedures
03 63 00 Concrete Doweling
03 64 23 Crack Repair Epoxy Injection Grouting
DIVISION 4MASONRY
04 21 13.13 Masonry Veneer
DIVISION 5METALS
05 05 23 Welding
Supplement:
Welding and Nondestructive Testing Table
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 6WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 10 00 Rough Carpentry
06 20 00 Finish Carpentry
DIVISION 7THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 13 53 Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing
07 18 00 Traffic Coatings
07 21 00 Thermal Insulation
07 54 23 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing
07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
07 70 01 Roof Specialties and Accessories
07 84 00 Firestopping
07 92 00 Joint Sealants
DIVISION 8OPENINGS
08 06 01 Door and Hardware Schedule
08 11 00 Metal Doors and Frames
08 14 00 Wood Doors
08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
08 71 00 Door Hardware
08 80 00 Glazing
DIVISION 9FINISHES
09 22 16 Nonstructural Metal Framing
09 22 36 Lath and Plastering

PW/WBG/475883 TABLE OF CONTENTS
JANUARY 2014 00 01 10 - 3
09 29 00 Gypsum Board
09 30 00 Tiling
09 51 23 Acoustical Tile Ceilings
09 65 00 Resilient Flooring
09 68 00 Carpeting
09 90 05 Architectural Painting
Supplement:
Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS)
DIVISION 10SPECIALTIES
10 80 00 Miscellaneous Specialties
DIVISIONS 11 THROUGH 20(NOT USED)
DIVISION 21FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 13 13 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
DIVISION 22PLUMBING
22 07 00 Plumbing Piping Insulation
22 10 01 Plumbing Piping and Accessories
Supplement:
Plumbing Piping Schedule
22 10 01.02 Copper and Copper Alloy Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
22 10 01.03 Cast Iron Soil Pipe (CISP) and Fittings
DIVISION 23HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
23 07 00 HVAC Insulation
23 31 13 Metal Ducts and Accessories
Supplement:
Ductwork Schedule
23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets
23 81 00 Air-Conditioning Equipment
DIVISIONS 24 AND 25(NOT USED)

TABLE OF CONTENTS PW/WBG/475883
00 01 10 - 4 JANUARY 2014
DIVISION 26ELECTRICAL
26 05 02 Basic Electrical Requirements
26 05 04 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
26 05 05 Conductors
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes
26 24 16 Panelboards
26 27 26 Wiring Devices
26 50 00 Lighting
26 56 00 Exterior Lighting
DIVISION 31EARTHWORK
31 23 13 Subgrade Preparation
31 23 16 Excavation
31 23 23 Fill and Backfill
DIVISION 32EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 84 23 Landscape Irrigation Systems (To be provided by Addendum)
32 91 13 Soil Preparation (To be provided by Addendum)
32 94 50 Silva Cells (To be provided by Addendum)
PART 2DRAWINGS (BOUND SEPARATELY)
END OF SECTION

PART 1
SPECIFICATIONS

PW/WBG/475883 SUMMARY OF WORK
JANUARY 2014 01 11 00 - 1
SECTION 01 11 00
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The completed Work will provide Owner with the completed code update
retrofit of the City Hall Two and existing Annex portion of the Boise City
Hall Complex located at 150 North Capitol Boulevard, Boise.
B. Scheduling of the Work will be the responsibility of the Construction
Manager. The schedule represents an approach to the Work that meets the
City of Boises relocation and logistics needs. The Owner and Construction
Manager reserves the right to adjust the schedule to meet changing needs of
the Owner or construction process. See Section 01 31 13, Project
Coordination, for detailed requirements regarding schedule and logistics.
C. Alternates:
1. Only those alternates that were selected by the Owner, as evidenced in
the Agreement, are made a part of this Contract.
2. Alternates that were Bid were as described below:
a. Additive Alternate No. 1: Streetscape along Idaho Street relating
to the installation of Silva Cells and all related work.
b. Additive Alternate No. 2: Streetscape along 6th Street relating to
the installation of Silva Cells and all related work.
1.02 SUPPLEMENT
A. The supplement listed below, following End of Section, is a part of this
Specification:
1. Construction Schedule: To be provided by CM Company.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 PROJECT COORDINATION
JANUARY 2014 01 31 13 - 1
SECTION 01 31 13
PROJECT COORDINATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 CONTRACT LOGISTICS CONSTRAINTS AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Impact to Operations:
1. General: Work must be done in a manner to minimize impact to staff,
the public and to operations.
2. Hours: Work hours vary by location and phase. See Construction
Schedule. Any exceptions must be specifically approved by Owner at
least 7 days in advance.
a. Work during evening Council meeting is prohibited. Schedule
with City of Boise and the Construction Manager.
b. City holidays include New Years, Martin Luther King Day,
Presidents Day, Memorial Day, Fourth of July, Labor Day,
Veterans Day, Thanksgiving Day (1 day), and Christmas (1 day).
3. Any work occurring outside must be done in a manner to minimize
noise or other disturbances to the adjacent businesses.
4. Cleaning:
a. Before returning areas to service, conduct thorough cleaning.
b. Use methods and equipment to minimize generation of dust; when
this is not practical, provide barriers to limit migration of dust; in
these cases cover furniture, etc., and protect HVAC system.
c. For work areas to remain in service during business hours,
conduct clean-up operations at the end of each shift to ensure
facility is ready for use each business day; clean-up shall consist
of vacuuming and dusting or other cleaning as needed.
d. Keep construction, staging and storage areas neat and free of
debris.
e. Coordinate work areas with City janitorial staff; City will not
clean active work areas.
5. For Work Areas to Remain in Service During Business Hours:
a. Trade Contractors to provide for safe use of the area (such as,
flooring transitions to eliminate tripping hazards, etc.),
b. Trade Contractors to make reasonable efforts to make the area
presentable and minimize impacts of construction.
6. Travel Paths:
a. General:
1) Maintain safe travel paths available for staff and public
during business hours in the locations listed below.
2) Maintain safe travel paths for emergency exiting/evacuation
routes at all times.

PROJECT COORDINATION PW/WBG/475883
01 31 13 - 2 JANUARY 2014
3) Paths need to be reasonably ADA accessible.
4) Keep driveways open.
5) Maintain walking paths open where possible.
7. Signage:
a. The Owner, through the Construction Manager, will provide all
safety signage, barricades, etc., to clearly identify work zones and
to limit access to hazardous areas.
b. City will provide directional signage, notification to staff and
informational signage for the public.
8. Mechanical/Electrical Services:
a. Maintain mechanical and electrical systems in service during
business hours.
b. Schedule any shutdowns at least 2 weeks in advance. Coordinate
with City staff through the Construction Manager.
c. Mechanical system shutdowns must be scheduled such that the
system has time to bring the building back to normal temperatures
before the next business period.
d. Electrical shutdowns must be scheduled to allow adequate time to
restore affected systems to normal operation.
9. City will relocate staff (including removing/reinstalling partitions,
physical moves, phone/data provisions), relocate furniture, and close
parking spaces.
B. Use of Premise:
1. Parking: 35 parking spaces will be available in the evenings only for
Trade Contractors staff parking in the Annex building (available no
earlier than 5:45 p.m. each day, must be cleared by 7:00 a.m. each
business day); note that the Annex parking has limited height and length
restrictions.
2. Utilities: Trade Contractors may reasonably use building water and
power at no cost; when building envelope is breached Contractor to
provide temporary walls, etc., to minimize heating/cooling loss.
3. Restrooms: The Owner, through the Construction Manager, will provide
portable toilets, to be located within Contractor staging area.
4. All Trade Contractors to prohibit smoking within the buildings. The
Owner, through the Construction Manager, will establish designated
smoking areas located away from doors or open windows.
5. The Owner, through the Construction Manager, will establish
designated break areas; limit consumption of food and beverages to
those areas.
6. Security:
a. Construction Manager to limit staff access to one location and
maintain continuous log of all personnel entering/leaving the
Work Site during construction hours.
b. Construction Manager to secure the staging area.

JANUARY 2014 01 31 13 - 3
c. Construction Manager, in cooperation with the Trade Contractors,
are responsible for building security during construction work
hours; when work breaches the building envelope (including the
basement garage doors), Trade Contractors, under direction of
Construction Manager, shall either construct alternative security
walls or provide security staff until the building envelope is
restored.
d. See Article Specific Security Requirements.
7. Staging Area and Building Access: See Site Plan Drawings for proposed
staging area and building access points.
C. Coordination:
1. Trade Contractors, in conjunction with Construction Manager, will
inspect work areas in advance to identify issues, items to be relocated,
etc.; no time extensions will be granted for delays that could have been
mitigated by early planning and inspection.
2. The City has up to 3 business days to identify cables and other utilities
which are identified by Trade Contractors, through the Construction
Manager, as a conflict.
3. Construction Manager will provide advance notice for any shutdowns or
impacts to City operations:
a. HVAC or electrical shutdowns impacting more than three offices
for more than 4 hours will require 2-week advance notice;
otherwise 1-week notice is required.
b. Construction Manager will provide running 2-month projection
for anticipated staff relocations and facility closures (parking and
conference room); Contractor will provide firm schedule 2 weeks
in advance of each staff move and facility closure.
D. Fire Safety Related Requirements:
1. General:
a. Trade Contractors to comply with Fire Code and OSHA
requirements.
b. Construction Manager shall designate Fire Safety Coordinator
(FSC) to plan, oversee and manage all fire safety issues.
1) FSC shall be adequately trained or have sufficient
experience to identify and mitigate fire hazards.
2) FSC shall have authority to stop unsafe work and require
mitigation measures.
3) FSC shall coordinate with Trade Contractors staff,
subcontractors, Owners inspection staff, Fire Department
staff and Owners insurance representatives.

01 31 13 - 4 JANUARY 2014
c. Fire safety issues shall be included as a standing item in the
weekly coordination meeting; special meetings shall be conducted
as needed.
d. When a Fire Watch is required, Contractor to provide adequately
trained and equipment to perform the fire watch; see attached
requirements from the Fire Marshall.
2. Fire Sprinkler Impairments:
a. Whenever the fire sprinkler system is impaired, Fire Sprinkler
Contractor, in coordination with the Construction Manager, shall
follow City insurance carrier (FM Global) tag-out and other
requirements. See attached brochure characterizing procedure and
requirements.
b. A fire watch will not be required during such periods if the fire
alarm system is fully operable.
3. Fire Alarm Impairments:
a. Trade Contractors will identify issues which will impact the fire
alarm system (for example, system modification, hot work, work
generating dust, etc.) and take measures to mitigate such impacts
(for example, short duration alarm system shut-down, covers or
caps to protect sensors, etc.).
b. When the fire alarm system is impaired, Trade Contractors to
provide Fire Watch in impaired areas.
c. When the main fire alarm system is impaired, City will limit City
employee access to the door near the Trade Contractor check-in
point. During those periods Construction Manager to maintain log
of City staff in the building.
4. Hot Work:
a. Construction Manager will provide Hot Work Safety Coordinator
(HWSC), which may be the same person as the Fire Safety
Coordinator.
1) HWSC shall have similar qualifications and requirements as
specified for the FSC.
b. Hot work is prohibited when any portion of the fire sprinkler or
fire alarm system is impaired.
1) Exceptions may be allowed to disable or protect a fire alarm
sensor in the immediate area of the hot work; such sensor
must be returned to service immediately after completion of
hot work.
c. Hot work is allowed in only one area at a given time.
d. When performing hot work, Trade Contractor must:
1) Use City insurance carrier (FM Global) hot work permit
procedure and other requirements. See attached brochure
characterizing procedure and requirements.
2) Use rated welding pads, fire protection blankets or fire
protection curtains to prevent sparks from contacting

JANUARY 2014 01 31 13 - 5
flammable materials and to protect other City equipment,
furnishings, etc.
3) During and upon completion of hot work, provide Fire
Watch in conformance with Fire Marshall requirements and
with Citys insurance carrier requirements.
E. Miscellaneous Requirements:
1. Permits:
a. City will apply for and pay for the building permit; all other
permits, trade permits, etc., are the Contractors responsibility.
b. Owner, through the Construction Manager, will obtain any
necessary ACHD permits and inspections for all work conducted
in the ROW and for storage/staging areas in the ROW.
1) City will make arrangements and pay fees associated with
closure of parking spaces.
2) Owner, through the Construction Manager, to provide traffic
signage, sidewalk closure signage, etc., as required by
ACHD.
2. Special Inspections/Permit Inspections:
a. For work requiring continuous special inspections and for
concrete testing, City will arrange to have such testing/inspections
conducted during the work hours (for example, nights).
b. For special inspections requiring periodic inspections, Trade
Contractor to sequence the work to allow for such inspections
during normal business hours.
c. Trade Contractor to sequence the Work and be available to obtain
building department inspections during normal business hours.
3. City has performed an evaluation of potential asbestos containing
materials in the work area; where noted on Drawings, take appropriate
precautions and follow environmental and OSHA requirements.
a. Attached is a copy of a survey prepared by Materials Testing &
Inspection characterizing the findings regarding Asbestos
Containing Materials (ACM) in the work areas that are included
in this Project. This report is available for inspection at Boise City
Public Works office.
b. See Section 02 41 00, Demolition, for additional detailed
requirements.
1.02 SPECIFIC SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conduct of Trade Contractor and Subcontractor Employees: Employees while
performing work under this Contract will not:
1. Remove any City of Boise property, equipment, monies, forms, or any
other item from their place.

01 31 13 - 6 JANUARY 2014
2. Engage in horseplay or loud boisterous behavior.
3. Play amplified sound equipment.
4. Be under the influence of alcohol or drugs. If an employee arrives to the
Work Site and their actions suggest intoxication, this person will be
asked to confine their presence to a waiting area while a contract
supervisor is contacted to the purpose of escorting the employee away
from the building safely.
5. Smoke within the building.
6. Bring weapons to the Job Site (such as, firearms, knives unrelated to the
work, etc.).
7. Bring unauthorized personnel to Job Site (such as, relatives, friends,
guests, and children).
8. Turn on or off or use any City equipment other than Trade Contractors
equipment.
9. Use any City telephone.
10. Open any desk, file cabinet, storage cabinet, or refrigerator.
11. Disturb or remove any article from desks.
12. Consume any food or beverage, other than that brought with the
employee or purchased from vending machines, and only in areas
designated by the building management for regular breaks.
13. Engage in long conversations with visitors or other individuals.
14. Take photographs of the building or its content.
15. Remove any documents, records, forms or paper of any kind which is
not either in trash cans or clearly marked as trash.
16. Engage in any activity which is not in the best interest of City or is
otherwise detrimental to the performance of this Contract.
B. Discipline or Discharge of Employees: Trade Contractor shall immediately
transfer any employee, subcontractor, vendor or delivery personnel who
violate the above conduct requirements and prohibit them from accessing the
Site. A request by City to transfer an employee shall not constitute an order to
discipline or discharge the employee. All actions taken by the Trade
Contractor in regards to employee discipline shall be at the sole discretion of
the Trade Contractor. The department shall be held harmless in any disputes
the Trade Contractor may have with the Trade Contractors employees. This
shall include, but is not limited to, charges of discrimination, harassment, and
discharge without just cause.
C. Building Access and Access Cards:
1. Upon successful background check (see requirements below), the City
will issue Tier I access cards (with photo identification) to key Trade
Contractor employees (project managers, superintendent, foremen, etc.)
and to key subcontractor employees. Tier I access cards will provide
access to necessary locations within the building.

JANUARY 2014 01 31 13 - 7
2. Upon certification of background checks (see requirements below), the
City will issue Tier II identification cards (with photo identification) to
employees, subcontractors, vendors and delivery personnel who are
regularly engaged at the Site.
3. The City will issue Tier III identification cards for employees,
subcontractors, vendors and delivery staff who are only occasionally
engaged at the Site (such as, less than 2 days per month). Such cards
will have an alternate Trade Contractor logo attached and will be for
identification only (no access will be granted). Trade Contractor must
provide access for Tier III visitors via Tier I employees. Construction
Manager shall maintain a log of Tier III credential cards.
4. Trade Contractors are responsible for conduct of all employees,
subcontractors, vendors, delivery personnel, etc.
5. Security identification/access cards shall be worn at all times. Personnel
found onsite without identification/access cards are to be immediately
removed from Site.
6. Security identification/access cards shall be provided and issued by the
City. Trade Contractors shall schedule arrangements, through the
Construction Manager, with Contract Administrator and Security
Coordinator. The City will supply identification/access cards at no
charge for the first year. Additional/replacement photo
identification/access cards because of negligence or loss will be at the
cost of $12 each, which will be the responsibility of the Trade
Contractor.
7. Trade Contractor must promptly report any lost keys or
identification/access cards to the Contract Administrator or Security
Coordinator and the Construction Manager.
8. Identification/access cards are the sole property of the Owner and must
be surrendered upon the completion of the Work.
D. Background Checks:
1. The background checks shall run criminal history and check for
outstanding warrants (both local and national), verification of U.S.
citizenship or appropriate work visa, and known ties to criminal or
terrorist groups.
2. For all employees receiving Tier I access cards, Trade Contractor shall
arrange and pay for background checks performed through the Idaho
State Police. Personnel who do not have outstanding warrants, are
legally able to work in the United States and do not have ties to criminal
or terrorist groups are eligible to obtain Tier I access cards and gain full
access to the Site. General employees (i.e., not foremen or supervisors)
who have resided in Idaho for 10 years may obtain a City conducted
background check at no cost.

01 31 13 - 8 JANUARY 2014
3. For all employees receiving Tier II access cards, Trade Contractor shall
arrange and pay for background checks performed through the Idaho
State Police.
E. Other Security Requirements:
1. Construction Manager, in coordination with Trade Contractors are
responsible for building security during construction work hours. Doors
and windows will remain locked and secured at all times. When this is
impractical (such as, delivering materials, ventilating, etc.), Trade
Contractor must post staff to continually monitor the unsecured areas.
At the end of shift, Construction Manager shall perform an inspection to
ensure all doors are locked and secured.
2. Trade Contractors will ensure that all employees working within City
facilities can read and understand warning signs that are written in
English.
3. Trade Contractors shall provide and equip each shift supervisor with a
communication device such as a cell phone or similar independent
communication device.
1.03 ADJACENT FACILITIES AND PROPERTIES
A. Examination:
1. After Effective Date of the Agreement and before Work at Site is
started, Construction Manager, Trade Contractors, Engineer, and
affected property owners and utility owners shall make a thorough
examination of pre-existing conditions including existing buildings,
structures, and other improvements in vicinity of Work, as applicable,
which could be damaged by construction operations.
2. Periodic reexamination shall be jointly performed to include, but not
limited to, cracks in structures, settlement, leakage, and similar
conditions.
1.04 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. The Owner, through the Construction Manager, will photographically
document all phases of the Project including preconstruction, construction
progress, and post-construction.
B. Digital Images:
1. Archive using a commercially available photo management system.
2. Label each disk with Project and Owners name, and week and year
images were produced.

JANUARY 2014 01 31 13 - 9
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CUTTING, FITTING, AND PATCHING
A. Cut, fit, adjust, or patch Work and work of others, including excavation and
backfill as required, to make Work complete.
B. Obtain prior written authorization of Construction Manager and Architect
before commencing Work to cut or otherwise alter:
1. Structural or reinforcing steel, structural column or beam, elevated slab,
trusses, or other structural member.
2. Weather- or moisture-resistant elements.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element.
4. Work of others.
C. Refinish surfaces to provide an even finish.
1. Refinish continuous surfaces to nearest intersection.
2. Refinish entire assemblies.
3. Finish restored surfaces to such planes, shapes, and textures that no
transition between existing work and Work is evident in finished
surfaces.
D. Restore existing Work, underground facilities, and surfaces that are to remain
in completed Work including concrete-embedded piping, conduit, and other
utilities as specified and as shown.
E. Make restorations with new materials and appropriate methods as specified
for new Work of similar nature; if not specified, use recommended practice of
manufacturer or appropriate trade association.
F. Fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations
through surfaces and fill voids.
G. Remove specimens of installed Work for testing when requested by Engineer.

01 31 13 - 10 JANUARY 2014
3.02 SUPPLEMENTS
A. The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are a part of this
Specification:
1. Fire Marshall Requirements.
2. FM Global Tag-Out Brochure.
3. FM Global Hot Work Permit Procedure Brochure.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 PROJECT MEETINGS
JANUARY 2014 01 31 19 - 1
SECTION 01 31 19
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Construction Manager shall schedule physical arrangements for meetings
throughout progress of the Work, prepare meeting agenda with regular
participant input and distribute with written notice of each meeting, preside at
meetings, record minutes to include significant proceedings and decisions, and
reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within 5 days after each meeting to
participants and parties affected by meeting decisions.
1.02 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Construction Manager shall be prepared to discuss the following subjects, as a
minimum:
1. Required schedules.
2. Status of Bonds and insurance.
3. Sequencing of critical path work items.
4. Progress payment procedures.
5. Project changes and clarification procedures.
6. Use of Site, access, office and storage areas, security and temporary
facilities.
7. Major product delivery and priorities.
8. Construction Managers safety plan and representative.
B. Attendees will include:
1. Owners representatives.
2. Construction Managers Project Manager.
3. Construction Managers Managing Superintendent.
4. Construction Managers Safety Consultant.
5. Trade Contractors representatives whom Construction Manager may
desire or Engineer may request to attend.
6. Architects representatives.
7. Owners representatives.
8. Others as appropriate.
1.03 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULES REVIEW MEETING
A. As set forth in General Conditions and Section 01 32 00, Construction
Progress Documentation.

PROJECT MEETINGS PW/WBG/475883
01 31 19 - 2 JANUARY 2014
1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. The Construction Manager will schedule weekly progress meetings at Site,
conduct weekly to review the Work progress, Progress Schedule, Schedule of
Submittals, Application for Payment, contract modifications, and other
matters needing discussion and resolution.
B. Attendees will include:
1. Owners representative(s).
2. Trade Contractors, Subcontractors, and Suppliers, as appropriate.
3. Architects representative(s).
4. Others as appropriate.
1.05 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. When required in individual specification sections, convene at Site prior to
commencing the Work of that section.
B. Require attendance of entities directly affecting, or affected by, the Work of
that section.
C. Notify Owners Representative and Architect days in advance of meeting
date.
D. Provide suggested agenda to Engineer to include reviewing conditions of
installation, preparation and installation or application procedures, and
coordination with related Work and work of others.
1.06 OTHER MEETINGS
A. In accordance with Contract Documents and as may be required by Owner,
Architect and Construction Manager.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
JANUARY 2014 DOCUMENTATION
COPYRIGHT 2014 CH2M HILL 01 32 00 - 1
SECTION 01 32 00
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Detailed Progress Schedule:
a. Included in Section 01 11 00, Summary of Work.
b. Construction Manager to submit an Updated Progress Schedule at
each update, in accordance with Article Detailed Progress
Schedule.
2. Submit with Each Progress Schedule Submission: Construction
Managers certification that Progress Schedule submission is actual
schedule being utilized for execution of the Work.
1.02 DETAILED PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. Show activities including, but not limited to the following:
1. Notice to Proceed.
2. Permits.
3. Submittals, with review time.
4. Early procurement activities for long lead equipment and materials.
5. Initial Site work.
6. Earthwork.
7. Specified Work sequences and construction constraints.
8. Contract Milestone and Completion Dates.
9. Owner-furnished products delivery dates or ranges of dates.
10. Major structural, mechanical, equipment, electrical, architectural, and
instrumentation and control Work.
11. System startup summary.
12. Project close-out summary.
13. Demobilization summary.
B. Show the duration and sequences of activities required for complete
performance of the Work reflecting means and methods chosen by Contractor.
C. The Detailed Progress Schedule will be the Baseline Schedule. Subsequent
revisions will be considered as Updated Progress Schedules.
D. Format: Critical Path Network.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS PW/WBG/475883
DOCUMENTATION JANUARY 2014
01 32 00 - 2 COPYRIGHT 2014 CH2M HILL
E. Construction Manager will update weekly to reflect actual progress and
occurrences to date.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
JANUARY 2014 01 33 00 - 1
SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. See Section 3.13.1 of the Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and
Trade Contractor.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittal: Written and graphic information submitted by Contractor
that requires Engineers and Construction Managers responsive action.
B. Deferred Submittal: Information, in accordance with IBC Section 106.3.4.2,
submitted by Trade Contractor for portions of the design which are to be
submitted to permitting agency for approval prior to installation of that
portion of the Work, along with Engineers review documentation that
submittal has been found to be in general conformance with Projects design.
C. Informational Submittal: Information submitted by Trade Contractor that
requires Engineers review and determination that submitted information is in
accordance with the Conditions of the Contract.
1.03 PROCEDURES
A. Direct submittals to the Construction Manager, unless specified otherwise.
Trade Contractor shall upload Submittal to Submittal Exchange.
B. Electronic Submittals: Submittals will be made in electronic format.
1. Each submittal shall be an electronic file in Adobe Acrobat Portable
Document Format (PDF). Use the latest version available at time of
execution of the Agreement.
2. Electronic files that contain more than 10 pages in PDF format shall
contain internal book marking from an index page to major sections of
the document.
3. PDF files shall be set to open Bookmarks and Page view.
4. Add general information to each PDF file, including title, subject,
author, and keywords.
5. PDF files shall be set up to print legibly at 8.5-inch by 11-inch, 11-inch
by 17-inch, or 22-inch by 34-inch. No other paper sizes will be
accepted.
6. Submit new electronic files for each resubmittal.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PW/WBG/475883
01 33 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
7. Include a copy of the Transmittal of Contractors Submittal form,
located at end of Section, with each electronic file.
C. Transmittal of Submittal:
1. Trade Contractor shall:
a. Review each submittal and check for compliance with Contract
Documents.
b. Stamp each submittal with uniform approval stamp before
submitting to Construction Manager.
1) Stamp to include Project name, submittal number,
Specification number, Trade Contractors reviewer name,
date of Trade Contractors approval, and statement
certifying submittal has been reviewed, checked, and
approved for compliance with Contract Documents.
2) Construction Manager or Engineer will not review
submittals that do not bear Trade Contractors approval
stamp and will return them without action.
2. Complete, sign, and transmit with each submittal package, one
Transmittal of Trade Contractors Submittal form in format approved by
the Construction Manager.
3. Identify each submittal with the following:
a. Numbering and Tracking System:
1) Sequentially number each submittal.
2) Resubmission of submittal shall have original number with
sequential alphabetic suffix.
b. Specification section and paragraph to which submittal applies.
c. Project title and Engineers project number.
d. Date of transmittal.
e. Names of Trade Contractor, Subcontractor or Supplier, and
manufacturer as appropriate.
4. Identify and describe each deviation or variation from Contract
Documents.
D. Format:
1. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of Contract Documents.
2. Package submittal information by individual specification section. Do
not combine different specification sections together in submittal
package, unless otherwise directed in Specification.
3. Present in a clear and thorough manner and in sufficient detail to show
kind, size, arrangement, and function of components, materials, and
devices, and compliance with Contract Documents.
4. Index with labeled tab dividers in orderly manner.

JANUARY 2014 01 33 00 - 3
E. Timeliness: Schedule and submit in accordance Schedule of Submittals, and
requirements of individual specification sections.
F. Processing Time:
1. Time for review shall commence on Construction Managers receipt of
submittal.
2. Construction Manager will act upon Trade Contractors submittal and
transmit response to Trade Contractor not later than 30 days after
receipt, unless otherwise specified.
3. Resubmittals will be subject to same review time.
4. No adjustment of Contract Times or Price will be allowed due to delays
in progress of Work caused by rejection and subsequent resubmittals.
G. Resubmittals: Clearly identify each correction or change made.
H. Incomplete Submittals:
1. Construction Manager/Engineer will return entire submittal for Trade
Contractors revision if preliminary review deems it incomplete.
2. When any of the following are missing, submittal will be deemed
incomplete:
a. Trade Contractors review stamp; completed and signed.
b. Transmittal of Trade Contractors Submittal; completed and
signed.
I. Submittals not required by Contract Documents:
1. Will not be reviewed and will be returned stamped Not Subject to
Review.
2. Engineer will keep one copy and return submittal to Trade Contractor.
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual specification
sections.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Copies: One electronic copy uploaded to Submittal Exchange in PDF
format.
2. Identify and Indicate:
a. Applicable Contract Drawing and Detail number, products, units
and assemblies, and system or equipment identification or tag
numbers.
b. Equipment and Component Title: Identical to title shown on
Drawings.

01 33 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
c. Critical field dimensions and relationships to other critical
features of Work. Note dimensions established by field
measurement.
d. Project-specific information drawn accurately to scale.
3. Manufacturers standard schematic drawings and diagrams as follows:
a. Modify to delete information that is not applicable to the Work.
b. Supplement standard information to provide information
specifically applicable to the Work.
4. Product Data: Provide as specified in individual Specifications.
5. Deferred Submittal: See Drawings for list of deferred submittals.
a. Trade Contractor-design data related to permanent construction.
1) Written and graphic information.
2) List of assumptions.
3) List of performance and design criteria.
4) Summary of loads or load diagram, if applicable.
5) Calculations.
6) List of applicable codes and regulations.
7) Name and version of software.
8) Information requested in individual specification section.
b. Prior to installation of indicated structural or nonstructural
element, equipment, distribution system, or component or its
anchorage, submit required calculations and supporting data and
drawings for review and acceptance by Engineer. Documentation
of review and indication of compliance with general design intent
provided on Engineers comment form, along with completed
submittal, shall be filed with permitting agency by Trade
Contractor and acknowledged by permitting agency prior to
installation.
6. Foreign Manufacturers: When proposed, include following additional
information:
a. Names and addresses of at least two companies that maintain
technical service representatives close to Project.
b. Complete list of spare parts and accessories for each piece of
equipment.
C. Samples:
1. Copies: Two, unless otherwise specified in individual Specifications.
2. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to
facilitate review of quality. Attach label on unexposed side that includes
the following:
a. Manufacturer name.
b. Model number.
c. Material.
d. Sample source.

JANUARY 2014 01 33 00 - 5
3. Manufacturers Color Chart: Units or sections of units showing full
range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
4. Full-size Samples:
a. Size as indicated in individual specification section.
b. Prepared from same materials to be used for the Work.
c. Cured and finished in manner specified.
d. Physically identical with product proposed for use.
D. Action Submittal Dispositions: Engineer will review, mark, stamp, and
distribute as noted:
1. Approved:
a. Trade Contractor may incorporate product(s) or implement Work
covered by submittal.
b. Distribution: Final document will be posted to Submittal
Exchange for all parties use.
2. Approved as Noted:
a. Trade Contractor may incorporate product(s) or implement Work
covered by submittal, in accordance with Engineers notations.
3. Partial Approval, Resubmit as Noted:
a. Make corrections or obtain missing portions, and resubmit.
b. Except for portions indicated, Trade Contractor may begin to
incorporate product(s) or implement Work covered by submittal,
in accordance with Engineers notations.
c. Distribution: Final document will be posted to Submittal
4. Revise and Resubmit:
a. Trade Contractor may not incorporate product(s) or implement
Work covered by submittal.
1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Copies: Document shall be uploaded to Submittal Exchange by Trade
Contractor in PDF format.
2. Refer to individual specification sections for specific submittal
requirements.

01 33 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
3. Engineer will review each submittal. If submittal meets conditions of
the Contract, Engineer will forward copy to appropriate parties. If
Engineer determines submittal does not meet conditions of the Contract
and is therefore considered unacceptable, Engineer will retain one copy
and return remaining copy with review comments to Contractor, and
require that submittal be corrected and resubmitted.
B. Application for Payment: In accordance with Article 9 of Standard Form of
Agreement Between Owner and Trade Contractor.
C. Certificates:
1. General:
a. Provide notarized statement that includes signature of entity
responsible for preparing certification.
b. Signed by officer or other individual authorized to sign documents
on behalf of that entity.
2. Welding: In accordance with individual specification sections.
3. Installer: Prepare written statements on manufacturers letterhead
certifying installer complies with requirements as specified in individual
specification section.
4. Material Test: Prepared by qualified testing agency, on testing agencys
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for
compliance with requirements.
5. Certificates of Successful Testing or Inspection: Submit when testing or
inspection is required by Laws and Regulations or governing agency or
specified in individual specification sections.
6. Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance: In accordance with
individual specification sections.
7. Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation: In accordance with
individual specification sections.
D. Construction Photographs and Video: In accordance with Section 01 31 13,
Project Coordination, and as may otherwise be required in Contract
Documents.
E. Closeout Submittals: In accordance with Section 01 77 00, Closeout
Procedures.
F. Trade Contractor-design Data (related to temporary construction):
1. Written and graphic information.
2. List of assumptions.
3. List of performance and design criteria.
4. Summary of loads or load diagram, if applicable.
5. Calculations.

JANUARY 2014 01 33 00 - 7
6. List of applicable codes and regulations.
7. Name and version of software.
8. Information requested in individual specification section.
G. Manufacturers Instructions: Written or published information that documents
manufacturers recommendations, guidelines, and procedures in accordance
with individual specification section.
H. Schedules:
1. Schedule of Submittals: The Construction Manager will prepare
separately or in combination with Progress Schedule as specified in
Section 01 32 00, Construction Progress Documentation.
a. Show for each, at a minimum, the following:
1) Specification section number.
2) Estimated date of submission to Construction Manager,
including reviewing and processing time.
b. On a monthly basis, submit updated schedule to Construction
Manager if changes have occurred or resubmittals are required.
2. Schedule of Values: Develop in accordance with Article 9 of the
Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Trade Contractor.
3. Progress Schedules: In accordance with Section 01 32 00, Construction
Progress Documentation.
I. Special Guarantee: Suppliers written guarantee as required in individual
specification sections.
J. Statement of Qualification: Evidence of qualification, certification, or
registration as required in Contract Documents to verify qualifications of
professional land surveyor, engineer, materials testing laboratory, specialty
Subcontractor, trade, Specialist, consultant, installer, and other professionals.
K. Submittals Required by Laws, Regulations, and Governing Agencies:
1. Promptly submit promptly notifications, reports, certifications, payrolls,
and otherwise as may be required, directly to the applicable federal,
state, or local governing agency or their representative.
2. Transmit to Construction Manager for Owners records one copy of
correspondence and transmittals (to include enclosures and attachments)
between Contractor and governing agency.
L. Test, Evaluation, and Inspection Reports:
1. General: Shall contain signature of person responsible for test or report.

01 33 00 - 8 JANUARY 2014
2. Factory:
a. Identification of product and specification section, type of
inspection or test with referenced standard or code.
b. Date of test, Project title and number, and name and signature of
authorized person.
c. Test results.
d. If test or inspection deems material or equipment not in
compliance with Contract Documents, identify corrective action
necessary to bring into compliance.
e. Provide interpretation of test results, when requested by Engineer.
f. Other items as identified in individual specification sections.
3. Field:
a. As a minimum, include the following:
1) Project title and number.
2) Date and time.
3) Record of temperature and weather conditions.
4) Identification of product and specification section.
5) Type and location of test, Sample, or inspection, including
referenced standard or code.
6) Date issued, testing laboratory name, address, and telephone
number, and name and signature of laboratory inspector.
7) If test or inspection deems material or equipment not in
compliance with Contract Documents, identify corrective
action necessary to bring into compliance.
8) Provide interpretation of test results, when requested by
Engineer.
9) Other items as identified in individual specification
sections.
1.06 SUPPLEMENT
Specification:
1. Transmittal of Contractors Submittal.
END OF SECTION

JANUARY 2014 01 33 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1
TRANSMITTAL OF CONTRACTORS SUBMITTAL
(ATTACH TO EACH SUBMITTAL)
DATE:
TO:

FROM:
Contractor

Submittal No.:
New Submittal Resubmittal
Project:
Project No.:
Specification Section No.:
(Cover only one section with each transmittal)
Schedule Date of Submittal:

SUBMITTAL TYPE: Shop Drawing Sample Informational
Deferred

The following items are hereby submitted:
Number of
Copies
Description of Item Submitted
(Type, Size, Model Number, Etc.)
Spec. and
Para. No.
Drawing or
Brochure Number
Contains Variation
to Contract
No Yes

Contractor hereby certifies that (i) Contractor has complied with the requirements of Contract Documents in
preparation, review, and submission of designated Submittal and (ii) the Submittal is complete and in
accordance with the Contract Documents and requirements of laws and regulations and governing agencies.
By:___________________________________
Contractor (Authorized Signature)

PW/WBG/475883 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
JANUARY 2014 01 42 13 - 1
SECTION 01 42 13
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCE TO STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF TECHNICAL
SOCIETIES
A. Reference to standards and specifications of technical societies and reporting
and resolving discrepancies associated therewith shall be as provided in
Article 3 of the Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Trade
Contractor, Consensus Doc 802, and as may otherwise be required herein and
in the individual specification sections.
B. Work specified by reference to published standard or specification of
government agency, technical association, trade association, professional
society or institute, testing agency, or other organization shall meet
requirements or surpass minimum standards of quality for materials and
workmanship established by designated standard or specification.
C. Where so specified, products or workmanship shall also meet or exceed
additional prescriptive or performance requirements included within Contract
Documents to establish a higher or more stringent standard of quality than
required by referenced standard.
D. Where two or more standards are specified to establish quality, product and
workmanship shall meet or exceed requirements of most stringent.
E. Where both a standard and a brand name are specified for a product in
Contract Documents, proprietary product named shall meet or exceed
requirements of specified reference standard.
F. Copies of standards and specifications of technical societies:
1. Copies of applicable referenced standards have not been bound in these
Contract Documents.
2. Where copies of standards are needed by Construction Manager or
Trade Contractor, obtain a copy or copies directly from publication
source and maintain in an orderly manner at the Site as Work Site
records, available to Construction Manager, Contractors personnel,
Subcontractors, Owner, and Engineer.

ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS PW/WBG/475883
01 42 13 - 2 JANUARY 2014
1.02 ABBREVIATIONS
A. Abbreviations for trade organizations and government agencies: Following is
a list of construction industry organizations and government agencies to
which references may be made in the Contract Documents, with abbreviations
used.
1. AA Aluminum Association
2. AABC Associated Air Balance Council
3. AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers
Association
4. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials
5. ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association
6. ACI American Concrete Institute
7. AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies
8. AGA American Gas Association
9. AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association
10. AI Asphalt Institute
11. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
12. AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
13. AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
14. ALS American Lumber Standards
15. AMCA Air Movement and Control Association
16. ANSI American National Standards Institute
17. APA APA The Engineered Wood Association
18. API American Petroleum Institute
19. APWA American Public Works Association
20. AHRI Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration
Institute
21. ASA Acoustical Society of America
22. ASABE American Society of Agricultural and
Biological Engineers
23. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
24. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
25. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
26. ASNT American Society for Nondestructive Testing
27. ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering
28. ASTM ASTM International
29. AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
30. AWPA American Wood Preservers Association
31. AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute
32. AWS American Welding Society
33. AWWA American Water Works Association

JANUARY 2014 01 42 13 - 3
34. BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
35. CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturer
36. CDA Copper Development Association
37. CGA Compressed Gas Association
38. CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
39. CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America
40. CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
41. CS Commercial Standard
42. CSA Canadian Standards Association
43. CSI Construction Specifications Institute
44. DIN Deutsches Institut fr Normung e.V.
45. DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association
46. EIA Electronic Industries Alliance
47. EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents
Committee
48. ETL Electrical Test Laboratories
49. FAA Federal Aviation Administration
50. FCC Federal Communications Commission
51. FDA Food and Drug Administration
52. FEMA Federal Emergency Management Agency
53. FIPS Federal Information Processing Standards
54. FM FM Global
55. Fed. Spec. Federal Specifications (FAA Specifications)
56. FS Federal Specifications and Standards
(Technical Specifications)
57. GA Gypsum Association
58. GANA Glass Association of North America
59. HI Hydraulic Institute
60. HMI Hoist Manufacturers Institute
61. IBC International Building Code
62. ICBO International Conference of Building Officials
63. ICC International Code Council
64. ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
65. IFC International Fire Code
66. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,
Inc.
67. IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North
America
68. IFI Industrial Fasteners Institute
69. IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance
70. IMC International Mechanical Code
71. INDA Association of the Nonwoven Fabrics Industry
72. IPC International Plumbing Code
73. ISA International Society of Automation
74. ISO International Organization for Standardization

ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS PW/WBG/475883
01 42 13 - 4 JANUARY 2014
75. ITL Independent Testing Laboratory
76. JIC Joint Industry Conferences of Hydraulic
Manufacturers
77. MIA Marble Institute of America
78. MIL Military Specifications
79. MMA Monorail Manufacturers Association
80. MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society
81. NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal
Manufacturers
82. NACE NACE International
83. NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association
84. NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau
85. NEC National Electrical Code
86. NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
87. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
88. NESC National Electrical Safety Code
89. NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association
90. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
91. NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association
92. NICET National Institute for Certification in
Engineering Technologies
93. NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
94. NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association
95. NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories
96. NSF NSF International
97. NSPE National Society of Professional Engineers
98. NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association
99. NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association
100. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act (both
Federal and State)
101. PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
102. PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute
103. PPI Plastic Pipe Institute
104. PS Product Standards Section-U.S. Department of
Commerce
105. RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association
106. RUS Rural Utilities Service
107. SAE SAE International
108. SDI Steel Deck Institute
109. SDI Steel Door Institute
110. SJI Steel Joist Institute
111. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors
National Association
112. SPI Society of the Plastics Industry
113. SSPC The Society for Protective Coatings

JANUARY 2014 01 42 13 - 5
114. STI/SPFA Steel Tank Institute/Steel Plate Fabricators
Association
115. SWI Steel Window Institute
116. TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association
117. TCA Tile Council of North America
118. TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
119. UBC Uniform Building Code
120. UFC Uniform Fire Code
121. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
122. UMC Uniform Mechanical Code
123. USBR U.S. Bureau of Reclamation
124. WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
125. WI Wood Institute
126. WWPA Western Wood Products Association
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 MANUFACTURERS FIELD SERVICES
JANUARY 2014 01 43 33 - 1
SECTION 01 43 33
MANUFACTURERS FIELD SERVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DEFINITIONS
A. Person-Day: One person for 8 hours within regular Contractor working hours.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Training Schedule: Submit, in accordance with requirements of this
Specification, not less than 21 days prior to start of equipment
installation and revise as necessary for acceptance.
2. Lesson Plan: Submit, in accordance with requirements of this
Specification, proposed lesson plan not less than 21 days prior to
scheduled training and revise as necessary for acceptance.
3. Training Session Recordings: Furnish Owner with two complete sets of
recordings fully indexed and cataloged with printed label stating session
and date recorded.
1.03 QUALIFICATION OF MANUFACTURERS REPRESENTATIVE
A. Authorized representative of the manufacturer, factory trained, and
experienced in the technical applications, installation, operation, and
maintenance of respective equipment, subsystem, or system, with full
authority by the equipment manufacturer to issue the certifications required of
the manufacturer. Additional qualifications may be specified in the individual
specification section.
B. Representative subject to acceptance by Owner and Engineer. No substitute
representatives will be allowed unless prior written approval by such has been
given.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FULFILLMENT OF SPECIFIED MINIMUM SERVICES
A. Furnish manufacturers services, when required by an individual specification
section, to meet the requirements of this Section.

MANUFACTURERS FIELD SERVICES PW/WBG/475883
01 43 33 - 2 JANUARY 2014
B. Where time is necessary in excess of that stated in the Specifications for
manufacturers services, or when a minimum time is not specified, time
required to perform specified services shall be considered incidental.
C. Schedule manufacturer services to avoid conflict with other onsite testing or
other manufacturers onsite services.
D. Determine, before scheduling services, that conditions necessary to allow
successful testing have been met.
E. Only those days of service approved by Engineer will be credited to fulfill
specified minimum services.
F. When specified in individual specification sections, manufacturers onsite
services shall include:
1. Assistance during product (system, subsystem, or component)
installation to include observation, guidance, instruction of Contractors
assembly, erection, installation or application procedures.
2. Inspection, checking, and adjustment as required for product (system,
subsystem, or component) to function as warranted by manufacturer and
necessary to furnish Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation.
3. Providing, on a daily basis, copies of manufacturers representatives
field notes and data to Engineer.
4. Revisiting the Site as required to correct problems and until installation
and operation are acceptable to Engineer.
5. Resolution of assembly or installation problems attributable to or
associated with respective manufacturers products and systems.
6. Assistance during functional and performance testing, and facility
startup and evaluation.
7. Training of Owners personnel in the operation and maintenance of
respective product as required.
3.02 MANUFACTURERS CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION
A. When so specified, a Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation form, a
copy of which is attached to this Section, shall be completed and signed by
equipment manufacturers representative.
B. Such form shall certify signing party is a duly authorized representative of
manufacturer, is empowered by manufacturer to inspect, approve, and operate
their equipment and is authorized to make recommendations required to
ensure equipment is complete and operational.

JANUARY 2014 01 43 33 - 3
3.03 TRAINING
A. General:
1. Furnish manufacturers representatives for detailed classroom and
hands-on training to Owners personnel on operation and maintenance
of specified product (system, subsystem, component) and as may be
required in applicable Specifications.
2. Furnish trained, articulate personnel to coordinate and expedite training,
to be present during training coordination meetings with Owner, and
familiar with operation and maintenance manual information.
3. Manufacturers representative shall be familiar with facility operation
and maintenance requirements as well as with specified equipment.
4. Furnish complete training materials, to include operation and
maintenance data, to be retained by each trainee.
B. Training Schedule:
1. List specified equipment and systems that require training services and
show:
a. Respective manufacturer.
b. Estimated dates for installation completion.
c. Estimated training dates.
2. Allow for multiple sessions when several shifts are involved.
3. Adjust schedule to ensure training of appropriate personnel as deemed
necessary by Owner, and to allow full participation by manufacturers
representatives. Adjust schedule for interruptions in operability of
equipment.
4. Coordinate with Section 01 32 00, Construction Progress
Documentation.
C. Lesson Plan: When manufacturer or vendor training of Owner personnel is
specified, prepare a lesson plan for each required course containing the
following minimum information:
1. Title and objectives.
2. Recommended attendees (such as, managers, engineers, operators,
maintenance).
3. Course description, outline of course content, and estimated class
duration.
4. Format (such as, lecture, self-study, demonstration, hands-on).
5. Instruction materials and equipment requirements.
6. Resumes of instructors providing training.

MANUFACTURERS FIELD SERVICES PW/WBG/475883
01 43 33 - 4 JANUARY 2014
D. Prestartup Training:
1. Coordinate training sessions with Owners operating personnel and
manufacturers representatives.
2. Complete at least 14 days prior to beginning of facility startup.
E. Post-startup Training: If required in Specifications, furnish and coordinate
training of Owners operating personnel by respective manufacturers
representatives.
F. Recording of Training Sessions:
1. Furnish audio and color video recording of prestartup and post-startup
instruction sessions, including manufacturers representatives hands-on
equipment instruction and classroom sessions.
2. Video training materials shall be produced by a qualified, professional
video production company.
3. Use DVD format suitable for playback on standard equipment available
commercially in the United States. Blu-ray DVD format is not
acceptable without Engineers prior approval.
4. DVD may contain multiple training sessions. If multiple training
sessions included on a DVD, provide with on-screen menu for playback
selection.
3.04 SUPPLEMENT
Specification:
1. Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation.
END OF SECTION

MANUFACTURERS CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION
OWNER EQPT SERIAL NO:
EQPT TAG NO: EQPT/SYSTEM:
PROJECT NO: SPEC. SECTION:
I hereby certify that the above-referenced equipment/system has been:
(Check Applicable)
Installed in accordance with Manufacturers recommendations.
Inspected, checked, and adjusted.
Serviced with proper initial lubricants.
Electrical and mechanical connections meet quality and safety standards.
All applicable safety equipment has been properly installed.
Functional tests.
System has been performance tested, and meets or exceeds specified performance
requirements. (When complete system of one manufacturer)
Note: Attach any performance test documentation from manufacturer.
Comments:

I, the undersigned Manufacturers Representative, hereby certify that I am (i) a duly
authorized representative of the manufacturer, (ii) empowered by the manufacturer to
inspect, approve, and operate their equipment and (iii) authorized to make
recommendations required to ensure equipment furnished by the manufacturer is complete
and operational, except as may be otherwise indicated herein. I further certify that all
information contained herein is true and accurate.
Date: _________________________________, 20___
Manufacturer:
By Manufacturers Authorized Representative:
(Authorized Signature)

PW/WBG/475883 SPECIAL INSPECTION
JANUARY 2014 AND TESTING
SECTION 01 45 33
SPECIAL INSPECTION AND TESTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section covers requirements for Special Inspection and Testing required
in accordance with requirements of the International Building Code and is in
addition to and supplements requirements included in the Statement of Special
Inspections shown on Drawings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this Section:
1. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 7, Minimum Design
Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
2. International Code Council (ICC):
a. International Building Code (IBC).
b. Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) Reports and Legacy Reports.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Agencies and Personnel:
1. Approved Agency: An established and recognized agency regularly
engaged in conducting tests or furnishing inspection services, when
such agency has been approved.
2. Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge: An individual
who is registered or licensed to practice their respective design
profession as defined by the statutory requirements of the professional
registration laws of the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is to be
constructed.
3. Special Inspector: Qualified person employed by the Owner who will
demonstrate competence to the satisfaction of the building official for
inspection of a particular type of construction or operation requiring
Special Inspection.
B. Special Inspection:
1. Special Inspection: Inspection required of materials, installation,
fabrication, erection, or placement of components and connections
requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved Contract
Documents and referenced standards.

SPECIAL INSPECTION PW/WBG/475883
AND TESTING JANUARY 2014
2. Special Inspection, Continuous: Full-time observation of work requiring
Special Inspection by an approved Special Inspector who is present in
the area where the Work is being performed.
3. Special Inspection, Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of
work requiring Special Inspection by an approved Special Inspector
who is present in the area where the Work has been or is being
performed, and at the completion of the Work.
C. Structural Systems and Components: See Structural Statement of Special
Inspection on Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide access to shop or Site for Special Inspection and Testing.
B. Notify Architect and Construction Manager in advance of required Special
Inspection no later than 48 hours prior to date of Special Inspection.
C. Materials and systems, inclusive, shall be inspected during placement where
Continuous Special Inspection is required.
D. Materials and systems shall be inspected during or at completion of their
placement where Periodic Special Inspection is allowed.
1. Periodic Special Inspection shall be performed so that Work inspected
after, but not during, its placement can be corrected prior to other related
Work proceeding and covering inspected Work. Schedule Periodic
Special Inspections to be conducted during normal business hours when
possible.
2. Periodic Special Inspection does not allow sampling of a portion of the
Work. All Work shall be inspected.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
JANUARY 2014 01 50 00 - 1
SECTION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Construction facilities and temporary controls outlined in this Section will be
provided by the party specifically noted or are to be provided as described in
individual specification sections. This Section is to describe the responsibility
of various Trade Contractors for Temporary Facilities and Controls.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, telephone service, and water.
B. Temporary Construction and Support Facilities: Temporary ventilation, field
offices and storage sheds, sanitary facilities, drinking water, temporary
enclosures, hoists and temporary elevator use, project identification, progress
cleaning, waste disposal services, debris chutes, removal of utilities and
controls, construction aids, and miscellaneous services and facilities.
C. Security and Protection Facilities: Temporary fire protection, barricades,
warning signs and lights, environmental protection, protection of installed
work, security, and emergency exiting.
D. These requirements have been included for special purposes as indicated.
Nothing in this Section is intended to limit types and amounts of temporary
work required and no omission from this Section will be recognized as an
indication by Architect that such temporary activity is not required for
successful completion of the Work and compliances with requirements of
Contract documents. Provisions of this Section are applicable to, but no way a
limitation of, utility services, construction facilities, security/protection
provisions and support facilities.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 31 13, Project Coordination.
B. Section 01 77 00, Closeout Procedures, Final Cleaning.
1.04 REFERENCES
1. American Nursery and Landscape Association (ANLA): American
Standards for Nursery Stock.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PW/WBG/475883
01 50 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
2. Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA).
3. National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA): 241, Standards for
Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations.
4. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): 568-C, Commercial
Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
5. U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA): Urban Hydrology for Small
Watersheds.
6. U.S. Weather Bureau: Rainfall-Frequency Atlas of the U.S. for
Durations from 30 Minutes to 24 Hours and Return Periods from 1 to
100 Years.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals: Copies of permits and approvals for construction as
required by Laws and Regulations and governing agencies.
1.06 MOBILIZATION
A. Mobilization shall include, but not be limited to, these principal items:
1. Obtaining required permits.
2. Moving Construction Managers field office and equipment required for
first month operation onto Site.
3. Installing temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities.
4. Providing onsite communications facilities, including telephones.
5. Providing onsite sanitary facilities and potable water facilities as
specified and as required by Laws and Regulations, and governing
agencies.
6. Arranging for erection of Work and staging area.
7. Posting OSHA required notices and establishing safety programs and
procedures.
8. Having Construction Managers superintendent at Site full time.
B. Use area designated for Project temporary facilities as shown on Drawings.
1.07 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
A. Comply with Owners safety rules while on Owners property.
B. Keep Owner, through the Construction Manager, informed of serious onsite
accidents and related claims.
C. See detailed requirements for protection of Work and property in
Section 01 31 13, Project Coordination.

JANUARY 2014 01 50 00 - 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Temporary Electricity:
1. Electric power will be available from Owners existing electrical
service. Trade Contractor will provide for all connection requirements
and costs necessary to utilize Owner provided power. Trade Contractor
to ensure GFCI protected.
2. The Owner, through Construction Manager, will provide one electrical
connection from existing electrical panels on each floor at north and
south end of building.
3. The voltage provided at point of distribution will be 120/208, single-
phase.
4. Trade Contractor shall provide their own UL approved extension cords
and any adapters required.
5. Trade Contractor shall provide supplementary electrical power to handle
any additional power requirements.
6. Trade Contractor shall provide labor and materials to relocate, or
modify power needs to each desired location. Each relocation is subject
to the Construction Managers approval.
B. Temporary Lighting:
1. The Owner, through the Construction Manager will provide general
temporary lighting throughout Project duration.
2. Each Trade Contractor will supply and maintain their own task lighting
to allow erection application or installation of materials and equipment
or inspection of Work.
C. Telephone Services: All telephone service is the responsibility of each Trade
Contractor for use during construction. Trade Contractor to pay cost of
installation and monthly bills.
D. Water: The Owner, through the Construction Manager, will provide one water
source onsite.
3.02 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND SUPPORT FACILITIES
A. Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating:
1. Use of the Owners heating, cooling and ventilation systems will be
allowed. Trade Contractors will protect Owners equipment as
necessary during construction process.

01 50 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
2. Provide as required to maintain adequate environmental conditions to
facilitate progress of the Work, to meet specified minimum conditions
for installation of materials, and to protect materials, equipment, and
finishes from damage because of temperature or humidity. Provide
adequate forced air ventilation of enclosed areas to cure installed
materials, to dispense humidity, and to prevent hazardous accumulations
of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
3. Pay costs of installation, maintenance, operation, removal, and fuel
consumed.
4. Provide portable unit heaters, complete with controls, oil-or gas-fired,
and suitably vented to outside as required for protection of health and
property.
B. Field Offices and Storage Sheds: Trade Contractors will not be allowed to
provide a project trailer without prior approval by Owner through the
Construction Manager.
C. Sanitary Facilities: The Owner, through the Construction Manager, will
provide and maintain a designated toilet facility as required by Occupational
Safety and Health Act.
D. Drinking Water: Each Trade Contractor shall provide drinking water for their
respective personnel as required by applicable employment regulations.
E. Temporary Enclosures: The Construction Manager will provide and direct the
installation of temporary enclosures where needed for the protection of staff,
and public at all Work zones and debris containment locations, both at the
interior and exterior of the building for their portion of Work.
F. Hoists and Temporary Elevator Use: The Construction Manager shall provide
facilities to hoist materials and employees to working location. The
Construction Manager will identify a construction elevator location that is to
be used during construction.
G. Project Identification:
1. No signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required
by law.
2. Remove signs framing and supports at completion of Project and restore
area.
H. Progress Cleaning:
1. Each Trade Contractor shall clean up their trash and debris and remove
it to Owner furnished Job Site dumpster. Demolition and excess
excavation materials are to be removed and disposed of in a legal
manner by any Trade Contractor performing demolition or earthwork.

JANUARY 2014 01 50 00 - 5
2. Trade Contractor shall broom clean their work areas daily or as
specified in other specification sections, and as required herein.
3. If Trade Contractor fails to clean up their work area in a timely and
satisfactory manner after 24-hour notice, the Construction Manager will
cause the clean up to be done by others at the expense of the Trade
Contractor.
4. If it is impractical to determine the sources of debris, or if debris from a
Trade Contractor or various separate Trade Contractors is inseparably
mixed, all Trade Contractors working in the subject area shall jointly
clean up the debris at the direction of the Construction Manager. If
conflicts arise as to which party is responsible for clean up, the
Construction Managers judgment will be final.
5. If additional clean up is required, the Construction Manager may
organize a cleanup wherein Trade Contractors will provide personnel
for a general clean up. The Construction Manager will determine the
areas cleaned and numbered of personnel provided. The Construction
Managers decision will be final.
6. See Section 01 31 13, Project Coordination, for additional cleaning
requirements.
I. Recycle and Waste Disposal Services:
1. The Owner through the Construction Manager will provide recycle
containers and waste collection containers (dumpsters) for use for all
construction waste except waste generated by demolition, excavation
and gypsum board contractors.
2. Trade Contractor is responsible to separate recyclable waste by type at
Project Site to the maximum extent possible. Recyclable waste is to be
placed in appropriate recycle container.
3. Recycle waste container or designated stock areas will include:
a. Metal.
b. Cardboard.
c. Wood.
d. Paper and beverage containers used by onsite workers.
e. Carpet and pad.
4. Trade Contractor is responsible for hauling their waste material to
contractor supplied dumpster.
5. Trade Contractors for Demolition, Concrete and Gypsum Board are
responsible to dispose of their waste in a legal manner and not into
Owner provided waste container.
J. Removal of Utilities, Facilities, and Controls:
1. Supervision: All Trade Contractors shall enforce strict discipline in use
of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability
of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

01 50 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
2. Protection of Installed Work:
a. Each Trade Contractor shall maintain all existing protection and
maintain all additional protection as required by the governing
laws, rules, regulations and ordinances. The Owner through the
Construction Manager will erect and maintain all barriers
necessary to enclose and protect structures, and others work and
equipment from trespass by unauthorized persons. All shall be
removed from the premises when directed, and/or completion of
all Work.
b. Protection and methods of protection shall be the responsibility of
each Trade Contractor until the completion of all Work under
their Contract.
c. When the whole or a portion of the Work is suspended for any
reason, each Trade Contractor shall properly cover over, secure
and protect such Work from rain, wind, etc., as well as be liable
for equipment left unprotected, which can become an attractive
nuisance or sustain injury from any other cause.
d. Each Trade Contractor shall protect installed Work and provide
special protection for installed Products. Control activity in
immediate Work area to minimize damage.
e. Each Trade Contractor shall provide temporary and removable
protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate
Work area to minimize damage.
3. Environmental Protection:
a. The Owner, through the Construction Manager shall protect the
Site from puddling or running water.
b. Each Trade Contractor shall execute Work by methods to
minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide
positive means to prevent dust from dispersing into atmosphere.
4. Termination and Removal: Each Trade Contractor shall remove their
own temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has
been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion of any individual Work area. Complete or, if
necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed
because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
a. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the
property of Trade Contractor providing same. Owner reserves
right to take possession of Project identification signs.
b. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent
facilities used during construction period. Comply with final
cleaning requirements in Section 01 77 00, Closeout Procedures.

JANUARY 2014 01 50 00 - 7
K. Construction Aides:
1. Trade Contractor shall review Site conditions and related factors
affecting construction procedure and construction aides, including
adjacent properties and facilities that may be affected by this Work.
Comply with applicable requirements specified in this Project manual.
Provide construction aides as required by progress of Work, or storage,
and to accommodate legitimate requirements of Owner, subcontractors
and other contractors employed at Site.
2. Trade Contractor to comply with all local, state and federal safety laws
regarding construction aides; barriers and fences for the protection of
Work and prevent Public entry to Work.
3. Trade Contractor shall maintain access to and around adjacent
properties and buildings to permit the normal use of facilities.
4. Trade Contractor shall provide and maintain for duration of Work,
required scaffolds, tarpaulins, fences, barricades, canopies, warning
signs, steps, bridges, platforms and other required aides for safe and
proper execution of their Work in compliance with all safety and other
regulations.
5. Aides may be of materials new and used, at Trade Contractors option,
suitable for intended purpose, but must not be in violation of
requirements of applicable codes or safety standards. Provide aides in
neat and reasonably uniform appearance, structurally adequate for
required purpose; maintain throughout duration of Work and relocate as
required by progress of Work.
6. Trade Contractor shall completely remove from Site construction aides
when construction needs are met with permanent construction or at
completion of Work. Repair damage caused by use of construction
aides; remove all below grade construction and facilities of construction
aides. Clean debris and grade Site to required elevations. Restore any
existing facilities used as construction aides to original or better
condition.
7. Temporary Vertical Transportation: Trade Contractor shall provide
temporary ladders, ramps, material hoists, scaffolding, cranes and other
devises required for the Work, including guys, bracings and other
required devices.
3.03 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
A. General:
1. See Section 01 31 13, Project Coordination, for protection of Work and
property.

01 50 00 - 8 JANUARY 2014
2. Maintain in continuous service existing oil and gas pipelines,
underground power, telephone or communication cable, water mains,
irrigation lines, sewers, poles and overhead power, and other utilities
encountered a long line of the Work, unless arrangements satisfactory to
owners of said utilities have been made.
3. Where completion of the Work requires temporary or permanent
removal or relocation of existing utility, coordinate activities with
owner of said utility and perform work to their satisfaction.
4. Protect, shore, brace, support, and maintain underground pipes,
conduits, drains, and other underground utility construction covered or
otherwise affected by construction operations.
5. Keep fire hydrants and water control valves free from obstruction and
available for use at all times.
6. In areas where Trade Contractors operations are adjacent to or near a
utility, such as gas, telephone, television, electric power, water, sewer,
or irrigation system, and such operations may cause damage or
inconvenience, suspend operations until arrangements for necessary
protection have been made by Trade Contractor.
7. Do not impair operation of existing sewer system. Prevent construction
material, pavement, concrete, earth, volatile and corrosive wastes, and
other debris from entering sewers, pump stations, or other sewer
structures.
B. Temporary Fire Protection:
1. The Owner, through the Construction Manager, will provide and
maintain temporary fire protection facilities for the Project.
2. All Trade Contractors are to comply with Fire Safety Related
requirements as described in Section 01 31 13, Project Coordination.
3. All Trade Contractors are to store combustibles in a fire-safe location.
4. Any Trade Contractor performing welding operations, combustion type
temporary heating units or similar sources of fire ignition shall
supervise these operations.
5. The Owner, through the Construction Manager will maintain permanent
fire protection.
C. Barricades, Warning Signs, Lights, and Emergency Exiting:
1. Each Trade Contractor shall provide barricades, warning signs and
lights at areas of their own Work to comply with standards and code
requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with
appropriate colors, graphics and warning signs to inform personnel and
the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and
needed provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. Each
Trade Contractor shall maintain environmental controls during progress
of Work.

JANUARY 2014 01 50 00 - 9
2. The Construction Manager will provide barriers to prevent unauthorized
entry to construction areas. Each Trade Contractor shall protect adjacent
properties from damage from construction operations and demolition.
This includes, but is not limited to, the following areas of Work:
a. Demolition: Shoring, bracing and fall protection at openings.
b. Masonry: Scaffolding, bracing and fall protection.
c. Roofing: Access control and fall protection.
3. The Construction Manager will coordinate and maintain exiting to
comply with Life Safety Plans detailed on Drawings.
D. Environmental Protection:
1. While onsite earthwork, utility, and concrete contractors shall protect
Site from puddling or running water in areas under their care, custody
and control. Provide water barriers as required to protect Site from soil
contamination.
2. Each Trade Contractor shall execute Work by methods to minimize
raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to
prevent dust from dispersing into atmosphere.
E. Protection of Existing Finished Areas and Installed Work:
1. Each Trade Contractor shall protect existing finished areas and installed
work and provide special protection where specified individual
2. Trade Contractor shall provide temporary and removable protection for
installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize
damage.
3. Trade Contractor shall provide protective coverings at walls,
projections, jambs, sills and soffits of openings.
4. Trade Contractor shall protect finished floors form dirt, wear and
damages:
a. Install adhesive back protective materials in areas subject to foot
traffic.
b. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas subject to
movement of heavy objects.
c. Trade Contractor shall lay planking or similar rigid materials in
place in areas where storage of products will occur.
d. Trade Contractor shall not permit smoking on the Project. The
Owner, through the Contract Manager will post NO SMOKING
signs in rooms and instruct all personnel.
5. Trade Contractor shall prohibit traffic on landscaping areas.
F. Security: See security requirements in Section 01 31 13, Project Coordination.

01 50 00 - 10 JANUARY 2014
3.04 LAYOUT
A. Owner will provide via the Construction Manager the following layout work:
1. Verification of opening locations in existing core deck floor.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
JANUARY 2014 01 61 00 - 1
SECTION 01 61 00
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DEFINITIONS
A. Products:
1. New items for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased by
Contractor or Owner for the Project, or taken from previously purchased
stock, and may also include existing materials or components required
for reuse.
2. Includes the terms material, equipment, machinery, components,
subsystem, system, hardware, software, and terms of similar intent and
is not intended to change meaning of such other terms used in Contract
Documents, as those terms are self-explanatory and have well
recognized meanings in construction industry.
3. Items identified by manufacturers product name, including make or
model designation, indicated in manufacturers published product
literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Where Contractor design is specified, design of installation, systems,
equipment, and components, including supports and anchorage, shall be in
accordance with provisions of latest edition of International Building Code
(IBC) by International Code Council. See Drawings for specific design
requirements.
1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Altitude: Provide materials and equipment suitable for installation and
operation under rated conditions at 3,000 feet above sea level.
1.04 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
A. When practical, factory assemble products. Mark or tag separate parts and
assemblies to facilitate field assembly. Cover machined and unpainted parts
that may be damaged by the elements with strippable protective coating.
B. Package products to facilitate handling and protect from damage during
shipping, handling, and storage. Mark or tag outside of each package or crate
to indicate its purchase order number, bill of lading number, contents by
name, name of Project and Contractor, equipment number, and approximate

COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PW/WBG/475883
01 61 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
weight. Include complete packing list and bill of materials with each
shipment.
C. Extra Materials, Special Tools, Test Equipment, and Expendables:
1. Furnish as required by individual Specifications.
2. Schedule:
a. Ensure that shipment and delivery occurs concurrent with
shipment of associated equipment.
b. Transfer to Owner shall occur immediately subsequent to
Contractors acceptance of equipment from Supplier.
3. Packaging and Shipment:
a. Package and ship extra materials and special tools to avoid
damage during long term storage in original cartons insofar as
possible, or in appropriately sized, hinged-cover, wood, plastic, or
metal box.
b. Prominently displayed on each package, the following:
1) Manufacturers part nomenclature and number, consistent
with Operation and Maintenance Manual identification
system.
2) Applicable equipment description.
3) Quantity of parts in package.
4) Equipment manufacturer.
4. Deliver materials to Site.
5. Notify Construction Manager upon arrival for transfer of materials.
6. Replace extra materials and special tools found to be damaged or
otherwise inoperable at time of transfer to Owner.
D. Request a minimum 7-day advance notice of shipment from manufacturer.
Upon receipt of manufacturers advance notice of shipment, promptly notify
Construction Manager of anticipated date and place of equipment arrival.
E. Factory Test Results: Reviewed and accepted by Engineer before product
shipment as required in individual specification sections.
1.05 DELIVERY AND INSPECTION
A. Deliver products in accordance with accepted current Progress Schedule and
coordinate to avoid conflict with the Work and conditions at Site. Deliver
anchor bolts and templates sufficiently early to permit setting prior to
placement of structural concrete.
B. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturers original
container or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. Include on
label, date of manufacture and shelf life, where applicable.

JANUARY 2014 01 61 00 - 3
C. Unload products in accordance with manufacturers instructions for unloading
or as specified. Record receipt of products at Site. Promptly inspect for
completeness and evidence of damage during shipment.
D. Remove damaged products from Site and expedite delivery of identical new
undamaged products, and remedy incomplete or lost products to provide that
specified, so as not to delay progress of the Work.
1.06 HANDLING, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Handle and store products in accordance with manufacturers written
instructions and in a manner to prevent damage. Store in approved storage
yards or sheds provided in accordance with Section 01 50 00, Temporary
Facilities and Controls. Provide manufacturers recommended maintenance
during storage, installation, and until products are accepted for use by Owner.
B. Manufacturers instructions for material requiring special handling, storage, or
protection shall be provided prior to delivery of material.
C. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make
periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained
under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration. Keep
running account of products in storage to facilitate inspection and to estimate
progress payments for products delivered, but not installed in the Work.
D. Store electrical, instrumentation, and control products, and equipment with
bearings in weather-tight structures maintained above 60 degrees F. Protect
electrical, instrumentation, and control products, and insulate against
moisture, water, and dust damage. Connect and operate continuously space
heaters furnished in electrical equipment.
E. Store fabricated products above ground on blocking or skids, and prevent
soiling or staining. Store loose granular materials in well-drained area on solid
surface to prevent mixing with foreign matter. Cover products that are subject
to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings; provide adequate ventilation
to avoid condensation.
F. Store finished products that are ready for installation in dry and well-
ventilated areas. Do not subject to extreme changes in temperature or
humidity.
G. After installation, provide coverings to protect products from damage due to
traffic and construction operations. Remove coverings when no longer
needed.

01 61 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
H. Hazardous Materials: Prevent contamination of personnel, storage area, and
Site. Meet requirements of product specification, codes, and manufacturers
instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide manufacturers standard materials suitable for service conditions,
unless otherwise specified in the individual Specifications.
B. Where product specifications include a named manufacturer, with or without
model number, and also include performance requirements, named
manufacturers products must meet the performance specifications.
C. Like items of products furnished and installed in the Work shall be end
products of one manufacturer and of the same series or family of models to
achieve standardization for appearance, operation and maintenance, spare
parts and replacement, manufacturers services, and implement same or
similar process instrumentation and control functions in same or similar
manner.
D. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except
as specifically permitted by Contract Documents.
E. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar
components, unless otherwise specified.
F. Equipment, Components, Systems, and Subsystems: Design and manufacture
with due regard for health and safety of operation, maintenance, and
accessibility, durability of parts, and shall comply with applicable OSHA,
state, and local health and safety regulations.
G. Regulatory Requirement: Coating materials shall meet federal, state, and local
requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds and for
worker exposure.
H. Safety Guards: Provide for all belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, or
other moving or rotary parts. Cover rotating part on all sides. Design for easy
installation and removal. Use 16-gauge or heavier; galvanized steel, aluminum
coated steel, or galvanized or aluminum coated 1/2-inch mesh expanded steel.
Provide galvanized steel accessories and supports, including bolts. For
outdoors application, prevent entrance of rain and dripping water.

JANUARY 2014 01 61 00 - 5
I. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):
1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall
be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or
other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for
approval under NEC.
2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards
published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., shall conform to those
standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.
J. Equipment Finish:
1. Provide manufacturers standard finish and color, except where specific
color is indicated.
2. If manufacturer has no standard color, provide equipment with gray
finish as approved by Owner.
K. Special Tools and Accessories: Furnish to Owner, upon acceptance of
equipment, all accessories required to place each item of equipment in full
operation. These accessory items include, but are not limited to, adequate oil
and grease (as required for first lubrication of equipment after field testing),
light bulbs, fuses, hydrant wrenches, valve keys, handwheels, chain operators,
special tools, and other spare parts as required for maintenance.
L. Lubricant: Provide initial lubricant recommended by equipment manufacturer
in sufficient quantity to fill lubricant reservoirs and to replace consumption
during testing, startup, and operation until final acceptance by Owner.
2.02 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE
A. General:
1. Manufacture parts to U.S.A. standard sizes and gauges.
2. Two or more items of the same type shall be identical, by the same
manufacturer, and interchangeable.
3. Design structural members for anticipated shock and vibratory loads.
4. Use 1/4-inch minimum thickness for steel that will be submerged,
wholly or partially, during normal operation.
5. Modify standard products as necessary to meet performance
Specifications.

01 61 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
B. Lubrication System:
1. Require no more than weekly attention during continuous operation.
2. Convenient and accessible; oil drains with bronze or stainless steel
valves and fill-plugs easily accessible from the normal operating area or
platform. Locate drains to allow convenient collection of oil during oil
changes without removing equipment from its installed position.
3. Provide constant-level oilers or oil level indicators for oil lubrication
systems.
4. For grease type bearings, which are not easily accessible, provide and
install stainless steel tubing; protect and extend tubing to convenient
location with suitable grease fitting.
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Where Specifications call for factory testing to be witnessed by Engineer,
notify Engineer not less than 14 days prior to scheduled test date, unless
otherwise specified.
B. Calibration Instruments: Bear the seal of a reputable laboratory certifying
instrument has been calibrated within the previous 12 months to a standard
endorsed by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
C. Factory Tests: Perform in accordance with accepted test procedures and
document successful completion.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Inspect materials and equipment for signs of pitting, rust decay, or other
deleterious effects of storage. Do not install material or equipment showing
such effects. Remove damaged material or equipment from the Site and
expedite delivery of identical new material or equipment. Delays to the Work
resulting from material or equipment damage that necessitates procurement of
new products will be considered delays within Contractors control.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Drawings show general locations of equipment, devices, and
raceway, unless specifically dimensioned.
B. No shimming between machined surfaces is allowed.
C. Install the Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation, unless

JANUARY 2014 01 61 00 - 7
D. Repaint painted surfaces that are damaged prior to equipment acceptance.
E. Do not cut or notch any structural member or building surface without
specific approval of Engineer.
F. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition, and adjust products in accordance
with manufacturers instructions, and as may be specified. Retain a copy of
manufacturers instruction at Site, available for review at all times.
G. For material and equipment specifically indicated or specified to be reused in
the Work:
1. Use special care in removal, handling, storage, and reinstallation to
assure proper function in the completed Work.
2. Arrange for transportation, storage, and handling of products that
require offsite storage, restoration, or renovation. Include costs for such
Work in the Contract Price.
3.03 FIELD FINISHING
A. In accordance with Section 09 90 05, Architectural Painting, and individual
3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Perform required adjustments, tests, operation checks, and other startup
activities.
3.05 LUBRICANTS
A. Fill lubricant reservoirs and replace consumption during testing, startup, and
operation prior to acceptance of equipment by Owner.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
JANUARY 2014 01 77 00 - 1
SECTION 01 77 00
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit prior to application for final payment.
a. Record Documents: As required in Section 3.13.6 of Standard
Form of Agreement Between Owner and Trade Contractor.
b. Special bonds, Special Guarantees, and Service Agreements.
c. Consent of Surety to Final Payment: As required in Part 2
Contracting Requirements; Project Forms.
d. Releases from Agreements.
e. Final Application for Payment.
f. Extra Materials: As required by individual specification sections.
1.02 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Quality Assurance:
1. Each Trade Contractor shall maintain record drawings for their
respective area of responsibility. These record drawings will be received
by the Construction Manager for inclusion in the master set of record
documents.
2. Accuracy of Records:
a. Coordinate changes within record documents, making legible and
accurate entries on each sheet of Drawings and other documents
where such entry is required to show change.
b. Purpose of Project record documents is to document factual
information regarding aspects of the Work, both concealed and
visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed
without lengthy and expensive Site measurement, investigation,
and examination.
3. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that a change
in the Work has occurred.
4. Prior to submitting each request for progress payment, request
Construction Managers review and approval of current status of record
documents. Failure to properly maintain, update, and submit record
documents may result in a deferral by Architect or Construction
Manager to recommend whole or any part of a Trade Contractors
Application for Payment, either partial or final.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PW/WBG/475883
01 77 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
1.03 RELEASES FROM AGREEMENTS
A. Furnish Owner written releases from property owners or public agencies
where side agreements or special easements have been made, or where Trade
Contractors operations have not been kept within the Owners construction
right-of-way.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General:
1. Promptly following commencement of Contract Times, each Trade
Contractor shall secure from Architect at no cost to Trade Contractor,
one complete set of Contract Documents.
2. Label or stamp each record document with title, RECORD
DOCUMENTS, in neat large printed letters.
3. Record information concurrently with construction progress and within
24 hours after receipt of information that change has occurred. Do not
cover or conceal Work until required information is recorded.
B. Preservation:
1. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order.
Do not use record documents for construction purposes.
2. Make documents and Samples available at all times for observation by
Engineer.
C. Making Entries on Drawings:
1. Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly
describe change by graphic line and note as required.
a. Color Coding:
1) Green when showing information deleted from Drawings.
2) Red when showing information added to Drawings.
3) Blue and circled in blue to show notes.
2. Date entries.
3. Call attention to entry by cloud drawn around area or areas affected.
4. Legibly mark to record actual changes made during construction,
including, but not limited to:
a. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finished
first floor data if not shown or where depth differs from that
shown.

PW/WBG/475883 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
JANUARY 2014 01 77 00 - 3
b. Horizontal and vertical locations of existing and new
Underground Facilities and appurtenances, and other underground
structures, equipment, or Work. Reference to at least two
measurements to permanent surface improvements.
c. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the
construction referenced to visible and accessible features of the
structure.
d. Locate existing facilities, piping, equipment, and items critical to
the interface between existing physical conditions or construction
and new construction.
e. Changes made by Addenda and Field Orders, Work Change
Directive, Change Order, and Engineers written interpretation
and clarification using consistent symbols for each and showing
appropriate document tracking number.
5. Dimensions on Schematic Layouts: Show on record drawings, by
dimension, the centerline of each run of items such as are described in
previous subparagraph above.
a. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as cast iron
drain, galv. water, and the like.
b. Show, by symbol or note, vertical location of item (under slab,
in ceiling plenum, exposed, and the like).
c. Make identification so descriptive that it may be related reliably to
Specifications.
3.02 FINAL CLEANING
A. See Section 01 31 13, Project Coordination, for project cleaning requirements.
B. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surfaces to be
cleaned.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 DEMOLITION
JANUARY 2014 02 41 00 - 1
SECTION 02 41 00
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI):
Guideline K, Containers for Recovered Non-flammable Fluorocarbon
Refrigerants.
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A10.6, Safety
Requirements for Demolition Operations.
3. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), U.S. Code of Federal
Regulations (CFR), Title 40:
a. Part 61National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air
Pollutants.
b. Part 82Protection of Stratospheric Ozone.
c. Part 273Standards for Universal Waste Management.
4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S. Code of
Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 29 Part 1926Occupational Safety
and Health Regulations for Construction.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. ACM: Asbestos-containing material.
B. Demolition: Dismantling, razing, destroying, or wrecking of any fixed
building or structure or any part thereof.
C. Modify: Provide all necessary material and labor to modify an existing item to
the condition indicated or specified.
D. Relocate: Remove, protect, clean and reinstall equipment, including electrical,
instrumentation, and all ancillary components required to make the equipment
fully functional, to the new location identified on Drawings.
E. Renovation: Altering a facility or one or more facility components in any way.
F. Salvage/Salvageable: Remove and deliver, to the specified location(s), the
equipment, building materials, or other items so identified to be saved from
destruction, damage, or waste; such property to remain that of Owner. Unless
otherwise specified, title to items identified for demolition shall revert to
Contractor.

DEMOLITION PW/WBG/475883
02 41 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
G. Universal Waste Lamp: In accordance with 40 CFR 273, the bulb or tube
portion of an electric lighting device, examples of which include, but are not
limited to, fluorescent, high-intensity discharge, neon, mercury vapor, high-
pressure sodium, and metal halide lamps.
H. Universal Waste Thermostat: A temperature control device that contains
metallic mercury in an ampule attached to a bimetal sensing element, and
mercury-containing ampules that have been removed from these temperature
control devices in compliance with the requirements of 40 CFR 273.
1.03 REGULATORY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. In
addition to the requirements of the General Conditions, Contractors safety
requirements shall conform to ANSI A10.6.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE DEMOLISHED OR RENOVATED
A. Facilities: Portions of buildings and other areas scheduled for selective
demolition, partial demolition, and renovation Work are shown on Drawings.
B. Utilities and Related Equipment:
1. Notify Architect and Owner or appropriate utilities to turn off affected
services at least 48 hours before starting demolition activities.
2. Remove existing utilities as indicated and terminate in a manner
conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific
utility and approved by Architect.
3. When utility lines are encountered that are not indicated on Drawings,
notify Architect and Owner prior to further work in that area.
C. Paving and Slabs: Remove concrete slabs as indicated on Drawings including
the vapor barrier under the slab.
D. Reroofing:
1. Where indicated on Drawings remove roof membrane and associated
roof insulation systems to concrete topping slab.
2. Sequence Work to minimize building exposure between the time of
existing roof removal and new roof material installation. Install
temporary roofing and flashing as necessary to maintain a watertight
condition throughout the course of the Work.

PW/WBG/475883 DEMOLITION
JANUARY 2014 02 41 00 - 3
E. Concrete: Saw concrete along straight lines to a depth of not less than
2 inches. Make each cut in walls perpendicular to the face and in alignment
with the cut in the opposite face. Break out the remainder of the concrete
provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished Work, and the
remaining concrete is sound. At locations where the broken face cannot be
concealed, grind smooth or saw cut entirely through the concrete. Where new
concrete adjoins existing, the new Work shall abut or tie into the existing
construction as indicated.
F. Patching:
1. Where removals leave holes and damaged surfaces exposed in the
finished Work, patch and repair to match adjacent finished surfaces as
to texture and finish.
2. Where new Work is to be applied to existing surfaces, perform removals
and patching in a manner to produce surfaces suitable for receiving new
Work.
G. Ceilings: Patch acoustic lay-in ceiling where partitions have been removed.
The transition between the different ceiling heights shall be effected by
continuing the higher ceiling level over to the first runner on the lower ceiling
and closing the vertical opening with a painted sheet metal strip.
H. Electrical:
1. Cut off concealed or embedded conduit, boxes, or other materials a
minimum of 3/4 inch below final finished surface.
2. When removing designated equipment, conduit and wiring may require
rework to maintain service to other equipment.
3. Rework existing circuits, or provide temporary circuits as necessary
during renovation to maintain service to existing lighting and equipment
not scheduled to be renovated. Existing equipment and circuiting shown
are based upon limited field surveys. Verify existing conditions, make
all necessary adjustments, and record the Work on the record drawings.
This shall include, but is not limited to, swapping and other adjustments
to branch circuits and relocation of branch circuit breakers within
panelboards as required to accomplish the finished work.
4. Reuse of existing luminaires, devices, conduits, boxes, or equipment
will be permitted only where specifically indicated.
5. Raceways and cabling not scheduled for reuse.
6. Inaccessibly Concealed: Cut off and abandon in place.
7. Exposed or Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Remove.
8. Raceways and Cabling Scheduled for Future Use: Cap/seal and tag.
9. Relocating Equipment: Extend existing wiring or run new wiring from
the source.

DEMOLITION PW/WBG/475883
02 41 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
10. Where the existing raceway is concealed, the outlet box shall be
cleaned, and a blank cover plate installed.
11. Where the concealed raceway is uncovered remove raceway (or
extended to new location if appropriate).
3.02 PROTECTION
A. See Section 01 31 13, Project Coordination, for protection requirements.
3.03 TITLE TO MATERIALS
A. All salvaged equipment and materials will remain the property of Owner.
B. All items designated to be removed shall become the property of Contractor.
3.04 CLEANUP
A. Debris and rubbish shall be removed from basement and similar excavations.
Debris and rubbish shall be removed and transported in a manner that prevents
spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Local regulations regarding hauling and
disposal shall apply.
3.05 SUPPLEMENT
Specification:
1. Asbestos Survey Report.
END OF SECTION
Boise City Hall 2
General Information 1.1
City of Boise
Prepared for:
Photo Documentation
AHERA Certificates
2.1
Inspection Summary 1.2
NVLAP Certificate
150 N. Capitol Boulevard
Boise, ID 83701
Sample Inventories
Laboratory Data
Not Numbered
Not Numbered
3.1
Asbestos Survey Report
Not Numbered
4412 SW Corbett Avenue, Portland, OR 97239
503.248.1939 Main
866.727.0140 Fax
888.248.1939 Toll-Free
June 2013
Project No.: 95010.003 Phase No.: 0001
www.pbsenv.com

PW/WBG/475883 REPAIR OF VERTICAL AND OVERHEAD
JANUARY 2014 CONCRETE SURFACES
SECTION 03 01 32
REPAIR OF VERTICAL AND OVERHEAD CONCRETE SURFACES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
a. 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete.
b. 506.2, Specification for Shotcrete.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A82/A82M, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for
Concrete Reinforcement.
b. A185/A185M, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete.
c. A615/A615M, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain
Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
d. A706/A706M, Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel
Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
e. C42/C42M, Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing
Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.
f. C78/C78M, Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of
Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading).
g. C109/C109M, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or [50-mm] Cube
Specimens).
h. C157/C157M, Standard Test Method for Length Change of
Hardened Hydraulic-Cement Mortar and Concrete.
i. C293/C293M, Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of
Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Center-Point Loading.
j. C348, Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-
Cement Mortars.
k. C496/C496M, Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile
Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
l. C531, Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient
of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts,
Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes.
m. C596, Standard Test Method for Drying Shrinkage of Mortar
Containing Hydraulic Cement.
n. C666/C666M, Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete
to Rapid Freezing and Thawing.
o. C882/C882M, Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-
Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Shear.

REPAIR OF VERTICAL AND OVERHEAD PW/WBG/475883
CONCRETE SURFACES JANUARY 2014
p. C1202, Standard Test Method for Electrical Indication of
Concretes Ability to Resist Chloride Ion Penetration.
q. C1583/C1583M, Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of
Concrete Surfaces and the Bond Strength or Tensile Strength of
Concrete Repair and Overlay Materials by Direct Tension (Pull-
off Method).
r. D4258, Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for
Coating.
s. D4259, Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete.
t. E699, Standard Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in
Testing, Quality Assurance, and Evaluating of Building
Components.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Abrasive Blasting: Surface preparation method that uses compressed air
intermixed with an abrasive medium to clean surface of substrate concrete,
exposed steel, and reinforcing steel. Compressed air and abrasive medium is
projected at high speed through a nozzle directly at the surface. Method is
used to remove corrosion by-products, laitance, or other materials that may
inhibit bond of repair concrete.
B. Defective Area: As defined in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C. High-Pressure Water Blasting: Sometimes referred to as hydro-demolition.
Uses water that may contain an abrasive medium, projected under high
pressure and high velocity. Used for demolition, cutting, partial or full depth
removal, cleaning, scarifying, or roughening of concrete surfaces, or removing
existing coatings, for preparation of substrate concrete surfaces.
D. Low-Pressure Spray Mortar: Mortar suitable to be applied by low-pressure
spraying, and in small areas may be applied by hand troweling.
E. New Concrete: As defined in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
F. Rebound: Shotcrete material, mostly aggregates, that bounce off a surface
against which shotcrete was projected.
G. Shotcrete: Mortar pumped through hose and projected at high velocity.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Product data sheets for each material supplied.
2. Mesh reinforcement and mesh anchor.

3. Drawings or photographs indicating location, size, estimated quantity,
and proposed repair mortar for each repair location in new or existing
concrete. See Contract Drawings for approximate repair areas.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Repair Mortar System: Manufacturers preparation and installation
instructions.
2. Mesh manufacturers installation instructions and allowable load
criteria.
3. Written description of equipment proposed for concrete removal and
surface preparation.
4. Certificates:
a. Shotcrete Nozzleman: Current ACI Certification for each
proposed nozzleman.
b. Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with
Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, that proposed
repair mortar systems:
1) Meet or exceed specified performance criteria when tested
in accordance with Article Field Quality Control.
2) Are prepackaged, shrinkage compensated, specially
designed for use on vertical and overhead surfaces that are
exposed to weather.
c. Mortar Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation, in
accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.
5. Statements of Qualification:
a. Repair mortar system applicator.
b. Repair mortar system manufacturers representative.
c. Independent Testing Laboratory.
6. Repair mortar system manufacturers proposed modified test procedures
for ASTM C109/C109M and ASTM C882/C882M test methods.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Repair Mortar System Applicator:
a. Trained and experienced applicator recognized or certified by
repair mortar system manufacturer.
b. For Repair System B, in lieu of recognition or certification,
demonstrate application of repair mortar manufacturers system
and obtain Certification of Proper Installation, in accordance with
Article Manufacturers Services.
2. Repair Mortar System Manufacturers Representative: As specified in
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.

B. Independent Testing Laboratory: Meet criteria stated in ASTM E699.
C. Demonstration Mockup for Shotcrete Mortar or Low-Pressure Spray Mortar
Repair System:
1. For each type of repair mortar system to be used, prepare one
demonstration mockup in each vertical and overhead orientation of at
least 10 feet by 10 feet with average thickness, and containing
reinforcement, representative of area being repaired on Project.
Alternatively, a repair area in each vertical and overhead orientation that
is representative of area to be repaired in terms of size, thickness, and
reinforcement, may be used for demonstration in lieu of mockups;
subject to acceptance by Engineer.
2. Repair Mortar System Manufacturers Demonstration:
a. Schedule time for manufacturers demonstration of repair system
proposed for Project.
b. Prepare mortar to specified consistency for testing and placement.
c. Cure portions of each type of surface to be repaired using
proposed curing procedure and materials, including overhead and
vertical applications.
d. Prepare surface area in advance of demonstration and obtain
manufacturers acceptance of preparation for each type of
application.
e. Demonstrate the following:
1) Mixing and application equipment capabilities and
procedures, including flow of material from nozzle or
sprayer.
2) Nozzle operator and person in charge of low-pressure
sprayer, capabilities and ability to follow prescribed
application procedures and properly operate equipment and
apply surface repair materials.
f. Compression Strength Test: Take core samples from or make
compression test samples from wet mortar during demonstration
placement and deliver to independent testing laboratory for testing
at 7 days and 28 days.
g. Tensile Bond Test: Test in situ or take a core of demonstration
placement and test as specified herein below for tensile bond at
7 days as specified in Paragraph Direct Tension Bond Test.
D. Demonstration Mockup for Hand-Applied Repair Mortar:
1. For each type of repair mortar system to be used, prepare one
demonstration mockup in each vertical and overhead orientation of
average size and thickness, and containing reinforcement, representative
of area being repaired on Project. Alternatively, a repair area in each
vertical and overhead orientation that is representative of area to be

repaired in terms of size, thickness, and reinforcement, may be used for
demonstration in lieu of mockups; subject to acceptance by Engineer.
2. Repair Mortar System Manufacturers Demonstration:
a. Schedule time for manufacturers demonstration of repair system
proposed for Project.
b. Prepare mortar to specified consistency, for testing and placement.
c. Cure portions of each type of surface to be repaired using
proposed curing procedure and materials, including overhead and
vertical applications.
d. Prepare surface area in advance of demonstration and obtain
manufacturers acceptance of preparation for each type of
application.
e. Demonstrate mixing and application procedures.
f. Compression Strength Test: Take core samples from or make
compression test samples from wet mortar during demonstration
placement and deliver to independent testing laboratory for testing
at 7 days and 28 days.
g. Tensile Bond Test: Test in situ or take a core of demonstration
placement and test for tensile bond at 7 days as specified in
Paragraph Direct Tension Bond Test.
E. Pre-repair Conference:
1. Required Meeting Attendees:
a. Contractor.
b. Repair Subcontractor.
c. Technical representative for repair material manufacturer.
d. Engineer.
2. Schedule and conduct prior to conducting mockups and incorporation of
respective products into Project. Notify Engineer of location and time.
3. Agenda shall include, but not limited to:
a. Review of field conditions. Conduct field observations of Work to
be performed.
b. Based on above observations, repair material manufacturers
technical representative shall confirm material selection and make
Project-specific repair method recommendations.
c. Technical representative for repair material manufacturer shall
review proposed surface preparation, material application,
consolidation, finishing, curing, and protection of repair material
from weather conditions.
d. Other specified requirements requiring coordination.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package repair mortar system products in moisture-resistant bags, pails, or
moisture-resistant bulk bags.

B. Deliver, store, and handle repair materials in accordance with manufacturers
printed instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SYSTEM ASHOTCRETE MORTAR
A. Mortar Materials:
1. Blend of selected portland cements, microsilica, and specially graded
aggregates and fibers applicable for vertical and overhead surfaces.
2. Materials shall not contain asbestos, chlorides, nitrates, added gypsum,
added lime, or high aluminum cements.
3. Noncombustible before and after cure.
4. Furnish in factory proportioned unit.
5. Workability from 1/4 inch in depth and greater.
B. Mixed Mortar Properties:
1. Working Time: 5 to 10 minutes.
2. Finishing Time: 10 to 20 minutes.
3. Color: Dark gray.
C. Cured Mortar Properties:
1. Compressive strength for 2-inch cubes in accordance with
ASTM C109/C109M, or 3-inch cubes in accordance with
manufacturers modification to ASTM C109/C109M:
a. 7 Days: 6,000 psi minimum.
b. 28 Days: 7,000 psi minimum.
2. Flexural Strength (Modulus of Rupture), ASTM C78/C78M or
ASTM C348 (Modified) at 28 Days: 1,100 psi minimum.
3. Splitting Tensile Strength, ASTM C496/C496M at 28 Days: 400 psi
minimum.
4. Chloride Ion Permeability Based on Charge Passed, ASTM C1202:
800 coulombs maximum.
5. Mortar shall not produce a vapor barrier.
D. Manufacturers and Products:
1. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC - Building Systems, Shakopee,
MN; Shotpatch 21F.
2. Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; SIKACEM 103F.
3. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Eucoshot F or Eucoshot with Tuf-
Strand SF added per manufacturers recommendations.

2.02 SYSTEM BLOW-PRESSURE SPRAY MORTAR
A. One-component, cement based, fiber reinforced, shrinkage compensated, gray
in color, with a minimum 30-minute working time.
B. Cured materials mixed in accordance with manufacturers instructions shall
conform to the following criteria:
1. Compressive Strength, ASTM C109/C109M at 28 Days: 6,000 psi
minimum.
2. Flexural Strength, ASTM C348 at 28 Days: 1,100 psi minimum.
3. Slant Shear Bond Strength, ASTM C882/C882M Test Method Modified
with No Bonding Agent, at 28 Days: 3,000 psi minimum.
4. Direct Tensile Bond Strength, ASTM C496/C496M at 28 Days: 300 psi
minimum.
5. Drying Shrinkage, ASTM C157/C157M Modified at 28 Days or
ASTM C531: 0.1 percent maximum.
7. System shall not produce a vapor barrier.
8. Sprayable, extremely low permeability, sulfate resistant, easy to use and
requiring only addition of water.
9. Free of chlorides and other chemicals causing corrosion.
C. Manufacturers and Products:
MN; Emaco S88 CI.
2. Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; SikaRepair 224.
3. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Tamms Structural Mortar.
2.03 SYSTEM CPOLYMER-MODIFIED REPAIR MORTAR
A. Polymer-modified, one- or two-component, cementitious based, chloride
resistant, flowable, gray in color, working time of 20 minutes minimum,
surface renovation mortar.
B. Cured Mortar Properties:
1. Compressive Strength, ASTM C109/C109M at 28 Days: 7,000 psi
minimum.
2. Flexural Strength, ASTM C348 at 28 Days: 1,200 psi minimum.
3. Slant Shear Bond Strength, ASTM C882/C882M Test Method Modified
with No Bonding Agent at 28 Days: 2,000 psi minimum.
4. Splitting Tensile Strength, ASTM C496/C496M at 28 Days: 500 psi
minimum.

5. Drying Shrinkage, ASTM C596 at 28 Days: 0.12 percent maximum.
6. Freeze Thaw Resistance, ASTM C666/C666M, at 300 Cycles:
90 percent RDM.
8. Certified to meet requirements of NSF 61 for contact with potable
water.
1. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC Building Systems, Shakopee,
MN; Emaco R300 CI.
2. Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; SikaTop 123 PLUS.
3. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; DuralTop Gel.
2.04 SYSTEM DSITE-MIXED PORTLAND-CEMENT MORTAR
A. Mortar Materials:
1. Use same materials as concrete to be repaired with no coarse aggregate,
per Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. Use of 3/8-inch nominal
pea gravel acceptable where repairs are in excess of 1 inch deep.
2. For repairs to exposed concrete, make trial batches to check color
compatibility of repair mortar with existing surrounding concrete.
3. When repair is too dark, substitute white portland cement for part of the
gray portland cement to produce desired color closely matching color of
surrounding concrete.
2.05 WATER
A. Clean and free from oil, acid, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious
substances, meeting federal drinking water standards, as specified in
Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2.06 REINFORCEMENT
A. Deformed Reinforcing Bars:
1. ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, where welding is not required.
2. ASTM A706/A706M, Grade 60, for reinforcing to be welded.
B. Mesh Reinforcement: Welded wire fabric flat sheets with spacing of wires and
wire size in accordance with ASTM A185/A185M, wire 75 ksi minimum
tensile strength per ASTM A82/A82M, and repair mortar system
manufacturers recommendations.
C. Tie Wire: 16-gauge, galvanized.

D. Mesh Anchors:
1. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Powers Fastening, Inc., Brewster, NY; Tie Wire Version of
Power-Stud.
b. Hilti Fastener Systems, Tulsa, OK; Kwik Bolt II HHDCA,
1/4-inch ceiling hanger.
2.07 CEMENTITIOUS BONDING AGENT AND REINFORCEMENT COATING
A. Cementitious adhesive, specifically formulated for bonding plastic portland
cement concrete or mortar to hardened portland cement concrete.
1. Mixed Bonding Agent Properties:
a. Pot Life: 75 to 105 minutes.
b. Contact Time: 24 hours.
2. Cured Cementitious Adhesive Properties:
a. Splitting Tensile Strength, ASTM C496/C496M at 28 Days:
500 psi minimum.
b. Flexural Strength, ASTM C348: 1,000 psi minimum.
c. Slant Shear Bond Strength, ASTM C882/C882M at 14 Days:
1) 2-Hour Open Time: 2,500 psi minimum.
3. Bonding agent shall not produce a vapor barrier.
4. Compatible with repair system.
B. Manufacturers and Products:
MN; Emaco P24.
2. Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem.
3. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH: Dural Prep AC.
2.08 EVAPORATION RETARDANT
A. As specified in Section 03 39 00, Concrete Curing.
2.09 CURING COMPOUND

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. New Concrete Work: Repair deficiencies in new concrete structures
constructed under this Contract with applicable repair system. Refer to
B. Existing Concrete Work: Repair concrete as identified in Contract
Documents.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Identify unsound and deteriorated concrete by sounding techniques, or as
directed by Engineer, and review proposed extent of repair with Engineer.
B. Remove unsound, honeycombed, deteriorated, or otherwise defective areas of
concrete from work areas.
1. Use 8,000 psi minimum high-pressure water or abrasive blasting
machine as required for Site conditions.
2. Remove concrete to abrade substrate concrete surfaces to a minimum
amplitude roughness of 3/16 inch measured between high and low
points with a 3-foot-long straightedge, in accordance with
ASTM D4259.
3. For existing structures, extent of concrete removal as shown on
Drawings.
4. Where final surface is required to be flush with existing adjacent surface
remove existing concrete depth as required for application of minimum
thickness of repair mortar.
C. Do not use power-driven jackhammers, chipping hammers, or scabblers
unless water blasting is not permitted or practical due to Site conditions, or
may cause other damage to equipment or facilities. In such cases where
chipping hammers are required, limit size of chipping hammer to 16 pounds
or lighter, or use small electric chipping hammer, to reduce formation of
micro-fractures in substrate concrete surface.
D. Following removal of unsound or deteriorated concrete, check substrate
concrete surface by sounding techniques to identify unsound concrete
remaining or resulting from use of chipping hammer.
E. Remove unsound concrete to satisfaction of Engineer.
F. Square edges of patch areas by sawing or chipping to avoid tapered shoulders
or featheredges. Avoid cutting embedded reinforcing steel. Roughen polished

saw-cut edge by high-pressure water blasting or abrasive blasting as suitable
for Site conditions.
G. Remove concrete adjacent to reinforcing bar to a minimum of 1-inch
clearance around reinforcing bar for application and bonding of new repair
mortar to circumference of exposed reinforcing bar if one or more of the
following surface conditions exist:
1. 50 percent or more of circumference around reinforcing bar is exposed
during concrete removal.
during concrete removal and corrosion is present to extent that more
than 25 percent loss of section has occurred.
3. Otherwise evident that bond between existing concrete and reinforcing
bar has been destroyed or has deteriorated as determined by Engineer.
H. Clean exposed reinforcing steel bars of loose rust and concrete splatter per
recommendations of repair material manufacturer and in accordance with
ASTM D4258.
I. Keep areas from which concrete has been removed free of dirt, dust, and
water blasting waste slurry. Remove laitance and other bond inhibiting
contaminates from prepared areas.
J. Dampen repair areas at least 6 inches beyond area to receive repair mortar for
at least 24 hours to provide saturated surface dry (SSD) condition without
standing water at time of application of mortar as required by and in
accordance with repair mortar manufacturers printed instructions.
K. Collect and dispose of spent water and concrete debris from removal
operations offsite in manner and location acceptable to Owner.
3.03 REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A. Provide reinforcement when existing reinforcement is not exposed, and when
mortar application is more than 3 inches deep, unless otherwise shown on
Drawings.
B. Replace deteriorated reinforcing with new reinforcing equivalent in cross-
sectional area to original reinforcing.
C. Install mesh anchors in accordance with mesh manufacturers instructions.
D. Fasten reinforcing bars to mesh anchors with tie wire to prevent from moving
during placement of repair mortar.

E. Lap reinforcement mesh a minimum of one mesh spacing and securely fasten
mesh to mesh anchors, or to reinforcement fastened to mesh anchors, with tie
wire at intervals no more than 12 inches to prevent movement during
application of repair mortar.
F. Coat exposed new and existing reinforcing bars and reinforcement mesh with
cementitious reinforcement coating at same time as substrate concrete is
coated, as specified below, per repair mortar and cementitious reinforcement
coating manufacturers printed instructions.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. If cementitious coating or bonding agent is used, protect adjacent surfaces
from over application. Promptly remove bonding agent applied beyond repair
area.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces, and equipment, from being damaged by
overshooting, rebound, and dust, as applicable for repair mortar system used,
from shotcrete mortar or low-pressure spray mortar.
3.05 SYSTEM ASHOTCRETE MORTAR APPLICATION
A. Apply shotcrete mortar in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B. Do not reuse rebound materials.
C. Apply mortar utilizing dry mix process, in accordance with ACI 506.2.
D. Shotcrete mortar shall emerge from nozzle in a steady, uninterrupted flow. If
flow becomes intermittent, direct flow away from the Work until flow of
mortar becomes constant.
E. Applied Shotcrete Mortar: Minimum thickness of 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches of
cover over existing reinforcement, or to level of surrounding concrete surface,
whichever results in thicker coat.
F. Nozzle Position: Hold nozzle approximately at right angles to and at a
distance from surface in accordance with shotcrete repair mortar system
manufacturers instructions for type of application, nozzle, and air pressure
used.
G. Reinforcing Steel Encasement:
1. Modify procedure of shooting shotcrete mortar to better direct material
around reinforcement bars.

2. Prevent shotcrete mortar from building up on reinforcement steel when
shooting on, around, through, and behind steel to eliminate voids.
3. Provide dense void-free encasement of reinforcement steel.
H. Shotcreting More than One Layer: In accordance with shotcrete repair mortar
system manufacturers printed instructions.
I. Slice off excess material with a wire screed approximately 5 minutes to
10 minutes after initial set.
J. Apply finish to exposed shotcrete mortar surface to match existing surface and
in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Steel trowel finish when
finish coat is not applied. Apply full strength evaporation retardant.
K. Rebound Removal: Continuously throughout shotcrete mortar application,
remove rebound, sand, and miscellaneous debris, and dispose off Site at an
approved disposal facility.
L. Cure as specified in Article Curing.
3.06 SYSTEM BLOW-PRESSURE SPRAY MORTAR APPLICATION
A. Mix mortar in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.
B. After priming prepared substrate concrete surface per manufacturers
recommendations, apply mortar by low-pressure spraying equipment, unless
noted otherwise.
C. Bonding Agent:
1. Use bonding agent for hand applied areas, in accordance with repair
mortar manufacturers instructions.
2. Application of repair mortar over bonding agent shall be completed
within time frame recommended by bonding agent manufacturer.
3. Consult with manufacturer for optimum and minimum acceptable
degrees of surface tackiness of coat.
D. Work mortar firmly and quickly into repair area.
E. Finish repair mortar to smooth even surface matching adjacent concrete
surface with steel trowel finish.
F. Provide evaporation retardant at full strength.
G. Cure as specified in Article Curing.

3.07 SYSTEM CPOLYMER-MODIFIED REPAIR MORTAR APPLICATION
A. Mix mortar in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.
B. Bond Coat: Apply to prepared substrate concrete surface before application of
mortar in accordance with repair mortar manufacturers printed instructions.
Do not apply more bond coat than can be covered with mortar before bond
coat dries. Do not retemper bond coat.
C. Place mortar by hand or low-pressure spray and trowel to specified surface
finish, in accordance with requirements of repair materials printed
instructions.
D. Finish repair mortar to smooth even surface matching adjacent concrete
surface with hand float application steel trowel finish.
E. Cure as specified in Article Curing, and in accordance with manufacturers
3.08 CURING
A. Prior to curing, apply water fog to repair mortar system in accordance with
repair mortar system manufacturers printed instructions.
B. Cure in accordance with repair mortar manufacturers printed instructions.
C. Where permitted by repair mortar manufacturers printed instructions,
commence water or continue water fog curing after repair mortar system
application and when curing will not cause erosion of mortar.
D. Continuously water or fog cure repair mortar system for a period of 7 days
unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer.
E. Do not cure using curing compound or membrane, unless method is part of
repair mortar system manufacturers printed instructions and approval is
obtained from Engineer.
F. Cure intermediate layers of repair mortar in accordance with repair mortar
manufacturers printed instructions.
G. Where curing compound is permitted by repair mortar system manufacturer,
apply curing compound in accordance with Section 03 39 00, Concrete
Curing.

3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Sounding for Hollow Areas:
1. Light hammer tap repaired areas listening for hollow sound to determine
areas that have not properly bonded to substrate concrete.
2. Mark hollow areas for removal and replacement.
B. Compression Strength Test:
1. Test in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M, except modified by
making samples using repair mortar.
2. Obtain production samples of mixed wet mortar materials from nozzle,
or mixer, during construction for compliance with Specifications for
testing at 7 days, and 28 days. Alternatively, take core samples in
accordance with ASTM C42/C42M from applied mortar material for
testing at 7 days and 28 days.
3. Provide a minimum of three samples for each 1,000 square feet of
mortar repair, and a minimum of three samples in total, whichever is
greater, for testing.
4. Record location where repair mortar is being applied at time production
samples are obtained.
C. Direct Tension Bond Test:
1. In Situ Bond Testing: Perform tension bond test in accordance with
ASTM C1583/C1583M.
2. Record locations on in situ bond tests on each type of applied repair
mortar.
3. Laboratory Bond Testing:
a. Core two 2-1/2-inch or 3-inch-diameter core drilled samples per
ASTM C42/C42M for each 2,000 square feet of repair work for
direct tension bond testing. Where total area repaired is less than
2,000 square feet, core two 2-1/2-inch or 3-inch diameter samples
for direct tension bond testing. Record locations of core drilled
samples extracted from each type of applied repair mortar.
b. Cut core samples through cured mortar repair and into base
concrete to total depth equal to at least 2.5 times repair mortar
thickness. Avoid core drilling through structural element.
c. Saw cut core samples after removal to trim base concrete
thickness to same thickness as mortar so bond line is at center of
prepared core sample.
d. Bond core samples to steel plates at each end using epoxy
bonding agent.
e. Perform tension bond testing using calibrated independent test
laboratory equipment and eyebolts or threaded connectors tapped

and threaded into baseplate in order that tension load is concentric
with center of core sample.
f. Bond Strength of Repair Mortar to Substrate Concrete: 300 psi
minimum in direct tension without failure or movement.
D. Testing laboratory retained by Owner will test the following:
1. Compression Strength Test:
a. Testing will follow a modified ASTM C109/C109M.
b. A minimum of three production samples of mixed material will be
obtained from each 1,000 square feet of mortar repair, and a
minimum of three samples in total, whichever is greater, for
testing at 7 days, and 28 days. Alternatively, take core samples in
accordance with ASTM C42/C42M from applied mortar material
for testing at 7 days and 28 days.
c. Record location where repair mortar is being applied at time
production samples are obtained.
2. Direct Tension Bond Test:
a. Two core samples will be obtained and tested for each
2,000 square feet of repair work.
b. Cores will be 2-1/2-inch or 3-inch diameter to a total depth equal
to at least 2.5 times repair mortar thickness.
c. Bond Strength of Repair Mortar to Substrate Concrete: 300 psi
d. Record locations of Bond Tests on each type of applied repair
mortar tested.
E. Retest mortar repairs that do not meet test requirements.
F. Repair and fill holes using same repair mortar where core samples have been
removed.
3.10 MORTAR REPAIR FAILED TEST
A. Remove and replace unacceptable Work.
B. Hollow Sounding Areas: Saw cut hollow sounding areas to a new square
edge. Remove unsound mortar repair. Prepare substrate surface and reapply
repair mortar as specified herein above.
C. Failed Compression Strength Test: Remove affected areas of repair mortar
represented by failed compression strength test results. Prepare substrate
surface and reapply repair mortar as specified herein above.

D. Failed Bond Tests: Remove affected areas of repair mortar represented by
failed bond test results. Prepare substrate surface and reapply repair mortar as
specified herein above.
E. Retest areas where repair mortar was removed and replaced, in accordance
with test requirements specified herein above.
3.11 MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A. Provide repair mortar system manufacturers representative at Site in
accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services, for review
acceptability of surface preparation, mixing and installation assistance,
training of repair mortar system applicators, inspection, and Certification of
Proper Installation.
3.12 CLEANING
A. Remove overshot repair mortar and rebound materials as the Work proceeds.
Remove waste materials, unsound material from concrete surfaces, material
chipped from structure, and water used in preparation of or repair areas,
finishing, and curing, and dispose offsite at an approved disposal site.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 REPAIR OF HORIZONTAL
SECTION 03 01 33
REPAIR OF HORIZONTAL CONCRETE SURFACES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO): T277, Standard Method of Test for Electrical Indication of
a. A82/A82M, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for
Concrete Reinforcement.
b. A185/A185M, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete.
c. A615/A615M, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain
d. A706/A706M, Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel
e. C42/C42M, Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing
Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.
f. C78/C78M, Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of
Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading).
g. C109/C109M, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or [50-mm] Cube
Specimens).
i. C348, Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-
Cement Mortars.
j. C469, Standard Test Method for Static Modulus of Elasticity and
Poissons Ratio of Concrete in Compression.
k. C496/C496M, Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile
Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
l. C666/C666M, Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete
to Rapid Freezing and Thawing.
m. C779/C779M, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of
Horizontal Concrete Surfaces.
n. C882/C882M, Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-
Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Shear.
o. C928/C928M, Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Rapid-
Hardening Cementitious Materials for Concrete Repairs.

REPAIR OF HORIZONTAL PW/WBG/475883
p. C1012/C1012M, Standard Test Method for Length Change of
Hydraulic-Cement Mortars Exposed to a Sulfate Solution.
q. C1202, Standard Test Method for Electrical Indication of
r. C1583/C1583M, Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of
Concrete Surfaces and the Bond Strength or Tensile Strength of
Concrete Repair and Overlay Materials by Direct Tension (Pull-
off Method).
s. D638, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
t. D695, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics.
u. D4258, Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for
Coating.
v. D4259, Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete.
w. E699, Standard Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in
Testing, Quality Assurance, and Evaluating of Building
Components.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Abrasive Blasting: Surface preparation method that uses compressed air
intermixed with an abrasive medium to clean surface of substrate concrete,
exposed steel, and reinforcing steel. Compressed air and abrasive medium is
projected at high speed through a nozzle directly at the surface. Method is
used to remove corrosion by-products, laitance, or other materials that may
inhibit bond of repair concrete.
B. Defective Area: As defined in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C. High-Pressure Water Blasting: Sometimes referred to as hydro-demolition.
Uses water that may contain an abrasive medium, projected under high
pressure and high velocity. Used for demolition, cutting, partial or full depth
removal, cleaning, scarifying, or roughening of concrete surfaces, or removing
existing coatings, for preparation of substrate concrete surfaces.
D. New Concrete: As defined in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Product data sheets for each material supplied.
2. Drawings or photographs indicating location, size, estimated quantity,
and proposed repair mortar system for each repair location in new or
existing concrete.

3. Drawings indicating results of sounding for hollow areas including
location, size, estimated quantity, of hollow-sounding areas for each
repair location.
1. Repair Mortar System: Manufacturers preparation and installation
instructions.
2. Written description of equipment proposed for concrete removal and
surface preparation.
3. Certificates:
a. Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with
Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, that material
meets requirements of ASTM C928/C928M.
b. Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with
Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, that proposed
repair mortar systems meet or exceed specified performance
criteria when tested in accordance with Article Field Quality
Control.
c. Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with
Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, that repair
mortar systems are prepackaged, shrinkage compensated,
specially designed for use on horizontal surfaces that are exposed
to weather and/or receive traffic.
d. Mortar Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation, in
e. Confirmation epoxy resin bonding agents conform to
ASTM C882/C882M.
a. Repair mortar system applicator.
b. Independent Testing Laboratory.
A. Qualifications:
1. Repair Mortar System Applicator: Trained and experienced applicator
endorsed by repair mortar system manufacturer.
2. Repair Mortar System Manufacturers Representative: As specified in
B. Independent Testing Laboratory: Meet criteria stated in ASTM E699.

C. Pre-repair Conference:
a. Contractor.
b. Repair Subcontractor.
c. Technical representative for repair material manufacturer.
d. Engineer.
2. Schedule and conduct prior to incorporation of respective products into
Project. Notify Engineer of location and time.
3. Agenda shall include, but not limited to:
a. Review of field conditions. Conduct field observations of the
Work to be performed.
b. Based on above observations, repair material manufacturers
technical representative shall confirm material selection and make
Project specific repair method recommendations.
c. Technical representative for repair material manufacturer shall
review proposed surface preparation, material application,
consolidation, finishing, curing, and protection of repair material
from weather conditions.
d. Other specified requirements requiring coordination.
A. Package repair mortar system products in moisture-resistant bags, pails, or
moisture-resistant bulk bags.
B. Deliver, store, and handle repair materials in accordance with manufacturers
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SYSTEM NO. 1MAGNESIUM PHOSPHATE REPAIR MORTAR
A. One component, magnesium-ammonium-phosphate concrete mortar.
B. Compressive Strength, ASTM C109/C109M modified:
1. 1 Hour: 2,000 psi minimum.
2. 3 Hours: 5,000 psi minimum.
3. 1 Day: 6,000 psi minimum.
4. 28 Days: 7,500 psi minimum.
C. Flexural Strength, ASTM C78/C78M Modified (3-inch by 4-inch by 16-inch
prism) at 1 Day: 550 psi minimum.
D. Modulus of Elasticity, ASTM C469 at 7 Days: 4.18 by 10
6
psi minimum.

E. Freeze-thaw Resistance and Resistance to Deicing Chemicals,
ASTM C666/C666M, Procedure A, at 300 Cycles: 80 percent RDM
minimum.
F. Sulfate Resistance, ASTM C1012/C1012M, Length Change after 52 Weeks:
0.09 percent maximum.
G. Application Temperature Range: 20 degrees F to 85 degrees F for normal
weather applications 85 degrees F to 100 degrees F for hot weather
applications.
H. Manufacturers and Products:
1. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC - Building System, Shakopee, MN;
SET 45 or SET 45 HW.
2. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Eucospeed MP or Eucospeed MP
Hot Weather.
2.02 SYSTEM NO. 2HIGH EARLY STRENGTH REPAIR MORTAR
A. One component, fast-setting, high early strength repair mortar.
B. Compressive Strength, ASTM C109/C109M:
1. 2 Hours: 1,500 psi minimum.
C. Flexural Strength, ASTM C348:
1. 1 Day: 850 psi minimum.
D. Modulus of Elasticity, ASTM C469:
1. 1 Day: 3.8 by 10
6
psi minimum.
2. 28 Days: 4.5 by 10
6
psi minimum.
E. Slant Shear Bond Strength, ASTM C882/C882M:

F. Splitting Tensile Strength, ASTM C496/C496M:
1. 1 Day: 850 psi minimum.
G. Freeze-thaw Resistance, ASTM C666/C666M, Procedure A, at 300 Cycles:
98 percent RDM.
H. Chloride Ion Permeability Based on Charge Passed, ASTM C1202 or
AASHTO T277, 28 Days: 960 coulombs maximum.
I. Manufacturers and Products:
MN; Emaco T415.
2. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; VersaSpeed.
2.03 SYSTEM NO. 3SHRINKAGE COMPENSATED REPAIR MORTAR
A. One component cement-based, flowable, shrinkage compensated repair mortar
system.
C. Flexural Strength, ASTM C348 at 28 Days: 770 psi minimum.
D. Modulus of Elasticity, ASTM C469 at 28 Days: 5.9 by 10
6
psi minimum.
E. Slant Shear Bond Strength, ASTM C882/C882M Modified:
2. 28 Days: 3, 000 psi minimum.
F. Freeze-thaw Resistance, ASTM C666/C666M, Procedure A, at 300 Cycles:
97.0 percent RDM.
G. Chloride Ion Permeability Based on Charge Passed, ASTM C1202 at
28 Days: 650 coulombs maximum.
H. Sulfate Resistance, ASTM C1012/C1012M after 6 Months: 0.01 percent
length change maximum.

MN; Emaco S66 CI.
2. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Eucocrete Supreme.
2.04 SYSTEM NO. 5POLYMER MODIFIED REPAIR MORTAR
A. One component, fast-setting, polymer modified cementitious based repair
mortar system.
C. Flexural Strength, ASTM C348 at 28 Days: 1,500 psi minimum.
D. Slant Shear Bond Strength, ASTM C882/C882M at 28 Days: 2,000 psi
minimum.
E. Splitting Tensile Strength, ASTM C496/C496M at 28 Days: 600 psi
minimum.
F. Abrasion Resistance Depth of Wear, ASTM C779/C779M, Procedure A, at
60 Minutes: 0.033 inch maximum.
G. Drying Shrinkage, ASTM C157/C157M Modified, at 28 Days: 0.09 percent
maximum.
H. Rapid Chloride Ion Permeability Based on Charge Passed, ASTM C1202:
28 Days: Under 850 coulombs maximum.
MN; Emaco R310 CI.
2. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Duraltop Flowable Mortar.
3. Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; SikaTop 111 PLUS.
2.05 WATER
A. Clean and free from oil, acid, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious
substances, meeting federal drinking water standards, as specified in

2.06 REINFORCEMENT
A. Deformed Reinforcing Bars:
1. ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, where welding is not required.
B. Mesh Reinforcement: Welded wire fabric flat sheets with spacing of wires and
wire size in accordance with ASTM A185/A185M, wire 75 ksi minimum
tensile strength per ASTM A82/A82M, and repair mortar system
manufacturers recommendations.
C. Tie Wire: 16-gauge, galvanized.
D. Mesh Anchors:
a. Powers Fastening, Inc., Brewster, NY; Tie Wire Version of
Power-Stud.
b. Hilti Fastener Systems, Tulsa, OK; Kwik Bolt II HHDCA,
1/4-inch ceiling hanger.
2.07 CEMENTITIOUS BONDING AGENT AND REINFORCEMENT COATING
A. Cementitious adhesive, specifically formulated for bonding plastic portland
cement concrete or mortar to hardened portland cement concrete.
1. Mixed Bonding Agent Properties:
a. Pot Life: 75 to 105 minutes.
b. Contact Time: 24 hours.
c. Color: Concrete gray.
2. Cured Cementitious Adhesive Properties:
a. Splitting Tensile Strength, ASTM C496/C496M at 28 Days:
600 psi minimum.
b. Flexural Strength, ASTM C348: 1,000 psi minimum.
c. Slant Shear Bond Strength, ASTM C882/C882M:
d. Bonding agent shall not produce a vapor barrier.
e. Compatible with repair mortar system.
MN; Emaco P24.
2. Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem.
3. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Dural Prep AC.

2.08 EPOXY BONDING AGENT
A. Two-component, moisture insensitive, 100 percent solids epoxy resin.
B. Tensile Strength, ASTM D638, at 14 Days: 4,400 psi minimum.
C. Elongation at Break, ASTM D638: 1.49 percent minimum.
D. Compressive Strength, ASTM D695, at 28 Days for Application Temperature
of 73 Degrees F to 77 Degrees F: 8,000 psi minimum.
E. Bond Strength, ASTM C882/C882M, at 14 Days: 1,800 psi minimum.
F. Pot Life, at 73 Degrees F to 77 Degrees F: 75 minutes minimum.
G. Manufacturers and Products: BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC - Building
Systems, Shakopee, MN; Concresive Liquid LPL when ambient temperature
is 73 degrees F or higher.
2.09 EVAPORATION RETARDANT
2.10 CURING COMPOUND
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. New Concrete Work: Repair deficiencies in new concrete structures
constructed under this Contract with applicable repair system.
B. Existing Concrete Work: Repair concrete as identified in Contract
Documents.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Identify unsound and deteriorated concrete by sounding techniques, or as
directed by Engineer. Review proposed extent of repair with Engineer.
B. Remove unsound, deteriorated, or otherwise defective areas of concrete from
work areas.
1. Use: 8,000 psi minimum psi high-pressure water or abrasive blasting
machine, as appropriate to suit Site conditions.

2. Remove concrete to abrade substrate concrete surface to a minimum
amplitude roughness of 3/16 inch measured between high and low
points with a 3-foot-long straightedge, in accordance with
ASTM D4259.
3. For existing structures, extent of concrete removal as shown on
Drawings.
4. Where final surface is required to be flush with existing adjacent
surface, remove existing concrete depth as required for application of
minimum thickness of repair mortar.
C. Do not use power-driven jackhammers, chipping hammers, scabblers, or
scarifiers unless water blasting is not permitted or practical due to Site
conditions, or may cause other damage to equipment or facilities. In such
cases where chipping hammers are required, limit size of chipping hammer to
16 pounds or lighter, or use small electric chipping hammer, to reduce
formation of micro-fractures in substrate concrete surface.
D. Following removal of unsound or deteriorated concrete, check substrate
concrete surface by sounding techniques to identify unsound concrete
remaining or resulting from use of chipping hammer.
E. Remove unsound concrete to satisfaction of Engineer.
F. Square edges of patch areas by sawing or chipping to avoid tapered shoulders
or featheredges. Avoid cutting embedded reinforcing steel. Roughen polished
saw-cut edge by high-pressure water blasting or abrasive blasting as
appropriate for to suit Site conditions.
G. Remove concrete adjacent to reinforcing bar to a minimum of 1-inch
clearance around reinforcing bar for application and bonding of new repair
mortar to entire circumference of exposed reinforcing bar if one or more of
the following surface conditions exist:
during concrete removal.
during concrete removal and corrosion is present to extent that more
than 25 percent loss of section has occurred.
3. Otherwise evident that bond between existing concrete and reinforcing
bar has been destroyed or has deteriorated as determined by Engineer.
H. Clean exposed reinforcing steel bars of loose rust and concrete splatter per
recommendations of repair material manufacturer and in accordance with
ASTM D4258.

I. Keep areas from which concrete has been removed free of dirt, dust, and
water blasting waste slurry. Remove laitance and other bond inhibiting
contaminates from prepared areas.
J. Substrate Concrete Surface in Areas to Receive Repair Mortar System Nos. 1,
2, 3, or 5: Dampen repair areas at least 6 inches beyond area to receive repair
mortar for at least 24 hours to provide saturated surface dry (SSD) condition
without standing water at time of application of mortar, as required by and in
accordance with repair mortar manufacturers printed instructions.
K. Substrate Concrete Surface in Areas to Receive System No. 4 Repair Mortar:
Dry, in accordance with material manufacturers printed instructions.
L. Spalled Joints:
1. Saw cut edge 1 inch deep and 6 inches back from old joint.
2. Remove unsound concrete and concrete between saw cut and joint.
3. Place wood or fiber spacer to thickness of joint at joint line.
M. Overlays:
1. Square cut edges to a minimum of 1/4 inch deep.
2. Do not feather edge area.
3. Perform special preparation recommended by mortar manufacturer.
N. Collect and dispose of spent water and concrete debris from removal
operations offsite in manner and location acceptable to Owner.
3.03 REINFORCMENT INSTALLATION
A. Replace deteriorated reinforcing with new reinforcing equivalent in cross-
sectional area to original reinforcing.
B. Install mesh anchors in accordance with mesh manufacturers instructions.
C. Fasten reinforcement to chairs or mesh anchors with tie wire to prevent from
moving during placement of repair mortar.
D. Lap reinforcement mesh a minimum of one mesh spacing and securely fasten
mesh to mesh anchors, or to reinforcement fastened to mesh anchors, with tie
wire at intervals no more than 12 inches to prevent movement during
application of repair mortar.
E. Coat exposed new and existing reinforcing bars with cementitious
reinforcement coating at the same time as substrate concrete is coated, as
specified below, per repair mortar and cementitious reinforcement coating
manufacturers printed instructions.

3.04 PROTECTION
A. If cementitious coating or bonding agent is used, protect adjacent surfaces
from over application. Promptly remove bonding agent applied beyond repair
area.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces, and equipment from spillage of repair mortar and
dust, as applicable for repair mortar system used.
3.05 APPLICATION
A. General:
1. Repair Mortar System No. 1: Patches, joints, and overlays 1/2 inch to
3 inches thick. Return to service in 1 hour.
2. Repair Mortar System No. 2: Patches, joints, or overlays 1/2 inch to
3 inches thick. Return to service in 3 hours to 7 days.
3. Repair Mortar System No. 3: Patches, joints, or overlays 1 inch thick or
greater. Return to service in 7 days or more.
4. Repair Mortar System No. 5:
a. Patches and Overlays: 1/4 inch to 3 inches thick.
b. Return to service for foot traffic in 4 hours; wheel traffic in
7 days.
c. Working Time: 30 minutes at 70 degrees F.
d. Application Temperature Range: 45 degrees F to 90 degrees F.
B. Repair Mortar System Nos. 1, 2, 3, or 5:
1. Remove standing and free water from prepared area.
2. Apply bond scrub coat of mortar to prepared surface in accordance with
manufacturers instructions. Do not apply more scrub coat of mortar
than can be covered with repair mortar before scrub coat begins drying.
3. Immediately place mixed repair mortar into prepared area from one side
to the other side.
4. Work material firmly into bottom and sides of patch to ensure a good
continuous bond.
5. Level repair mortar and screed to elevation of existing concrete.
6. Finish to same texture as existing concrete around patch.
7. Repair Mortar System No. 5 screed or use self-leveling mixture to
obtain a uniform and plane surface.
C. Joint Repair:
1. Remove joint spacer when repair mortar is hard enough that a pointed
trowel will penetrate surface less than 1/2 inch.

2. When repair mortar is cured and ready for use, fill joint in accordance
with repair mortar system manufacturers instructions.
3.06 FINISHING
A. Spray full strength evaporation retardant on fresh concrete to prevent rapid
drying during hot and windy weather.
3.07 CURING
A. Repair Mortar System No. 1:
1. No curing is required.
2. Protect from rain immediately after placing.
3. Liquid-membrane curing compounds or plastic sheeting may be used in
accordance with repair mortar manufacturers instructions to protect the
early surface from precipitation.
4. Never wet cure.
B. Repair Mortar System Nos. 2, 3, or 5: Apply curing compound in accordance
with Section 03 39 00, Concrete Curing.
A. Sounding for Hollow Areas:
1. Chain drag or light hammer tap repaired areas listening for hollow
sound to determine areas that have not properly bonded to substrate
concrete.
2. Mark hollow areas for removal and replacement.
B. Compression Strength Test:
1. Test in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M, except modified by
making samples using repair mortar.
2. Obtain production samples of mixed materials from mixer during
construction for compliance with Specifications.
3. Provide minimum of three samples for each 1,000 square feet of mortar
repair, and a minimum of three samples in total, whichever is greater for
testing.
4. Record location where repair mortar is being applied at time production
samples are obtained.
C. Direct Tension Bond Test:
1. In Situ Bond Testing: Perform tension bond test in accordance with
ASTM C1583/C1583M.

2. Record locations on in situ bond tests on each type of applied repair
mortar.
D. Testing laboratory retained by Owner will test the following:
1. Compression Strength Test:
a. Testing will follow a modified ASTM C109/C109M.
b. A minimum of three production samples of mixed material will be
obtained from each 1,000 square feet of mortar repair, and a
minimum of three samples in total, whichever is greater, for
testing at 7 days, and 28 days.
c. Record location where repair mortar is being applied at time
production samples are obtained.
2. Direct Tension Bond Test:
a. Two core samples will be obtained and tested for each
2,000 square feet of repair work.
b. Cores will be 2-1/2-inch or 3-inch diameter to a total depth equal
to at least 2.5 times repair mortar thickness.
c. Bond Strength of Repair Mortar to Substrate Concrete: 300 psi
d. Record locations of bond tests on each type of applied repair
mortar tested.
E. Retest mortar repairs that do not meet test requirements.
F. Repair and fill holes using same repair mortar where core samples have been
removed.
3.09 MORTAR REPAIR FAILED TEST
A. Remove and replace unacceptable Work.
B. Hollow Sounding Areas: Saw cut hollow sounding areas to a new square
edge, remove unsound mortar repair. Prepare substrate surface and reapply
repair mortar as specified herein above.
C. Failed Compression Strength Test: Remove affected areas of repair mortar
represented by failed compression strength test results. Prepare substrate
surface and reapply repair mortar as specified herein above.
D. Retest areas where repair mortar was removed and replaced, in accordance
with test requirements specified herein above.
A. Provide mortar manufacturers representative at Site in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services, for advice on product

selection, review acceptability of surface preparation, mixing and installation
assistance, inspection, and Certification of Proper Installation.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Remove excess repair mortar materials as the Work proceeds. Remove waste
materials, unsound material from concrete surfaces, material chipped from
structure, and water used in preparation of repair areas, finishing, and curing,
and dispose offsite at approved disposal site.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 CONCRETE FORMING
JANUARY 2014 AND ACCESSORIES
SECTION 03 10 00
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
a. 117/117R, Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials.
b. 318/318R, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
and Commentary.
c. 347, Guide to Formwork for Concrete.
A. Design formwork in accordance with ACI 347 and ACI 318/318R to provide
concrete finishes specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
B. When high range water reducer (superplasticizer) is used in concrete mix,
forms shall be designed for full hydrostatic pressure per ACI 347.
C. Make joints in forms watertight.
D. Limit panel deflection to 1/360th of each component span to achieve
tolerances specified.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings: Manufacturers data for form release agent.
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Formwork Designer: Formwork, falsework, and shoring design shall be by an
engineer licensed in the state of Project.

CONCRETE FORMING PW/WBG/475883
AND ACCESSORIES JANUARY 2014
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORM MATERIALS
A. Wall Forms and Underside of Slabs and Beams:
1. Materials: Plywood, hard plastic finished plywood, overlaid waterproof
particle board, or steel in new and undamaged condition, of sufficient
strength and surface smoothness to produce specified finish.
B. All Other Forms: Materials as specified for wall forms.
C. Form Release Agent:
1. Material: Release agent shall not bond with, stain, or adversely affect
concrete surfaces, and shall not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces when applied to forms. A ready-to-use water based
material formulated to reduce or eliminate surface imperfections,
containing no mineral oil or organic solvents. Environmentally safe,
meeting local, state, and federal regulations.
a. BASF, Shakopee, MN; MBT, Rheofinish 211.
b. Cresset Chemical Company; Crete-Lease 20-VOC.
c. Unitex Chemicals; Farm Fresh.
d. Atlas Construction Supply, Inc.; Bio-Guard.
D. Rustication Grooves and Beveled Edge Corner Strips: Nonabsorbent material,
compatible with form surface, fully sealed on all sides prohibiting loss of
paste or water between the two surfaces.
E. Form Ties:
1. Material: Steel.
2. Spreader Inserts:
a. Conical or spherical type.
b. Design to maintain positive contact with forming material.
c. Furnish units that will leave no metal closer than 1.5 inches to
concrete surface when forms, inserts, and tie ends are removed.
3. Wire ties not permitted.
4. Flat bar ties for panel forms; furnish plastic or rubber inserts with
minimum 1.5-inch depth and sufficient dimensions to permit patching
of tie hole.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FORM SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Thoroughly clean form surfaces that will be in contact with concrete or that
have been in contact with previously cast concrete, dirt, and other surface
contaminants prior to coating surface.
B. Exposed Wood Forms in Contact with Concrete: Apply form release agent as
recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Steel Forms: Apply form release agent to steel forms as soon as they are
cleaned to prevent discoloration of concrete from rust.
3.02 ERECTION
A. General: Unless specified otherwise, follow applicable recommendations of
ACI 347.
B. Beveled Edges (Chamfer):
1. Form 3/4-inch bevels at concrete edges, unless otherwise shown.
2. Where beveled edges on existing adjacent structures are other than
3/4 inch, obtain Engineers approval of size prior to placement of
beveled edge.
C. Wall Forms:
1. Do not reuse forms with damaged surfaces.
2. Locate form ties and joints in an uninterrupted uniform pattern.
3. Inspect form surfaces prior to installation to assure conformance with
specified tolerances.
D. Forms for Curbs, Sidewalks, and Driveways:
1. Provide standard steel or wood forms.
2. Set forms to true lines and grades, and securely stake in position.
E. Form Tolerances: Provide forms in accordance with ACI 117/117R, ACI 347,
and ACI 318/318R and the following tolerances for finishes specified:
1. Wall Tolerances:
a. Straight Vertical or Horizontal Wall Surface: Flat planes within
tolerance specified.
b. Wall Type W-A:
1) Plumb within 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

CONCRETE FORMING PW/WBG/475883
2) Depressions in Wall Surface: Maximum 5/16 inch when
10-foot straightedge is placed on high points in all
directions.
c. Wall Type W-B:
1) Plumb within 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
2) Depressions in Wall Surface: Maximum 1/8 inch when
10-foot straightedge is placed on high points in all
directions.
d. Thickness: Maximum 1/4 inch minus or 1/2 inch plus from
dimension shown.
e. Form Offset: Between adjacent pieces of formwork, facing
material shall not exceed 1/8 inch.
2. Beams and Columns Tolerances:
a. Exposed Straight Horizontal and Vertical Surfaces: Flat planes
within tolerances specified.
b. Lateral Alignment:
1) Centerlines must be within plus or minus 1/2 inch from
dimensions shown.
2) At intersections, centerlines shall intersect within plus or
minus 1/2 inch of dimensions shown.
c. Beam Type B-A:
1) Physical Dimensions: Maximum 1/4 inch minus or 1/2 inch
plus from dimension shown.
2) Elevations: Within plus or minus 1/2 inch, except where
tops of beams become part of finished slab. In this case refer
to slab tolerances.
d. Column Type C-A:
1) Physical Dimensions: Maximum 1/4 inch minus or 1/2 inch
plus from dimension shown.
2) Plumb within 1/4 inch in 10 feet in all directions with
maximum 1/2 inch out-of-plumb at top with respect to
bottom.
3.03 FORM REMOVAL
A. Nonsupporting forms (sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of
Work) may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F
for 24 hours from time of concrete placement if:
1. Concrete is sufficiently hard so as not to sustain damage by form
removal operations.
2. Curing and protection operations are maintained.

B. Elevated Structural Slabs or Beams: In accordance with ACI 318/318R,
Chapter 6, and at such time as concrete has reached compressive strength
equal to 80 percent of specified 28-day compressive strength as determined by
test cylinders.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 CONCRETE JOINTS
SECTION 03 15 00
CONCRETE JOINTS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
a. A36/A36M, Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
b. A615/A615M, Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
c. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-
Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)
by the Hot-Dip Process.
d. A767/A767M, Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
e. C920, Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
f. D226, Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing.
g. D227, Specification for Coal-Tar Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing.
h. D994, Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete (Bituminous Type).
i. D1056, Specification for Flexible Cellular MaterialsSponge or
Expanded Rubber.
j. D1171, Standard Guide for Evaluating Nonwoven Fabrics.
k. D1751, Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and
Resilient Bituminous Types).
l. D1752, Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork
Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction.
2. Corps of Engineers (COE): CRD-C-572, Corps of Engineers
Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop.
3. NSF International (NSF): 61, Drinking Water System Components -
Health Effects.
A. Acceptance at Site: Verify delivered materials are in accordance with
Specifications and manufacturers product data sheets prior to unloading and
storing onsite.

CONCRETE JOINTS PW/WBG/475883
B. Storage: Store materials under tarps to protect from oil, dirt, and sunlight.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER
A. Bituminous Type: ASTM D994 or ASTM D1751.
2.02 PREFORMED CONTROL JOINT
A. One-Piece, Flexible, Polyvinyl Chloride Joint Former:
1. Manufacturer and Product: Vinylex Corp., Knoxville, TN; Kold-Seal
Zip-Per Strip KSF-150-50-50.
B. One-Piece Steel Strip with Preformed Groove:
1. Manufacturer and Product: Burke Concrete Accessories, Inc., San
Mateo, CA; Keyed Kold Retained Kap.
C. Furnish in full-length, unspliced pieces.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Sealant: Polyurethane as specified in Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants.
B. Nonshrink Grout: As specified in Section 03 62 00, Nonshrink Grouting.
C. Roofing Felt: ASTM D226, Type II, 30-pound asphalt-saturated or equal
weight of ASTM D227 coal-tar saturated felt.
D. Reinforcing Steel: As specified in Section 03 21 00, Reinforcing Steel.
E. Nails: Galvanized, as required for securing premolded joint filler.
F. Masking Tape: As required to temporarily adhere to concrete at each side of
joint to receive filler.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Commence concrete placement after joint preparation is complete.
B. Time Between Concrete Pours: As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-
Place Concrete.

PW/WBG/475883 CONCRETE JOINTS
3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Construction Joints: Prior to placement of abutting concrete, clean contact
surface:
1. Remove laitance and spillage from reinforcing steel and dowels.
2. Roughen surface to minimum of 1/4-inch amplitude:
a. Sandblast after concrete has fully cured.
b. Water blast after concrete has partially cured.
c. Green cut fresh concrete with high pressure water and hand tools.
3. Perform cleaning so as not to damage waterstop, if one is present.
3.03 EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION
A. Bituminous Type Premolded Joint Filler:
1. Drive nails approximately 1 foot 6 inches on center through filler, prior
to installing, to provide anchorage embedment into concrete during
concrete placement.
2. Secure premolded joint filler in forms before concrete is placed.
3. Install in slabs on grade adjacent to concrete walls and columns which
penetrate the slab.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 REINFORCING STEEL
JANUARY 2014 03 21 00 - 1
SECTION 03 21 00
REINFORCING STEEL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
a. 318/318R, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
and Commentary.
b. SP-66, Detailing Manual.
2. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.4/D1.4M, Structural Welding
Code - Reinforcing Steel.
a. A82, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement.
b. A185, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric,
Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
c. A497, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric,
Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement.
d. A615/A615M, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain
e. A706/A706M, Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel
f. A775/A775M, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated
Reinforcing Steel Bars.
4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI):
a. Placing Reinforcing Bars.
b. Manual of Standard Practice.
5. International Code Council (ICC): Evaluation Services Report.
6. Wire Reinforcement Institute (WRI): Manual of Standard Practice,
Welded Wire Fabric.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings prepared in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard
Practice and ACI SP-66 Detailing Manual:
a. Bending lists.
b. Placing drawings.
2. Welded, metallic sleeve splice, and mechanical threaded connection.

REINFORCING STEEL PW/WBG/475883
03 21 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
1. Lab test reports for reinforcing steel showing stress-strain curves and
ultimate strengths.
2. Mechanical Threaded Connections:
a. Current ICC Evaluation Services Report or equivalent code
agency report listing findings to include acceptance, special
inspection requirements, and restrictions.
b. Verification device threads have been tested and meet
requirements for thread quality, in accordance with
manufacturers published methods.
c. Manufacturers instructions.
3. Welding Qualification: Prior to welding, submit welder qualifications
and nondestructive testing procedures in accordance with
Section 05 05 23, Welding.
4. Test results of field testing.
A. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M.
A. Unload, store, and handle bars in accordance with CRSI publication Placing
Reinforcing Bars.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars:
1. Includes stirrups, ties, and spirals.
2. ASTM A615, Grade 60, where welding is not required.
B. Mechanical Splices and Connections:
1. Metal Sleeve Splice:
a. Furnish with cast filler metal, capable of developing, in tension or
compression, 125 percent of minimum tensile strength of bar.
b. Manufacturer and Product: Erico Products, Inc., Cleveland, OH;
Cadweld T-Series.
2. Mechanical Threaded Connections:
a. Furnish metal coupling sleeve with internal threads engaging
threaded ends of bars developing in tension or compression
125 percent of yield strength of bar.

JANUARY 2014 03 21 00 - 3
b. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Erico Products, Inc., Cleveland, OH; Lenton Reinforcing
Steel Couplers.
2) Richmond Screw Anchor Co., Inc., Fort Worth, TX;
Richmond DB-SAE Dowel Bar Splicers.
C. Welded Wire Fabric:
1. ASTM A185 or ASTM A497 and ACI 318/318R, using ASTM A82
wire of 75 ksi minimum tensile strength.
2. Furnish flat sheets only, rolled sheets not permitted.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Tie Wire:
1. Black, soft-annealed 16-gauge wire.
2. Nylon-, epoxy-, or plastic-coated wire.
B. Bar Supports and Spacers:
1. Use precast concrete bar supports or all-plastic bar supports and side
form spacers, unless noted otherwise. Do not use other types of supports
or spacers.
2. Bar supports shall have sufficient strength and stiffness to carry loads
without failure, displacement, or significant deformation. Space bar
supports so minimum concrete cover is maintained for reinforcing
between supports.
3. Use only precast concrete bar supports where concrete surfaces are
exposed to weather, earth, water, chloride intrusion, or corrosive
chemicals. Bar supports shall be nonconductive and have geometry and
bond characteristics that deter movement of moisture from the surface
to the reinforcement.
4. Precast concrete supports shall have same minimum strength and shall
be made from same materials as that of the concrete in which they are to
be embedded. Precast concrete supports shall be cast and properly cured
for at least 7 days before use and shall have a wire or other device cast
into each block for the purpose of attaching them securely to the
reinforcing steel.
5. In Beams, Columns, Walls, and Slabs Exposed to View after Form
Removal: Use small precast concrete blocks made of same color as
concrete in which they are embedded. All-plastic bar supports and side
form spacers may be used, except where surface is exposed as described
above.

03 21 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
6. Design and fabricate special bar supports for top reinforcing bars in
slabs where standard bar supports do not possess necessary geometry,
strength, or stiffness.
7. Plastic Bar Supports: Manufactured by Aztec Concrete Accessories,
Bloomington, CA.
8. Precast Concrete Supports: Total bond precast high performance
concrete bar supports as supplied by Con Sys Inc., Pinawa, MB,
Canada.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Follow CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.
B. Bend bars cold.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Notify Engineer when reinforcing is ready for inspection and allow sufficient
time for inspection prior to placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcing bars of loose mill scale, oil, earth, and other contaminants.
C. Coat wire projecting from precast concrete bar supports with dielectric
material, epoxy, or plastic.
3.02 REINFORCING BAR INSTALLATION
A. Bundle or space bars, instead of field bending where construction access
through reinforcing is necessary.
B. Spacing and Positioning: Conform to ACI 318/318R.
C. Location Tolerances: In accordance with CRSI publication, Placing
Reinforcing Bars.
D. Splicing:
1. Follow ACI 318/318R.
2. Use lap splices, unless otherwise shown or permitted in writing by
Engineer.
3. Welded Splices: Accomplish by full penetration groove welds and
develop a minimum of 125 percent of yield strength of bar.
4. Stagger splices in adjacent bars where indicated.

JANUARY 2014 03 21 00 - 5
E. Mechanical Splices and Connections:
1. Use only in areas specifically approved in writing by Engineer.
2. Install threaded rods as recommended by manufacturer with threads
totally engaged into coupling sleeve and in accordance with ICC
Evaluation Services Report or equivalent code agency report.
3. For metal sleeve splice, follow manufacturers installation
recommendations.
4. Maintain minimum edge distance and concrete cover.
F. Tying Reinforcing Bars:
1. Tie every other intersection on mats made up of Nos. 3, 4, 5, and 6 bars
to hold them firmly at required spacing.
2. Bend tie wire away from concrete surface to provide clearance of 1 inch
from surface of concrete to tie wire.
G. Reinforcement around Openings: On each side and above and below pipe or
opening, place an equivalent area of steel bars to replace steel bars cut for
opening. Extend steel reinforcing a standard lap length beyond opening at
each end.
H. Welding Reinforcement:
1. Only ASTM A706/A706M bars may be welded.
2. Do not perform welding until welder qualifications are approved.
I. Straightening and Rebending: Field bending of reinforcing steel bars is not
permitted.
J. Unless permitted by Engineer, do not cut reinforcing bars in field.
3.03 WELDED WIRE FABRIC INSTALLATION
A. Use only where specifically shown.
B. Extend fabric to within 2 inches of edges of slab, and lap splices at least
1-1/2 courses of fabric or minimum 8 inches.
C. Tie laps and splices securely at ends and at least every 24 inches with tie wire.
D. Place welded wire fabric on concrete blocks and rigidly support equal to that
provided for reinforced bars. Do not use broken concrete, brick, or stone.
E. Follow ACI 318/318R and current Manual of Standard Practice, Welded Wire
Fabric.

03 21 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
F. Do not use fabric that has been rolled. Install flat sheets only.
3.04 TESTS AND INSPECTION
A. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner to visually inspect
and test reinforcing steel welds in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M as
specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding.
B. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner to inspect each
mechanical splice and verify each component is installed in accordance with
manufacturers instructions and ICC Evaluation Services Report or equivalent
code agency report.
C. Special inspection will be provided by Owner as indicated on Drawing S-001.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
JANUARY 2014 03 30 00 - 1
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
a. 211.1, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete.
b. 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete.
c. 302.1R, Guide For Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
d. 304R, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing
Concrete.
e. 305R, Hot Weather Concreting.
f. 306.1, Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.
g. 309R, Guide for Consolidation of Concrete.
a. C31/C31M, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete
Test Specimens in the Field.
b. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
c. C39/C39M, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
d. C88, Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use
of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate.
e. C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
f. C143/C143M, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic
Cement Concrete.
g. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
i. C192/C192M, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete
Test Specimens in the Laboratory.
j. C231, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Pressure Method.
k. C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for
Concrete.
l. C311, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash
or Natural Pozzolans for Use in Portland-Cement Concrete.
m. C452, Standard Test Method for Potential Expansion of Portland-
Cement Mortars Exposed to Sulfate.
n. C494/C494M, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures
for Concrete.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PW/WBG/475883
03 30 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
o. C595, Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements.
p. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or
Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.
q. C1012, Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hydraulic-
Cement Mortars Exposed to a Sulfate Solution.
r. C1218/C1218M, Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble
Chloride in Mortar and Concrete.
s. D4580, Standard Practice for Measuring Delaminations in
Concrete Bridge Decks by Sounding.
t. E1155, Standard Test Method for Determining F
F
Floor Flatness
and F
L
Floor Levelness Numbers.
3. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST): Handbook 44,
Specifications, Tolerances, and Other Technical Requirements for
Weighing and Measuring Devices.
4. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA).
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Architectural Concrete: Concrete that is exposed as an interior or exterior
surface in the completed structure that contributes to visual character of the
completed structure, as indicated on Drawings.
B. Defective Areas: Surface defects that include honeycomb, rock pockets,
indentations greater than 3/16 inch, cracks 0.005 inch wide and larger, as well
as a crack that leaks for liquid containment basins and belowgrade habitable
spaces; cracks 0.010 inch wide and larger in nonfluid holding structures
spalls, chips, air bubbles greater than 3/4 inch in diameter, pinholes, bug
holes, embedded debris, lift lines, sand lines, bleed lines, leakage from form
joints, fins and other projections, form popouts, texture irregularities, and
stains and other color variations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
C. Exposed Concrete: Concrete surfaces that can be seen inside or outside of
structures regardless whether concrete is above water, dry at all times, or can
be seen when structure is drained.
D. New Concrete: Less than 60 days old.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Product Data: Admixtures, bonding agent, bond breaker, and
patching materials.
b. Design Data: Concrete mix designs signed by qualified mix
designer.

JANUARY 2014 03 30 00 - 3
c. Detailed plan for cold weather curing and protection of concrete
placed and cured in weather below 40 degrees F.
d. Detailed plan for hot weather placements including curing and
protection for concrete placed in ambient temperatures over
80 degrees F.
e. Concrete repair methods and materials.
1. Preinstallation Conference minutes.
2. Manufacturers application instructions for bonding agent and bond
breaker.
3. Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance:
a. Portland cement.
b. Admixtures.
c. Fly ash.
d. Aggregates.
e. Bonding agent.
f. Bond breaker.
g. Patching materials.
h. Admixtures: Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation.
a. Mix designer.
b. Batch plant.
5. Test Reports:
a. Admixtures, test reports showing chemical ingredients and
percentage of chloride in each admixture and fly ash.
b. Source test analysis report for fly ash, including percentage of
chloride content.
c. Statement identifying aggregates reactivity. Determine water
soluble chloride in each component of aggregates in accordance
with ASTM C1218/C1218M.
d. For each trial concrete mix design and signed by a qualified mix
designer.
e. Cylinder compressive test results for laboratory concrete mixes.
6. Concrete Delivery Tickets:
a. For each batch of concrete before unloading at Site.
b. Record of drum revolution counter, type, brand, test certification,
Amount of fly ash if used in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M,
Section 16.

03 30 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
A. Qualifications:
1. Mix Designer: Licensed professional engineer registered in the State of
Project or state DOT approved mix designer in the state of Project.
2. Batch Plant: Currently certified by the National Ready Mixed Concrete
Association.
B. Preinstallation Conference:
a. Contractor, including pumping, placing and finishing, and curing
subcontractors.
b. Ready-mix producer.
c. Admixture representative.
d. Testing and sampling personnel.
e. Engineer.
2. Schedule and conduct prior to incorporation of respective products into
Project. Notify Engineer of location and time.
3. Agenda shall include:
a. Admixture types, dosage, performance, and redosing at Site.
b. Mix designs, test of mixes, and Submittals.
c. Placement methods, techniques, equipment, consolidation, and
form pressures.
d. Slump and placement time to maintain slump.
e. Finish, curing, and water retention.
f. Protection procedures for weather conditions.
g. Adhesive dowel and rod installation.
h. Other specified requirements requiring coordination.
4. Conference minutes as specified in Section 01 31 19, Project Meetings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cement: Furnish from one source.
1. Portland Cement Type I or Type II:
a. Meet ASTM C150.
b. Alkalies: Maximum 0.60 percent.
c. Tricalcium Aluminate Content of Type I Cement: Maximum
12 percent.
d. Type II cement or combination of Type I mixed with fly ash.
e. Combine fly ash with cement at batch plant or during production
of cement in accordance with ASTM C595, Type IP cement.

JANUARY 2014 03 30 00 - 5
B. Aggregates: Furnish from one source.
1. Natural Aggregates:
a. Free from deleterious coatings and substances in accordance with
ASTM C33, except as modified herein.
b. Free of materials and aggregate types causing popouts,
discoloration, staining, or other defects on surface of concrete.
2. Nonpotentially Reactive: In accordance with ASTM C33, Appendix XI,
Paragraph X1.1.
3. Aggregate Soundness: Test for fine and coarse aggregates in accordance
with ASTM C33 and ASTM C88 using sodium sulfate solution.
4. Fine Aggregates:
a. Clean, sharp, natural sand.
b. ASTM C33.
c. Materials Passing 200 Sieve: 4 percent maximum.
d. Limit deleterious substances in accordance with ASTM C33,
Table 1 with material finer than 200 sieve limited to 3 percent,
coal and lignite limited to 0.5 percent.
5. Coarse Aggregate:
a. Natural gravels, combination of gravels and crushed gravels,
crushed stone, or combination of these materials containing no
more than 15 percent flat or elongated particles (long dimension
more than five times the short dimension).
b. Materials Passing 200 Sieve: 0.5 percent maximum.
c. Limit deleterious substances in accordance with ASTM C33,
Table 3 for exposed concrete.
C. Admixtures: Furnish from one manufacturer.
1. Characteristics: Compatible with each other and free of chlorides or
other corrosive chemicals.
2. Air-Entraining Admixture:
a. ASTM C260, nontoxic after 30 days and contains no chlorides.
b. Concrete with air-entrainment admixture added shall maintain air
percentage as batched, within plus or minus 2 percent for time
required for placement into structure.
3. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A or Type D.
a. Manufacturers and Products:
1) BASF Admixtures Inc., Shakopee, MN; Pozzolith or
Polyheed.
2) Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Eucon WR-91.
3) W. R. Grace & Co., Cambridge, MA; WRDA with HYCOL.
4. High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer):
a. ASTM C494/C494M.
b. Hold slump of 5 inches or greater for time required for placement.

03 30 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
c. Furnish type as recommended by manufacturer for allowed
temperature ranges.
d. Type F or G.
e. Manufacturers and Products:
1) BASF Admixtures Inc., Shakopee, MN; Rheobuild or
Polyheed at dosage greater than 10 ounces per 100 pounds
of cement.
2) Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Eucon 537.
3) W. R. Grace & Co., Cambridge, MA; Daracem 100.
5. Fly Ash (Pozzolan): Class C or Class F fly ash in accordance with
ASTM C618, except as modified herein:
a. Shall not be produced from process that has utilized hazardous or
potentially hazardous materials.
b. ASTM C618, Table 1, Loss of Ignition: Maximum 3 percent.
c. ASTM C618, Table 2, Water Requirement: Maximum
100 percent of control.
d. ASTM C618, Table 3, Effectiveness in Controlling Alkali-Silica
Reaction: Maximum 100 percent expansion of test mixture as a
percentage of low-alkali cement control at 14 days.
e. ASTM C618, Table 3, Uniformity Requirements: Apply when
loss on ignition of fly ash furnished exceeds 3 percent.
f.
CaO
FE O
Maximum
(%)
(%)
: .
5
15
2 3

6. Fly Ash: Maximum 25 percent, minimum 15 percent, of total weight of
fly ash plus cement.
7. For fly ash not meeting requirements of chemical ratio listed above,
furnish the following:
a. Test fly ash in accordance with ASTM C1012.
b. Furnish test data confirming fly ash in combination with cement
used meets strength requirements, is compatible with air-
entraining agents and other additives, provides increased sulfate
resistance equivalent to or better than Type II cement.
c. Conduct tests using proposed fly ash and cement samples together
with control samples using Type II cement without fly ash.
8. Fly ash used in concrete containing aggregate classified as potentially
reactive for ASR (alkali-silica reactivity) shall be limited to Class F and
shall contain low levels of CaO.
D. Water: Clean and potable containing less than 500 ppm of chlorides.
2.02 ANCILLARY MATERIALS
A. Bonding Agent:
1. Furnish two-component epoxy.

JANUARY 2014 03 30 00 - 7
2. Consult manufacturer for surface finish, pot life, set time, vertical or
horizontal application, and forming restrictions.
a. BASF Building Systems Inc., Shakopee, MN; Concresive.
b. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Euco Epoxy System.
c. Sika Chemical Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; Sikadur 32.
B. Bond Breaker:
1. Nonstaining type, providing positive bond prevention.
a. Burke Co., San Mateo, CA; Burke Clean Lift Bond Breaker or
Burke Tilt Free Bond Breaker.
b. Nox-Crete Products Group, Omaha, NE; Silcoseal Select.
c. Williams Distributors, Inc., Seattle, WA; Williams Tilt-Up
Compound.
C. Repair Material:
1. In accordance with requirements of Section 03 01 32, Repair of Vertical
and Overhead Concrete Surfaces.
2. In accordance with requirements of Section 03 01 33, Repair of
Horizontal Concrete Surfaces.
2.03 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Design: Select and proportion ingredients using trial batches; sample, cure
and test concrete mix through approved independent testing laboratory in
accordance with ACI 211.1.
1. Concrete Compressive Strength, Fc:
a. 4,000 psi at 28 days, unless otherwise shown.
b. Design lab-cured trial mix cylinders.
c. Use additional cement or cement plus fly ash above minimum
specified if required to meet average compressive strength, Fcr.
d. Use Fcr as basis for selection of concrete proportions as set forth
in ACI 301.
e. Fcr: Equal to Fc plus 1,200 when data are not available to
establish standard deviation.
2. Concrete Fill:
a. Design for 2,500 psi at 28 days using 1-inch aggregate, 4-inch
maximum slump and 0.46 maximum water to cementitious
materials ratio.
b. Use water-reducing admixture.

03 30 00 - 8 JANUARY 2014
B. Proportions:
1. Design mix to meet aesthetic and structural concrete requirements.
2. In accordance with ACI 211.1, unless specified otherwise.
3. Unless specifically stated otherwise, water to cementitious materials
ratio shall control amount of total water added to concrete as follows:
Water to Cementitious Materials Ratio
Coarse Aggregate
Size
Maximum W/C
Ratio w/
Superplasticizer
Maximum W/C
Ratio w/o
Superplasticizer
1-1/2" 0.44 0.44
1" 0.44 0.44
3/4" 0.44 0.44
3/8 0.44 0.44
4. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content:
a. 517 pounds per cubic yard for concrete with 1-1/2-inch maximum
size aggregate.
b. 540 pounds per cubic yard for 1-inch maximum size aggregate.
c. 564 pounds per cubic yard for 3/4-inch maximum size aggregate.
d. 588 pounds per cubic yard for 3/8-inch maximum size aggregate.
e. Increase cementitious materials content as required to obtain
strength requirements and water-cement ratio.
C. Admixtures:
1. Air Content:
a. 4 percent to 7 percent when tested in accordance with
ASTM C231.
b. 3 percent maximum for interior slabs where heavy-duty concrete
floor finish is required or for interior slabs with dense polished
machine-trowel surface.
c. Use 4 percent minimum for concrete placed under requirements of
cold weather concreting, unless noted otherwise.
2. Fly Ash: Maximum 25 percent, minimum 15 percent of total weight of
fly ash plus cement.
3. Water Reducers: Use in all concrete.
4. High Range Water Reducers (Superplastizicers): Use at Contractors
option. Control slump and workability to at least 4-1/2-inch slump at
discharge into forms by adjusting high range water reducer at batch
plant.

JANUARY 2014 03 30 00 - 9
D. Slump Range at Site:
1. 4-1/2 inches minimum, 8 inches maximum for concrete with a high
range water reducing admixture.
2. 3 inches minimum and 6 inches maximum for concrete without high
range water reducing admixture.
2.04 CONCRETE MIXING
A. General: In accordance with ACI 304R.
B. Concrete Mix Temperatures: As shown below for various stages of mixing
and placing:
Concrete Temperatures
Concrete Member Size, Minimum Dimension
Ambient Air Temp. <12" 12"-36" 36"-72" >72"
Minimum concrete temperature as mixed for indicated air temperature:
Above 30 deg F 60 deg F 55 deg F 50 deg F 45 deg F
0 to 30 deg F 65 deg F 60 deg F 55 deg F 50 deg F
Below 0 deg F 70 deg F 65 deg F 60 deg F 55 deg F
Maximum allowable gradual temperature drop in first 24 hours after curing
period and after end of protection:
50 deg F 40 deg F 30 deg F 20 deg F
C. Truck Mixers:
1. Equip with electrically actuated counters to readily verify number of
revolutions of drum or blades.
2. Counter:
a. Resettable, recording type, mounted in drivers cab.
b. Actuated at time of starting mixers at mixing speeds.
3. Truck mixer operation shall furnish concrete batch as discharged that is
homogeneous with respect to consistency, mix, and grading.
4. If slump tests taken at approximately 1/4 point and 3/4 point of load
during discharge give slumps differing by more than 2 inches when
specified, slump is more than 4 inches, discontinue use of truck mixer
unless causing condition is corrected and satisfactory performance is
verified by additional slump tests.

03 30 00 - 10 JANUARY 2014
5. Before attempting to reuse unit, check mechanical details of mixer, such
as water measuring, and discharge apparatus, condition of blades, speed
of rotation, general mechanical condition of unit, admixture dispensing
equipment, and clearance of drum.
6. Do not use nonagitating or combination truck and trailer equipment for
transporting ready-mixed concrete.
7. Concrete Volume in Truck:
a. Limit to 63 percent of total volume capacity in accordance with
ASTM C94/C94M when truck mixed.
b. Limit to 80 percent of total volume capacity when central mixed.
8. Mix each batch of concrete in truck mixer for minimum 70 revolutions
of drum or blades at rate of rotation designated by equipment
manufacturer.
9. Perform additional mixing, if required, at speed designated by
equipment manufacturer as agitating speed.
10. Place materials, including mixing water, in mixer drum before actuating
revolution counter for determining number of mixing revolutions.
D. Aggregates: Thoroughly and uniformly wash before use.
E. Admixtures:
1. Air-Entraining Admixture: Add at plant through manufacturer-approved
dispensing equipment.
2. Water Reducers: Add prior to addition of high range water reducing
admixture (superplasticizers).
3. High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizers) and Air-
Entraining Admixtures:
a. Add at concrete plant only through equipment furnished or
approved by admixture manufacturer.
b. Accomplish variations in slump, working time, and air content for
flowable mixes by increasing or reducing high range water
reducing admixture (superplasticizers) dose or air-entraining
admixture dose at ready-mix plant only.
c. Equipment shall provide for easy and quick visual verification of
admixture amount used for each dose.
d. Add discharge amount to each load of concrete into separate
dispensing container, verify amount is correct, and add to
concrete.
e. Additional dosage of high range water reducing admixture
(superplasticizers) may be added in field using manufacturer-
approved dispensing when unexpected delays cause too great of
slump loss.

JANUARY 2014 03 30 00 - 11
A. Cement: Test for total chloride content.
B. Fly Ash: Test in accordance with ASTM C311.
C. Batch Plant Inspection: Engineer shall have access to and have right to inspect
batch plants, cement mills, and supply facilities of suppliers, manufacturers,
and Subcontractors, providing products included in these Specifications.
1. Weighing Scales: Tested and certified within tolerances set forth in the
NIST Handbook No. 44.
2. Batch Plant Equipment: Either semiautomatic or fully automatic in
accordance with ASTM C94/C94M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Preparation: Meet requirements and recommendations of ACI 304R and
ACI 301, except as modified herein.
B. Inspection: Notify Engineer at least 1 full working day in advance before
starting to place concrete.
C. Discharge Time:
1. As determined by set time, do not exceed 1-1/2 hours after adding
cement to water unless special approved time delay admixtures are
used. Coordinate time delay admixture information with manufacturer
and Engineer prior to placing concrete.
2. Adjust slump or air content at Site by adding admixtures for particular
load when approved by Engineer. Then, adjust plant dosage for
remainder of placement. Additional dosage at Site shall be through
approved dispenser supplied by admixture manufacturer.
3. Maintain required slump throughout time of concrete placement and
consolidation. Discontinue use of high range water reducing admixture
(superplasticizers) and provide new mix design if it fails to maintain
slump between 4 inches to 8 inches and produce good consolidation for
length of time required. Redesign mix adjusting set control admixtures
to maintain setting time in range required.
D. Placement into Formwork:
1. Before depositing concrete, remove debris from space to be occupied by
concrete.

03 30 00 - 12 JANUARY 2014
2. Prior to placement of concrete, dampen fill under slabs on ground,
dampen sand where vapor retarder is specified, and dampen wood
forms.
3. Reinforcement: Secure in position before placing concrete.
4. Place concrete as soon as possible after leaving mixer, without
segregation or loss of ingredients, without splashing forms or steel
above, and in layers not over 1.5 feet deep, except for slabs which shall
be placed full depth. Place and consolidate successive layers prior to
initial set of first layer to prevent cold joints.
5. Use placement devices, for example, chutes, pouring spouts, and pumps.
6. Vertical Free Fall Drop to Final Placement: 5 feet in forms 8 inches or
less wide and 8 feet in forms wider than 8 inches, except as specified.
a. For placements where drops are greater than specified, use
placement device such that free fall below placement device
conforms to required value.
b. Limit free fall to prevent segregation caused by aggregates hitting
reinforcing steel.
7. Do not use aluminum conveying devices.
8. Provide sufficient illumination in the interior of forms so concrete
deposition is visible, permitting confirmation of consolidation quality.
9. Joints in Footings and Slabs:
a. Ensure space beneath plastic water stop completely fills with
concrete.
b. During concrete placement, make visual inspection of entire water
stop area.
c. Limit concrete placement to elevation of waterstop in first pass,
vibrate concrete under waterstop, lift waterstop to confirm full
consolidation without voids, place remaining concrete to full
height of slab.
d. Apply procedure to full length of waterstops.
10. If reinforcement is in direct sunlight or is more than 20 degrees F higher
in temperature than concrete temperature before placement, wet
reinforcement with water fog spray before placing concrete to cool
reinforcement.
11. Trowel and round off top exposed edges of walls with 1/4-inch radius
steel edging tool.
E. Conveyor Belts and Chutes:
1. Design and arrange ends of chutes, hopper gates, and other points of
concrete discharge throughout conveying, hoisting, and placing system
for concrete to pass without becoming segregated.
2. Do not use chutes longer than 50 feet.
3. Minimum Slopes of Chutes: Angled to allow concrete to readily flow
without segregation.

JANUARY 2014 03 30 00 - 13
4. Conveyor Belts:
a. Approved by Engineer.
b. Wipe clean with device that does not allow mortar to adhere to belt.
c. Cover conveyor belts and chutes.
F. Retempering: Not permitted for concrete where cement has partially hydrated.
G. Pumping of Concrete:
1. Provide standby pump, conveyor system, crane and concrete bucket, or
other system onsite during pumping, for adequate redundancy to assure
completion of concrete placement without cold joints in case of primary
placing equipment breakdown.
2. Minimum Pump Hose (Conduit) Diameter: 4 inches.
3. Replace pumping equipment and hoses (conduits) that are not
functioning properly.
H. Maximum Size of Concrete Placements:
1. Limit size of each placement to allow for strength gain and volume
change as a result of shrinkage.
2. Joints:
a. Locate expansion, control, contraction, and construction joints
where shown.
b. When expansion or control joints are not shown, provide
construction joints at maximum spacing of 40 feet.
c. When expansion or control joint spacing exceeds 60 feet, provide
intermediate construction joints at maximum spacing of 40 feet.
d. Uniformly space construction joints.
e. Vertical construction joint shall not be greater than 20 feet from
wall corners or intersections.
3. Consider beams, girders, brackets, column capitals, and haunches as
part of floor or roof system and place monolithically with floor or roof
system.
I. Removal of Water: Unless tremie method for placing concrete is specified,
remove water from space to be occupied by concrete.
J. Consolidation and Visual Observation:
1. Consolidate concrete with internal vibrators with minimum frequency of
8,000 cycles per minute and amplitude as required to consolidate
concrete in section being placed.
2. Provide at least one standby vibrator in operable condition at placement
Site prior to placing concrete.
3. Consolidation Equipment and Methods: ACI 309R.

03 30 00 - 14 JANUARY 2014
4. Provide sufficient windows in forms or limit form height to allow for
concrete placement through windows and for visual observation of
concrete.
5. Vibration consolidation shall not exceed distance of 3 feet from point of
placement.
6. Vibrate concrete in vicinity of joints to obtain impervious concrete.
K. Hot Weather:
1. Prepare ingredients, mix, place, cure, and protect in accordance with
ACI 305R.
2. Placement frequency shall be such that lift lines will not be visible in
exposed or architectural concrete finishes.
3. Maintain concrete temperature below 85 degrees F at time of placement,
or furnish test data or provide other proof that admixtures and mix
ingredients do not produce flash set plastic shrinkage, or cracking as a
result of heat of hydration. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain
fresh concrete temperatures as specified or less.
4. Provide for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ice, wet
cover, or other means as necessary to maintain concrete at or below
specified temperature.
5. Prevent differential temperature between reinforcing steel and concrete.
6. Evaporation Retardant: As specified in Section 03 39 00, Concrete
Curing.
L. Cold Weather Placement:
1. Do not place concrete when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F
or approaching 40 degrees F and falling, without special protection as
specified or approved by Engineer.
2. Do not place concrete against frozen earth or ice, or against forms and
reinforcement with frost or ice present.
3. Provide heated enclosures when air temperatures are below
40 degrees F.
4. Maintain surface temperature of concrete above 40 degrees F and cure
concrete as specified in Section 03 39 00, Concrete Curing, for
minimum of 7 days.
5. Provide maximum and minimum thermometers placed on concrete
surfaces spaced throughout Work to allow monitoring of concrete
surface temperatures representative of Work.
6. In accordance with ACI 306.1 and ACI 301.
7. External Heating Units:
a. Vent heating units to atmosphere and do not locally heat or dry
concrete. Where water cure is specified, maintain wet condition.
b. Do not exhaust heater flue gases (causes concrete carbonation as a
result of concentrated carbon dioxide) directly into enclosed area.

JANUARY 2014 03 30 00 - 15
8. Maintain curing conditions as specified in Section 03 39 00, Concrete
Curing.
3.02 CONCRETE BONDING
A. To Existing Concrete:
1. Thoroughly clean and mechanically roughen existing concrete surfaces
to roughness profile of 1/4 inch.
2. Saturate surface with water for 24 hours prior to placing new concrete.
3.03 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. As specified in Section 03 10 00, Concrete Forming and Accessories.
3.04 REPAIRING CONCRETE
A. Repair of Defective New Work:
1. Repair concrete surfaces of elements placed in this Project that are
defective.
2. Repair defective vertical and overhead concrete surfaces in accordance
with Section 03 01 32, Repair of Vertical and Overhead Concrete
Surfaces.
3. Develop repair techniques with material manufacturer on mockup
panels prior to starting actual repair work and show how finish color
will blend with adjacent surfaces. Obtain approval from Engineer.
4. Obtain quantities of repair material and manufacturers detailed
instructions for use to provide repair with finish to match adjacent
surface or apply sufficient repair material adjacent to repair to blend
finish appearance.
5. Repair of concrete shall provide structurally sound surface finish,
uniform in appearance or upgrade finish by other means until acceptable
to Engineer.
B. Rehabilitation Repair:
1. Repair existing deteriorated concrete areas indicated on Drawings.
2. Repair horizontal concrete surfaces in accordance with
Section 03 01 33, Repair of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces.
3. Repair vertical and overhead concrete surfaces in accordance with
Section 03 01 32, Repair of Vertical and Overhead Concrete Surfaces.
4. Repair existing cracks with epoxy injections in accordance with
Section 03 64 23, Crack Repair Epoxy Injection Grouting.

03 30 00 - 16 JANUARY 2014
C. Tie Holes:
1. Fill with nonshrink grout as specified in Section 03 62 00, Nonshrink
Grouting.
2. Match color of adjacent concrete and demonstrate on mockup panels
first.
3. Compact grout using steel hammer and steel tool to drive grout to high
density. Cure grout with water.
D. Exposed Metal Objects:
1. Metal objects not intended to be exposed in as-built condition of
structure including wire, nails, and bolts, shall be removed by chipping
back concrete to depth of 1/2 inch and then cutting or removing metal
object.
2. Repair area of chipped-out concrete.
3.05 CONCRETE WALL FINISHES
A. Type W-1 (Ordinary Wall Finish):
1. Patch tie holes.
2. Knock off projections.
3. Patch defective areas.
B. Type W-2 (Smooth Wall Finish):
1. Patch tie holes.
2. Grind off projections, fins, and rough spots.
3. Patch defective areas and repair rough spots resulting from form release
agent failure or other reasons to provide smooth uniform appearance.
C. Type W-5 (Finish for Painting):
1. Patch tie holes.
2. Grind off projections, fins, and rough spots.
3. Patch and repair defective areas as specified for Type W-2.
4. Leave surface ready for painting as specified in Section 09 90 05,
Architectural Painting.
3.06 CONCRETE SLAB FINISHES
A. General:
1. Finish slab concrete per the requirements of ACI 302.1R.
2. Use manual screeds, vibrating screeds, or roller compacting screeds to
place concrete level and smooth.

JANUARY 2014 03 30 00 - 17
3. Do not use jitterbugs or other special tools designed for purpose of
forcing coarse aggregate away from surface and allowing layer of
mortar, which will be weak and cause surface cracks or delamination, to
accumulate.
4. Do not dust surfaces with dry materials.
5. Use evaporation retardant.
6. Round off edges of slabs with steel edging tool, except where cove
finish is shown. Steel edging tool radius shall be 1/4 inch for slabs
subject to wheeled traffic.
B. Type S-1 (Steel Troweled Finish):
1. Finish by screeding and floating with straightedges to bring surfaces to
required finish elevation. Use evaporation retardant.
2. While concrete is still green, but sufficiently hardened to bear a persons
weight without deep imprint, wood float to true, even plane with no
coarse aggregate visible.
3. Use sufficient pressure on wood floats to bring moisture to surface.
4. After surface moisture has disappeared, hand trowel concrete to produce
smooth, impervious surface, free from trowel marks.
5. Burnish surface with an additional troweling. Final troweling shall
produce ringing sound from trowel.
6. Do not use dry cement or additional water during troweling, nor will
excessive troweling be permitted.
7. Power Finishing:
a. Approved power machine may be used in lieu of hand finishing in
accordance with directions of machine manufacturer.
b. Do not use power machine when concrete has not attained
necessary set to allow finishing without introducing high and low
spots in slab.
c. Do first steel troweling for slab S-1 finish by hand.
C. Type S-2 (Wood Float Finish):
1. Finish slab to receive fill and mortar setting bed by screeding with
straightedges to bring surface to required finish plane.
2. Wood float finish to compact and seal surface.
3. Remove laitance and leave surface clean.
4. Coordinate with other finish procedures.
D. Type S-3 (Underside Elevated Slab Finish): When forming is removed, grind
off projections on underside of slab and patch defective areas:
1. Prepare surfaces for painting as specified in Section 09 90 05,
Architectural Painting.

03 30 00 - 18 JANUARY 2014
E. Type S-5 (Broomed Finish):
1. Finish as specified for Type S-1 floor finish, except omit final troweling
and finish surface by drawing fine-hair broom lightly across surface.
2. Broom in same direction and parallel to expansion joints, or, in the case
of inclined slabs, perpendicular to slope, except for round roof slab,
broom surface in radial direction.
F. Type S-6 (Sidewalk Finish):
1. Slope walks down 1/4 inch per foot away from structures, unless
otherwise shown.
2. Strike off surface by means of strike board and float with wood or cork
float to true plane, then flat steel trowel before brooming.
3. Broom surface at right angles to direction of traffic or as shown.
4. Lay out sidewalk surfaces in blocks, as shown or as directed by
Engineer, with grooving tool.
G. Concrete Curbs:
1. Float top surface of curb smooth, and finish all discontinuous edges
with steel edger.
2. After concrete has taken its initial set, remove front form and give
exposed vertical surface an ordinary wall finish, Type W-1.
3.07 CONCRETE SLAB TOLERANCES
A. Slab Tolerances:
1. Exposed Slab Surfaces: Comprise of flat planes as required within
tolerances specified.
2. Slab Finish Tolerances and Slope Tolerances: Crowns on floor surface
not too high as to prevent 10-foot straightedge from resting on end
blocks, nor low spots that allow block of twice the tolerance in
thickness to pass under supported 10-foot straightedge.
3. Slab Type S-A: Steel gauge block 5/16 inch thick.
4. Slab Type S-B: Steel gauge block 1/8 inch thick.
5. Slab Type S-A and S-B: Finish Slab Elevation: Slope slabs to floor
drain and gutter, and shall adequately drain regardless of tolerances.
6. Thickness: Maximum 1/4 inch minus or 1/2 inch plus from thickness
shown. Where thickness tolerance will not affect slope, drainage, or slab
elevation, thickness tolerance may exceed 1/2 inch plus.
B. Thickness: Maximum 1/4 inch minus or 1/2 inch plus from thickness shown.
Where thickness tolerance will not affect slope, drainage, or slab elevation,
thickness tolerance may exceed 1/2 inch plus.

JANUARY 2014 03 30 00 - 19
3.08 BEAM AND COLUMN FINISHES
A. Type B-1: Match wall Type W-1.
B. Type B-2: Match wall Type W-2.
C. Type B-5:
1. Repair rock pockets.
2. Fill air voids.
3. Match wall Type W-5.
D. Type C-1: Match wall Type W-1.
E. Type C-2: Match wall Type W-2.
F. Type C-5:
1. Fill air pockets.
2. Match wall Type W-5.
A. General:
1. Provide adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of
concrete test cylinders onsite for first 24 hours, and for additional time
as may be required before transporting to test lab.
2. Provide concrete for testing of slump, air content, and for making
cylinders from the point of discharge into forms. When concrete is
pumped, Samples used shall be taken from discharge end of pump hose.
3. Evaluation will be in accordance with ACI 301 and Specifications.
4. Specimens shall be made, cured, and tested in accordance with
ASTM C31/C31M and ASTM C39/C39M.
5. Frequency of testing may be changed at discretion of Engineer.
6. Pumped Concrete: Take concrete samples for slump
(ASTM C143/C143M) and test cylinders (ASTM C31/C31M and
ASTM C39/C39M) and shrinkage specimens (ASTM C157/C157M) at
placement (discharge) end of line.
7. Reject concrete represented by cylinders failing to meet strength and air
content specified.
B. High Range Water Reducer (Superplasticizer) Admixture Segregation Test:
Test each truck prior to use on job.
1. Segregation Test Objective: Concrete with 4-inch to 8-inch slump must
stay together when slumped. Segregation is assumed to cause mortar to

03 30 00 - 20 JANUARY 2014
flow out of mix even though aggregate may stay piled enough to meet
slump test.
2. Test Procedure: Make slump test and check for excessive slump and
observe to see if mortar or moisture flows from slumped concrete.
3. Reject concrete if mortar or moisture separates and flows out of mix.
C. Cold Weather Placement Tests:
1. During cold weather concreting, cast cylinders for field curing as
follows. Use method that will produce greater number of specimens:
a. Six extra test cylinders from last 100 cubic yards of concrete.
b. Minimum three specimens for each 2 hours of placing time or for
each 100 cubic yards.
2. These specimens shall be in addition to those cast for lab testing.
3. Protect test cylinders from weather until they can be placed under same
protection provided for concrete of structure that they represent.
4. Keep field test cylinders in same protective environment as parts of
structure they represent to determine if specified strength has been
obtained.
5. Test cylinders in accordance with applicable sections of
ASTM C31/C31M and ASTM C39/C39M.
6. Use test results to determine specified strength gain prior to falsework
removal or for prestressing.
D. Tolerances:
1. Walls: Measure and inspect walls for compliance with tolerances
specified in Section 03 10 00, Concrete Forming and Accessories.
2. Slab Finish Tolerances and Slope Tolerances:
a. Floor flatness measurements shall be made day after floor is
finished and before shoring is removed to eliminate effects of
shrinkage, curing, and deflection.
b. Support 10-foot-long straightedge at each end with steel gauge
blocks of thicknesses equal to specified tolerance.
c. Compliance with designated limits in four of five consecutive
measurements is satisfactory, unless defective conditions are
observed.

JANUARY 2014 03 30 00 - 21
A. Provide the following representative at Site in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services, for installation assistance,
inspection, and certification of proper installation for concrete ingredients,
mix design, mixing, and placement.
1. Batch Plant Representative:
a. Observe how concrete mixes are performing.
b. Be present during first placement of each type of concrete mix.
c. Assist with concrete mix design, performance, placement, weather
problems, and problems as may occur with concrete mix
throughout Project.
d. Establish control limits on concrete mix designs.
2. Admixture Manufacturers Representative:
a. Demonstrate special features, product performance, product
mixing, testing, and placement or installation for each type of
admixture.
b. Observe how concrete mixes are performing.
c. Be present during first placement of each type of concrete mix.
d. Assist with concrete mix design, performance, placement, weather
problems, and problems as may occur with concrete mix
throughout Project, including instructions for redosing.
e. Provide equipment for control of concrete redosing for air
entrainment or high range water reducing admixture
(superplasticizers) at Site to maintain proper slump and air content
if so needed.
3. Bonding Agent Manufacturers Representative: Demonstrate product
performance, product mixing, and placement.
3.11 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. After curing as specified in Section 03 39 00, Concrete Curing, and after
applying final floor finish, cover slabs with plywood or particle board or
plastic sheeting or other material to keep floor clean and protect it from
material and damage as a result of other construction work.
B. Repair defective areas and areas damaged by construction.
3.12 SCHEDULE OF CONCRETE FINISHES
A. Form Tolerances: As specified in Section 03 10 00, Concrete Forming and
Accessories.

03 30 00 - 22 JANUARY 2014
B. Provide concrete finishes as scheduled:
Area
Type of
Finish
Required
Form
Tolerances
Exterior Wall Surfaces
Abovegrade/exposed (above a point 6" below
finish grade)
W-5 W-B
Backfilled/not waterproofed (below a point 6"
below final grade)
W-1 W-A
Walls to receive cementitious coatings W-5 W-B
Interior Wall Surfaces
Dry areas/not painted or coated W-2 W-A
Dry areas/painted or coated W-5 W-A
Exterior Slabs
Roof slab/exposed S-5 S-B
Roof slab/covered with roofing material S-1 S-A
Stairs and landings S-5 S-B
Sidewalks S-6 S-B
Other exterior slabs S-1 S-A
Interior Slabs
Building dry areas S-1 S-B
Slabs to receive mortar setting bed for tile S-2 S-A
Slabs to receive resilient flooring or carpet S-1 S-A
Underside of elevated slabs S-3 S-A
Building basement slabs S-5 S-B
Beams and Columns
Beams/coated B-5 B-A
Beams/not coated B-2 B-A
Columns/coated C-5 C-A
Columns/not coated C-2 C-A
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 CONCRETE CURING
JANUARY 2014 03 39 00 - 1
SECTION 03 39 00
CONCRETE CURING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
a. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming
Compounds for Curing concrete.
b. C1315, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming
Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing
Concrete.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturers data for the following products:
a. Evaporation retardant.
b. Curing compound.
c. Clear sealer.
2. Curing methods proposed.
1. Curing Compound: Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance showing
moisture retention requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Curing Compound:
1. Water-based, high solids content nonyellowing curing compound
meeting requirements of ASTM C309 and ASTM C1315.
a. Moisture Loss: 0.40 kg/square m/72 hours maximum.
b. Capable of meeting moisture retention at manufacturers specified
application rate.
a. Chemrex, Inc., Shakopee, MN; Masterkure.
b. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Super Diamond
Clear VOX.

CONCRETE CURING PW/WBG/475883
03 39 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
c. WR Meadows, Inc., Hampshire, IL; VOCOMP-30.
d. Vexcon Chemical, Inc.; Philadelphia, PA; Starseal 1315.
e. Dayton Superior; Safe Cure and Seal 30%.
B. Evaporation Retardant:
1. Optional: Fluorescent color tint that disappears completely upon drying.
a. Master Builders Co., Cleveland, OH; Confilm.
b. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Eucobar.
C. Clear Sealer (One-Component Penetrating Silane Sealer):
a. Chemrex, Inc., Shakopee, MN; Masterseal SL.
b. Euclid Chemical Co.; Eucoguard 200.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CURING OF CONCRETE
A. Use one of the following methods as approved by Engineer:
1. Walls:
a. General: Where walls are to receive coatings, painting,
cementitious material, or other similar finishes, use only water
curing procedures.
b. Method 1: Leave concrete forms in place and keep entire surfaces
of forms and concrete wet for 7 days.
c. Method 2: Apply curing compound, where allowed, immediately
after removal of forms.
d. Method 3: Continuously sprinkle with water 100 percent of
exposed surfaces for 7 days starting immediately after removal of
forms.
2. Slabs and Curbs:
a. Method 1: Protect surface by water ponding for 7 days.
b. Method 2: Cover with burlap or cotton mats and keep
continuously wet for 7 days.
c. Method 3: Cover with 1-inch layer of wet sand, earth, or sawdust,
and keep continuously wet for 7 days.
d. Method 4: Continuously sprinkle exposed surface for 7 days.
e. Other agreed upon method that will keep moisture present and
uniform at all times on surface of slabs. Do not use curing
compounds.

PW/WBG/475883 CONCRETE CURING
JANUARY 2014 03 39 00 - 3
f. Where water curing for slabs during cold weather is not possible,
use Engineer-approved curing compound at manufacturers
recommended coverage per gallon.
g. Where curing compound cannot be used, special methods using
moisture shall be agreed upon prior to placing the concrete slabs.
h. Protect slabs during cold weather with plastic sheets or other
material inside required heated enclosure if foot traffic is
permitted on slabs.
B. Use only water curing where additional finishes such as clear sealer,
hardeners, painting, parking deck coating system, and other special coatings
are required.
3.02 EVAPORATION RETARDANT APPLICATION
A. Spray onto surface of fresh flatwork concrete immediately after screeding to
react with surface moisture.
B. Reapply as needed to ensure a continuous moist surface until final finishing is
completed.
3.03 CLEAR SEALER APPLICATION
A. Apply to slabs on grade.
B. Before application, water cure concrete walls and floors to receive sealer for a
minimum of 28 days, keep clean, unpainted, free from membrane curing
compounds, with Work above them completed.
C. Apply with stiff brush, short nap roller, squeegee, garden sprayer, or
conventional paint spray equipment.
D. Apply at a coverage rate of 125 to 200 square feet per gallon and cure the
sealer on slabs for the following minimum cure time at the ambient
temperatures shown prior to allowing foot traffic:
1. 90 degrees F: 2 hours.
A. Provide manufacturers representative at Site in accordance with
inspection, and certification of proper installation for products specified.

CONCRETE CURING PW/WBG/475883
03 39 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
B. Provide clear sealer manufacturers representative to demonstrate proper
application of product.
C. Provide curing compound manufacturers representative to demonstrate
proper application of curing compound to show coverage in one coat.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 NONSHRINK GROUTING
JANUARY 2014 03 62 00 - 1
SECTION 03 62 00
NONSHRINK GROUTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
a. C230, Standard Specification for Flow Table for Use in Tests of
Hydraulic Cement.
b. C621, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-
Cement Grout (Nonshrinkable).
c. C939, Standard Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-
Aggregate Concrete (Flow Cone Method).
d. C1107/C1107M, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry,
Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink).
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Product data of grouts.
2. Proposed method for keeping existing concrete surfaces wet prior to
placing grout.
3. Forming method for fluid grout placements.
4. Curing method for grout.
1. Manufacturers Written Instructions:
a. Adding fiber reinforcing to batching.
b. Cement-water ratio of grout topping.
c. Mixing of grout.
2. Manufacturers proposed training schedule for grout work.
3. Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance:
a. Grout free from chlorides and other corrosion-causing chemicals.
b. Nonshrink grout properties of Category II, verifying expansion at
3 days or 14 days will not exceed the 28-day expansion and
nonshrink properties are not based on gas or gypsum expansion.
4. Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation.
5. Statements of Qualification: Nonshrink grout manufacturers
representative.

NONSHRINK GROUTING PW/WBG/475883
03 62 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
6. Test Reports:
a. Test report for 24-hour evaluation of nonshrink grout.
b. Test results and service report from demonstration and training
session.
c. Field test reports and laboratory test results for field-drawn
Samples.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Nonshrink Grout Manufacturers Representative: Authorized and trained
representative of grout manufacturer. Minimum of 1-year experience that has
resulted in successful installation of grouts similar to those for this Project.
B. For grout suppliers not listed herein, provide completed 24-hour Evaluation of
Nonshrink Grout Test Form, attached at the end of this Section. Independent
testing laboratory to certify that testing was conducted within last 18 months.
1.04 GUARANTEE
A. Manufacturers guarantee shall not contain disclaimer on the product data
sheet, grout bag, or container limiting responsibility to only the purchase price
of products and materials furnished.
B. Manufacturer guarantees participation with Contractor in replacing or
repairing grout found defective as a result of faulty materials, as determined
by industry standard test methods.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NONSHRINK GROUT SCHEDULE
A. Furnish nonshrink grout for applications in grout category in the following
schedule:
Application
Temperature
Range Max. Placing Time
40 deg F to
100 deg F 20 Min.
Greater Than
20 Min.
Filling tie holes I I I
Through-bolt openings II II II
Grouting hollow core cells II II II
Grouting around floor
drains
II II II

JANUARY 2014 03 62 00 - 3
2.02 NONSHRINK GROUT
A. Category I:
1. Nonmetallic and nongas-liberating.
2. Prepackaged natural aggregate grout requiring only the addition of
water.
3. Test in accordance with ASTM C1107/C1107M:
a. Grout shall have flowable consistency.
b. Flowable for 15 minutes.
4. Grout shall not bleed at maximum allowed water.
5. Minimum strength of flowable grout, 3,000 psi at 3 days, 5,000 psi at
7 days, and 7,000 psi at 28 days.
a. BASF Building Systems, Inc., Shakopee, MN; Construction
Grout.
b. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; NS Grout.
c. Dayton Superior Corp., Kansas City, KS; 1107 Advantage Grout.
d. US MIX Co., Denver, CO; US Spec MP Grout.
e. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE; Duragrout.
B. Category II:
1. Nonmetallic, nongas-liberating.
2. Prepackaged natural aggregate grout requiring only the addition of
water.
3. Aggregate shall show no segregation or settlement at fluid consistency
at specified times or temperatures.
4. Test in accordance with ASTM C1107/C1107M:
a. Fluid consistency 20 seconds to 30 seconds in accordance with
ASTM C939.
b. Temperatures of 40 degrees F, 80 degrees F, and 100 degrees F.
5. 1 hour after mixing, pass fluid grout through flow cone with continuous
flow.
6. Minimum strength of fluid grout, 3,500 psi at 1 day, 4,500 psi at 3 days,
and 7,500 psi at 28 days.
7. Maintain fluid consistency when mixed in 1 to 9 yard loads in ready-
mix truck.
a. BASF Building Systems, Inc., Shakopee, MN; Master Flow 928.
b. Five Star Products Inc., Fairfield, CT; Five Star Fluid Grout 100.
c. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Hi Flow Grout.
d. Dayton Superior Corp., Kansas City, KS; Sure Grip High
Performance Grout.
e. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE; Crystex.

03 62 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 NONSHRINK GROUT
A. General: Mix, place, and cure nonshrink grout in accordance with grout
manufacturers representatives training instructions.
B. Form Tie or Through-Bolt Holes: Provide nonshrink grout, Category I and
Category II, fill space with dry pack dense grout hammered in with steel tool
and hammer. Through-bolt holes; coordinate dry pack dense grout application
with vinyl plug in Section 03 10 00, Concrete Forming and Accessories, and
bonding agent in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
A. Evaluation and Acceptance of Nonshrink Grout:
1. Provide a flow cone and cube molds with restraining plates onsite.
Continue tests during Project as demonstrated by grout manufacturers
representative.
2. Perform flow cone and bleed tests, and make three 2-inch by 2-inch
cubes for each 25 cubic feet of each type of nonshrink grout used. Use
restraining caps for cube molds in accordance with
ASTM C1107/C1107M.
3. For large grout applications make three additional cubes and one more
flow cone test. Include bleed test for each additional 25 cubic feet of
nonshrink grout placed.
4. Consistency: As specified in Article Nonshrink Grout. Grout with
consistencies outside range requirements shall be rejected.
5. Segregation: As specified in Article Nonshrink Grout. Grout when
aggregate separates shall be rejected.
6. Nonshrink grout cubes shall test equal to or greater than minimum
strength specified.
7. Strength Test Failures: Nonshrink grout work failing strength tests shall
be removed and replaced.
8. Perform bleeding test to demonstrate grout will not bleed.
9. Store cubes at 70 degrees F.
10. Independent testing laboratory shall prepare, store, cure, and test cubes
in accordance with ASTM C1107/C1107M.
A. General:
1. Coordinate demonstrations, training sessions, and applicable Site visits
with grout manufacturers representative.

JANUARY 2014 03 62 00 - 5
2. Provide and conduct onsite, demonstration and training sessions for
bleed tests, mixing, flow cone measurement, cube testing, application,
and curing for each category and type of nonshrink grout.
3. Necessary equipment and materials shall be available for demonstration.
B. Training:
1. Training is required for all Type II grout installations.
2. Grout manufacturers representative shall train Contractor to perform
grout work.
3. Establish location at Site and schedule time for grout manufacturers
demonstration and training session of proposed nonshrink grouts. Mix
nonshrink grouts to required consistency, test, place, and cure on actual
Project, such as, baseplates and tie holes to provide actual on-the-job
training.
4. Use minimum of five bags for each grout Category II. Mix grout to fluid
consistency and conduct flow cone and two bleed tests, make a
minimum of six cubes for testing of two cubes at 1 day, 3 days, and
28 days. Use remaining grout for final Work.
5. Training shall include methods for curing grout.
6. Mix and demonstrate grouting hollow core cells.
7. Transport test cubes to independent test laboratory and obtain test
reports.
3.04 SUPPLEMENT
Specification:
1. 24-Hour Evaluation of Nonshrink Grout Test Form and Grout Testing
Procedures.
END OF SECTION

SUPPLEMENT 1

(Test Lab Name)

(Address)

(Phone No.)
24-HOUR EVALUATION OF NONSHRINK GROUT TEST FORM
OBJECTIVE: Define standard set of test procedures for an independent testing
laboratory to perform and complete within a 24-hour period.
SCOPE: Utilize test procedures providing 24-hour results to duplicate field
grouting demands. Intent of evaluation is to establish grout
manufacturers qualifications.
PRIOR TO TEST: Obtain five bags of each type of grout.
1. From intended grout supplier for Project.
2. Five bags of grout shall be of same lot number.
ANSWER THE FOLLOWING QUESTIONS FOR GROUT BEING TESTED FROM
LITERATURE, DATA, AND PRINTING ON BAG:
A. Product data and warranty information contained in company
literature and data? Yes_____ No_____
B. Literature and bag information meet specified requirements? Yes_____ No_____
C. Manufacturer guarantees grout as specified in
Article Guarantee? Yes_____ No_____
D. Guarantee extends beyond grout replacement value and
allows participation with Contractor in
replacing and repairing defective areas? Yes_____ No_____
E. Water demands and limits printed on bag? Yes_____ No_____
F. Mixing information printed on the bag? Yes_____ No_____
G. Temperature restrictions printed on bag? Yes_____ No_____
*Rejection of a grout will occur if one or more answers are noted NO.

03 62 00 SUPPLEMENT - 2 JANUARY 2014
GROUT TESTING PROCEDURES
A. Bagged Material:
1. List lot numbers.
2. List expiration date.
3. Weigh bags and record weight.
Owners Representative will disqualify grout if bag weights have misstated measure
plus or minus 2 pounds by more than one out of five bags. (Accuracy of weights is
required to regulate amount of water used in mixing since this will affect properties.)
B. Mixing and Consistency Determination:
1. Mix full bag of grout in 10 gallon pail.
2. Use electric drill with a paddle device to mix grout (jiffy or jiffler type paddle).
3. Use maximum water allowed per water requirements listed in bag instructions.
4. Mix grout to maximum time listed on bag instructions.
5. In accordance with ASTM C939 (flow cone) determine time of mixed grout
through the flow cone. __________ seconds
6. Add water to attain 20 to 30 second flow in accordance with ASTM C939.
7. Record time of grout through cone at new water demand. _______ seconds
8. Record total water needed to attain 20 to 30 second flow. _______ pounds
9. Record percent of water. __________ percent
C. When fluid grout is specified and additional water is required beyond grout
manufacturers listed maximum water, ASTM C1107/C1107M will be run at new
water per grout ratio to determine whether grout passes using actual water
requirements to be fluid. Use new water per grout ratio on remaining tests.
D. Bleed Test:
1. Fill two gallon cans half full of freshly mixed grout at ambient temperatures for
each category and at required consistency for each.
2. Place one can of grout in tub of ice water and leave one can at ambient
temperature.
3. Cover top of both cans with glass or plastic plate preventing evaporation.
4. Maintain 38 degrees F to 42 degrees F temperature with grout placed in ice and
maintain ambient temperature for second container for 1 hour.
5. Visually check for bleeding of water at 15-minute intervals for 2 hours.

6. Perform final observation at 24 hours.
If grout bleeds a small amount at temperatures specified, grout will be rejected.
E. Extended Flow Time and Segregation Test (for Category II and Category III):
1. Divide the remaining grout into two 3 gallon cans. Place the cans into the
40-degree F and 100-degree F containers and leave for 20, 40, and 60 minutes.
Every 20 minutes remove and check for segregation or settlement of aggregate.
Use a gloved hand to reach to the bottom of the can, if more than 1/4-inch of
aggregate has settled to the bottom or aggregate has segregated into clumps
reject the grout.
2. Right after the settlement test mix the grout with the drill mixer for 10 seconds.
Take a ASTM C939 flow cone test of grout and record flow time. Maintain this
process for 1 hour at ambient temperatures of 40 degrees F and 100 degrees F.
a. 20 min _____, sec. @ 40 degrees F.
b. 40 min _____, sec. @ 40 degrees F.
c. 60 min _____, sec. @ 40 degrees F.
d. 20 min _____, sec. @ 100 degrees F.
e. 40 min _____, sec. @ 100 degrees F.
f. 60 min _____, sec. @ 100 degrees F.
All Category II and Category III grout that will not go through the flow cone with
continuous flow after 60 minutes will be disqualified.
____________ ____________
Qualified Disqualified
F. 24-hour Strength Test:
1. Using grout left in mixing cans in accordance with ASTM C1107/C1107M for
mixing and consistency determination test and for extended time flow test,
make minimum of nine cube samples.
2. Store cubes at 70 degrees F for 24 hours.
3. Record average compressive strength of nine cubes at 24 hours.
Grout will be disqualified if 24-hour compressive strengths are less than 2,500 psi for
grouts claiming fluid placement capabilities.
Grouts that have not been disqualified after these tests are qualified for use on the
Project for the application indicated in Nonshrink Grout Schedule.

Signature of Independent Testing Laboratory Date Test Conducted

PW/WBG/475883 CONCRETE DOWELING
JANUARY 2014 03 63 00 - 1
SECTION 03 63 00
CONCRETE DOWELING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
2. ASTM International (ASTM): C881/C881M, Standard Specification for
Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete.
3. International Code Council (ICC): Evaluation Services Report.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. ICC Evaluation Services Report for concrete anchor manufacturers.
B. Special Inspection: Observation of Work by Special Inspector for
conformance to approved design Drawings and Specifications.
C. Special Inspector: Qualified person who shall demonstrate competence, to
satisfaction of building official, for inspection of Work specified within this
Section.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Product Data: Manufacturers catalog information.
1. Manufacturers qualifications; include client name, address, contact
person, phone number, project location, and description of work.
2. Manufacturers instructions for preparation, placement, drilling of holes,
installation of anchors and adhesive, and handling of cartridges, nozzles,
and equipment.
3. Manufacturers written letter of certification identifying installers
qualifications to install products.
4. ICC Evaluation Services Report:
a. Doweling system manufacturer.
b. Detailed step-by-step instructions for Special Inspection
procedure.
5. Special Inspection report.

CONCRETE DOWELING PW/WBG/475883
03 63 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer: At least three similar projects with same products within
last 3 years.
2. Installer: Trained and certified by manufacturer.
A. Store adhesive cartridges and adhesive components on pallets or shelving in a
covered storage area.
B. Store at temperatures as indicated in manufacturers literature and ICC
Evaluation Services Report.
C. Dispose of When:
1. Shelf life has expired.
2. Stored other than per manufacturers instructions.
D. Container Markings: Include manufacturers name, product name, batch
number, mix ratio by volume, product expiration date, ANSI hazard
classification, and appropriate ANSI handling precautions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ADHESIVE
A. Disposable, self-contained cartridge system capable of dispensing both
components in the proper mixing ratio and that fit into manually or
pneumatically operated caulking gun.
B. Meet requirements of ASTM C881/C881M.
C. Two-component, insensitive to moisture, designed to be installed in adverse
freeze/thaw environments.
D. Cure Temperature, Pot Life, and Workability: Compatible for intended use
and anticipated environmental conditions.
E. Mixed Adhesive: Nonsag light paste consistency with ability to remain in a
1-inch diameter overhead drilled hole without runout.
F. Adhesive anchor system used in concrete shall be approved by ICC
Evaluation Services Report for use in cracked concrete and for short and long-

PW/WBG/475883 CONCRETE DOWELING
JANUARY 2014 03 63 00 - 3
term loads including wind and earthquake, and shall be approved for use with
IBC 2006.
G. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HIT Doweling Anchor System, HIT RE 500 SD.
2. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; SET-XP Epoxy
Adhesive Anchors.
3. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HIT-HY 150 MAX-SD Adhesive.
4. Powers Fasteners, Inc., Brewster, NY; Powers PE1000+ Epoxy
Adhesive.
2.02 MIXING NOZZLES
A. Disposable, manufactured in several sizes to accommodate size of reinforcing
dowels.
B. Nonremovable internal static mixer required to ensure proper blending of
components.
2.03 REINFORCING DOWELS
A. As specified in Section 03 21 00, Reinforcing Steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Dispensing, Metering, and Mixing Adhesive Components: Use portable,
automatic metering and mixing device or machine capable of maintaining
prescribed mix ratio within deviation of 5 percent or less, by volume.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturers recommended instructions.
C. Dispense components through specially designed static mixing nozzle that
thoroughly mixes components and places mixed adhesive at base of predrilled
hole.
3.02 DOWEL SIZING AND INSTALLATION
A. Install per adhesive manufacturers instructions.
B. Drilling Equipment:
1. Drilling Hammers for Dowel Holes: Electric or pneumatic rotary type
with medium or light impact.
2. Hollow drills with flushing air systems are preferred.

CONCRETE DOWELING PW/WBG/475883
03 63 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
3. Where edge distances are less than 2 inches, use lighter impact
equipment to prevent microcracking and concrete spalling during
drilling process.
C. Hole Diameter: Use drill bit diameter meeting ICC Evaluation Services
Report requirements and as recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Obstructions in Drill Path:
1. When existing reinforcing steel is encountered during drilling and when
approved by Engineer, enlarge hole by 1/8 inch, core through existing
reinforcing steel at the larger diameter, and resume drilling at original
hole diameter; or redrill hole 1 inch from original location, beginning in
same line at surface, redirecting drill to miss reinforcing steel.
2. Place dowels in both the misdrilled hole and the new one.
3. When using epoxy anchors, dowels may be prebent prior to installation
to 15 degrees to align with other bars. Do not heat dowels to bend.
4. If bars have fused epoxy coating and coating is damaged, recoat
damaged area with epoxy.
5. Bent Bar Dowels: Where edge distances are critical, and striking
reinforcing steel is likely, drill hole at 10-degree angle or less and use
prebent reinforcing bars.
A. Special Inspection:
1. Special Inspector will be onsite during dowel installation.
2. Special Inspector will observe installation in accordance with
requirements of the ICC Evaluation Services Report and will submit
report containing the following:
a. Drill bit compliance.
b. Hole depth and cleanliness.
c. Product Description: Product name, rod diameter and length.
d. Adhesive expiration date.
e. Verification of dowel installation in accordance with
manufacturers published instructions.
3. Special Inspector shall randomly select dowels for testing, observe pull
testing, and include pull testing in special inspection results. See
General Structural Notes Drawing for pull testing requirements of
adhesive anchors.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 CRACK REPAIR EPOXY
JANUARY 2014 INJECTION GROUTING
SECTION 03 64 23
CRACK REPAIR EPOXY INJECTION GROUTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO): T237, Standard Method of Test for Testing Epoxy Resin
Adhesive.
a. C882, Standard Specification for Test Method for Bond Strength
of Epoxy-Resin System Used with Concrete by Slant Shear.
b. D570, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
c. D638, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
d. D648, Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of
Plastics under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position.
e. D695, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics.
f. D790, Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of
Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating
Materials.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Crack: Complete or incomplete separation of concrete into two or more parts
produced by breaking or fracturing.
B. Crack Injection: Method of sealing or repairing cracks by injecting a polymer.
C. Large Cracks: Wider than 0.015 inch.
D. Small Cracks: Width equal to 0.015 inch or less.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Physical and chemical properties for epoxy adhesives.
2. Technical data for metering, mixing, and injection equipment.

CRACK REPAIR EPOXY PW/WBG/475883
INJECTION GROUTING JANUARY 2014
1. Manufacturers recommended surface preparation procedures and
application instructions for epoxy adhesives.
2. Installation instructions for repairing core holes with epoxy grout.
3. Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with
Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements: Certified test results
for each batch of epoxy adhesive.
4. Statements of Qualification for Epoxy Adhesive:
a. Manufacturers Site representative.
b. Injection applicator.
c. Injection pump operating technician.
5. Epoxy adhesive two component ratio and injection pressure test records
for concrete crack repair work.
A. Qualifications for Epoxy Injection Staff:
1. Manufacturers Site Representative:
a. Capable of instructing successful methods for restoring concrete
structures utilizing epoxy injection process.
b. Understands and is capable of explaining technical aspects of
correct material selection and use.
c. Experienced in the operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting of
application equipment.
2. Injection crew and job foreman shall provide written and verifiable
evidence showing compliance with the following requirements:
a. Licensed and certified by epoxy manufacturer.
b. Minimum 3 years experience in successful epoxy injection for at
least 10,000 linear feet of successful crack injection including
2,000 linear feet of wet crack injection to stop water leakage.
A. Packing and Shipping: Package adhesive material in new sealed containers
and label with following information:
1. Manufacturers name.
2. Product name and lot number.
3. ANSI Hazard Classification.
4. ANSI recommended precautions for handling.
5. Mix ratio by volume.
B. Storage and Protection: Store adhesive containers at ambient temperatures
below 110 degrees F and above 45 degrees F.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this Section shall be
products of:
1. BASF Building Systems, Shakopee, MN; SCB Concresive Series.
2. Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; Sikadur Series.
3. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Euco Series.
2.02 EPOXY ADHESIVE
A. Two-component A and B structural epoxy adhesive for injection into cracks
or other voids in concrete structures for bonding or grouting.
B. Adhesive Properties:
Test Method
7-day, Tensile Strength, psi ASTM D638 5,000 min.
Tensile Elongation @ Break,
percent
ASTM D638 1.0% min.
Compressive Yield Strength, 7 days
@ 73F, psi
ASTM D695
a

8,000 min.
Compressive Modulus, psi
ASTM D695
a

1.5x10
5
min.
Heat Deflection Temperature, F
ASTM D648
a
120 min.
a

Water absorption @ 24 hours,
Maximum %
ASTM D570 1.0
Bond Strength @ 2 days psi ASTM C882 1,000 min.
Bond Strength @ 14 days psi ASTM C882 1,500 min.
Slant Shear Strength: (5,000 psi
Compressive Strength Conc.)
Where test results are available psi.
AASHTO T237
b

Cured 3 days @ 40 deg FWet Concrete 3,500 min.
Cured 1 day @ 77 deg FDry Concrete 5,000 min.
Cured 3 days @ 77 deg 3 deg F 5,000 min.

Test Method
a
Cure test specimens so that peak exothermic temperature of adhesive does
not exceed 100F.
b
See referenced specifications for preparation method of test specimens.
2.03 SURFACE SEAL
A. Sufficient strength and adhesion for holding injection fittings firmly in place,
and to resist pressures preventing leakage during injection.
B. Capable of removal after injection adhesive has cured.
A. Test Requirements: Perform tests for each batch of adhesive.
B. Pot Life Test:
1. Condition Components A and B to required temperature.
2. Measure components in ratio of Component B as stated on
manufacturers label into an 8-fluid ounce paper cup.
3. Start stopwatch immediately and mix components for 60 seconds using
wooden tongue depressor, take care to scrape sides and bottom of cup
periodically.
4. Probe mixture once with tongue depressor every 30 seconds, starting
2 minutes prior to minimum specified pot life.
5. Pot Life Definition: Time at which a soft stringy mass forms in center of
cup.
C. Fabrication of Slant Shear Specimens for Testing Bond of Injectable
Adhesives to Wet Concrete at 40 Degrees F:
1. Scope: Test method for preparation of diagonal concrete mortar blocks
used in determining slant shear strength of low viscosity injectable
adhesives in accordance with AASHTO T237 when concrete is wet.
2. Materials:
a. Diagonal concrete mortar blocks prepared in accordance with
AASHTO Test Method T237 and cured to produce a mortar with
compressive strength of 5,000 psi or greater.
b. Paraffin wax.
c. Masking Tape: 3/4 inch wide.
d. Suitable 20-mil-thick shim stock.

3. Preparation:
a. Place a 20-mil shim between diagonal faces of two blocks and
align so ends and sides are square.
b. Bind block with masking tape covering gap between blocks.
c. Leave a gap between blocks on one face uncovered for removal of
shim and application of adhesive.
d. Paint melted paraffin wax over masking tape.
e. Shallow dam may be built up around opening using paraffin wax
or modeling clay to help retain adhesive.
f. Apply suitable capping compound to each end of specimen
producing smooth surfaces perpendicular to longitudinal axis of
block.
g. Remove shim stock from gap opening.
h. Soak specimen in water at 40 degrees F, plus or minus 3 degrees F
for at least 24 hours.
i. After soaking, remove specimen, shake free water from surface
and gap opening.
j. Prepare liquid adhesive.
k. Within 5 minutes after removing specimen from water, start
flowing adhesive into crack without entrap air bubbles.
l. Place specimen in 40 degrees F, plus or minus 3 degrees F
ambient for curing within 15 minutes after removing specimen
from water for bonding. Do not expose specimen to temperatures
beyond 77 degrees F during the 15-minute period.
m. Cure specimen for 72 hours, plus or minus 4 hours at
40 degrees F, plus or minus 3 degrees F.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Structurally repair cracks in structures as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-
in-Place Concrete where new concrete is deemed defective.
B. Structurally repair cracks in existing concrete structures listed below:
1. Under roof level of Annex structure where shown on Drawings.
C. Cracks:
1. Repair by injection of epoxy adhesive.
2. Repair cracks where specified or as shown.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Free cracks from loose matter, dirt, laitance, oil, grease, salt, and other
contaminants.
B. Clean cracks in accordance with epoxy adhesive manufacturers instructions.
C. Clean surfaces adjacent to cracks from dirt, dust, grease, oil, efflorescence,
and other foreign matter detrimental to bond of surface seal system.
D. Do not use acids and corrosives for cleaning, unless neutralized prior to
injecting epoxy.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Sealing: Apply surface seal in accordance with manufacturers instructions to
designated crack face prior to injection. Seal surface of crack to prevent
escape of injection epoxy.
B. Entry Ports:
1. Establish openings for epoxy entry in surface seal along crack.
2. Determine space between entry ports equal to thickness of concrete
member to allow epoxy to penetrate to the full thickness of the wall.
3. Provide a means to prevent concrete dusts and fines from contaminating
the crack or ports when drilling.
4. Space entry ports closer together to allow adjustment of injection
pressure to obtain minimum loss of epoxy to soil at locations where:
a. Cracks extend entirely through wall.
b. Backfill of walls on one side.
c. Difficult to excavate behind wall to seal both crack surfaces.
5. Core drill to verify epoxy depth where only one side of wall is exposed.
C. Epoxy Injection:
1. Store epoxy at minimum of 70 degrees F.
2. Start injection into each crack at lowest elevation entry port.
3. Continue injection at first port until adhesive begins to flow out of port
at next highest elevation.
4. Plug first port and start injection at second port until adhesive flows
from next port.
5. Inject entire crack with same sequence.

D. Finishing:
1. Cure epoxy adhesive after cracks have been completely filled to allow
surface seal removal without draining or runback of epoxy material
from cracks.
2. Remove surface seal from cured injection adhesive.
3. Finish crack face flush with adjacent concrete.
4. Indentations or protrusions caused by placement of entry ports are not
acceptable.
5. Remove surface seal material and injection adhesive runs and spills
from concrete surfaces.
3.04 EQUIPMENT
A. Portable, positive displacement type pumps with in-line metering to meter and
mix two adhesive components, and inject mixture into crack.
B. Pumps:
1. Electric or air powered with interlocks providing positive ratio control
of proportions for the two components at nozzle.
2. Primary injection pumps for each material of different mix ratio,
including a standby backup pump of similar ratio.
3. Capable of immediate compensation for changes in resins.
4. Do not use batch mix pumps.
C. Discharge Pressure: Automatic pressure controls capable of discharging
mixed adhesive at pressures up to 200 psi, plus or minus 5 percent, and able to
maintain pressure.
D. Automatic Shutoff Control: Provide sensors on both Component A and B
reservoirs for stopping machine automatically when only one component is
being pumped to mixing head.
E. Proportioning Ratio Tolerance: Maintain epoxy adhesive manufacturers
prescribed mix ratio within a tolerance of plus or minus 5 percent by volume
at discharge pressure up to 160 psi.
F. Ratio/Pressure Check Device:
1. Two independent valved nozzles capable of controlling flow rate and
pressure by opening or closing valve to restrict material flow.
2. Pressure gauge capable of sensing pressure behind each valve.

A. Epoxy Adhesive Two Component Ratio Tests:
1. Disconnect mixing head and pump two adhesive components
simultaneously through ratio check device.
2. Adjust discharge pressure to 160 psi for both adhesive components.
3. Simultaneously discharge both adhesive components into separate
calibrated containers.
4. Compare amounts simultaneously discharged into calibrated containers
during same time period to determine mix ratio.
5. Complete test at 160 psi discharge pressure and repeat procedure for
0 psi discharge pressure.
6. Run ratio test for each injection unit at beginning and end of each
injection work day, and when injection work has stopped for more than
1 hour.
7. Document and maintain complete accurate records of, ratios and
pressure checks.
B. Injection Pressure Test:
1. Disconnect mixing head of injection equipment and connect two
adhesive component delivery lines to pressure check device.
2. Pressure Check Device:
a. Two independent valved nozzles capable of controlling flow rate
and pressure by opening or closing of valve.
b. Pressure gauge capable of sensing pressure buildup behind each
valve.
3. Close valves on pressure check device and operate equipment until
gauge pressure on each line reads 160 psi.
4. Stop pumps and observe pressure; do not allow pressure gauge to drop
below 150 psi within 3 minutes.
5. Run pressure test for each injection equipment unit:
a. Beginning and end of each injection work day.
b. When injection work as stop for more than 45 minutes.
6. Check tolerance to verify equipment capable of meeting specified ratio
tolerance.
C. Crack Injection Tests:
1. Initial Cores:
a. 4-inch diameter for full crack depth taken from Engineer selected
locations.
b. Take three cores in first 100 linear feet of crack repaired and one
core sample for each 500 linear feet thereafter.

2. Provide suitable containers for storage, curing, and transportation of test
specimens.
3. Methods of Testing Cores:
a. Penetration: Visual examination.
b. Bond Strength/Compression Test: Concrete failure prior to
adhesive failure.
4. Test Requirements:
a. Penetration: Minimum of 90 percent of crack shall be full of
epoxy adhesive.
b. Bond Strength/Compression Test: Concrete failure before
adhesive failure, or 6,500 psi with no failure of either concrete or
adhesive.
5. Evaluation and Acceptance of Tests:
a. If initial cores pass tests as specified, epoxy adhesive injection
Work at area represented by cores will be accepted.
b. If initial cores fail either by lack of penetration or bond strength,
crack repair Work shall not proceed further until areas represented
by cores are reinjected or repaired and retested for acceptance.
c. Obtain verifying core samples, number and location as selected by
Engineer, after rework of areas represented by failed initial cores
is complete.
6. Core Hole Repair:
a. Correct Work as result of testing upon notification from Engineer.
b. Refill initial and verifying core holes with an epoxy grout tamped
and rodded in-place to form a dense fill.
c. Finish surface to blend with adjacent concrete.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 MASONRY VENEER
JANUARY 2014 04 21 13.13 - 1
SECTION 04 21 13.13
MASONRY VENEER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
a. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)
on Iron and Steel Hardware.
b. B370, Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for
Building Construction.
c. C91, Standard Specification for Masonry Cement.
d. C126, Standard Specification for Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay
Facing Tile, Facing Brick, and Solid Masonry Units.
e. C144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
f. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
g. C207, Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry
Purposes.
h. C216, Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry
Units Made from Clay or Shale).
i. C270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
j. C404, Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
k. C476, Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry.
l. C652, Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry
Units Made from Clay or Shale).
m. D1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials
Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Manufacturers product information.
b. Mix designs for mortar and grout.
c. Details for special brick shapes.

MASONRY VENEER PW/WBG/475883
04 21 13.13 - 2 JANUARY 2014
2. Samples:
a. Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required
showing full range of exposed color, texture, and dimensions to be
expected in completed construction. Match selected Samples at
Engineers office or listed in Finish Schedule.
1) Include size variation data verifying that actual range of
sizes for brick falls within ASTM C216 dimension
tolerances for brick where modular dimensioning is
indicated.
b. Colored masonry mortar Samples for each color required showing
the full range of colors expected in the finished construction.
Label Samples to indicate type and amount of colorant used.
c. Accessories embedded in the masonry.
1. Experience record of mortar color pigment proposed for use.
2. Manufacturers certificate of compliance for the masonry units specified
herein.
A. Regulatory Requirements: For masonry construction meet requirements of the
International Building Code and as supplemented by these Specifications.
B. Mockups: Lay up a Sample panel for each type of masonry at the Site to show
the bond pattern and method of finishing joints. Make Sample panels 4 feet
high and 4 feet long, and may be a part of the permanent construction. The
acceptable Sample panel serves as a basis of color, texture, pattern, and
workmanship for acceptance of the permanent construction.
A. Storage and Protection:
1. Store all masonry materials off ground and protected from precipitation.
2. Protect veneer materials from mud splatters and staining.
A. Temperature: Do not lay masonry when the ambient temperature is below
32 degrees F on a rising temperature or below 40 degrees F on a falling
temperature, or when there is a probability of such conditions occurring
within 48 hours, unless express approval of Engineer is obtained. In such
case, make special provisions for heating materials and protecting the finished
Work. Protect masonry against freezing for a minimum of 48 hours after

JANUARY 2014 04 21 13.13 - 3
being laid. Protect the tops of walls from precipitation at all times. Cover with
waterproof paper when rain or snow is imminent and the Work is
discontinued.
B. Humidity: Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun
when erected in an ambient air temperature of 99 degrees F (37 degrees C) in
the shade with relative humidity less than 50 percent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MASONRY UNITS
A. Color, Texture, and Pattern: Match the submitted Samples approved by the
Engineer. Brick to be Interstate Brick, Copper Stone L-4.
B. Facing Brick: ASTM C2l6, Grade SW, Type FBS.
1. Minimum Compressive Strength for Individual Brick: 2,500 psi, size
3-5/10 inch by 7-5/10 inch by 2-1/4 inch.
2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, low alkali content (0.03 percent maximum).
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, low alkali content (0.60 percent
maximum).
C. Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
D. Mortar: ASTM C270, Type S. Consisting of one part portland cement, from
1/4 to 1/2 part lime putty or hydrated lime, and clean well-graded sand in the
proportion of three times the sum of the cementitious material; or 1/2 part
portland cement, one part masonry cement, and clean well-graded sand in the
proportion of three times the sum of the cementitious material.
1. If color is added, add in a consistent manner to provide final uniformity.
2. No antifreeze liquid, salts, or other substances are allowed to lower the
freezing point. No calcium chloride is allowed in the mortar.
E. Tuck-Pointing Mortar: Prehydrated Type N, one part portland cement,
one part Type S hydrated lime, and six parts sand, by volume.

04 21 13.13 - 4 JANUARY 2014
F. Grout: Conform to ASTM C476 and the following.
1. Proportions:
a. Grout for pouring of fluid consistency conforming to the
requirements of ASTM C476. Coarse grout may be used in grout
spaces measuring 4 inches or more in both horizontal dimensions.
b. Grout for pumping of fluid consistency and having not less than
seven sacks of cement in each cubic yard of grout. Mix design
will be reviewed by Engineer.
c. Fluid consistency means a fluid suitable for pouring without
segregation.
2. Grout Admixture:
1) Sika Chemical Corp; Sika Grout Aid, Type II.
2) Concrete Emulsions; Grout Aid GA-II.
3) Master Builders Co; Grout Fluidifier MB-612
3. Amount of admixture and method of introducing admixture shall be in
accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
4. Compressive Strength:
a. The average 28-day compressive strength of the grout Samples for
each grout pour tested shall not be less than 2,000 psi.
b. Aggregate for grout shall conform to ASTM C404.
G. Sand: ASTM C144, in addition not less than 5 percent passes the No. 100
sieve.
H. Water: Fresh, clean, and free of deleterious acids, alkalies, chlorides, and
organic materials.
2.03 MASONRY CONTROL JOINTS
A. ASTM D1056, closed cell neoprene sponge, 3 inches wide by 3/8 inch thick.
2.04 COMPRESSIBLE PADS
A. ASTM D1056, closed cell neoprene sponge, 3 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick,
with pressure sensitive adhesive applied on one side.
2.05 THROUGH-WALL FLASHING
A. Copper:
1. ASTM B370.
2. 16 ounces, 0.0216 inch thick, rib-bond cold-rolled with uniform,
matching, pattern deformations, embossed to provide a mechanical bond
in all directions within the mortar bed.

JANUARY 2014 04 21 13.13 - 5
3. Manufacturers:
a. Atlantic Distributing Co., Inc.
b. Cheney Flashing Co., Dovetail design.
B. Copper:
1. Bonded on both sides with waterproofed creped kraft paper.
2. Copper Weight: 3 ounces per square foot.
a. AFCO Products, Inc.; AFCO Cop-A-Bond Duplex.
b. York Manufacturing, Inc.; Cop-R-Tex Duplex.
2.06 MASONRY ACCESSORIES AND ANCILLARY MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers, unless noted otherwise:
1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
2. Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.
3. Heckmann Building Products.
B. Corrugated Wall Ties: Form of 20-gauge minimum galvanized sheet steel.
Length as required by 7/8 inch wide.
C. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement:
1. Two parallel No. 9 wires, galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A153/A153M, weld connected to No. 9 perpendicular cross wire
at 15 inches on center.
2. Reinforcement: Clean and free from loose rust, scale, and any coatings
that reduce bond.
3. Furnish special manufactured corner and wall intersection pieces at
these locations.
D. Weep Holes: Clear nonstaining medium-density polyethylene, tube 3/8 inch
by depth of veneer.
2.07 MORTAR PREPARATION
A. Place one-half the water and aggregate in the operating mixer; add cement;
add the remaining aggregate and water and mix for at least 2 minutes. Add
lime and continue mixing as long as needed to secure a uniform mass, but no
less than 3 minutes after the addition of lime. Time the addition of admixture
in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions and the procedure
used for adding it to the mix shall provide good dispersion.

04 21 13.13 - 6 JANUARY 2014
B. Mix mortar in machine with mixing drums clean and free of debris and dried
mortar. Use mortar before the initial setting of the cement has taken place. Do
not retemper mortar in which the cement has started to set.
C. Retemper mortar boards by adding water within a basin formed with the
mortar and the mortar reworked into the water. Dashing or pouring water over
mortar and retempering of harsh, nonplastic mortar is not permitted.
D. Where color tinting of mortar is required, add sufficient lime-proof color-fast
mineral pigment to the mortar.
2.08 GROUT PREPARATION
A. Mix grout as specified for mortar preparation if onsite mixing is performed or
use transit-mixed grout, meeting the requirements of ASTM C476.
B. Add grout admixtures at the Site, following manufacturers recommendation.
Premix the admixture with water and add resulting solution to the grout and
thoroughly mix. Do not exceed quantity of admixture recommended by the
manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions
affecting performance of masonry veneer.
B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping
connections prior to installation.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Provide or cut special shapes for corners, jambs, lintels, and other areas as
shown or as required. Match color and texture of standard units.
B. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped
edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining
construction. Use full-size units without cutting where possible.
C. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of
new masonry with existing masonry.

JANUARY 2014 04 21 13.13 - 7
3.03 BRICK VENEER INSTALLATION
A. General: Do not install cracked, broken, or chipped masonry units exceeding
ASTM C216 allowances. Thoroughly wet brick just before laying except in
freezing weather where bricks are laid dry. Prewetting may also be omitted if
the brick at the time of laying has a rate of absorption not exceeding
0.025 ounce of water per square inch of surface after being placed in 1/8 inch
of water for 1 minute.
1. Coordinate installation with backup walls, through wall flashing, and
other construction. Use masonry saws to cut and fit exposed units. Lay
brick plumb, true to line, with level courses accurately spaced, and do
not furrow bed joints.
2. Finish horizontal run by racking back in each course; toothing not
permitted. Adjust all units to final position while mortar is soft and
plastic. If units are displaced after mortar has stiffened, remove, clean
joints and units of mortar, and relay with fresh mortar.
3. Bond unexposed units in wythe by lapping a minimum of 2 inches.
Adjust shelf angles to keep Work level at proper elevation. Provide
pressure relieving joints by placing a continuous compressible pad
under the shelf angle.
4. When joining fresh masonry to set or partially set masonry:
a. Remove loose brick and mortar.
b. Clean and lightly wet exposed surface of set masonry prior to
laying fresh masonry.
B. Pattern: Lay brick in running bond.
C. Mortar Beds: Lay brick with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical
joints. Rock closures into place with head joints thrown against two adjacent
bricks in-place. Do not pound corners or jambs to fit stretcher units after
setting in-place. Where adjustment to corners or jambs must be made after
mortar has started to set, remove mortar and replace with fresh mortar.
D. Horizontal and Vertical Face Joints:
1. Nominal Thickness: 38 inch.
2. Construct uniform joints.
3. Shove vertical joints tight.
4. Tool joints concave in exposed surfaces when thumbprint hard using
jointing tool.
5. Concave tool exterior joints below grade.
6. Flush cut all joints not tooled.
7. Fill horizontal joints between top of masonry partition and underside of
concrete beams with mortar.

04 21 13.13 - 8 JANUARY 2014
E. Movement Joints: Keep clean of all mortar and debris.
F. Masonry Control Joints:
1. Provide continuous vertical control joints in masonry as shown on
Drawings.
2. Omit mortar from the vertical joints. Place the control joint material as
the wall is built.
G. Through-Wall Flashing:
1. Place flashing on bed of mortar.
2. Lap cross joints of through-wall flashing at least 2 inches.
3. Extend flashing beyond exterior face of wall and provide drip edge.
4. Cover flashing with mortar.
H. Flashing: Clean surface of masonry smooth and free from projections that
might puncture, gouge, or otherwise damage flashing material.
I. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes in head joints in first course immediately
above all flashing leaving head joint free and clean of mortar.
1. Maximum Spacing: 24 inches OC.
2. Keep weep holes and area above flashing free of mortar droppings.
J. Sealant Joints: Retain sealant joints around outside perimeters of exterior
doors, window frames, and other wall openings:
1. Uniform Depth: 3/4 inch.
2. Uniform Width: 1/2 inch.
K. Nonreinforced Brick Masonry: Fill vertical, longitudinal joints by parging.
Keep cavity in cavity walls clean:
1. Place wood strips with attached wire pulls on metal ties.
2. Remove and clean wood strips prior to placing each succeeding row of
metal ties.
3. As the Work progresses, trowel all protruding fins in cavity flat on inner
surface of wythe.
L. Anchoring: Anchor brick veneer to concrete backing with dovetail anchor ties
and to CMU backing with corrugated anchor ties.
1. Maintain a space not less than 1 inch wide between masonry wall and
concrete members.
2. Keep space free of mortar or other rigid material to permit differential
movement between concrete and masonry.

JANUARY 2014 04 21 13.13 - 9
3. Attach brick veneer to backing with anchor ties.
a. Use one corrugated anchor tie for each 1.77 square feet of wall
area.
b. Maximum Space between Adjacent Ties:
1) Vertically: 16 inches.
2) Horizontally: 16 inches for corrugated anchor ties.
c. Embed ties at least 2 inches in horizontal joint of brick veneer.
d. Provide additional ties at openings:
1) Maximum Spacing Around Perimeter: 24 inches.
2) Install within 12 inches of opening.
M. Pointing: Cut out defective joints and holes in exposed masonry and repoint
with mortar. Dry brush masonry surface after mortar has set at end of each
days Work and after final pointing.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove mortar stains with clear water as Work progresses. Upon completion,
clean exposed surfaces with a 10 percent solution of commercial muriatic
acid, remove stains with fiber brushes, rinse with clean water. Collect and
dispose of water used for cleaning.
B. Cleaning Agents:
1. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate
(1/2 cup dry measure) and laundry detergent (1/2 cup dry measure)
dissolved in one gallon of water.
2. Job-Mixed Muriatic Solution: Solution of one part muriatic acid and
10 parts clean water, mixed in a nonmetallic container with acid added
to water.
3. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturers standard-strength, general-
purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains,
efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry
surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring or damaging
masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer
of masonry units being cleaned.
C. Clean exposed unglazed masonry with stiff brush and clean water. If cleaning
by water does not produce satisfactory results, apply cleaning agent to sample
wall area of 20 square feet in location acceptable to Engineer. Do not proceed
with cleaning until sample area is acceptable to Engineer.
D. Follow manufacturers recommendations for use of cleaning agents.

04 21 13.13 - 10 JANUARY 2014
E. Application:
1. Thoroughly wet surface of masonry on which no efflorescence appears
before using cleaning agent.
2. Scrub with acceptable cleaning agent.
3. Immediately rinse with clean water.
4. Work small sections at a time.
5. Work from top to bottom.
6. Protect sash, metal lintels, and other materials, which may corrode when
masonry is cleaned with acid solution.
7. Remove efflorescence in accordance with brick manufacturers
recommendations.
F. Leave Work area and surrounding surfaces clean and free of mortar spots,
droppings, and broken masonry.
A. At least once a week while installation of masonry veneer is in progress, take
mortar samples for testing. Continue on that basis for duration of installation
of masonry veneer at the discretion of Engineer.
B. Take Samples in accordance with ASTM C270.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Wall Covering: During erection, cover top of wall with strong waterproof
membrane at end of each day or shutdown and as follows:
1. Cover partially completed walls when Work is not in progress.
2. Extend cover minimum of 24 inches down both sides.
3. Hold cover securely in-place.
B. Protect sills, ledges, and offsets from mortar drippings or other damage during
construction. Remove misplaced mortar or grout immediately. Protect face
materials against staining. Protect the door jambs and corners from damage
during construction.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 WELDING
JANUARY 2014 05 05 23 - 1
SECTION 05 05 23
WELDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this Section:
1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
a. BPVC SEC V, Nondestructive Examination.
b. BPVC SEC IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
2. American Society of Nondestructive Testing (ASNT): SNT-TC-1A,
Personnel Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing.
3. American Welding Society (AWS):
a. A2.4, Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and
Nondestructive Examination.
b. A3.0, Standard Welding Terms and Definitions.
c. D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code - Steel.
d. D1.2/D1.2M, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.
e. D1.3/1.3M, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
D1.4/D1.4M, Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.
f. D1.6/D1.6M, Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel.
g. QC1, Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors.
4. ASTM International (ASTM): A370, Standard Test Methods and
Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. CJP: Complete Joint Penetration.
B. CWI: Certified Welding Inspector.
C. MT: Magnetic Particle Testing.
D. NDE: Nondestructive Examination.
E. NDT: Nondestructive Testing.
F. PJP: Partial Joint Penetration.
G. PQR: Procedure Qualification Record.
H. PT: Liquid Penetrant Testing.
I. RT: Radiographic Testing.

WELDING PW/WBG/475883
05 05 23 - 2 JANUARY 2014
J. UT: Ultrasonic Testing.
K. VT: Visual Testing.
L. WPQ: Welder/Welding Operator Performance Qualification.
M. WPS: Welding Procedure Specification.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop and field WPSs and PQRs.
2. Welding Data (Shop and Field): Submit welding data together with
Shop Drawings as a complete package.
a. Show on Shop Drawings or a weld map complete information
regarding base metal specification designation, location, type,
size, and extent of welds with reference called out for WPS and
NDE numbers in tails of combined welding and NDE symbols as
indicated in AWS A2.4.
b. Distinguish between shop and field welds.
c. Indicate, by welding symbols or sketches, details of welded joints
and preparation of base metal. Provide complete joint welding
details showing bevels, groove angles, and root openings for
welds.
d. Welding and NDE symbols shall be in accordance with
AWS A2.4.
e. Welding terms and definitions shall be in accordance with
AWS A3.0.
1. WPQs.
2. CWI credentials.
3. Testing agency personnel credentials.
4. CWI reports.
5. Welding Documentation: Submit on forms in referenced welding codes.
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. WPSs: In accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M (Annex N Forms) for shop or
field welding.
B. WPQs: In accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M (Annex N Forms) for shop or
fielding welding.

JANUARY 2014 05 05 23 - 3
C. CWI: Certified in accordance with AWS QC1, and having prior experience
with specified welding codes. Alternate welding inspector qualifications
require approval by Engineer.
D. Testing Agency: Personnel performing tests shall be NDT Level II certified in
accordance with ASNT SNT-TC-1A.
1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Unless otherwise specified, Submittals required in this Section shall be
submitted and approved prior to commencement of welding operations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. CWI shall be present whenever shop welding is performed. CWI shall
perform inspection, as necessary, prior to assembly, during assembly, during
welding, and after welding. CWI shall perform inspections as required in
AWS D1.1/D1.1M or referenced welding code and as follows:
1. Verifying conformance of specified job material and proper storage.
2. Monitoring conformance with approved WPS.
3. Monitoring conformance of WPQ.
4. Inspecting weld joint fit-up and performing in-process inspection.
5. Providing 100 percent visual inspection of welds.
6. Supervising nondestructive testing personnel and evaluating test results.
7. Maintaining records and preparing report confirming results of
inspection and testing comply with the Work.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Welding and Fabrication by Welding: Conform to governing welding codes
referenced in attached Welding and Nondestructive Testing Table.
3.02 NONDESTRUCTIVE WELD TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Weld Inspection Criteria:
1. Selection of welds to be tested unless 100 percent NDT is specified
herein, shall be as agreed upon between Engineer and Contractor.
2. Unless otherwise specified, perform NDT of welds at a frequency as
shown below and in the attached Table in accordance with referenced
welding codes as follows. Perform UT on CJP groove welds that cannot

WELDING PW/WBG/475883
05 05 23 - 4 JANUARY 2014
be readily radiographed. In case there is a conflict, higher frequency
level of NDT shall apply.
a. CJP Groove, Butt Joint Welds: 10 percent random RT.
b. All other CJP Groove Welds: 10 percent random UT.
c. Fillet Welds and PJP Groove Welds: 10 percent random PT or
MT.
d. All Welds: 100 percent VT.
3. Weld Acceptance:
a. VT:
1) All Other Structural Steel: AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
Paragraph 6.9, Visual Inspection, Statically Loaded
Nontubular Connections.
2) Stud Connections: AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 7.8.1.
b. UT: Perform on CJP groove welds in accordance with
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 6.13.3, Class R Indications.
c. RT: Perform on CJP butt joint welds in accordance with
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 6.12.1.
d. PT or MT:
1) Perform on fillet and PJP groove welds in accordance with
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 6.10.
2) Acceptance shall be in accordance with VT standards
specified above.
B. Provide FM-approved blankets or pads and fire watch per Division 01 for all
onsite hot working including welding.
A. CWI shall be present whenever field welding is performed. CWI shall perform
inspection, as necessary, prior to assembly, during assembly, during welding,
and after welding. CWI shall perform inspections as required in
AWS D1.1/D1.1M or referenced welding code and as follows:
1. Verify conformance of specified job material and proper storage.
2. Monitor conformance with approved WPS.
3. Monitor conformance of WPQ.
4. Inspect weld joint fit-up and perform in-process inspection.
5. Provide 100 percent visual inspection of all welds.
6. Supervise nondestructive testing personnel and evaluating test results.
7. Maintain records and prepare report confirming results of inspection and
testing comply with the Work.
3.04 WELD DEFECT REPAIR
A. Repair and retest rejectable weld defects until sound weld metal has been
deposited in accordance with appropriate welding codes.

JANUARY 2014 05 05 23 - 5
3.05 SUPPLEMENT
Specification:
1. Welding and Nondestructive Testing Table.
END OF SECTION

Welding and Nondestructive Testing
Specification
Section
Governing Welding Codes or
Standards
Submit
WPS
Submit
WPQ
Onsite
CWI
Reqd
Submit
Written NDT
Procedure
Specifications NDT Requirements
03 21 00
Reinforcing Steel
AWS D1.4/D1.4M, Structural
Welding Code - Reinforcing
Steel
Yes Yes Yes Yes 100% MT of all rebar
splices; also see
Section 03 21 00
05 50 00
Metal Fabrications
Welding CodeSteel or
Welding Code - Aluminum or
Welding Code - Stainless Steel
Yes Yes Yes Yes 100% VT; also see
Section 05 50 00

PW/WBG/475883 METAL FABRICATIONS
JANUARY 2014 05 50 00 - 1
SECTION 05 50 00
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. The Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA): The Aluminum Design Manual.
2. American Galvanizers Association (AGA): Inspection of Products Hot-
Dip Galvanized After Fabrication.
3. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): S329, Allowable
Stress Design Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or
A490 Bolts.
4. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): Stainless Steel Types.
5. American Ladder Institute (ALI): A14.3, Ladders - Fixed - Safety
Requirements.
7. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): B1.1, Unified-
inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form).
8. American Society of Safety Engineers (ASSE): A10.11, Safety
Requirements for Personnel and Debris Nets.
9. American Welding Society (AWS):
a. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel.
b. D1.2, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.
c. D1.6, Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel.
a. A36/A36M, Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
b. A48, Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
c. A53/A53M, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
d. A108, Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished,
Standard Quality.
e. A123/A123M, Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
f. A143, Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-
Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for
Detecting Embrittlement.
g. A153/A153M, Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron
and Steel Hardware.
h. A193/A193M, Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel
Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service.
i. A194/A194M, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for
Bolts for High-Pressure or High-Temperature Service, or Both.

METAL FABRICATIONS PW/WBG/475883
05 50 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
j. A240/A240M, Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and
Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for
Pressure Vessels.
k. A276, Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
l. A278, Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Pressure-
Containing Parts for Temperatures Up to 650 Degree.
m. A283/A283M, Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile
Strength Carbon Steel Plates.
n. A307, Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI
Tensile.
o. A325, Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
p. A380, Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of
Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems.
q. A384, Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion
During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies.
r. A385, Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-
Dip).
s. A489, Specification for Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes.
t. A500, Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
u. A501, Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
v. A563, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
w. A653, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
x. A780, Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of
Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.
y. A786/A786M, Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy,
High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates.
z. A793, Specification for Rolled Floor Plate, Stainless Steel.
aa. A967, Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for
Stainless Steel Parts.
bb. A992/A992M, Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for
Use in Building Framing
cc. B209, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet
and Plate.
dd. B308/B308M, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6
Standard Structural Profiles.
ee. B429, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural
Pipe and Tube.
ff. B632/B632M, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread
Plate.
gg. D1056, Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or
Expanded Rubber.

JANUARY 2014 05 50 00 - 3
hh. F436, Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.
ii. F468, Specification for Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and
Studs for General Use.
jj. F593, Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws,
and Studs.
kk. F594, Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts.
ll. F844, Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened
for General Use.
mm. F1554, Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi
Yield Strength.
11. International Code Council (ICC): Evaluation Reports for Concrete and
Masonry Anchors.
12. NSF International (NSF).
13. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
a. 29 CFR 1910.27, Fixed Ladders.
b. 29 CFR 1926.105, Safety Nets.
c. 29 CFR 1926.502, Fall Protection Systems Criteria and Practices.
14. Specialty Steel Industry of North America (SSINA):
a. Specifications for Stainless Steel.
b. Design Guidelines for the Selection and Use of Stainless Steel.
c. Stainless Steel Fabrication.
d. Stainless Steel Fasteners.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Corrosive Area: Containment area or area exposed to delivery, storage,
transfer, or use of chemicals.
B. Exterior Area: Location not protected from the weather by a building or other
enclosed structure.
C. Interior Dry Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is not
subject to liquid spills or washdown, nor where wall or roof slab is common to
a water-holding or earth-retaining structure.
D. Interior Wet Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is sloped
to floor drains or gutters and is subject to liquid spills or washdown, or where
wall, floor, or roof slab is common to a water-holding or earth-retaining
structure.
E. Submerged: Location at or below top of wall of open water-holding structure,
such as a basin or channel, or wall, ceiling or floor surface inside a covered
water-holding structure, or exterior belowgrade wall or roof surface of water-
holding structure, open or covered.

05 50 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Erection plans for lateral force collector elements and their
connections.
b. Collector members including piece numbers, sizes, grades,
dimensions, and connection details.
c. Joint details for complete penetration welds.
d. Metal fabrications, including welding and fastener information.
e. Specific instructions for concrete anchor installation, including
drilled hole size, preparation, placement, procedures, and
instructions for safe handling of anchoring systems.
1. Mill Certificates of tests made in accordance with ASTMA6/A6M.
2. Welding Procedures, Qualifications, and Inspection Reports: As
specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding.
3. Nondestructive Testing (NDT) Report.
4. Concrete and Masonry Drilled Anchors:
a. Manufacturers product description and installation procedures.
b. Current test data or ICC Evaluation Report.
c. Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification.
A. Qualifications:
1. Qualifications: Welding qualifications as specified in Section 05 05 23,
Welding.
2. Adhesive Anchor Installers: Trained and certified by manufacturer.
B. Certifications: Mill identification marks, heat number, size of section, and
length in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M.
A. Insofar as practical, factory assemble items specified herein. Assemblies that
due to necessity have to be shipped unassembled shall be packaged and
tagged in manner that will protect materials from damage and will facilitate
identification and field assembly.
B. Protect coatings and finishes from damage due to metal banding and rough
handling. Use padded slings and straps.

JANUARY 2014 05 50 00 - 5
C. Store fabricated items in dry area, not in direct contact with ground.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise indicated, meet the following requirements:
Item ASTM Reference
W-Shapes
Rolled Plates, bars and angles
A992
A36/A36M (Fy equals 36 ksi) or
A572/A572M (Fy equals 50 ksi)
Steel Pipe A501 or A53/A53M, Type E or S,
Grade B
Square and Rectangular Hollow
Sections (HSS)
A500, Grade B (Fy equals 46 ksi)
Stainless Steel:
Bars and Angles A276, AISI Type 316 (316L for
welded connections)
Shapes A276, AISI Type 304 (304L for
welded connections)
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip A240/A240M, AISI Type 316 (316L
for welded connections)
Bolts, Threaded Rods,
Anchor Bolts, and Anchor
Studs
F593, AISI Type 316, Condition CW
Nuts F594, AISI Type 316, Condition CW
Steel Bolts and Nuts:
Machine Bolts A307 bolts, with A563 nuts
High-Strength A325-N, Type 1 bolts, with A563
nuts
Slip Critical
Stainless Steel Anchor Bolts
Steel Anchor Bolts
Galvanizes Steel Anchor
Bolts
A325-SC
F593, AISI Type 316, Condition CW
F1554, GR 36
F1554/A36

Eyebolts A489

05 50 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
Item ASTM Reference
Threaded Rod Hangers A36/A36M
Flat Washers (Unhardened) F844
Flat and Beveled Washers
(Hardened)
F436
Lateral Force System Collectors
Threaded Rods A193/A193M, Grade B7
Nuts A194/A194M, Grade 2H
Welded Anchor Studs A108, Grades C-1010 through
C-1020
B. Bolts, Washers, and Nuts: Use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, zinc-
plated steel, and aluminum material types as indicated in Fastener Schedule at
end of this Section.
2.02 ANCHOR BOLTS AND ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVES
A. Cast-In-Place Anchor Bolts:
1. Headed type, unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
2. Material type and protective coating as shown in Fastener Schedule at
end of this Section.
B. Anchor Bolt Sleeves:
1. Plastic:
a. Single unit construction with corrugated sleeve.
b. Top of sleeve shall be self-threading to provide adjustment of
threaded anchor bolt projection.
c. Material: High density polyethylene.
d. Manufacturer: Sinco Products, Inc., Middletown, CT,
(800) 243-6753.
2. Fabricated Steel: ASTM A36/A36M.
2.03 CONCRETE AND MASONRY DRILLED ANCHORS
A. General:
1. AISI Type 316 stainless, hot-dip galvanized, or zinc-plated steel, as
shown in Fastener Schedule at end of this Section.
2. Current evaluation and acceptance reports by ICC or other similar code
organization.

JANUARY 2014 05 50 00 - 7
3. Acceptable for use in potable water structures by EPA and local health
agencies or NSF.
B. Wedge Anchors:
a. ITW Ramset/Red Head, Addison, IL; Trubolt Wedge Anchor.
b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; Kwik-Bolt-3 (KB-3) Anchor.
c. Powers Fasteners, New Rochelle, NY; Power-Stud Anchor.
d. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; Wedge-All
Anchor.
e. Wej-It Corp., Tulsa, OK; ANKRtite Wedge Anchor.
f. Adhesives Technology, Pompano Beach, FL; Kingpin Wedge
Anchor.
g. Unitex, Kansas City, MO; Pro-Poxy 300 and Pro-Poxy 300 Fast
Epoxy Adhesive Anchors.
C. Expansion Anchors:
1. Self-drilling anchors, snap-off or flush type, zinc-plated.
2. Nondrilling Anchors: Flush type for use with zinc-plated or stainless
steel bolt, or stud type with projecting threaded stud.
a. ITW Ramset/Red Head, Addison, IL; Multi-Set II Drop-In and
Self Drill Anchor.
b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; Hilti HDI Drop-In Anchor.
c. Powers Fasteners, New Rochelle, NY; Steel Drop-In Anchor.
d. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; Drop-In Anchor.
D. Undercut Anchors:
a. USP Structural Connectors; DUC Undercut Anchor.
b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa OK; HDA Undercut Anchor.
E. Sleeve Anchors:
a. ITW Ramset/Red Head, Addison, IL; Dynabolt Hex Nut Sleeve
Anchor.
b. Powers Fasteners, New Rochelle, NY; Hex Head Power-Bolt
Anchor.
c. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; Sleeve-All Hex
Head Anchor.
d. Wej-It Corp., Tulsa, OK; Wej-It Sleeve Anchor.
e. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HSL-3 Heavy Duty Sleeve Anchor.

05 50 00 - 8 JANUARY 2014
F. Adhesive Anchors:
1. Threaded Rod:
a. ASTM F593 stainless steel threaded rod, diameter as shown on
Drawings.
b. Length as required, to provide minimum depth of embedment.
c. Clean and free of grease, oil, or other deleterious material.
d. For hollow-unit masonry, provide galvanized or stainless steel
wire cloth screen tube to fit threaded rod.
2. Adhesive:
a. Two-component, designed to be used in adverse freeze/thaw
environments, with gray color after mixing.
b. Cure Temperature, Pot Life, and Workability: Compatible for
intended use and environmental conditions.
c. Nonsag, with selected viscosity base on installation temperature
and overhead application where applicable.
3. Packaging and Storage:
a. Disposable, self-contained cartridge system capable of dispensing
both components in the proper mixing ratio and fitting into a
manually or pneumatically operated caulking gun.
b. Store adhesive cartridges on pallets or shelving in covered storage
area, in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.
c. Cartridge Markings: Include manufacturers name, product name,
material type, batch or serial number, and adhesive expiration
date.
d. Dispose of cartridges if shelf life has expired.
a. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HIT-HY 150 MAX xD Adhesive.
b. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; SET-XP Epoxy.
c. Powers Fastener Inc., Brewster, NY; PE1000+ Epoxy Adhesive.
d. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HIT-RE 500-SD Adhesive.
G. Adhesive Threaded Inserts:
1. Stainless steel, internally threaded insert.
2. Manufacturer and Product: Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HIS-R Insert with
HIT HY 150 adhesive.
2.04 WELDED ANCHOR STUDS
A. Headed anchor studs (HAS) or threaded anchor studs (TAS), as indicated on
Drawings.
1. Carbon Steel: ASTM A108, Standard Quality Grades 1010
through 1020, inclusive either semikilled or killed aluminum or silicon
dioxidation, unless indicated otherwise.

JANUARY 2014 05 50 00 - 9
B. Manufacturers:
1. Nelson Stud Welding, FabriSteel Co., Elyria, OH.
2. Stud Welding Associates, Inc., Elyria, OH.
2.05 STEEL LINTELS AND SHELF ANGLES
A. ASTM A36/A36M, hot-dip galvanize after fabrication in accordance with
ASTM A123/A123M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF METAL FABRICATIONS
A. General:
1. Install metal fabrications plumb or level, accurately fitted, free from
distortion or defects.
2. Install rigid, substantial, and neat in appearance.
3. Install manufactured products in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations.
4. Obtain Engineer approval prior to field cutting steel members or making
adjustments not scheduled.
B. Steel Lintels and Shelf Angles: Provide as required for support of masonry
and other construction not attached to structural steel framing, unless
otherwise shown on Drawings.
3.02 CAST-IN-PLACE ANCHOR BOLTS OR HEADED ANCHOR STUDS
A. Accurately locate and hold anchor bolts in place with templates at the time
concrete is placed.
B. Use anchor bolt sleeves for location adjustment and provide two nuts and one
washer per bolt of same material as bolt.
C. Minimum Bolt Size: 1/2-inch diameter by 12 inches long, unless otherwise
shown.
3.03 CONCRETE DRILLED ANCHORS
A. Begin installation only after concrete or masonry to receive anchors has
attained design strength.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

05 50 00 - 10 JANUARY 2014
C. Provide minimum embedment, edge distance, and spacing as follows, unless
indicated otherwise by anchor manufacturers instructions or shown otherwise
on Drawings:
Anchor Type
Min.
Embedment
(Bolt Diameters)
Min. Edge
Distance
(Bolt Diameters)
Min. Spacing
(Bolt
Diameters)
Wedge 9 6 12
Expansion and Sleeve 4 6 12
Undercut 9 12 16
Adhesive 9 9 13.5
D. Use only drill type and bit type and diameter recommended by anchor
manufacturer. Clean hole of debris and dust with brush and compressed air.
E. For undercut anchors, use special undercutting drill bit and rotary hammer
drill and apply final torque as recommended by anchor manufacturer.
F. When embedded steel or rebar is encountered in the drill path, move hole
1 inch and drill again. Coordinate fabrication of steel anchor plates with as-
installed location of adhesive anchored bolts and threaded rods.
G. Adhesive Anchors:
1. Do not install adhesive anchors when temperature of concrete is below
40 degrees F or above 100 degrees F.
2. Remove any standing water from hole with oil-free compressed air.
Inside surface of hole shall be dry where required by manufacturers
instructions.
3. Do not disturb anchor during recommended curing time.
4. Do not exceed maximum torque as specified in manufacturers
instructions.
H. Existing Prestressed Concrete Hollow Core, Tees and Girders: Do not use
drilled-in anchors in prestressed concrete members without Engineers prior
approval unless specifically shown on Drawings.

JANUARY 2014 05 50 00 - 11
A. Welded Anchor Studs:
1. At start of each production period, Contractor shall perform the
following test to determine proper generator, control unit, and stud
welding gun settings, in accordance with AWS D1.1, Chapter 7:
a. Weld two test studs and visually inspect for full 360-degree flash.
b. Bend test studs 30 degrees from vertical for headed anchor studs
(HAS). Torque test threaded anchor studs (TAS) studs per
AWS D1.1, Section 7.6.6.2.
c. Test studs will be acceptable if there is no failure of welds.
d. If weld fails, repeat test until two consecutive test studs test to be
satisfactory.
2. During production, if visual inspection reveals that weld does not
exhibit full 360-degree flash or that stud has been repaired by welding,
Contractor shall perform the following test in accordance with
AWS D1.1, Chapter 7:
a. HAS studs, bend stud approximately 15 degrees from vertical,
away from missing portion of flash. For TAS studs, torque test per
AWS D1.1, Section 7.6.6.2.
b. Studs meeting this test without exhibiting cracks in weld will be
considered acceptable and left in bent position.
c. Replace studs failing test.
3. Special inspection will be provided by Owner where indicated on
Drawings.
B. Concrete Drilled Anchors:
1. Special inspection and testing will be provided by Owner where
indicated on Drawings.
2. Special Inspector shall randomly select adhesive anchored threaded rod
and anchor bolts for testing, observe testing, and include pull testing in
special inspection reports. See General Structural Notes drawing for pull
testing requirements of adhesive anchors.
A. Adhesive Anchors: Conduct site training of installation personnel for proper
installation, handling, and storage of adhesive anchor system. Notify Engineer
of time and place for sessions.

05 50 00 - 12 JANUARY 2014
3.06 FASTENER SCHEDULE
A. Unless indicated otherwise on Drawings, provide fasteners as follows:
Service Use
and Location Product Remarks
1. Anchor Bolts Cast Into Concrete for Structural Steel, Metal Fabrications
and Castings
Interior Dry Areas Plain uncoated steel
headed anchor bolts,
unless indicated
otherwise.

Exterior and
Interior Wet Areas
Hot-dip galvanized
steel headed anchor
bolts.

2. Anchor Bolts Cast Into Concrete for Equipment Bases
Interior Dry Areas Stainless steel
headed anchor bolts,
unless otherwise
specified with
equipment

3. Drilled Anchors for Metal Components to Cast-in-Place Concrete (e.g.,
Ladders, Handrail Posts, Electrical Panels, and Equipment)
Interior Dry Areas Zinc-plated or
stainless steel
wedge or expansion
anchors
Use zinc-plated undercut
anchors for overhead and
ceiling installations.
Submerged,
Exterior, Interior
Wet, and
Corrosive Areas
Adhesive stainless
steel anchors
Use stainless steel undercut
anchors for overhead and
ceiling installations.
4. Connections for Structural Steel Framing
Exterior and
Interior Wet and
Dry Areas
High-strength steel
bolted connections
Use hot-dipped galvanized
high-strength bolted
connections for galvanized
steel framing members

JANUARY 2014 05 50 00 - 13
Service Use
and Location Product Remarks
5. All Others
Exterior and
Interior Wet and
Dry Areas
Stainless steel
fasteners

B. Antiseizing Lubricant: Use on all stainless steel threads.
C. Do not use adhesive anchors to support fire-resistive construction or where
ambient temperature will exceed 120 degrees F.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 ROUGH CARPENTRY
JANUARY 2014 06 10 00 - 1
SECTION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. American Forest and Paper Association (AF&PA): 2, National Design
Specification for Wood Construction.
2. American Hardboard Association (AHA): A135.4, Basic Hardboard.
3. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC): 112, Standard for
Tongue-and-Groove Heavy Timber Roof Decking.
4. American Lumber Standards Committees Board of Review (ALSC).
5. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA):
a. U1, User Specification for Treated Wood.
b. M4, Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood
Products.
6. APA - The Engineered Wood Association (APA):
a. PRP-108, Performance Standards and Qualification Policy for
Structural-Use Panels (Form E445).
b. Form B445, APA Quality Assurance Policies for Structural-Use
Panels Qualified to PRP-108.
b. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,
60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.
c. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-
d. C1177/C1177M, Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum
Substrate for Use as Sheathing.
e. C1396/C1396M, Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.
f. D226/D226M, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated
Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
g. D3498, Standard Specification for Adhesives for Field-Gluing
Plywood to Lumber Framing for Floor Systems.
h. D5456, Standard Specification for Evaluation of Structural
Composite Lumber Products.
i. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
j. F1667, Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes,
and Staples.

ROUGH CARPENTRY PW/WBG/475883
06 10 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
8. Composite Panel Association (CPA): A208.1, Standard for
Particleboard.
9. International Code Council (ICC):
a. ESR-1539, Power-Driven Staples and Nails.
b. International Building Code (IBC).
10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 255, Standard Method of
Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
11. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB): 1003, Grading Rules.
12. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 723, Standard for Safety Test for
Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
13. U.S. Department of CommerceVoluntary Product Standard (DOC):
a. PS 1, Structural Plywood.
b. PS 2, Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use
Panels.
c. PS 20, American Softwood Lumber Standard.
14. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA): G5, Western Lumber
Grading Rules.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Product Data: Indicate component materials and dimensions, and
include construction and application details for the following:
a. Underlayment.
b. Sheathing.
c. Metal framing anchors.
d. Construction adhesives.
e. Construction panel thickness where not shown.
1. ICC Evaluation Service Reports, including the following as a minimum:
a. Connections and Fasteners.
b. Wood Treatment.
c. Nails.
d. Wood Framing.
e. Structural Panels.
2. Wood treatment manufacturers instructions for handling, storing,
installation, and finishing of treated material.
3. Material Certificates: Showing species and grade selected for dimension
lumber for each use.
a. Material certificates for dimensional lumber in compliance with
allowable unit stresses. Show species and grade selected for each
use as well as design values approved by the ALSCs Board of
Review.

JANUARY 2014 06 10 00 - 3
b. For each type of preservative-treated wood product, include
certification by treatment plant stating type of preservative
solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative
retained, and compliance with applicable standards.
c. For waterborne-treated products include statement that moisture
content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated prior
to shipment to Site.
4. Material test reports from testing laboratory showing and interpreting
test results in accordance with test methods UL 723, NFPA 255, and
ASTM E84, relative to fire-retardant treated wood products.
A. Upon delivery to Site, immediately place materials in area protected from
weather. Do not store seasoned materials in wet or damp areas.
B. Protect sheet materials from breaking corners and damaging surfaces while
unloading.
C. Store materials a minimum of 6 inches above ground on framework or
blocking and cover with waterproof covering, providing for adequate air
circulation and ventilation. Store sheet materials flat, not on edge.
D. Protect fire-retardant materials against high humidity and moisture during
storage and erection.
E. Store materials for which maximum moisture content is specified in areas
where humidity can be controlled.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Lumber Standards:
1. In accordance with DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules and wood
species certified by ALSC.
2. Design values for wood members equal to those published in
supplement to AF&PA 2.
3. Stamp or brand each unexposed piece of lumber with grade, species,
and moisture content at time of mill surfacing.
4. Furnish exposed lumber pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or
back of each piece. If completely exposed, and permitted by local
building jurisdiction, omit grade stamps entirely.
B. Lumber sizes shown on Drawings are nominal, unless shown otherwise.
Provide actual sizes as required by DOC PS 20 for use.

06 10 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
C. Dressed lumber S4S, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.
D. Moisture content of lumber not to exceed 19 percent, unless otherwise
specified and marked DRY.
E. Each plywood panel identified with designated grade trademark of APA.
2.02 LUMBER
A. Framing lumber shall be Douglas Fir-Larch, No. 1 or better unless indicated
otherwise below:
Usage Minimum Grade
Plates, sills, blocking, furring,
braces, and nailers
Douglas Fir-Larch No. 2, Hemlock,
Southern Pine Stud grade, nondense
Structural light framing, general
framing, studs 2 to 4 inches thick by
2 to 6 inches wide
Douglas Fir-Larch No. 1, or
Southern Pine No. 1
Structural joists, headers, posts and
planks, 2 to 4 inches thick by
5 inches and wider
Douglas Fir-Larch No. 1, or
Southern Pine No. 1
Posts and timbers Douglas Fir-Larch Select Structural,
Southern Pine Select Structural
Beams and stringers Douglas Fir-Larch Select Structural,
Southern Pine Select Structural
Baffles and tank liners Douglas Fir-Larch No. 1, Eastern
Hemlock-Tamarack No. 1
2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. Plywood:
1. General:
a. Where construction panels are shown on Drawings for the
following concealed types of applications, provide APA
Performance-Rated Panels complying with requirements
designated under each application for grade designation, span
rating, exposure durability classification, edge detail, and
thickness.
b. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with DOC PS 1 for
plywood construction panels and for products not manufactured
under DOC PS 1 provisions, in accordance with APA PRP-108
and APA Form B445.

JANUARY 2014 06 10 00 - 5
c. Trademark: Each construction panel factory-marked with
APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements.
2. Combination Subfloor Underlayment: APA rated Plywood sheathing.
a. Exposure Durability Classification: EXTERIOR with fully sanded
face.
b. Span Rating: 48/24.
c. Edge Detail: Tongue-and-groove.
3. Subflooring: APA rated Plywood sheathing.
a. Exposure Durability Classification: EXTERIOR.
b. Span Rating: 48/24, 3/4 inch thick.
4. Wall Sheathing: APA rated Plywood sheathing.
a. Exposure Durability Classification: EXTERIOR.
b. Span Rating: 12/0, 16/0, 20/0 for stud spacing of 16 inches or less.
B. Plywood Backing Panel: Mounting electrical, telephone, and like equipment;
provide fire-retardant treated plywood panel with grade designation,
APA C-D Plugged Exposure 1, in thickness shown on Drawings, or, if not
shown on Drawings, not less than 15/32 inch.
C. Gypsum Sheathing:
1. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board (GMSB):
a. In accordance with ASTM C1177/C1177M.
b. Size: Type X, 5/8-inch thick.
c. Manufacturer and Product: G-P Gypsum Corp., Dens-Glass Gold.
2.04 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS
A. Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative-treated wood, in
accordance with AWPA U1 and AWPA M4, mark and grade each treated
item in accordance with SPIB 1003 or WWPA G5.
1. Kiln-dry after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
2. Treat wood in contact with roofing or flashing.
3. Treat wood in contact with masonry or concrete.
4. Treat wood less than 18 inches above grade.
B. Aboveground Materials:
1. Pressure treat items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum
retention of 0.25 per cubic foot.
2. Interior Use: After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to maximum
moisture content of 19 percent and 15 percent respectively.

06 10 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
3. Treat the following items:
a. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking,
stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing,
flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar
concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.
c. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade.
d. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact
with earth.
C. Materials in Contact with Ground or Freshwater: Pressure treat in accordance
with applicable AWPA U1.
D. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut
after treatment, coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each
piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective
pieces.
2.05 AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER
A. In accordance with Section 06 20 00, Finish Carpentry.
2.06 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATED WOOD
A. Pressure treat lumber and plywood with fire-retardant chemicals in
accordance with applicable AWPA U1 and AWPA M4 standard for species,
product, preservative and end use to ensure flame-spread rating not higher
than 25 with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when tested
for 30 minutes duration under UL 723 and ASTM E84.
B. Treated lumber and plywood labeled and tested by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. shall show performance rating.
2.07 HARDWARE
A. Fasteners and connectors in contact with preservative-treated or fire-retardant-
treated wood shall be hot-dipped zinc-coated galvanized steel or stainless
steel in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M.
B. Conform to ASTM F1667.
C. Nails:
1. Conform to ASTM F1667.
2. Steel common nails or alternatives listed in rough carpentry section of
General Structural Notes found on Drawings.

JANUARY 2014 06 10 00 - 7
3. Use hot-dipped zinc-coated nails wherever exposed.
4. Use deformed shank nails for fastening underlayment.
D. Staples: Conform to ASTM F1667, galvanized where exposed.
E. Power Driven Fasteners: Conform to ICC ESR-1539.
F. Bolts and Screws: Conform to ASTM A307, galvanized where exposed.
G. Framing Anchors, Joist, and Beam Hangers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. United Steel Products, Gibraltar Industries, Montgomery, MN.
b. KC Metal Products, San Jose, CA.
c. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Pleasanton, CA.
d. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co., Bedford Heights, OH.
H. Fasteners for Gypsum Sheathing Board:
1. Galvanized roofing nails 3/8-inch head to 7/16-inch head, 1-3/4 inches
long.
2. Staples No. 11 or No. 16-gauge, 7/16 inch by 1-1/2 inches with
divergent points.
I. Structural Framing Connectors:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Simpson Strong-Tie Co, Inc. Pleasanton, CA; hot-dip galvanized.
b. United Steel Products Company; hot-dip galvanized.
J. Ply Clips: Extruded 6063-T6 aluminum alloy.
K. Bar or Strap Anchors: ASTM A653/A653M, zinc-coated steel, 18 gauge
minimum.
2.08 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Construction Adhesives: Elastomeric glue conforming to ASTM D3498 for
gluing subfloor to joists.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify surfaces to receive rough carpentry materials are prepared to exact
grades and dimensions.

06 10 00 - 8 JANUARY 2014
3.02 GENERAL
A. Lay out, cut, fit, and install rough carpentry items. Anchor sufficiently to
ensure rigidity and permanence.
B. Install items accurate to dimension, true to line, level, and square unless
shown otherwise on Drawings. Provide for installation and support of other
Work.
C. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry
construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with
minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.
D. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
E. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary
bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition
until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.
F. Field cuts and holes in pressure-treated lumber shall be field treated with
preservative in accordance with AWPA M4.
G. Holes shall be 1/16 inch larger than nominal bolt diameter, except holes for
cast-in-place anchor bolts shall be 3/16 inch larger than nominal bolt
diameter. Tight holes requiring forcible driving of bolts shall be enlarged by
reaming.
H. Provide washers under bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Sills and Plates:
1. Set level and flush with outside face of foundation or as shown on
Drawings.
2. Anchor with 1/2-inch diameter bolt embedded at least 7 inches into
concrete with a minimum of two bolts per piece and with one bolt
located within 12 inches of each end of one piece and spaced not more
than 6 feet apart.
B. Stud Framing:
1. Plates and Stud Members:
a. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates for load-bearing
partitions, 2 inches thick by width of stud. Lap top plates at
corners. Splice top plate two stud spaces from lower top plate.

JANUARY 2014 06 10 00 - 9
b. Provide single bottom plate and single top plate for nonload-
bearing partitions, 2 inches thick by width of studs.
c. Provide studs in continuous lengths without splice.
d. End nail studs to bottom plate and end nail to lower top plate. Tilt
up and anchor into place.
e. Face-nail upper top plate to lower top plate.
f. Nail bottom plate to wood construction.
g. Anchor bottom plate to concrete structure as shown on Drawings.
h. Triple studs at corners and partition intersections.
i. Partition parallel with joists, locate two joists directly below studs.
j. Frame openings with double studs and headers for openings less
than 4 feet; triple studs and headers for openings 4 feet and
greater.
2. Headers: In bearing and exterior walls, provide headers over openings.
Maximum span:
a. Spans to 3 Feet 6 Inches: Two 2 by 4.
b. Spans to 4 Feet 6 Inches: Two 2 by 6.
c. Spans to 6 Feet 0 Inch: Two 2 by 8.
d. Spans to 8 Feet 0 Inch: Two 2 by 10, braced.
3. Blocking:
a. Install in continuous, staggered horizontal row where shown on
Drawings or required by code.
b. Locate blocking to facilitate installation of finishing materials,
fixtures, specialty items, hardware, and trim.
C. Wall Sheathing:
1. Allow minimum 1/16 inch space at end joints and 1/8 inch at edge
joints, doubling these spacings in wet or humid conditions.
2. Unless noted otherwise on Drawings, minimum nailing shall be 6 inches
on center along panel edges and 12 inches on center at intermediate
supports.
3. Unless noted otherwise on Drawings, use 6d common nails for panels
and 1/2-inch thick and less, and 8d nails for greater thickness. See rough
carpentry section of General Structural Notes found on Drawings for
alternate fastener and spacing options.
4. Place an air infiltration barrier horizontally over wall sheathing, weather
lap edges, and ends.
D. Gypsum Sheathing:
1. Abut ends of sheathing at center of supports. Stagger end joints.
2. Attach sheathing using nails spaced at 8 inches on center on supports or
staple at 6 inches on center at supports.

06 10 00 - 10 JANUARY 2014
E. Air Infiltration Barrier: In accordance with Section 06 20 00, Finish
Carpentry.
3.04 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Provide preservative-treated wood for framing, blocking, furring, nailing
strips built into exterior masonry walls, wood in contact with concrete or
masonry and in conjunction with gravel stops, and built-up roofing.
B. Apply two brush coats of same preservative used in original treatment to
sawed or cut surfaces of treated lumber.
3.05 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATED WOOD
A. Provide fire-retardant treated lumber and plywood for framing and sheathing
and for backing panels at electrical, telephones, and like equipment.
B. Use FR-S rated wood on interior only.
C. Use exterior rated wood outside and where relative humidity is above
80 percent.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 FINISH CARPENTRY
JANUARY 2014 06 20 00 - 1
SECTION 06 20 00
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. American Hardboard Association (AHA): A135.4, Basic Hardboard.
2. APAThe Engineered Wood Association (APA): 303, Siding
Manufacturing Specifications.
3. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards.
4. ASTM International (ASTM): A653/A653M, Standard Specification for
Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
5. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): 156.9, Cabinet
Hardware.
6. California Redwood Association (CRA): Redwood Lumber Grades and
Uses.
7. Composite Panel Association (CPA): A208.1, Particleboard.
8. Federal Specifications (FS): A-A-1936, Adhesive, Contact, Neoprene
Rubber.
9. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): LD 3, High-
Pressure Decorative Laminates.
10. U.S. Department of Commerce, Voluntary Product Standards (DOC):
PS 1, Structural Plywood.
11. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA): G16, Standard Patterns.
12. Woodwork Institute (WI): Manual of Millwork.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings for Cabinets, Countertops, Casework, and Running
Trim:
a. Show field measurements, construction details, dimensions,
materials used, and finish.
1) Use full-size or 1/4-scale drawings.
2) Key Shop Drawings to Contract Drawings.

FINISH CARPENTRY PW/WBG/475883
06 20 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
1. Plastic Laminate Countertops: Submit manufacturers product data.
2. Submit two 6-inch by 6-inch Samples.
A. Quality Standards: AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, unless
detailed otherwise.
B. Plywood Grades: DOC PS 1. Identify each plywood panel with appropriate
grade trademark of APA-The Engineered Wood Association.
C. Grade and Trademark: Identify each piece or bundle of lumber or other
product with a recognized mark of the authority grading the product.
A. Defer material delivery to Site until installation or storage areas are complete
or protected from wetness. Install materials or store in these areas
immediately upon delivery and maintain relative humidity at 60 percent or
less.
B. Protect sheet materials from corner breaks and surface damage while
unloading.
C. Protect surfaces of cabinets, casework, shelving, and workbenches subject to
damage while in transit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMBER
A. Moisture Content: Kiln-dry lumber to an average moisture content range as
follows:
1. Exterior Work: 9 to 15 percent.
2. Interior Work: 5 to 10 percent.
B. Interior Trim, Door Frames, Casing, and Base: Plain sawn natural red birch,
AWI Custom Grade.
C. Hardwood: Plain sawn natural red birch, AWI Custom Grade.
2.02 PLYWOOD
A. Softwood Plywood: APA A-B Interior.

JANUARY 2014 06 20 00 - 3
B. Overlaid Plywood: EXT APA B-B with medium density overlay (MDO) on
both faces, plain surface, no grooves.
A. Plastic Laminate: 1/16-inch thick general-purpose type conforming to
NEMA LD 3, Grade GP-50.
B. Hardboard: Tempered hardboard, AHA A135.4, Type II, Surface 2, Finish A,
and Design A.
C. Air Infiltration Barrier:
1. Nonwoven sheet material composed of 100 percent high-density
polyethylene fibers bonded together under heat and pressure; Tyvek
CommercialWrap, as manufactured by E.I. DuPont de Nemours and Co.
2. Reinforced, 3-ply polyethylene sheet material; Griffolyn Type-65, as
manufactured by Reef Industries, Inc.
D. Adhesives:
1. For Woodwork: Phenol-resin or resorcinol-resin.
2. For Plastic Laminate: Contact cement; FS A-A-1936.
E. Hardware: Furnish fasteners and miscellaneous hardware required for
assembling and anchoring woodwork, including casework.
F. Carpenters Putty: Single-component, acrylic latex polymer, paintable, and
nonsag.
G. Metal Zee Flashing: Galvanized 0.0217-inch (26-gauge) steel sheet,
ASTM A653/A653M, G90; bend for 1-inch minimum vertical concealed leg
and 1/2-inch maximum exposed leg. Furnish 10-foot long pieces.
2.04 CABINET HARDWARE
A. As specified in this Section.
B. Hinges: For flush overlay or reveal overlay, use pin, pivot, or European style
hinge; 626 satin chrome finish.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Blum, Inc.
b. Grass America, Inc.
c. Stanley.
C. Continuous Hinges: Stanley No. Sc 311-1/4; 625 bright chrome finish.

06 20 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
D. Locks: Sargent and Co. 1654 MKD or Schlage 46-002; 626 satin chrome
finish keyed into building door lock system.
E. Catches: Stanley No. 46; 628 aluminum finish, magnetic.
F. Pulls: Stainless steel, Hafele #101.20.720, 128 mm, center-to-center, M4.
G. Drawer Slides: Knape and Vogt No. 1300, Grant No. 336SC.
H. Heavy-Duty Drawer Slides: Knape and Vogt No. 1460, Grant No. 4930.
I. Shelf Supports: BHMA 156.9, Types B84072/B84082, Knape and Vogt
No. 255/256, Grant No. 120/121; nickel-plated finish.
J. Heavy-Duty Shelf Supports: Knape and Vogt slotted standard No. 82 and
bracket 182, Stanley No. 6783 and 6785; clear anodized aluminum finish.
K. Shelf and Rod Support: Stanley No. 7046, Knape and Vogt No. 1195.
L. Metal Closet Pole with Flanges: Knape and Vogt No. 770-5 with 764 and 766,
Builders Brass Works 7770-5 with 7775-5 and 7776-5.
M. Heavy-Duty Folding Bracket: Stanley No. V772 heavy-duty folding shelf
bracket.
2.05 CABINETS, CASEWORK, SHELVING, AND WORKBENCHES
A. Exposed Solid Hardwood:
1. Plain sawn natural red birch, beech, or ash.
2. Semi-exposed and concealed members may be any species at option of
mill.
B. Assemble units in shop for field installation and application finishes.
C. Units may be factory finished provided finish conforms to that specified in the
Interior Finish Schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Do not install finish interior woodwork until building has been dry for at least
10 days.
B. Verify spaces and surface preparations are ready to receive finish carpentry
items.

JANUARY 2014 06 20 00 - 5
C. Broom clean spaces before beginning installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Lay out, cut, fit, and install finish carpentry items.
B. Anchor securely to ensure rigidity, tight fit, permanence, and as noted on
Drawings.
C. Install items accurate to dimension, true to line, level, and square unless
otherwise shown.
D. Install running trim in as long a length as practical.
1. Miter corners of casings and moldings.
2. Anchor securely using finishing nails.
3. Counter set nails 1/16 inch for filling.
E. Install shelving as shown. Make shelves level and fit loosely on supports so
they can be easily removed.
F. Follow manufacturers instructions for installation of hardware items.
G. Make Work neat and secure, developing full strength of components and
providing intended function.
3.03 CABINETS, CASEWORK, AND COUNTERTOP INSTALLATION
A. Examine rounds, stripping, and blocking to secure cabinets. Do not install
until defects are corrected.
B. Install units plumb and level without distortion.
C. Shim as necessary with concealed metal or hardwood shims.
D. Accurately scribe and closely fit faceplates, filler strips, and trim strips to
irregularities of adjacent surfaces.
E. Plastic Laminate:
1. Apply as recommended by laminate manufacturer.
2. Use minimal amount of cross joints with no longitudinal joints.
3. Scribe neatly to vertical surfaces.
F. Adjust doors and drawers to operate without restriction.

06 20 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
G. Cut holes in counter tops for sinks. Coordinate installation with other trades
and equipment requiring cutouts and fitting.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
JANUARY 2014 07 13 53 - 1
SECTION 07 13 53
ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. American Hardboard Association (AHA): A135.4 Basic Hardboard.
a. D412, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension.
b. D471, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Effect of
Liquids.
c. D476, Standard Classification for Dry Pigmentary Titanium
Dioxide Products.
d. D624, Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional
Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers.
e. D1149, Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration-Surface
Ozone Cracking in a Chamber.
f. D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer
Hardness.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings: Layout of sheets, location of field splices, type of
splices, and termination details.
2. Samples:
a. 12-inch by 12-inch membrane material.
b. 12-inch strip of splicing tape.
c. 1-quart splicing cement.
d. 1-quart bonding adhesive.
1. Certificates:
a. Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with
b. Written approval of installer by membrane manufacturer.
c. Evidence certifying applicators experience on equivalent
projects.

ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING PW/WBG/475883
07 13 53 - 2 JANUARY 2014
2. Manufacturers printed instructions including procedures for flashing,
splicing, and bonding.
3. Test report of field flood test.
A. Applicators Qualifications: Minimum of 3 years experience on equivalent
projects.
B. Preinstallation Meeting:
1. Notify Engineer before conducting meeting.
2. Prior to installation of waterproofing and associated Work, meet at Site
with applicator of each component of associated Work, and applicators
of work requiring coordination with waterproofing Work.
3. Review material selections and procedures to be followed in performing
Work.
A. Storage and Protection:
1. Do not cut, tear, or puncture elastomeric sheet.
2. Store materials onsite in enclosures or under waterproof protective
coverings.
3. Ensure materials are kept clean and dry.
4. Store materials off the ground.
1.05 SPECIAL GUARANTEE
A. Provide manufacturers extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named
as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall
provide for correction, or at the option of the Owner, removal and replacement
of Work specified in this specification section found defective during a period
of 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations
for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work shall be as
specified in the General Conditions.

JANUARY 2014 07 13 53 - 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Membrane Waterproofing:
1. Bituthene System 4000 Self Adhesive HDPE Waterproofing Membrane
for use on exterior cast-in-place concrete walls conforming to the
following physical properties:
Property Test Method Specifications
Color Gray
Tensile Strength ASTM D412 325 psi min.
Elongation @ Break ASTM D412 300% min.
Crack Cycling ASTM C836 - 25 deg F/
100 cycles
Puncture Resistance ASTM E154 50 lbs min.
Thickness ASTM D3767 1/16 inch
Water Absorption ASTM D570 0.1% max.
B. Plaza Deck Waterproofing Membrane:
1. Sarnafil G476 SA Self-adhering Composite Sheet conforming to the
following physical properties:
Property Test Method Specifications
Thickness ASTM D751 0.120 inch
Tensile Strength ASTM D638 1,600 psi min.
Elongation @ Break ASTM D638 240% min.
Weight 0.45 lb/ft
2

Tear Resistance ASTM 1004 21.3 lb/linear
foot min.
Resistance to Heat Aging ASTM D3045
Elongation, max. reduction ASTM D638 5%
Tensile strength, max. loss ASTM D638 5%

07 13 53 - 4 JANUARY 2014
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Flashings:
1. For Plaza Deck Warerproofing: Sarnifil G476-20, 60 mil (non-exposed)
and Sarnifil G459-15, 60-mil (exposed).
B. Adhesive for Plaza Deck Waterproofing: Sikaflex 11FC Grid adhesive for
G459 flashing membrane.
C. Insulation: Extruded polysyrene closed-cell foam with high compressive
strength.
D. Splicing Tape: Use only tape recommended or approved by membrane
manufacturer.
E. Splicing Cement: Use only cement recommended or approved by membrane
manufacturer.
F. Bonding Adhesive: Use only adhesive recommended or approved by
membrane manufacturer.
G. Protection Board: Tempered hardboard, 1/8 inch thick, conforming to
AHA A135.4, Type II, Surface 2, Finish A, and Design A.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify conditions prior to application:
1. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive membrane waterproofing and
plaza deck waterproofing to ensure they are smooth, dry, and free from
conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality
of Work.
2. Do not install membrane waterproofing or plaza deck waterproofing
until other Work that penetrates membrane has been completed and the
substrate and environmental conditions are in accordance with
requirements and satisfactory to the Engineer.
3. Application of waterproofing will be construed as acceptance of the
substrate.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove existing belowgrade materials. Sweep clean surfaces on or against
which waterproofing is applied. Remove loose and foreign materials that
could prevent proper adhesion.

JANUARY 2014 07 13 53 - 5
B. Remove fins, sharp edges, oil, and grease.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Plaza Deck Waterproofing: Remove existing overburden, waterproofing, base
flashings, and insulation. Prepare existing concrete surfaces for new plaza
deck waterproofing membrane.
B. Positioning Membrane Waterproofing:
1. Place membrane waterproofing sheet in final position without
stretching.
2. Allow membrane to relax 30 minutes minimum before making splices
or bonding to substrate.
3. Overlap adjacent sheets for splicing.
C. Applying Adhesive:
1. Spread adhesive in 6-inch strips over both mating surfaces.
2. Spread adhesive completely over both mating surfaces.
3. Place membrane in bond position without stretching, taking care to
avoid trapped air.
4. Roll with dry roller to remove air pockets.
D. Splicing:
1. Clean overlapping areas with heptane, hexane, or white gasoline.
2. Overlap sheets 3 inches minimum.
3. Join overlaps with splicing cement and tape to form splice in accordance
with manufacturers instructions.
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Apply waterproofing membrane to exterior surfaces of cast-in-place concrete
walls above ground level. Apply plaza deck membrane waterproofing that
enclose spaces that may be occupied, such as stairways, parking garages,
sidewalk plaza structures, galleries, pump rooms, mechanical and electrical
equipment rooms, and other areas indicated on Drawings. Apply plaza deck
waterproofing membrane to areas of existing concrete below sidewalks
excavated or disturbed by the installation of new brick pavers. Provide plaza
deck waterproofing to all areas of sloping plaza on the south side of City
Hall 2 after existing brick pavers have been removed. Apply plaza deck
membrane in areas indicated on Drawings.

07 13 53 - 6 JANUARY 2014
3.05 FIELD FINISHING
A. Flashings: Flash pipes, conduits, and other penetrations through waterproofing
in strict conformance with membrane manufacturers recommended
procedures, and as specified in Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and
Trim.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Do not backfill until protection board is installed.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 TRAFFIC COATINGS
JANUARY 2014 07 18 00 - 1
SECTION 07 18 00
TRAFFIC COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Complete manufacturers literature and technical data for the
Standard, Heavy Duty, and Extra Heavy Duty vehicular
coating system proposed.
b. Project-specific details of penetrations and perimeter conditions.
2. Samples:
a. Standard, Heavy Duty, and Extra Heavy Duty coating
system applied to 12-inch by 12-inch by 1/2-inch plywood or
similar rigid base.
b. One Sample of each color and coating type to be used on Project.
1. Licensed Applicator Certificate issued by the coating system
materials manufacturer.
2. Maintenance Manual: Upon completion of the coating system, submit
one maintenance manual, identified with project name, location, and
date; type of coating applied; and surface to which system was applied,
including sketches where necessary. Include recommendations for
periodic inspections, care, and maintenance. Identify common causes of
damage with instructions for temporary patching until repair can be
made.
3. Sample of special guarantee.
A. Applicator: Approved and licensed by the coating system materials
manufacturer.
B. Preapplication Conference:
1. Conduct a preapplication conference with the Engineer, applicator,
coating system materials manufacturer, and all Subcontractors likely to
be on the deck, present.
2. Questions regarding the acceptability of the substrate, the coating
system and related materials, and the mechanical related items should
be discussed and finalized during this conference.

TRAFFIC COATINGS PW/WBG/475883
07 18 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
A. Deliver materials to Site in sealed, undamaged containers. Identify containers
with material name, date of manufacture, and lot number.
A. Weather Conditions: Do not install coating materials if rain is anticipated or
predicted within 8 hours of application.
B. Temperature: Substrate surface above 40 degrees F and less than
110 degrees F.
C. Do not allow open fires or spark-producing equipment in application area
until after vapors have dissipated.
A. Furnish manufacturers extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named
provide for correction, or at the option of the Owner, removal and
replacement of Work specified in this Section found defective during a period
of 5 years after the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for
correction or removal and replacement of defective Work as specified in the
General Conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Pecora-Deck 800 series Vehicular Traffic Deck Coating as manufactured by
Pecora Corporation, Harleysville, PA.
B. Gacoflex GW-15-UBU (as applicable) Traffic Deck Coating system as
manufactured by Gates Engineering Co., Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. General: Materials used in the coating system shall be the end products of one
manufacturer or approved by the manufacturer whose coating system
specification is selected for use. Provide Standard, Heavy Duty, and
Extra Heavy Duty applications in areas as indicated in Article Application
Schedule.

JANUARY 2014 07 18 00 - 3
B. Traffic Coating: Polyurethane elastomer based and capable of producing a
seamless, waterproof coating system.
1. Color of Topcoating and Aggregate: Gray for vehicular coating.
C. Primer: As recommended by the deck coating system materials manufacturer
for the type of substrate involved.
D. Backer Rod: Expanded polyethylene rod equal to Ethafoam by Dow
Chemical.
E. Sealant: Polyurethane or polysulfide based, as recommended by coating
system materials manufacturer.
F. Flashing Reinforcement: Woven, uncoated fiberglass mesh.
G. Aggregate:
1. Vehicular: Silicon carbide or shell granules.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Remove all existing traffic coatings down to existing concrete topping slab.
Repair existing topping slab and replace damaged or exposed wire mesh
reinforcing. Provide new surface drains in locations indicated on Drawings.
Provide sloping cementitious/epoxy infill compatible with traffic coating
system between drains to reduce the potential for ponding of water and to
provide good surface drainage.
B. Thoroughly clean surfaces to receive coating system in strict accordance with
manufacturers instructions and recommendations.
1. Remove laitance, loose material on the surface, grease, oil, and other
contaminants which will affect bond of the coating system. Leave
surfaces broom-clean.
2. Prepare all concrete surfaces by brushoff blasting followed by vacuum
cleaning or by etching with a 10 to 15 percent solution of muriatic acid.
3. Flush all acid with clean water and allow to dry.
C. Condition of Surfaces:
1. Concrete Surfaces: Visibly dry and pass a 4-hour rubber mat test (no
condensation) prior to application of coating system. Mat shall be taped
to substrate on all edges.

07 18 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
2. Metal Surfaces: Dry and free from rust, corrosion, and coatings which
would affect bond of coating system, and without sharp edges or offset
at joints.
D. Rout or saw cut all cracks exceeding 1/16 inch in width and fill with sealant.
E. Use sealant to fill expansion, control, and construction joints to be overcoated
by traffic coating system. Provide 1/4-inch by 1/4-inch saw cut where coating
system to be terminated within a horizontal plane.
F. Protect adjacent surfaces with drop cloths or masking as required.
3.02 FLUID APPLIED FLASHINGS
A. Provide fluid applied flashings at locations where a horizontal surface abuts a
vertical surface and at all deck penetrations.
B. Unless detailed or specified otherwise, at projections through coating system
such as posts, vents, pipes, stanchions, railings, and similar locations of
potential slight movement, reinforce coating with one layer of flashing
reinforcement.
3.03 PRIMER AND DETAIL WORK
A. Prime concrete, masonry, and metal surfaces. Apply primer at manufacturers
recommended rate. Allow prime coat to completely dry but do not apply more
than 8 hours preceding application of coating. Metal prime coat may be
applied up to 9 days prior to application of coating.
B. Apply 20-mil dry film thickness of nonflowing type coating over flashings.
Extend coating 2 inches beyond flashing out onto adjacent substrate surface.
Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or where limited by height of base,
extend coating a minimum of 1 inch above the top of the flashing and
terminate in a neat straight line. Use masking tape for such purposes.
C. Apply 20-mil dry film thickness of nonflowing type coating for a distance of
1-1/2 inches on each side of all cracks.
D. Apply 20-mil dry film thickness of nonflowing type coating or nonadhering
tape for a distance of 2 inches on each side of expansion joints, control joints,
and construction joints to be coated.

JANUARY 2014 07 18 00 - 5
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Base Coat:
1. Apply coating material at a minimum wet film thickness of 25 to
30 mils. Extend coating over fluid applied flashings and detail coatings.
2. Allow to cure for 16 hours minimum. At temperatures less than
75 degrees F and relative humidities less than 50 percent, extend curing
time.
B. Intermediate Coat 1 (Standard Duty): Apply coating material at a minimum
wet film thickness of 16 to 20 mils and broadcast aggregate while still wet.
Allow to cure for 8 hours minimum.
C. Intermediate Coat 2 (Heavy Duty): Apply coating material at a minimum wet
film thickness of 16 to 20 mils and broadcast aggregate while still wet. Allow
to cure for 8 hours minimum.
D. Intermediate Coat 3 (Extra Heavy Duty): Apply coating material at a
minimum wet film thickness of 16 to 20 mils and broadcast aggregate while
still wet. Allow to cure for 8 hours minimum.
E. Topcoat:
1. Apply topcoating material at a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils
to all areas which have been previously coated.
2. While coating is still fluid, uniformly broadcast aggregate over surface
at the rate of 5 pounds per 100 square feet. Immediately roll to evenly
distribute and completely coat the aggregate.
3. Allow topcoat to cure for 24 hours minimum (pedestrian) and 48 hours
minimum (vehicular) before permitting traffic on surfaces. At
temperatures less than 75 degrees F and relative humidities less than
50 percent, extend curing time.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean stains from adjacent surfaces with toluene, 1,1,1, trichloroethane,
xylene, commercial tar remover, or as recommended by coating manufacturer.
B. Remove foreign matter from finished coating surfaces.

07 18 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
3.06 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Parking spaces apply Standard application; drives apply Heavy Duty
application, and turns and ramps Extra Heavy Duty application.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 THERMAL INSULATION
JANUARY 2014 07 21 00 - 1
SECTION 07 21 00
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
a. C272, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Core
Materials for Structural Sandwich Constructions.
b. C303, Standard Test Method for Dimensions and Density of
Preformed Block and Board-Type Thermal Insulation.
c. C549, Standard Specification for Perlite Loose Fill Insulation.
d. C578, Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene
Thermal Insulation.
e. C665, Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal
Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured
Housing.
f. D4397, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for
Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications.
g. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
h. E96/E96M, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission
of Materials.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings: Manufacturers product literature identifying products
proposed for use.
A. On packaging clearly identify manufacturer, contents, brand name, applicable
standard, and R-value.
B. Store materials off ground and keep them dry. Protect against weather,
condensation, and damage.

THERMAL INSULATION PW/WBG/475883
07 21 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BATT INSULATION AND FASTENERS
A. Fiberglass or Mineral Wool Batts:
1. ASTM C665, Type I, with no vapor retarder for use as sound
attenuation blankets, III, Class A, with 0.10 or less perm rating,
reinforced reflective aluminum foil vapor retarder membrane laminated
to one side with R-values of 19.
2. Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corp.
b. Owens-Corning Insulating Systems.
c. Johns Manville.
B. Fasteners: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C. Tape: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
2.02 RIGID INSULATION
A. Extruded Polystyrene Foam:
1. ASTM C578, Type IV.
2. Flame Spread: Less than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Thickness: As shown.
a. Dow Chemical Co.; Styrofoam Square Edge.
b. UC Industries; Foamular.
B. Adhesives and Fasteners: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
2.03 SPRAY-ON INSULATION
A. Cellulose Fiber:
1. Thermal Conductivity (K) Value: 0.22, maximum.
2. Flame Spread: 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Fuel Contribution: 10 or less.
4. Smoke Developed Rating: 0.
5. Color: Grey where exposed.
a. International Cellulose Corp.; K-13.
b. ThermoCon; Spray-Tec ThermoCon spray-on insulation.

PW/WBG/475883 THERMAL INSULATION
JANUARY 2014 07 21 00 - 3
B. Mineral Fiber:
1. Thermal Conductivity (K) Value: 0.26, maximum.
2. Flame Spread: 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Fuel Contribution: 15 or less.
4. Smoke Developed Rating: 10 or less.
5. Color: White with minimum light reflectance of 70 percent where
exposed.
a. American Energy Products, Inc.; SprayDon, Type II.
b. United States Mineral Products Co.; Cafco Heat-Shield.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 BATT INSULATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions and as specified below:
1. Install in widths required by framing spacing with vapor retarder facing
warm side.
2. Fit tightly to ensure continuous seal. Tape overlapping flanges of vapor
retarder when necessary, using tape as recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
3. Where electrical outlets, ducts, pipes, vents, or other utility items occur,
place insulation on cold weather side of obstruction.
4. Protect installed insulation from tears and other damage until covered
with finish material.
5. Remove and replace damaged material.
3.02 RIGID INSULATION
A. Install in accordance with the following:
1. Install boards in location and in thickness as shown.
2. Cut insulation with saw, knife, or other sharp tool to fit tightly around
obstructions.
3. Butt insulation boards together tightly at joints.
4. Where thickness required exceeds 1-1/2 inches, install two layers of
boards.
5. Apply to masonry or concrete with fasteners recommended by
insulation manufacturer.
3.03 SPRAY-ON INSULATION
A. Surface Preparation: Free of dirt, grease, oil, loose paint, excessive rust scale,
or other foreign material, which would prevent adequate adhesion.

THERMAL INSULATION PW/WBG/475883
07 21 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
B. Ambient Temperature: Between 40 degrees F and 155 degrees F throughout
application process.
C. Application:
1. Mix, apply, and finish in accordance with manufacturers instructions
for monolithic blanket of uniform texture.
2. Blanket Thickness: Minimum 2 inches.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE
JANUARY 2014 ROOFING
SECTION 07 54 23
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes vapor retarder on concrete hollow core slab roof deck,
insulation, protection board and membrane roofing, base flashings roofing
membrane expansion joints, cant strips, and counterflashings.
1.02 REFERENCES
1. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA): U1, Use Category
System: User Specification for Treated Wood.
a. C578, Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene
Thermal Insulation.
b. C728, Standard Specification for Perlite Thermal Insulation
Board.
c. C1289, Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular
Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.
d. D41, Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,
Dampproofing, and Waterproofing.
e. D312, Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing.
f. D412, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension.
g. D471, Standard Test Method for Rubber PropertyEffect of
Liquids.
h. D573, Standard Test Method for RubberDeterioration in an Air
Oven.
i. D751, Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics.
j. D1149, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Deterioration-Cracking
in an Ozone Controlled Environment.
k. D1204, Standard Test Method for Linear Dimensional Changes of
Nonrigid Thermoplastic Sheeting or Film at Elevated
Temperature.
l. D4601, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Coated Glass Fiber
Base Sheet Used in Roofing.
m. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
n. E96/E96M, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission
of Materials.
o. E108, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE PW/WBG/475883
ROOFING JANUARY 2014
p. E119, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building
Construction and Materials.
q. E408, Standard Test Methods for Total Normal Emittance of
Surfaces Using Inspection-Meter Techniques.
r. E1980, Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index
of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces.
3. FM Global (FM):
a. DS 1-28, Design Wind Loads.
b. DS 1-29, Roof Deck Securement and Above-Deck Roofing
Components.
c. 4450, Approval Standard for Class I Insulated Steel Deck Roofs.
4. International Code Council (ICC): International Building Code (IBC).
5. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed) (WH), Certification
Listings.
6. National Roofing Contractors Association: NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual.
7. Single Ply Roofing Institute (SPRI): ES-1, Wind Design Standard for
Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems.
8. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
a. 790, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.
b. 1256, Fire Test of Roof Deck Constructions.
c. 1897, Uplift Tests for Roof Covering Systems.
9. U.S. Department of Defense Military Standard (MIL): 3010, Test
Procedures for Packaging Materials.
10. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): ENERGY STAR -
ENERGY STAR Voluntary Labeling Program.
A. Low Slope Membrane Roof Edge Securement: Conform to SPRI ES-1 for
wind speeds determined from applicable edition of ICC IBC code.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Roof Assembly Classification: FM-approved roof system(s), in accordance
with FM DS 1-29.
B. Vapor Retarder Permeance: Maximum 0.1 perm when tested in accordance
with ASTM E96/E96M, desiccant method or water method.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
1. Project-specific details of roof penetrations and perimeter conditions.
2. Layout and details of fully adhered system in areas to be repaired.

3. List of materials proposed for use; include roofing materials,
accessories, insulation, and fasteners.
4. Manufacturers specifications selected for use; include description of
complete system from deck up.
5. Documentation that anchoring system meets uplift requirements.
2. Manufacturers installation instructions.
3. Letter or other documentation from roofing materials manufacturer
stating that installer has been trained and approved to apply roof system.
4. Sample copy of guarantee to be provided.
5. Record of Preroofing Conference.
6. Inspection reports for inspections conducted by membrane
manufacturers representative; include written instructions or
recommendations as conditions to special guarantee.
7. Operation and Maintenance Data:
a. Include sketches where applicable, recommendations for periodic
inspection, care, and maintenance.
b. Identify common causes of damage with instructions for
temporary patching until permanent repair can be made.
8. Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with
9. Proposed Maintenance Agreement.
A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing
Manual.
B. Roof Assembly Fire Classification: Minimum Class A when tested in
accordance with ASTM E108 or UL 790.
1. Roof Assembly with Foam Insulation: Passes FM 4450 or UL 1256.
C. Surface Burning Characteristics:
1. Foam Insulation: Maximum 75/450 flame spread/smoke developed
index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
D. Apply label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify
each roof assembly component.

1.07 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Trained and approved by roof membrane manufacturer.
2. Experience: 3 years, minimum, in the installation of the specific roofing
and flashing system specified.
B. Materials, including insulation used in roofing system shall be furnished by or
approved by manufacturer whose roofing system is selected for use.
1.08 PREROOFING CONFERENCE
A. Conference Requirements:
1. Attendees: Engineer, roofing installer, roofing manufacturer, installers
of related Work, and other entities concerned with roofing performance
included, where applicable, Owners insurer, test agencies, governing
authorities, and Owner.
2. Agenda: Follow outline in NRCAs Waterproofing Manual. Include
acceptability of deck, roofing system, materials, manufacturers
specifications selected, flashing details, roof guarantee, and protection
of furnished roofing system.
3. Documentation: Record discussion and agreements. Furnish copy to
each attendee invited.
B. Membrane manufacturers inspections as required to meet conditions of
guarantee.
A. Deliver materials in their original, unopened containers, clearly labeled with
manufacturers name, brand name, and such identifying numbers as are
appropriate.
B. Storage:
1. Store materials at temperatures between 60 degrees F and 80 degrees F.
Should they be exposed to lower temperatures, restore to 60 degrees F
prior to use.
2. Store rigid roof insulation materials on clean, raised platform.
3. Do not store uncured flashing membrane on roof or at temperatures
exceeding 75 degrees F.
C. Protect materials against wetting, moisture absorption, and construction
traffic.

A. Weather: Do not install roofing during precipitation or when it is probable.
B. Temperature:
1. Install roofing when ambient temperature is 50 degrees F or above.
2. When temperature is below 50 degrees F, install only with approval or
and under supervision of membrane manufacturer.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work with installation of new structural collectors, roof
penetrations and metal flashings, as Work of this Section proceeds.
A. Product: Furnish manufacturers extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner
named as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall
provide for correction, or at the option of the Owner, removal and replacement
of roofing membrane, flashing, insulation, and accessories found defective
during a period of 20 years after date of Substantial Completion. Duties and
obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work shall
be as specified in the General Conditions.
B. Coverage and Conditions:
1. Costs for repairs required to maintain roofing system, flashing,
expansion joint covers, and roof vents in watertight condition.
2. Natural deterioration of roofing system as a result of ordinary wear and
tear by elements.
3. Defects as a result of faulty materials or workmanship during
application.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fully Adhered TPO Roofing:
1. Johns Manville; ST6RA-C/I, 60-mil membrane.
2. Firestone Building Products Co.; Ultraply TPO.
3. Dow/Stevens; EP TPO.
4. GenFlex Roofing Systems; TPO.

2.02 ROOFING SYSTEM
A. Roofing system shall meet these Specifications, and approval and warranty of
membrane manufacturer to provide a fully adhered complete TPO or EPDM
system to match the existing roofing system including the following:
1. Membrane.
2. Roof insulation.
3. Cover board.
4. Flashing.
5. Adhesives.
6. Fasteners.
7. Accessory materials.
8. Vapor retarder.
9. (Note: Contractor to verify all materials used for existing roof system
and replace in kind in areas disturbed by the installation of new
structural collectors.)
2.03 MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. Reinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet,0.060-inch thick with the following
properties:
Properties Test Method Specification
Thickness Tolerance ASTM D751 Plus or minus 10%
Breaking Strength
(min)
ASTM D751, Grab
Method
270 pounds
Elongation at Break ASTM D412 28%
Tear Strength (min) ASTM D751 70 pounds
Ozone Resistance ASTM D1149,
70 hours at
100 degrees F
No cracks or other
affect
Heat Aging ASTM D573, 28 days
at 212 degrees F
retention of tensile
Maintain 100% of
original breaking
strength
Water Absorption
(change in mass)
ASTM D471,
158 degrees F for
7 days
1%
Hydrostatic Resistance
(min)
ASTM D751, Method
A
430 psi
Puncture Resistance MIL Std 3010 380 pounds

Properties Test Method Specification
Dimensional Stability
(% change max.)
ASTM D1204 + 0.4%
B. Membrane Sheet Size: Cut sections of membrane to fit over the areas of
membrane removed to provide a single piece of membrane wherever possible.
C. Color: White.
D. Energy and Environment:
1. Roof Surface: Minimum solar reflectance index (SRI) for 75 percent of
roof area, in accordance with ASTM E1980. Emissivity in accordance
with ASTM E408.
a. ENERGY STAR: Reflectivity 0.78, emissivity 0.90.
b. California Title 24: Reflectivity 0.78, emissivity 0.87.
c. LEED: Reflectivity 0.78, emissivity 0.90, post-consumer recycled
content 0 percent, post-industrial recycled content 3 to 5 percent.
2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Adhesives and Fasteners:
1. Surface Conditioner: Compatible with membrane.
2. Membrane cover board, and insulation adhesives and fasteners as
recommended by membrane manufacturer.
3. Thinner and Cleaner: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer,
compatible with sheet membrane.
B. Flashing:
1. 0.60-inch roofing membrane.
2. Provide unreinforced 0.070-inch thick roofing membrane for field
fabricated vent stacks, pipes, and corners.
C. Primer: ASTM D41 Asphalt.
D. Asphalt: ASTM D312, Type III steep asphalt.
E. Roofing Felt: ASTM D4601, Type IV or VI asphalt-coated glass fiber mat.
F. Nailers: Preservative treated wood as specified in Section 06 10 00, Rough
Carpentry.
1. Waterborne salt preservatives; AWPA U1.

2. Apply two brush coats of same preservative used in original treatment to
sawed or cut surfaces of treated lumber.
3. Minimum Grade: Standard of Better, or Stud Grade.
2.05 RIGID ROOF INSULATION BOARD
A. Average Aged R-value for Total Thickness of Rigid Insulation: Minimum
R30 or match existing thickness.
B. New insulation is to match the type of insulation currently being used as part
of the existing roof system. Match thickness of existing adjacent rigid
insulation.
2.06 COVER BOARD
A. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Johns Manville; Duraboard, Nailboard, Invinsa Roof Board, ENRG
3-Plus.
2. Wood Fibers Industries (USG); StructoDek.
2.07 ROOF WALKWAY
A. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Johns Manville; TPO Walkpad.
2. Stevens; EP Walkway Pad.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Roof work shall be performed in areas to receive new structural collectors that
are located below the existing roof surface. Care must be taken to cut the
existing membrane only to the extent necessary to install the new structural
elements. Repair all flashings and other adjacent materials effected by the
installation of new structural elements.
B. Surfaces to be adhered shall be dry before and throughout entire application.
C. Notify Engineer and manufacturers representative at least 48 hours before
installation of vapor retarder, insulation, membrane, and roofing system.
D. Inspection:
1. Verify work of other trades that penetrates roof deck or requires roof
access has been completed.

2. Ensure deck is firm, dry, free of foreign material, and reasonably
smooth.
a. Differential height between adjacent roof deck members of more
than 1/8 inch is not acceptable.
b. Repair joints greater than 1/4 inch wide.
3. Report immediately to Engineer cracks, breaks, holes, or other unusual
irregularities in surface.
4. Cover rough surface that would cause damage to membrane with
protection board.
E. Reroofing:
1. Remove existing roof membrane, and insulation from roof deck.
2. Inspect deck for damage and notify Engineer of areas that require repair.
F. Nailers:
1. Install wooden nailers at gravel stops or drip edges on outside perimeter
of building.
2. Anchor nailer with a suitable fastener with minimum withdrawal
resistance of 100 pounds.
3. Stagger fasteners 6 inches on center within 8 feet of outside corner and
12 inches on center along other perimeter areas.
4. Nailer Thickness: Choose to match top surface of adjacent construction.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. In accordance with membrane manufacturers standard details for flashing and
termination conditions not shown.
B. Existing roof is an adhered membrane.
C. In accordance with Article Performance Requirements for uplift conditions.
D. In accordance with applicable recommendations of FM DS 1-29.
E. Vapor Retarder: Apply vapor retarder consisting of a minimum of two layers
of roofing felts mopped in with steep asphalt in accordance with roofing
materials manufacturers specifications.
F. Insulation:
1. Keep insulation dry before and during application.
2. Install rigid insulation where and to thickness necessary to match
thickness of existing insulation.
3. Lay insulation with longest dimension perpendicular to direction of
membrane seams with joints staggered over roof area to be covered.

4. Butt boards as closely as possible with no gaps over 1/4 inch.
5. Mechanically fasten or adhere insulation to deck following roofing
membrane manufacturers instructions.
6. Do not install more insulation each day than can be covered with
membrane before end of day or start of inclement weather.
G. Cover Board:
1. Apply minimum 3/4-inch cover board to rigid insulation substrate with
longest dimension perpendicular to membrane seams with joints
staggered over roof area to be covered.
2. Fasten cover board with adhesive to concrete substrate in accordance
with roofing membrane manufacturers instructions.
H. Membrane:
1. Install membrane and flashing in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations and instructions.
2. Heat weld joints following manufacturers instructions.
3. Fully adhere membrane to substrate.
I. Flashing: Install perimeter, curb, vents, expansion joints, drains, and other
detail flashing as shown on manufacturers standard detail drawings and as
follows:
1. Heat weld flashing to membrane and attach to other surfaces following
manufacturers instructions.
2. Install pipe flashing, expansion joints, and roof drains in accordance
with manufacturers standard details and instructions.
J. Temporary and Night Seals:
1. Provide water cutoffs under the following circumstances:
a. Where and when a danger exists that water caused by
precipitation may get under new roofing membrane.
b. At end of each day.
2. Make by securely setting end of membrane in 6-inch wide continuous
application of cement and weight adhered edge to prevent displacement
of cutoff.
3. Remove temporary water cutoffs prior to proceeding with next work
period by cutting off and disposing of portion of membrane that has
been in contact with cement.
K. Walkways: Adhere to membrane with membrane manufacturers bonding
adhesive.

inspection and Certification of Proper Installation, equipment testing, startup
assistance, and training of Owners personnel for specified component,
subsystem, equipment, or system.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove spots and smears of asphalt or other material from flashings, gravel
stops, and other surfaces not intended to be coated with such material. During
removal, do not damage surfaces. Use solvents, if necessary, to clean surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Limit traffic of personnel and equipment on completed roof to that deemed
essential for completion of Project.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
JANUARY 2014 07 62 00 - 1
SECTION 07 62 00
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
b. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-
c. A666, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked
Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, and Flat Bar.
d. A924/A924M Standard Specification for General Requirements
for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
e. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
f. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate.
g. B370, Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for
Building Construction.
h. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
i. C1311, Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants.
j. D1187, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for
Use as Protective Coatings for Metal.
k. D4586, Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement,
Asbestos-Free.
2. Federal Specifications (FS): QQ-L-201F(2), Lead Sheet.
3. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
(SMACNA): Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 5th Edition.
A. General: Sheet metal flashing, trim, and soffits shall withstand wind loads,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather
without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.
B. Thermal Movements:
1. Provide sheet metal flashing, trim, and soffits that allows for thermal
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in
ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PW/WBG/475883
07 62 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
2. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of
sheet metal and trim thermal movements.
3. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due
to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
4. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F,
material surfaces.
C. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing, trim, and soffits that do not
allow water infiltration to building interior.
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNAs
Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Conform to dimensions and profiles
shown, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Show joints, types and location of fasteners, and special shapes.
b. Catalog data for stock manufactured items.
2. Samples: Color Samples for items to be factory finished.
1.05 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
A. Inspect for damage, dampness, and wet storage stains upon delivery to Work
Site.
B. Remove and replace damaged or permanently stained materials that cannot be
restored to like-new condition.
C. Carefully handle to avoid damage to surfaces, edges, and ends.
D. Do not open packages until ready for use.
E. Store materials in dry, weathertight, ventilated areas until immediately before
installation.
named as beneficiary, in writing, as Special Guarantee. Special Guarantee
shall provide for correction or, at the option of the Owner, removal and

JANUARY 2014 07 62 00 - 3
replacement of factory-applied fluoropolymer coating, finish, and accessories
found defective during a period of 20 years after date of Substantial
Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement
of defective Work shall be as specified in General Conditions.
B. Conditions:
1. Finish: No cracking, blistering, flaking, chipping, checking, chalking,
peeling, or fading.
2. All Components: Watertight and weathertight with normal usage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SOFFITS
A. Soffit panels, nominal 1 inch by 12 inches, flush panels, 0.040 aluminum with
Kynar 500 factory applied coating, meeting ASTM E330-90 structural
performance. Panels to be UC-500 profile as manufactured by Firestone Metal
Products, or approved equal.
2.02 METAL
A. Prefinished Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy and temper as required for
application and finish: 0.032-inch thick; mill finish; shop precoated with
fluoropolymer coating (Kynar polyvinylidene fluoride resin) coating; color as
selected from manufacturers standard color range.
B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 304 or Type 316, soft temper; No. 2D,
dull finish, 0.018 inch thick, unless otherwise shown.
C. Copper: ASTM B370, Temper Designation Standard H00, cold-rolled
1/8 hard, 16 ounces per square foot.
2.03 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHING
A. For Concrete:
1. Stainless steel, 0.015 inch.
a. Fry Reglet Corp.; Fry Springlok Type CO and Springlok Flashing.
b. Cheney Flashing Co.; Type A reglet and Snap Lock Cap Flashing.
B. For Masonry:

07 62 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
a. Fry Reglet Corp.; Fry Springlok Type MA and Springlok
Flashing.
b. Cheney Flashing Co.; Type B reglet and Snap Lock Cap Flashing.
C. Surface Mounted:
a. Fry Reglet Corp.; Fry Springlok Type SM and Springlok
Flashing.
b. Cheney Flashing Co.; Type D reglet and Snap Lock Cap Flashing.
2.04 PREFABRICATED METAL SYSTEMS
A. Gravel Stop and Fascia System:
1. Smooth aluminum, 0.050-inch minimum thickness.
2. Include ancillary items, such as prefabricated spillout scupper, fascia
sump, and mitered and welded corners, where shown and as required for
a complete system.
a. W.P. Hickman Co.; Econosnap for single-ply membranes.
b. MM Systems Corp.; SLF Series for single-ply membranes.
B. Coping System:
1. Snap-on system, smooth aluminum, 0.050-inch minimum thickness.
2. Include ancillary items, such as mitered and welded corners, and end
caps, where shown and as required for complete system.
a. W.P. Hickman Co.; Permasnap Coping.
b. MM Systems Corp.; Snap-Lok Coping.
C. Finish: Factory finished with full strength fluoropolymer coating (Kynar
polyvinylidene fluoride resin) in color to match existing adjacent coping
systems.
A. Solder: ASTM B32, alloy composition Sn 50 and Sn 60 for stainless steel.
B. Soldering Flux: ASTM B32, Type RA.
C. Sealing Tape: Polyisobutylene sealing tape specifically manufactured for
setting flanges on bituminous roofing.

JANUARY 2014 07 62 00 - 5
D. Isolation Paint: ASTM D1187, asphalt.
E. Isolation Tape: Butyl or polyisobutylene, internally reinforced, or 20-mil thick
minimum polyester.
F. Plastic Roof Cement: ASTM D4586, Type II.
G. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of
type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal
flashing and trim and remain watertight.
H. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber
sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion
joints with limited movement.
I. Fasteners:
1. For Galvanized Steelwork: Steel, galvanized per ASTM A153/A153M
or stainless steel fasteners.
2. For Zinc or Aluminum Work: Stainless steel or aluminum; reglet
fasteners may be galvanized or cadmium-plated steel.
3. For Stainless Steelwork: Stainless steel.
4. For Copperwork: Copper or copper alloy.
5. Nails: Roofing nailhead, 10-gauge spiral or ring shank, lengths as
required to penetrate wood at least 3/4 inch or as required in Article
Performance Requirements.
2.06 FABRICATION OF FLASHING
A. Field measure prior to fabrication.
B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual
that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item
indicated.
C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to
comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for
each application and metal.
D. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed
edges folded back to form hems.
1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams.
Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional
strength.

07 62 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
E. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories
with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
F. Reinforcements and Supports: Provide same material as flashing, unless other
material is shown. Steel, where shown or required, shall be galvanized or
stainless.
G. Rigid Joints and Seams: Make mechanically strong. Seal aluminum joints
with sealant. Solder stainless steel metal joints. Do not use solder to transmit
stress.
H. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to
accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA
recommendations.
I. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in
the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked
flanges, not less than 1-inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within
joints.
J. Fabricate sheet metal in 10-foot maximum lengths, unless otherwise indicated.
K. At exposed ends of counterflashing furnish watertight closures.
L. Fabricate corners in one-piece with legs extending 30 inches each way to field
joint. Lap, rivet, or solder corner seams watertight. Apply sealant if necessary.
M. Neutralize soldering flux.
N. Solvent clean sheet metal. Surfaces to be in contact with roofing or otherwise
concealed shall be coated with isolation paint.
O. Pipe Penetrations through Roof: As specified in Section 07 70 01, Roof
Specialties and Accessories.
P. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-
view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.
Q. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory
being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
1. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNAs Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual and FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for
application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

JANUARY 2014 07 62 00 - 7
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are
solidly set, and cant strips and reglets in place.
B. Verify nailing strips and blocking are properly located.
C. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and
secure.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Soffits: Follow the manufacturers latest installations instructions and
detailing.
B. Flashing:
1. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with
performance requirements and SMACNAs Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to
line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that
will be permanently watertight.
2. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces
according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data
Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated.
a. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats
anchored to substrate at 16-inch centers.
3. Isolate metal from wood and concrete and from dissimilar metal with
isolation tape or two coats of isolation paint.
4. Use only stainless steel fasteners to connect isolated dissimilar metals.
5. Joints: 10-foot maximum spacing and 2-1/2 feet from corners, butted
with 3/16-inch space centered over matching 8-inch-long backing plate
with sealing tape in laps.
6. Set flanges of flashings and roof accessories on continuous sealer tape
or in plastic roof cement on top of envelope ply of roofing. Nail flanges
through sealing tape and at 3-inch maximum spacing. Touch up
isolation paint on flanges.
7. Joints, Fastenings, Reinforcements, and Supports: Sized and located as
required to preclude distortion or displacement due to thermal
expansion and contraction.
8. Provide continuous holddown clips at counterflashing and gravel stops.
9. Conceal fastenings wherever possible.
10. Set flashing and sheet metal to straight, true lines with exposed faces
aligned in proper plane without bulges or waves.

07 62 00 - 8 JANUARY 2014
11. At vents through roof turn down lead flashing minimum 2 inches inside
vent pipe.
C. Prefabricated Metal Systems:
1. Follow system manufacturers printed instructions.
2. Place color variations in pieces so no extremes are next to each other.
3.03 FINISH
A. Exposed Surfaces of Flashing and Sheet Metalwork: Free of dents, scratches,
abrasions, or other visible defects, and clean and ready for painting where
applicable.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform
oxidation and weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal
flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished
surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems,
and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have
deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor
repair procedures.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 ROOF SPECIALTIES
SECTION 07 70 01
ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. Air Movement and Control Association International (AMCA).
2. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA).
a. D1187, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for
b. D4586, Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement,
Asbestos-Free.
4. FM (Factory Mutual) Global (FM).
5. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL).
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing materials, details,
flashing, anchorage, and relation to adjacent structure.
2. Catalog cuts of each item specified item.
A. Coordination: Schedule and coordinate work of this Section with work of
Section 07 54 23, Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing, and Section 07 62 00,
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FALL PROTECTION DAVITS
A. Prefabricated galvanized steel supports located as shown on the Roof Plan and
fastened to the existing roof deck system to meet OSHA Fall Protection
requirements. Provide all components necessary for a complete and operable
system. Provide Davit Posts Model No. CB-18, as supplied by Boise Rigging.

ROOF SPECIALTIES PW/WBG/475883
2.02 ROOF CURBS
A. Prefabricated Galvanized Steel: Minimum 12-inch-high curb with treated
wood nailer, liner panel, and factory installed insulation as required for
conditions shown on Drawings.
B. Metal Gauge and Reinforcement: To suit imposed loads of equipment to be
supported.
C. Fabricate curbs to fit roof slope.
1. Pate Co.; PC-2.
2. ThyCurb; Model TC-3.
3. RPS Corporation; RC-2A.
2.03 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT CURBS
A. Prefabricated Galvanized Steel: Minimum 12-inch-high curb with
counterflashing, factory installed insulation, and treated wood nailer as
required for conditions shown on Drawings.
B. Metal Gauge and Reinforcement: To suit imposed loads of equipment to be
supported.
C. Fabricate curbs to fit roof slope.
1. Pate Co.; ES-2.
2. ThyCurb; Model TEMS-3.
3. RPS Corporation; ER-2A.
2.04 PIPE CURB ASSEMBLY
A. Prefabricated Galvanized Steel: Minimum 12-inch-high curb for pipe
penetrations of roof, complete with cover, liner panel, factory installed
insulation and accessories as required for conditions shown on Drawings.
B. Fabricate to fit roof slope and furnish covers to suit pipe penetrations

PW/WBG/475883 ROOF SPECIALTIES
1. Pate Co.; PCA-2, with cover.
2. ThyCurb; Model TC-3, with cover.
3. RPS Corporation; Pipe Portal System.
2.05 EXPANSION AND WALL CURBS
A. Prefabricated Galvanized Steel: Minimum 12-inch-high curb with treated
wood nailer, liner panel, factory-installed insulation, inside and outside
corners, sloping end sections, spreader clips, and connector clips, as required
for conditions shown on Drawings.
B. Fabricate curbs to fit roof slope.
1. Pate Co.; EJ-2.
2. ThyCurb; Model TJX-3.
3. RPS Corporation; EC-2A.
2.06 PIPE SEALS
A. Prefabricated one-piece aluminum flanged base with stepped, graduated
EPDM cap and adjustable stainless steel clamps.
1. Pate Co.; Pipe Seal.
2. Portals Plus, Inc.; Alumi-Flash.
2.07 FLEXIBLE BASE PIPE SEALS
A. Prefabricated one-piece aluminum flanged base with stepped, graduated
EPDM cap and adjustable stainless steel clamps. Aluminum base shall be
capable of bending to match profile of sheet metal roofing panels.
1. Pate Co.; Dektite.
2. Portals Plus, Inc.; Deck-Mate.
2.08 VENT PIPE FLASHING
A. Prefabricated flashing with elastomeric collar and 0.032-inch aluminum base,
sized to fit vent pipe.

ROOF SPECIALTIES PW/WBG/475883
B. Manufacturer and Product: Oatey; No-Caulk Roof Flashing.
A. Sealer Tape: Polyisobutylene sealer tape specifically manufactured for setting
flanges on bituminous roofing.
B. Isolation Paint: ASTM D1187, asphalt.
C. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete or dissimilar metals as
specified in Section 09 90 05, Architectural Painting.
D. Isolation Tape: Butyl or polyisobutylene, internally reinforced, or 20-mil-
thick minimum polyester.
E. Plastic Roof Cement: ASTM D4586, Type II.
F. Fasteners: Stainless steel of type required.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Examine surfaces and structures to receive the Work of this Section.
B. Take measurements at Site and fabricate work to suit. No changes shall be
made in supporting structure to accommodate this Work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install roof specialties and accessories as detailed in approved Shop
Drawings and in conformance with manufacturers instructions,
recommendations, and standards.
2. Use appropriate pipe curb assembly, pipe seal, flexible base pipe seal, or
vent pipe flashing where pipe, conduit, or cable, etc., penetrate roofing
membrane.
3. Factory Finished Units: Place color variations in pieces so no extremes
are next to each other.
4. Make Work weathertight and free of expansion and contraction noise.
5. Maintain separation between aluminum surfaces and concrete or
dissimilar metals with isolation paint.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 FIRESTOPPING
JANUARY 2014 07 84 00 - 1
SECTION 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. ASTM International (ASTM): E814, Test Method for Fire Tests of
Through-Penetration Firestops.
2. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL):
a. 1479, Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
b. 2079, Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide systems of material or combination of materials used to fill openings
around penetrating items to prevent the spread of fire and retain integrity of
fire rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against spread of
flame, smoke, water, and hot gases through penetrations in fire rated wall and
floor assemblies.
B. Provide Fire Safing:
1. At slot gaps between edge of floor slabs and exterior walls.
2. Gaps between top of walls and structure above.
3. Expansion joints in walls, floors, and ceilings.
C. Performance Requirements: Provide firestop systems with materials that have
been manufactured and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by
manufacturer without defects, damage, or failure.
D. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Firestop Systems: Meet requirements of ASTM E814, UL 1479, or
UL 2079 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of
construction being penetrated.
2. Proposed Firestop Materials and Methods: Conform to applicable
governing codes having local jurisdiction.
3. Meet F and T ratings of ASTM E814 for a period equal to construction
penetrated.
4. Underwriters Laboratories classified as fill, void, or cavity materials
under UL 1479.

FIRESTOPPING PW/WBG/475883
07 84 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings: Show layout, profiles, and product components;
include UL Systems Number on Shop Drawings and diagram of UL
approved assembly.
2. Product Data: Include manufacturers SPEC-DATA product sheet for
products selected for use.
2. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified
performance characteristics and physical properties.
3. Certificates:
a. Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that
materials comply with specified performance characteristics and
physical requirements.
b. Certificate indicating installer qualifications.
c. Certificate of Proper Installation.
4. Special Guarantee documents specified below.
A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced in performing Work of this Section and
specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this Project.
B. Preinstallation Meetings: Conduct preinstallation meeting to identify where
seals are required and verify Project requirements, substrate conditions,
manufacturers installation instructions, and manufacturers warranty
requirements.
A. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow
minimum storage time at Project Site.
B. Deliver materials in manufacturers original, unopened, undamaged containers
with identification and UL listing mark intact.
C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in
compliance with manufacturers requirements.
D. Follow recommended procedures, precautions, or remedies described in
Material Safety Data Sheets as applicable.

JANUARY 2014 07 84 00 - 3
A. Firestopping requirements may be created by mechanical and electrical
portions of the Work:
1. Identify locations requiring firestopping.
2. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating
item installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings.
correction or removal and replacement of defective Work shall be as specified
in the General Conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Furnish firestop system products from a single manufacturer.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. 3M Corp.; Firestopping Products.
B. Hilti Construction Chemicals; High Performance Firestop Systems.
C. International Protective Coatings Corp. (IPC); Flamesafe Firestop Products.
D. Isolatek International (Cafco); TPS.
E. Specified Technologies; Inc. (STI).
F. United States Gypsum Co. (USG); Firestop Systems and Thermafiber Safing
Insulation.
2.03 MIXES
A. For those products requiring mixing prior to application, follow firestopping
manufacturers directions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if
required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing
containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce firestopping

FIRESTOPPING PW/WBG/475883
07 84 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for
application indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. With manufacturers representative, examine substrates and conditions for
compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items,
substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean openings and joints immediately prior to installing
firestopping in accordance with firestop manufacturer recommendations and
the following requirements:
1. Remove foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates
and from penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of
firestopping.
2. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce
clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with
firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer
using that manufacturers recommended products and methods. Confine
primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed
surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting
adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of Work and that
would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials. Remove
tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping seal with
substrates.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturers Instructions: Follow manufacturers instructions for
installation of through-penetration systems selected for use.
1. Seal holes or voids made by penetrations for pipes, conduits and ducts
through fire-rated floors, walls, and roofs and to ensure air and water
resistant seals.

JANUARY 2014 07 84 00 - 5
2. Receive Engineers approval prior to installation of UL firestop systems
that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains to duct
work.
B. Fire Safing: Install, following manufacturers instructions, to completely fill
gaps between tops of fire-rated walls and floor or roof deck above, between
edge of floors and walls, and other locations indicated on Drawings.
C. Meet Underwriters Laboratories and Factory Mutual requirements.
A. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before
concealing or enclosing areas.
B. Keep areas of Work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.
C. Perform patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or
penetrating existing firestop systems.
inspection and certification of proper installation, and training of installers
personnel in proper installation procedures.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed product from contact with contaminating substances and
from damage during construction.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 JOINT SEALANTS
JANUARY 2014 07 92 00 - 1
SECTION 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
a. C661, Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of
Elastomeric Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer.
b. C834, Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.
c. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
d. C1193, Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings: Surface preparation instructions. Indicate where each
product is proposed to be used.
2. Samples: Material proposed for use showing color range available.
1. Installation instructions.
2. Documentation showing applicator qualifications.
4. Special guarantee.
A. Applicator Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years experience installing sealants
in projects of similar scope.
A. Ambient Temperature: Between 40 degrees F and 80 degrees F (4 degrees C
and 27 degrees C) when sealant is applied. Consult manufacturer when sealant
cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

JOINT SEALANTS PW/WBG/475883
07 92 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
named as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall
provide for correction or, at the option of the Owner, removal and
correction or removal and replacement of defective Work shall be as specified
in the General Conditions.
B. Conditions: No adhesive or cohesive failure of sealant.
C. Sealed Joints: Watertight and weathertight with normal usage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Characteristics:
1. Uniform, homogeneous.
2. Free from lumps, skins, and coarse particles when mixed.
3. Nonstaining, nonbleeding.
4. Hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum, measured by ASTM C661
method.
5. Immersible may be substituted for nonimmersible.
B. Color: Unless specifically noted, match color of the principal wall material
adjoining area of application.
C. Type 1Silicone, Nonsag, Nonimmersible:
1. Silicone base, single-component, moisture curing; ASTM C920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.
2. Capable of withstanding movement up to 50 percent of joint width.
a. Dow Corning Corp.; No. 790.
b. General Electric; Silpruf.
c. BASF; Sonneborn, Omniseal-50.
D. Type 2Multipart Polyurethane, Self-leveling, Immersible:
1. Polyurethane base, multicomponent, chemical curing; ASTM C920,
Type M, Grade P, Class 25.
2. Capable of being continuously immersed in water.

JANUARY 2014 07 92 00 - 3
a. BASF; Sonneborn, SL-2.
b. Pecora Corp.; Urexspan NR-200.
c. Tremco; THC-900/901.
d. Sika Chemical Corp.; Sikaflex 2c SL.
E. Type 3Multipart Polyurethane, Nonsag, Immersible:
Type M, Grade NS, Class 25.
a. Pecora; DynaTrol II.
b. Tremco; Dymeric 240.
c. BASF; Sonneborn NP-2.
d. Sika Chemical Corp.; Sikaflex 2c NS.
F. Type 4Multipart Polyurethane, Nonsag, Nonimmersible:
Type M, Grade NS, Class 25.
a. BASF; Sonneborn NP-2.
b. Pecora Corp.; Dynatrol II.
c. Tremco; Dymeric 240.
d. Sika Chemical Corp.; Sikaflex 2c NS.
G. Type 5One-part Polyurethane, Immersible:
1. Polyurethane base, single-component, moisture curing; ASTM C920,
Type S, Grade NS or P, Class 25.
3. Manufacturers and Products for Nonsag:
a. Sika Chemical Corp.; Sikaflex-1a.
b. Tremco; Vulkem 116.
4. Manufacturers and Products for Self-leveling:
a. BASF; Sonneborn, SL-1.
b. Tremco; Vulkem 45.
c. Sika Chemical Corp.; Sikaflex 1c SL.
H. Type 6One-Part Polyurethane, Nonimmersible:
1. Polyurethane base, single-component, moisture curing; ASTM C920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.

07 92 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
a. Pecora Corp.; Dynatrol 1 XL.
b. Tremco; Dymonic.
c. BASF; Sonneborn, NP-I.
I. Type 10Sanitary Sealant:
1. Silicone sealant similar to Type 1, above, formulated to resist mold
growth and repeated exposure to high humidity while retaining
adhesion, flexibility, and color.
a. Dow Corning; 786.
b. General Electric; Sanitary Sealant SCS1700.
J. Type 11Fire Penetration Seal:
a. 3M Corp.; Fire Barrier Caulk CP25 and Putty 303.
b. General Electric; Pensil Sealant or Foam.
c. Unifrax Corporation; Fyre Putty.
d. Hilti USA; CP 604.
2.02 BACKUP MATERIAL
A. Nongassing, extruded, closed-cell round polyurethane foam or polyethylene
foam rod, compatible with sealant used, and as recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
B. Size: As shown or as recommended by sealant material manufacturer. Provide
for joints greater than 3/16 inch wide.
1. Sonneborn; Sonolastic Closed-cell Backing Rod.
2. Tremco; Closed-cell Backing Rod.
3. Pecora Corporation; Green Rod.
A. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape as recommended by sealant
manufacturer to suit application.
B. Joint Cleaner: Noncorrosive and nonstaining type, recommended by sealant
manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Primer: Nonstaining type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.

JANUARY 2014 07 92 00 - 5
2.04 PREFORMED SEALS
A. Preformed Compressible Joint Seals:
1. Widths Up to 5 Inches:
a. BASF, Watson Bowman Acme Div.; Wabo Weatherseal II.
b. Emseal Joint Systems Limited; Colorseal.
c. LymTal International; Iso-flex Joint System.
2. Other Widths: Series or model recommended by seal manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Use of more than one material for the same joint is not allowed unless
approved by sealant manufacturer.
B. Install joint sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C. Horizontal and Sloping Joints up to 1 Percent Maximum Slope: Use self-
leveling (Grade P) joint sealant.
D. Steeper Sloped Joints, Vertical Joints, and Overhead Joints: Use nonsag
(Grade NS) joint sealant.
E. Use joint sealant as required for the applicable application and as follows:
Joint Size Sealant Type
Less than 1" 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 10
Less than 2" 1, 2, 3, or 4
Over 2" Follow manufacturers recommendation
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Verify that joint dimensions, and physical and environmental conditions, are
acceptable to receive sealant.
B. Surfaces to be sealed shall be clean, dry, sound, and free of dust, loose mortar,
oil, and other foreign materials.
1. Mask adjacent surfaces where necessary to maintain neat edge.
2. Starting of work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces.
3. Apply primer to dry surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
C. Verify joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

07 92 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
D. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth
ratios.
E. Follow manufacturers instructions for mixing multi-component products.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Use joint filler to achieve required joint depths, to allow sealants to perform
intended function.
1. Install backup material as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
2. Where possible, provide full length sections without splices; minimize
number of splices.
3. Tape sealant may be used as joint filler if approved by sealant
manufacturer.
B. Use bond breaker where recommended by sealant manufacturer.
C. Seal joints around window, door and louver frames, expansion joints, control
joints, and elsewhere as indicated.
D. Joint Sealant Materials: Follow manufacturers recommendation and
instructions, filling joint completely from back to top, without voids.
E. Joints: Tool slightly concave after sealant is installed.
1. When tooling white or light color sealant, use a water wet tool.
2. Finish joints free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and
sags.
F. Tape Sealant: Compress to 50 percent of expanded thickness and install in
accordance with manufacturers instructions.
3.04 PREFORMED SEALS
A. Prepare joint surfaces clean and dry, free from oil, rust, laitance, and other
foreign material.
B. Construct joints straight and parallel to each other and at proper width and
depth.
C. Apply joint sealant manufacturers approved primer and adhesive in
D. Install seal in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

JANUARY 2014 07 92 00 - 7
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces next to the sealed joints of smears or other soiling resultant of
sealing application.
B. Replace damaged surfaces resulting from joint sealing or cleaning activities.
3.06 JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. This schedule lists the sealant types acceptable for each joint location. Use as
few different sealant types as possible to meet the requirements of Project.
Joint Locations Sealant Type(s)
Expansion/Contraction and Control Joints At:
Concrete Walls (except water-holding and
belowgrade portions of structures)
1, 3, 4, 5, 6
Concrete Floor Slabs (except for water-holding
Structures)
2, 5
Slabs Subject to Vehicle and Pedestrian Traffic 2, 5
Masonry Walls 1, 3, 4, 5, 6
Ceramic Tile Floors 1, 2, 5, 10
Ceramic Tile Walls 1, 3, 5, 10
Material Joints At:
Metal Door, Window, and Louver Frames
(Exterior)
1, 5, 6
Metal Door, Window, and Louver Frames
(Interior)
1, 5, 6
Wall Penetrations (Exterior) 1, 5, 6
Wall Penetrations (Interior) 1, 5, 6
Floor Penetrations 5, 6
Ceiling Penetrations 1, 3, 4, 5, 6
Roof Penetrations 5
Sheet Metal Flashings 5
Precast/Prestressed Floor Panels (Interior) 2
Precast/Prestressed Floor and Roof Panels
(Exterior)
3

07 92 00 - 8 JANUARY 2014
Joint Locations Sealant Type(s)
Other Joints:
Threshold Sealant Bed 5
Between Counter Tops and Backsplashes 10
Around Plumbing Fixtures 10
Openings Around Pipes, Conduits, and Ducts
Through Fire-Rated Construction
11
Concrete Form Snap-Tie Holes 1, 4, 5
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
JANUARY 2014 08 06 01 - 1
SECTION 08 06 01
DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal requirements are specified in appropriate product sections.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Products and materials referred to in this Section are specified in the
appropriate product sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Requirements for incorporation of scheduled products into the Work are
specified in the appropriate product sections.
B. The Door and Hardware Schedule that is part of the Drawings is a tabulation
of door, frame, and finish hardware characteristics for each opening numbered
on Drawings. Provide items as scheduled and as shown on Drawings.
C. Door and Frame Types are as shown on Drawings.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
JANUARY 2014 08 11 00 - 1
SECTION 08 11 00
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. A250.6, Hardware on Standard Steel Doors (Reinforcement -
Application).
b. A250.8, Recommended Specification for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames.
c. A250.11, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.
a. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
b. A480/A480M, Standard Specification for General Requirements
for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip.
c. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
d. A1008/A1008M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet,
Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy,
High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution
Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.
e. E90, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of
Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and
Elements.
3. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): A156.115,
Hardware Preparations in Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 80, Standard for Fire
Doors and Other Opening Protectives.
5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Building Materials Directory.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals: Applicable information for each type of door and frame,
including:
1. Frame conditions and complete anchorage details, supplemented by
suitable schedules covering doors and frames.

METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PW/WBG/475883
08 11 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
2. Glass and louver opening sizes and locations in doors.
3. Relate to door numbers used in Contract Drawings.
A. Properly identify each item with number used in Contract Drawings.
B. Store doors upright, in protected dry area, at least 1 inch off ground or floor
and at least 1/4 inch between individual pieces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
products of:
1. Curries Manufacturing.
2. The Ceco Corp.
3. Fenestra Division, Marmon Group.
4. Mesker Industries, Inc.
5. Monarch Steelcraft, Ltd.
6. Overly Manufacturing Co.
7. Pioneer Industries.
8. Precision Metals, Inc.
9. Republic Steel Corp.
10. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.
11. Trussbilt, Inc.
12. Williamsburg Steel Products Co.
13. Stiles Custom Metal, Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Basic Metal Material:
1. ASTM A1008/A1008M; sheet steel, cold-rolled, stretcher level.
2. ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.
B. Hollow Metal Frames:
1. Products of hollow metal door manufacturer.
2. ANSI 250.8, except as modified herein.
3. Frames for Doors and Windows: 16 gauge for interior and 14 gauge,
with thermal break, for exterior, knockdown or welded type, of cross-
section shown.
4. Prepare floor and wall anchors, reinforcement, and cutouts for hardware
to meet requirements of BHMA A156.115 and ANSI A250.6.

JANUARY 2014 08 11 00 - 3
5. Finished size, shape, and profile of frame members as shown.
6. Concealed fasteners or welding are preferred to through-the-face
fasteners.
7. Identification: Stamp opening number, as shown on Drawings, on center
hinge reinforcement of each frame.
C. Hollow Metal Doors: ANSI A250.8, except as modified herein.
BHMA A156.115 and ANSI A250.6 to receive hardware specified in Door
and Hardware Schedule.
1. Interior:
a. Flush Panel Doors: 18 gauge, Level 2, Model 1.
b. Flush end closure at top of doors.
2. Exterior:
a. Flush Panel Doors: 16 gauge, Level 3, Model 1.
b. Double Doors: Overlapping astragals for active leaf, except as
noted or detailed otherwise.
c. Flush end closure at top of doors.
d. R-Value: 8.
D. Labeled Fire Doors and Frames:
1. Conform to listing requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
(UL).
2. Label each door and frame for class of rating required.
3. Overlapping astragal on active leaf of double doors.
4. Label requirements, dimensions, and type of door are indicated in Door
and Hardware Schedule on Drawings.
a. Modify drawing details if required to secure label.
b. Clearly identify modifications on Shop Drawings.
c. Maximum temperature rise of 450 degrees F for stairway
enclosures.
E. Sound-Retardant Doors and Frames: Treat flush metal doors internally to
produce tested Sound Transmission Class (STC) of 40 decibels or better when
tested in accordance with ASTM E90.
1. Glass, Louvers, and Sound Seals: Factory install.
2. Seals, Automatic Door Bottom Seals, and Astragals: Same as units
tested and certified.
F. Door Louvers: Manufacturers standard fixed blade, double-zee louver,
minimum 16 gauge with vertical slat reinforcement at 12-inch centers, and
minimum 30 percent free area, factory installed, size as shown. Provide
exterior doors with aluminum 18- to 14-mesh, 0.0123-inch diameter, 5056
clad insect screen with frame to match louver.

METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PW/WBG/475883
08 11 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
G. Glazing:
1. Doors: Furnish with formed flush-type glazing strips with butt corner
joints to permit selection of secure side in field.
2. Glazing Arrangements: Accommodate glass of type and thickness
indicated and as specified in Section 08 80 00, Glazing.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
A. Filler or Transom Panels: Furnish of same construction and finish as door to
include fire-resistive label and sound-retardant construction.
B. Furnish manufacturers standard core filler, anchors, fasteners, and other
ancillary items.
2.04 FACTORY FINISHING REQUIREMENTS
A. Galvanized with A60 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M
(Wipe Coat galvanized coating is not acceptable).
B. Phosphate treat metal for paint adhesion.
C. One shop coat of baked-on rust-inhibiting prime coating compatible with
finish coating as shown and as specified in Section 09 90 05, Architectural
Painting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Frames:
1. Follow ANSI A250.11 and manufacturers instructions.
a. Maintain scheduled dimensions, hold head level, and maintain
jambs plumb and square.
b. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction.
c. Wherever possible, leave frame spreader bars intact until frames
are set perfectly square and plumb and anchors are securely
attached.
B. Doors:
1. Hollow Metal Doors: ANSI A250.8.
2. Hardware: In accordance with manufacturers templates and
instructions.
a. Adjust operable parts for correct function.

JANUARY 2014 08 11 00 - 5
b. Remove hardware, with exception of prime coated items, tag, box,
and reinstall after finish paint work is completed.
3. Labeled Doors: NFPA Pamphlet No. 80.
3.02 FIELD PAINTING
A. Where prime coat has been damaged, sand smooth and touch up with same
primer as applied at shop.
1. Remove rust before painting.
2. Touch Up: Not obvious.
3. Perform immediately after door and frame installation.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed doors and frames against damage from other construction
work.
3.04 SCHEDULES
A. For tabulation of door and frame characteristics, such as size, type, detail, and
finish hardware requirements, see Door and Hardware Schedule on Drawings.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 WOOD DOORS
JANUARY 2014 08 14 00 - 1
SECTION 08 14 00
WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. ASTM International (ASTM): E90, Standard Test Method for
Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of
Building Partitions and Elements.
2. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA):
a. Industry Standard I.S.1-A, Architectural Wood Flush Doors.
b. Industry Standard I.S.6-A, Architectural Wood Stile and Rail
Doors.
3. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): Building Materials Directory.
4. Warnock Hersey Certification Listings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings: Prepare specifically for this Project, indicating location
and size of each door, veneer species, type and characteristics, elevation
of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of
hardware blocking, fire ratings, factory finishing, if any, glass and
glazing, and other pertinent data.
a. For factory-premachined doors, also indicate dimensions and
locations of cutouts for finish hardware and cutouts for light and
louver openings.
b. Use same reference numbers for door openings and details as
Contract Drawings.
1. Manufacturers Certification of Compliance in accordance with
2. Manufacturers instructions for care and handling.
3. Maintenance instructions for sealing door edges.

WOOD DOORS PW/WBG/475883
08 14 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
A. Delivery:
1. Deliver doors to Job Site after moisture-producing construction
operations are complete and building has reached average prevailing
relative humidity of locality.
2. Deliver doors clearly marked with manufacturers name, brand name,
size, thickness, and identifying symbol.
3. Seal edges of doors before delivery to jobsite.
B. Storage:
1. Store doors in area where there will be no variation greater than plus or
minus 5 percent in heat and humidity.
2. Stack flat on 2 by 4 lumber, laid 12 inches from ends and across center.
3. Under bottom door and over top of stack provide plywood or corrugated
cardboard to protect door surface.
C. Handling:
1. Handle with clean gloves.
2. Do not drag doors across one another or across other surfaces.
A. Provide as special guarantee, manufacturers extended guarantee or warranty,
with Owner named in writing as beneficiary. Special guarantee shall provide
for correction, or at option of Owner, removal and replacement of flush doors
specified in this Section found defective during a period of 5 years after date
of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal
and replacement of defective Work shall be as specified in General
Conditions.
B. Conditions: Free of warp more than 1/4 inch in plane of door and no
delamination of veneers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
A. Solid Core Wood Doors:
1. Premium grade, five-ply.
2. Staved wood core or particleboard core.
3. Type I glue.
4. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

PW/WBG/475883 WOOD DOORS
JANUARY 2014 08 14 00 - 3
5. Faces:
a. Veneers and matching vertical edges of book-matched quarter
sliced wood to match exisitng.
b. Annex: Match wood species and finish used in Human Resources
Phase 1.
c. City Hall 2: Match wood species and color of adjacent doors.
B. Door Louvers: Manufacturers standard fixed, chevron design louver in
hardwood to match door face, with approximately 25 percent free area, in size
indicated on Door and Hardware Schedule.
C. Glass Stops:
1. Nonfire-Rated Doors: Hardwood to match door face.
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Metal.
D. Moldings: Hardwood to match door face.
E. Fire-Rated Doors:
1. Solid core wood doors that are listed in UL Building Materials
Directory or Warnock Hersey Certification Listings.
2. Bear label for rating scheduled.
F. Glass and Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00, Glazing.
2.02 FABRICATION OF FLUSH WOOD DOORS
A. Manufacture in accordance with WDMA Industry Standard I.S.1-A.
B. Wood Louvers: Factory install into prepared openings.
C. Glass Stops: Factory install, loose tacked for easy removal.
D. Moldings: Factory install in configuration indicated.
E. Prefitting and Premachining of Doors: At Contractors option.
1. Within tolerances specified herein.
2. Coordinate with Finish Hardware Schedule and door frames.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify door frames are of type required for door and are installed as required
for proper installation of doors.

WOOD DOORS PW/WBG/475883
08 14 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
B. Do not install doors in frames that would hinder operation of doors.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Fit doors for width by planing; for height by sawing.
B. Tolerances:
1. From Bottom to Floor Covering: 1/2 inch.
2. From Bottom to Top of Threshold: 1/4 inch.
3. Maximum From Top: 1/8 inch.
4. Bevel Lock and Hinge Edges: 1/8 inch in 2 inches.
5. Clearance of Meeting Stiles of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch.
C. Seal Job Site cut surfaces with two coats of door manufacturers standard
sealer before final hanging of doors.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Replace or rehang doors that are hinge-bound and do not swing or operate
freely.
B. Replace prefinished doors damaged during installation.
C. Refinish or replace job-finished doors damaged during installation.
3.04 SCHEDULE
finish hardware requirements, see Door and Hardware Schedule on Drawings.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
JANUARY 2014 AND STOREFRONTS
SECTION 08 41 13
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. The Aluminum Association, Incorporated (AA): Designation System for
Aluminum Finishes.
2. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 800,
Voluntary Specification and Test Method for Sealants.
a. C509, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed
Gasket and Sealing Material.
b. D1187, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for
c. E283, Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air
Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors
under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
d. E330, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static
Air Pressure Difference.
e. E331, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Provide a thermally isolated aluminum framing system for exterior
framing that utilizes straight-in glazing without projecting stops.
Position glass near exterior of frame and provide in-swinging operable
vents where shown.
2. System shall have interior flashing to provide continuous flashing to
exterior through pressure relieved horizontal weep holes.
3. Face Clip Design:
a. Engaged by pushing straight into the clip.
b. Easily removed for deglazing.
c. Reusable for reglazing.
4. Entrances and glass framing shall be compatible in appearance and
match appearance of existing aluminum store front being used on City
Hall 1 and City Hall 2.

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES PW/WBG/475883
AND STOREFRONTS JANUARY 2014
B. Performance Requirements: Meet requirements of Article Laboratory
Performance Tests.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Details of doors, framing, and anchorage to structure.
b. Manufacturers brochures or catalogs, specifications,
recommendations, and standard details illustrating and specifying
products proposed for use on this Project and other aluminum
door and window products available.
c. Show field measurements.
2. Samples: At least 6-inch long Samples of anodized extruded aluminum,
showing probable range of variation in color.
1. Evidence of installers qualifications.
2. Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
tests.
3. Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance: In accordance with
Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.
A. Installer Qualifications: Entity specializing in the installation of aluminum
glazing systems, with a minimum of 3 years experience and approved by the
system manufacturer.
B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct to discuss and verify project requirements,
substrate conditions, and manufacturers installation instructions and warranty
requirements.
A. Deliver materials in manufacturers original, unopened, undamaged containers
with identification labels intact.
B. Store materials as recommended by manufacturer, in inside designated areas,
free of dust and corrosive fumes, as close as possible to point of installation.
C. Prevent contaminants from contacting aluminum.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Framing systems, entrance doors, and ventilators shall be the products of a
single manufacturer.
B. Materials and products specified in this Section shall be products of:
1. Kawneer Co.
2. United States Aluminum Corp.
3. Tublite, Inc.
2.02 BASIC MATERIALS
A. Basic Aluminum Extrusions: 6063-T5 aluminum not less than 0.094 inch
thick; door extrusions not less than 0.125 inch thick.
B. Framing Members: 4-1/2 inches in depth with thermal break for exterior doors
and windows, and face width of 2 inches or less. 4-1/2 inches by 1-3/4 inches
(non-thermal break) for interior door and window frames. Sizes and profiles
as shown.
C. Swing Entrance Doors:
1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
2. Stile and Rail Construction:
a. Wide (over 4-inch) stiles and top rails, and 12-inch bottom rail.
b. Mechanically fastened and welded.
c. Hook-in type glazing stops.
d. Configuration indicated.
3. Flush Construction:
a. Face sheets of plain unpatterned architectural quality 5005 alloy
aluminum, 0.050 inch thick, interlocked with stiles and rails.
b. Aluminum stiles and rails, mechanically fastened and welded.
c. Core of froth-in-place urethane foam, free of chlorofluorocarbon
(CFC) blowing agents.
d. Aluminum framed vision lights.
e. Configuration indicated.
D. Glazing Gaskets: Framing manufacturers standard elastomeric extrusion,
conforming to ASTM C509.
E. Glass and Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00, Glazing.
F. Concealed Fastening Devices, Reinforcements, and Other Internal
Components: Of aluminum alloy, stainless steel, or corrosion-resistant plated.

G. Screws: Stainless steel, factory finished color to match aluminum finish.
H. Hardware: Door manufacturers standard items as scheduled, and coordinated
with Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware.
1. Hinges or pivots.
2. Locks.
3. Exit devices.
4. Concealed closers.
5. Pull handles.
6. Stops and holders.
7. Thresholds.
8. Weatherstripping: Head and jambs, and sweepstrip at bottom of doors.
9. Door operator and controls for accessible doors.
I. Sealants:
1. AAMA 800, to seal metal to metal, nonworking joints.
2. Color to be compatible with adjacent materials.
J. Isolation Tape:
a. Tremco; 440.
b. 3M; EC1202.
c. Presstite; 579.6.
K. Isolation Paint: Bituminous coating conforming to ASTM D1187.
2.03 FINISH
A. Exposed Framing Members: Free of scratches and other serious surface
blemishes.
B. Treatment and Color:
1. Caustic etch and anodic oxide.
2. Meet requirements of AA-M12C22A42.
3. Exterior Framing Color: Medium bronze.
4. Interior Framing Color: Clear Anodized.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Methods of Fabrication and Assembly: Manufacturers discretion, unless
B. Reinforcement for Surface Hardware: Manufacturers standard.

C. Wind Load: Reinforce mullions as necessary to limit deflection to 1/175 of
span when wind load on wall is 25 psf in addition to dead loads.
D. Assembly: As far as practicable, do fitting and assembly work in shop.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Substrate Conditions: Verify acceptability for product installation in
B. Field Measurements: Verify actual opening sizes prior to fabrication.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. In accordance with manufacturers installation instructions.
B. Set items straight, level, square, plumb, and at proper elevations and in
alignment with other work.
C. Securely anchor units to surrounding structure to resist wind loads and to
withstand the normal loads imposed by the operation of the doors.
D. Fasten framing members in place using screws and backing, anchor plugs, or
straps.
1. Accurately cut and fit framing and moldings to result in tightly closed
flush, hairline weathertight joints.
2. No visible unfinished aluminum.
3. Provide concealed attachments and fasteners.
E. Door Operation:
1. Swing freely, and without rattle when closed.
2. Swing Type Doors: Head and jamb clearance of 3/32 inch, plus or
minus 1/32 inch.
F. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete, cement plaster, or stucco
with isolation paint, sealant, or isolation tape cut to neat line.
G. Seal all joints.
H. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00, Glazing.

3.03 LABORATORY PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. Air Leakage Through Assembly: Maximum 0.06 cfm per minute per square
foot of wall area at 6.24 psf, as measured in accordance with ASTM E283.
B. Resistance to Water Infiltration: No leaks in the complete system when tested
in accordance with ASTM E331 at test pressure of 8 psf.
C. Performance Under Uniform Loading:
1. Test in accordance with ASTM E330 for a wind load of 25 psf.
2. Maximum Deflection: Not to exceed 1/175 of member span.
3. When Load is Removed: No permanent deformation or damage.
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services, for preinstallation meeting,
installation assistance, inspection and certification of proper installation, and
performance testing of specified equipment.
3.05 CLEANING
A. After erection, protect exposed portions from damage by machines, plaster,
lime, paint, acid, cement, or other harmful compounds.
B. Remove protective materials and clean with plain water, water with soap, or
household detergent.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent areas and finish surfaces from damage during product
installation.
3.07 SCHEDULES
finish hardware requirements, see Door and Hardware Schedules on
Drawings.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 DOOR HARDWARE
JANUARY 2014 08 71 00 - 1
SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA):
a. A156.1, Butts and Hinges.
b. A156.2, Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches.
c. A156.3, Exit Devices.
d. A156.4, Door Controls - Closers.
e. A156.13, Mortise Locks & Latches.
f. A156.16, Auxiliary Hardware.
g. A156.18, Materials and Finishes.
2. International Code Council (ICC): A117.1, Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities.
3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Fire Protection Equipment List.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Product Data: Manufacturers literature for each item of finish
hardware required herein, clearly marked.
b. Finish Hardware Schedule: Furnish complete and detailed
schedule, show product items, numbers, and finishes for hardware
for each separate opening.
c. Special Tools: Provide listing and description of usage.
2. Samples:
a. One pair of hinges.
b. One mortise lock set.
c. One sample of each metal finish.
1. Manufacturers Field Service Report.
2. Certification of Hardware Consultant.
3. Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with
4. Operation narrative for each hardware group.

DOOR HARDWARE PW/WBG/475883
08 71 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
A. Qualifications of Supplier: Recognized supplier of architectural finish
hardware, with warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing hardware in
vicinity of Project for not less than 5 years, and who is, or who employs,
architectural hardware consultant.
B. Qualifications of Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC): Certified by
Door and Hardware Institute.
A. Before delivery, clearly identify and tag each item of hardware with respect to
specified description and location of installation.
B. Provide secure storage for finish hardware until installation is made.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Provide minimum 2-year warranty on all hardware components.
B. Provide 10-year warranties for locks and manual door closers.
C. Provide 3-year warranty for exit devices.
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Special Tools: Two sets for installation and maintenance of hardware.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide end products of one manufacturer for each product in order to achieve
standardization for appearance, maintenance, and replacement.
B. Finishes: BHMA A156.18.
C. Some products listed below may not be used on this Project.
2.02 FASTENERS
A. Stainless steel.
2.03 BUTT HINGES
A. BHMA A156.1.

JANUARY 2014 08 71 00 - 3
B. Quantity per Door Leaf (Minimum):
Door Height Hinges
Up to 5'-0" 1 pair
5'-1" to 7'-7" 1-1/2 pair
7'-8" to 10'-0" 2 pairs
10'-1" to 12'-6" 2-1/2 pairs
C. Hinge Height (Minimum):
Door Width Hinge Height
Up to 3'-0" 4-1/2
3'-1" to 4'-0" 5
Over 4'-0" 6
D. Width: Minimum for clearance of trim and 180-degree swing.
E. Exterior Hinges: Nonremoveable pin.
F. Joint Tolerance: 0.012 inch maximum, gauged in CLOSED position.
G. Finish: Satin stainless steel No. 630.
H. Types and Manufacturers:
No. Type Description BHMA IVES
H1 Heavy weight, four ball-
races, full mortise, stainless
steel
A5112 5BB1 HW
H2 Continuous Hinge 112 HD DKBR
H3 Hinges or pivots furnished
by door manufacturer

2.04 LOCKS AND LATCH SETS
A. Cylindrical Locks: BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1.
1. Materials: Brass or stainless steel.
2. Trim: Wrought or forged lever handles and roses.
3. Core Cylinders: Interchangeable, removable; minimum of six pins.
4. Latch Throw: 1/2 inch minimum.
5. Lever Backset: 2-3/4 inches.

08 71 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
a. Schlage; ND Series.
b. Or approved equal.
B. Tactile Warning: Knurl knob backs and lever handles for touch identification;
ICC A117.1, Section 4.29.3.
C. Finish: Satin stainless steel No. 630.
D. Locks and Latches: Match existing in manufacturer, design, finish, and
keying. No substitutions allowed. Use Best cores in City Hall 2 (CH2), which
currently has Best cores.
E. Types and Manufacturers:
No. Type Description Schlage BHMA
L2 Bored, entrance lever lock ND53PD Rhodes F109
L4 Bored lever latch ND10S Rhodes F75
L6 Bored, utility room lever lock ND80PD Rhodes F86
L9 Bored, privacy lever lock ND40S Rhodes F76
L10 Cabinet lock, drawer and door 46-002 E07121
L11 Lock by door manufacturer;
furnish cylinders for keying to
other locks as required

L12 Bored, exit only, lever lock ND12D Rhodes F89
L13 Padlock 45-101 --
L14 Fixed knob pull and roller;
Latch: Ives 336, Stanley C44S
ND170 Rhodes --
L15 Push-pull latch GJ-HL --
L16 Lock by exit device
manufacturer; furnish cylinders
for keying to other locks as
required

F. Keying:
1. Lock Cylinders: Operate by grand master key system that allows for
future expansion.
2. Keylocks: As indicated in Door and Hardware Schedule. Key new locks
into existing master key system. As directed by Owner.
3. Keys: Two per lock; tag with schedule information.
4. Master Keys: Four; send by registered mail to Engineer.
5. Key cabinet and casework locks into building system.

JANUARY 2014 08 71 00 - 5
6. Furnish lock manufacturers removable core maximum security keying
system.
2.05 CONSTRUCTION KEY SYSTEM
A. Removable construction core system for locks.
B. See Article Manufacturers Services under Part 3, Execution.
2.06 CONSTRUCTION KEY SYSTEM
A. Assemble permanent cylinders with construction inserts and ship with all lock
sets.
B. Change Keys: Pack in separately identified envelopes and ship.
C. Construction Keys: Pack in cartons marked packing list and ship.
D. Construction Insert Extractor Keys, Master Keys, and Grand Master Keys:
Ship by registered mail to Engineer.
E. On completion of job, deliver construction keys to Owner.
2.07 EXIT DEVICES
A. BHMA A156.3, 2001, Grade 1.
B. Furnish fire exit devices and mullions at fire-rated doors.
C. Key Lockable, Removable Mullion: Steel construction, by exit device
manufacturer.
D. Guarded latches.
E. Trim:
1. Pulls: VonDuprin 392-7 Offset Pull.
F. Finish:
1. Exit Device: Satin stainless steel No. 630.
2. Removable Mullion: Steel. Factory primed finish with painted field
finish to match color of storefront.

08 71 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
G. Types and Manufacturers:
No. Type Description VonDuprin
ANSI/
BHMA
X1A Rim type, electric latch, request to
exit with dummy trim (REX
switches less dogging)
EL RX 98 w/392-7
Offset Pull
ANSI A156.2 -
2011 Grade 1
X1B Removable mullion with mortise
cylinder (match Owners key
system)
KR4954 --
X2 Rim type, exit only 98 w/392-7 Offset
Pull
Type 1
01
X9 Exit device by door manufacturers
X10 Rim type, active leaf, latch
function; with removable mullion
for pairs
98L-BE Type 1
2.08 CLOSERS
A. BHMA A156.4.
B. Size closers in accordance with manufacturers standards. Mount regular arm
closers on pull side of doors. Mount parallel arm closers on push side of
doors. On pair of doors provide closer on active leaf only, unless noted
otherwise. Verify that no closers with hold open arms are being used on fire
doors.
C. Finish: Manufacturers standard painted or powder coated finish, in color
selected by Engineer from manufacturers standard color range.
D. Types and Manufacturers:
No. Type/Description LCN BHMA
C1 Regular arm 4040XP Series C02011
C2 Parallel arm 4040XP Series C02021
C3 Regular arm with hold-
open
4040XP Series
w/3049 CNS
C02051
C4 Parallel arm with
integral stop
4040XP Series
w/3077 CNS
C02021
C5 Parallel arm with hold-
open
4040XP Series
w/3049 CNS
C02061

JANUARY 2014 08 71 00 - 7
No. Type/Description LCN BHMA
C6 Parallel arm with
integral stop and hold-
open
4040XP Series
w/3049 SCNS
C02061
C7 Closer furnished by
door and frame
manufacturer

2.09 PUSH-PULLS
A. Solid metal, not plated.
B. Finish: Satin stainless steel No. 630, unless indicated otherwise.
C. Plates: Beveled four edges, square corners.
D. Pulls: Bolted through door.
E. Push Plates: Countersink pull-through bolts and cover with push plate.
F. Types and Manufacturers:
No. Type Description BBW Baldwin
P1 8" x 3/4" Pull handle on plate:
0.050" x 4" x 16", and push plate:
0.050" x 8" x 16"
1017-3B and
47-G
2367 and
2125
P2 Push bar and pull handle Ives 9190-0-NO
P3 8" x 3/4" Pull handles: Both sides 2903 2552
2.10 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. BHMA A156.16.
B. Machine Screws: In threaded anchors at concrete or masonry.
C. Self-Tapping Screws: At stud partitions, wood, or metal mountings.
D. Metal Risers: For mounting at carpet floors.
E. Finish: Satin chromium-plated No. 626.

08 71 00 - 8 JANUARY 2014
F. Types and Manufacturers for Each Leaf:
No. Type Description BBW or GJ Baldwin BHMA
S1 Floor stop F121X 4086 L02131
S2 Wall bumper WC9X 4031 L02241
S3 Wall stop-holder W141X 4091 L01351
S4 Floor stop-holder F823X 4096 L01371
S5 Door-attached holder 872 4105 L01381
S6 Overhead stop GJ90S
Series
Sargent
590S Series
C02511
S7 Overhead stop with
hold-open
GJ90H
Series
Sargent
590H Series
C05541
S8 Heavy-duty overhead
stop
GJ79HDS
S9 Spring and chain stop Ives 115 4485
S10 Stop or holder furnished
by door manufacturer

2.11 BOLTS
A. BHMA A156.16.
B. Finish: Bright nickel No. 645.
C. Types and Manufacturers:
No. Type/Description Stanley Lawrence BHMA
B1 Top and bottom flush
bolts
393-1/2 280 L04201
B2 Top and bottom
surface bolts
CD4060 283 (L04151)
B3 Top:
8" bolt w/48" chain
1055 T146
Bottom:
8" foot-bolt or surface
bolt
1056
4060
T145
283

B4 Surface bolt, 4" 4060 283

JANUARY 2014 08 71 00 - 9
No. Type/Description Stanley Lawrence BHMA
B5 Cane bolt, 18" 1010 T250
B6 Automatic flush bolts GJ
FB7
Ives
559

2.12 KICKPLATES
A. Solid metal, not plated. Bevel four edges.
B. Width of door leaf less than 1-1/2 inches at single leaf and less than 1 inch at
pairs.
C. Finish: Satin stainless steel No. 630.
D. Types and Manufacturers: Builders Brass Works, Baldwin, or Cipco as
follows:
1. K1 10 inches high by 0.125 inch thick.
2. K2 36 inches high by 0.125 inch thick.
2.13 THRESHOLDS
A. Thresholds: One-piece full width of opening; extend beyond jamb where
indicated.
B. Provide with stainless steel machine screws in threaded expansion anchors at
concrete.
C. Finish: Dark bronze anodized aluminum, unless indicated otherwise.
D. Types and Manufacturers:
No. Type Description Pemko Reese
T1 Saddle (smooth, 4" x 1/2") 175D S104D
T2 Saddle (serrated, 4" x 1/4") 270D S404D
T3 Threshold furnished by door manufacturer -- --
T4 Thermal break saddle (6-1/8") 253XDFG S473D
T5 Carpet edge 174D 266D
T6 Panic exit saddle 2005DV S483DV

08 71 00 - 10 JANUARY 2014
2.14 WEATHERSTRIP
A. Finish: Dark bronze anodized aluminum, unless indicated otherwise.
B. Seal Types and Manufacturers:
No. Type Description Pemko Reese
W1 Rubber or vinyl bulb at jambs and
head, and at meeting stiles of pairs
S88D 797B
Door shoe 222DV DB596DF
Rain drip 346D R201D
S88D 797B
Door shoe 222DV DB596DF
W3 Rubber vinyl bulb at jambs and
S88D 797B
Door bottom with drip 345DV 353D
Interlocking watershed 68DR & 347D 202D & 203D
W4 Flexible plastic at jambs, head,
and at meeting stiles of pairs
PF114PS 794B
W5 Weatherstripping furnished by
door manufacturer
-- --
S88D 797B
Automatic door bottom 412DRL 320D
2.15 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
A. Provide as indicated in Door and Hardware Schedule:
M1 H.C. push plates. (2) CE-605 6-inch round push plates, mounted
in (2) CE-810-H-605-3 aluminum guide rails. One lobby side and
one mounted to left side of exterior door. Curran Engineering Co.,
Inc. Use with M4 power supply.
M2 Automatic Door OperatorsLCN 4640 Reg HL 72-inch (Note:
Operate by interior and exterior H.C. push plates.)
M3 Electrical Power TransferVon Duprin EPT-10 with ten
24-gauge wires.

JANUARY 2014 08 71 00 - 11
M4 Power SupplyVon Duprin PS914-4RL-BB 4A at 12/14V dc
output.
M5 Magnetic ContactProvided by Owner.
M6 Electric StrikeHES 1006 w/latch bolt monitoring.
2.16 SILENCERS
A. Ives, Glynn-Johnson.
B. At metal frame of each hinged door that does not have seals scheduled.
C. Three at single leaves and two at pairs.
2.17 NAMEPLATES
A. Material: Plastic plate; 1/8 inch thick with beveled edges.
B. Types and Manufacturers: Builders Brass Works, Trimco, and as follows:
N1 2"-high black plate with 1"-high white Helvetica medium letters in
text noted in Door and Hardware Schedule
N2 Same as N1 with addition of barrier-free pictorial symbol
2.18 TEMPLATES
A. Fabricate to template hardware applied to metal doors and frames.
B. Ensure that required templates are furnished to various manufacturers for
fabrication purposes.
C. Templates: Make available not more than 10 days after receipt of approved
Hardware Schedule.
2.19 EXIT AND FIRE DOORS
A. Exit Doors: Always openable from inside by simple turn of lever handle or
push on panic bar without use of key or any special knowledge or effort, to
include each leaf of door pairs.
B. Hardware for Fire Doors: Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Fire Protection
Equipment List.

08 71 00 - 12 JANUARY 2014
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. In accordance with manufacturers written instructions.
B. Make Work neat and secure, develop full strength of components, and provide
proper function.
C. Prevent marring, scratching, or otherwise damaging adjacent finishes during
hardware installation.
D. Latchbolts:
1. Install to engage in strikes automatically, whether activated by closers
or manually.
2. In no case shall additional manual pressure be required to engage
latchbolt in strike.
E. Stops and Holders: Set to allow doors to open as far as possible. Offset wall
stops to avoid accidental locking.
F. Wall Mounted Hardware: Install over solid structural backing or solid
blocking in hollow walls.
G. Thresholds:
1. Cope ends neatly to profile of jamb.
2. Set in sealant and seal ends to jambs.
H. Hardware: Adjust for easy, noise-free operation.
I. Coordinate hardware with Owners security contractor. Prepare doors for door
contacts by Owner.
J. Replace damaged hardware items.
3.02 MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
A. Standard Door Hardware Locations: As recommended and published by Door
and Hardware Institute, except as noted or detailed otherwise.
B. Door Silencers: Install 3 inches from top and bottom of jamb and 1 inch above
strike at single doors, and 3 inches from edges of doors in head for pairs of
doors.
C. Nameplates: Attach to doors or walls adjacent to doors 5 feet 6 inches above
floor using Phillips head screws.

JANUARY 2014 08 71 00 - 13
A. Deliver permanent lock cores to Site.
B. Remove temporary construction cores and insert permanent cores.
C. Inspect each lock set to ensure permanent cores are operating satisfactorily.
D. Deliver to Owner change and control keys for permanent system.
E. Return temporary construction cores to manufacturer.
F. Furnish manufacturers representative for the following services at Site or
classroom as designated by Owner, for minimum person-days listed below,
travel time excluded:
1. 2 person-days for installation assistance, inspection, and Manufacturers
Certificate of Proper Installation.
2. 2 person-days for functional and performance testing.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Cover and protect exposed surfaces of hardware during installation and until
Substantial Completion.
B. Fit, dismantle, and reinstall finish hardware as required for finish painting
work.
C. Protect and prevent staining of hardware during construction in accordance
with manufacturers recommendations.
D. Remove protective measures and permanent lock cylinders installed prior to
final cleaning.
3.05 DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. Door and Hardware Schedule on Drawings is guide to functional requirements
of each opening.
B. Provide finish hardware as scheduled. Sizes omitted shall be as recommended
by manufacturer.

08 71 00 - 14 JANUARY 2014
3.06 HARDWARE SETS
HDW-1: Item Type
2 Continuous hinges H2
2 Exit devices X1A
1 Removable mullion X1
2 Closers with hold open device and stop C6
1 Threshold T3
1 Set weatherstrip W5
2 Electrical power transfer M3
1 Power supply M4
2 Magnetic contact M5
Note: The Owner will provide a card reader.
HDW-1A: Item Type
2 Continuous hinges H2
2 Exit devices X1A
1 Removable mullion X1B
2 Closers with hold open feature C2
1 Threshold T3
2 H.C. Guide Rails with push plates; 1 on
exterior and 1 in lobby
M1
1 Automatic operator with power and wired to
push plates on outside. Activating push plate
operates automatic operators on exterior and
interior doors
M2
Electrical power transfer M3
Power supply M4
Magnetic contact (the Owner will provide a
card reader)
M5

JANUARY 2014 08 71 00 - 15
HDW-1B: Item Type
1 Continuous hinge H2
1 Exit device X1A
1 Surface closer with hold open device and
stop
C6
1 Threshold T3
1 Electrical power transfer M3
1 Power supply M4
1 Magnetic contact M5
Note: Owner will provide a card reader.
HDW-2:
(not used)
HDW-3: Item Type
1-1/2 Pair butts H1
1 Lock, classroom function L2
Note: Door 101 B to have wall bumper. S2
Note: Door 101 A to have overhead stop. S6
HDW-3A: Item Type
1-1/2 Pair butts H1
1 Lock, entry function L2
1 Closer with hold open device C3
1 Electrical strike connected to card reader.
One card reader and M5 door contacts by
Owner.
M6
1 Wall bumper S2
HDW-4:
(not used)

08 71 00 - 16 JANUARY 2014
HDW-5: Item Type
3 Pair butts H1
1 Lock, exit function L2
1 Electrical strike connected to card reader.
One card reader and two M5 door contacts by
Owner.
M6
1 Closer with hold open device C3
2 Wall bumpers S2
2 Flush bolts (inactive door) B1
HDW-6:
(not used)
HDW-7: Item Type
1-1/2 Pair butts H2
1 Lock, office lock function L2
1 Wall bumper (if no wall, use S1) S2
HDW-8: Item Type
3 Pair butts H1
1 Lock, classroom function L2
1 Wall bumper S2
2 Flush bolts (inactive door) B1
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 GLAZING
JANUARY 2014 08 80 00 - 1
SECTION 08 80 00
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 800,
Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants.
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Z97.1, Safety Glazing
Materials Used in BuildingsSafety Performance Specifications and
Methods of Test.
a. C542, Standard Specification for Lock-Strip Gaskets.
b. C864, Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression
Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers.
c. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
d. C1036, Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
e. C1048, Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat GlassKind
HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.
f. C1172, Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat
Glass.
g. E2190, Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit
Performance and Evaluation.
4. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): 16 CFR 1201, Safety Standard for
Architectural Glazing Materials.
5. Glass Association of North America (GANA):
a. Glazing Manual.
b. Sealant Manual.
6. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).
7. Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (IGMA).
a. 752, Standard for Bullet-Resisting Equipment.
b. Automotive Burglary Protection and Mechanical Equipment
Directory (ABPMED).
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Complete schedule of glass and glazing material to be used for
each purpose.

GLAZING PW/WBG/475883
08 80 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
b. Catalog cuts of glazing materials with inclusion of glass edge
cutting procedures.
2. Samples:
a. Two of each different type of glass at least 12 inches by 12 inches
properly labeled.
b. Two of each different type of glazing materials.
1. Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance for each type of glazing, in
2. Details and methods of glazing for each type of glazing condition;
include manufacturers recommendations for setting, sealing materials,
and installing each type of glazing.
3. Documentation declaring compatibility and adhesion test reports from
sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for
compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants and other glazing
materials.
4. Documentation of glazers previous experience and manufacturers
approval.
A. Glazier:
1. Have previous experience with installation of equal size and
requirements that can be inspected by Engineer.
2. Have approval of glass and framing manufacturer(s).
B. Factory Label Glass: Nonlabeled glass will be rejected.
C. Single Source Fabrication Responsibility: Fabrication processes, including
Low-E and reflective coatings, insulating, laminating, silkscreen, and
tempering, shall be fabricated by a single fabricator.
A. Storage:
1. Support cases on both sides when stored vertically.
2. After unpacking, place interleaving protection between lites.
3. Keep glass and interleaving dry by storing inside where temperatures
are above dewpoint, or if outside storage is necessary, cover the glass
interleaving with opaque tarpaulins or plastic and inspect periodically.
Wet interleaving can stain glass.
4. Avoid exposing stored glass to direct sunlight.

JANUARY 2014 08 80 00 - 3
B. Handling:
1. Stack individual lites on edge and lean them against sturdy uprights at a
slope of 5 degrees to 7 degrees from vertical.
2. Cushion bottom edges with soft, firm pads free of dirt, grit, glass chips,
or other foreign material.
3. Do not rotate or cartwheel insulating glass units over their corners. Use
turning device such as a rolling block if units must be rotated.
as beneficiary, in writing, as Special Guarantee. Special Guarantee shall
of 5 years after the date of Substantial Completion. Guarantee to cover
deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not due to handling
installing and cleaning practices performed contrary to glass manufacturers
published instructions. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and
replacement of defective Work shall be as specified in the General
Conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products of the following manufacturers, that meet these Specifications, may
be used on this Project:
1. Flat Glass:
a. AFG Industries, Inc.
b. Pilkington Libbey-Owens-Ford Glass Co.
c. PPG Industries, Inc.
d. Guardian Industries, Corp.
e. Monsanto Co.
f. Viracon, Inc.
2. Laminated Safety Glass, Bullet-resistant Glass, Insulated Glass;
Insulated Low E, Laminated Safety Glass; Tempered and Heat-
strengthened Glass, and Spandrel Glass:
a. AFG Industries, Inc.
b. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co.
c. Cardinal LG.
d. Interpane Glass Company.
e. TPG Technical Glass Products.
3. Fire-Rated and Safety-Rated Glass: TPG Technical Glass Products.

08 80 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
4. Sealant, Gasket, Tape, and Compound:
a. Dow Corning.
b. General Electric Silicones.
c. Pecora Corporation.
d. Tremco.
e. F. H. Maloney Co.
f. Standard Products Co.
2.02 GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Float Glass (F.G.): ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing, and
light-reducing), Glazing Quality q3, 1/4 inch, (6 mm) minimum thickness.
B. Tempered Float Glass (T.G.): ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered),
Type I, Class 2 (tinted, heat absorbing, and light-reducing), Glazing
Quality q3; meeting ANSI Z97.1 and 16 CFR 1201, as applicable; 1/4 inch
(6 mm) minimum thickness.
C. Laminated Safety Glass (S.G.): ASTM C1172, 7 mm minimum total
thickness, consisting of two lights of float glass, bonded to minimum
0.030-inch clear polyvinyl butyral (PVB) interlayer, meeting 16 CFR 1201,
Class 2 (tinted), as applicable, and ANSI Z97.1 and testing of 16 CFR 1201
for Category II materials.
D. Tinted Float Glass (T.): ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 3, Glazing Quality q3,
52 percent visible daylight transmittance, bronze color.
E. Reflective Glass (R.G.): Reflective coated, bronze tinted, float, 6 mm thick
with 30 percent visible light transmittance, 34 percent outside reflectance,
13 percent inside reflectance, a shading coefficient of 0.53, and a relative heat
gain of 120 Btu/hr sf.
F. Wire Glass (W.G.): ASTM C1036, Type II, Class 1, Form 1, glazing quality,
clear float, UL listed, meeting ANSI Z97.1, with 0.020-inch diameter welded
wire in square mesh pattern embedded in 6 mm thickness.
G. Insulating Glass (I.G.):
1. Clear glass as manufactured by:
a. Pilkington Libbey-Owens-Ford Glass Co.; Thermopane X1 with
Glasseal edge.
b. PPG, glass edge Twindow X1 units.
c. Insulating glass products are to be permanently marked either on
spacers or at least one component lite of units with appropriate
certification label from IGCC.

JANUARY 2014 08 80 00 - 5
H. Solar Control Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass (I.G.-T.): Insulating glass units
with 1/2-inch air space, specified tinted glass outboard and clear glass
inboard, each sheet 6 mm minimum thickness meeting ASTM E2190,
warranted by manufacturer against failure of edge sealing for minimum
5 years from date of manufacture.
1. Solarban 60 (2) Solarbronze + Clear:
a. Visible light transmission 42 percent.
b. U-value Winter 0.28.
c. U-value Summer 0.27.
d. SHGC 0.28.
e. Shading Coefficient 0.32.
f. Outdoor visible light reflectance 7 percent.
I. Laminated Acoustical Glass (A.G.): 7 mm total thickness, consisting of two
lights of 1/8-inch clear, annealed float glass, glazing quality, bonded to
0.045-inch vinyl interlayer, with STC rating of 35 as manufactured by
Laminated Glass Corp., Telford, PA.
J. Obscure Glass (O.G.): ASTM C1036, Type II, Class 1, Form 3, Glazing
Quality q3, random patterned one side, 5.5 mms thick.
K. Spandrel Glass (S.P.): ASTM C1048, Kind HS, Condition B, Type I, Class 2,
Glazing Quality q3, Style B, tinted float glass, 6 mm thick with ceramic frit
fused to one side.
L. Opaque Panel (O.P.): 1/4-inch thick mineral fiber cement sheet, steam cured,
with an acrylic three-coat finishing system thermally bonded to substrate in
color as scheduled, as manufactured by Glasweld International, Glasweld
panels.
M. Fire-Rated Glazing: Laminated and Impact Safety-Rated materials, 1/4 inch
(6 mm), with fire-rating of 60 minutes.
A. Setting Blocks: ASTM C864 Option silicone, 70 Shore A durometer hardness,
chemically compatible with sealant used.
B. Glazing Tape: Preformed, semisolid, polymeric-based material of proper size
and compressibility. Use only where glazing rabbet is designed for tape and
tape is recommended by glass or sealant manufacturer.
C. Glazing Channels: Resilient EPDM or vinyl gaskets, as recommended by
glass manufacturer, as provided with aluminum frames to be glazed.
D. Metal Sash Glazing Compounds: AAMA 800, nonskinning type butyl.

08 80 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
E. Glazing Sealant: One-component nonsag silicone elastomeric sealant
ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use G, or AAMA 800.
F. Compression Gaskets: Preformed dense elastomeric compression glazing
gaskets, ozone resistant, meeting ASTM C864, Option 1, Shore A durometer
between 65 and 75, of profile required to maintain weathertight seal.
G. Sliding Glass Hardware: Zinc-plated steel upper and side channels, glass
shoes, carriers with full ball bearings, and lower channel; Roll-Ezy Ball
Bearing Track, model numbers 993 ZC, 995 ZC, 997 ZC and 999 ZC as
manufactured by Knape & Vogt.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Do not perform glazing work in damp, foggy, or rainy weather, or when
temperatures are not within range recommended by GANA Glazing
Manual.
B. Surfaces: Smooth, even, sound, dry, and clean.
C. Priming: Complete and cured.
D. Measure size of frames to receive glass and compute actual glass size
allowing for edge clearances.
E. Use wire glass in all glazed openings in labeled fire doors and laminated
safety glass in all other doors, transoms, and sidelights.
F. Verify functioning weep system is present.
G. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 GLAZING INSTALLATION
A. General: Follow recommendations of glass manufacturer GANA Sealant
Manual, GANA Glazing Manual and the following:
1. Cutting:
a. Make concealed edges clean, straight cut, and free from chips and
fissures.
b. Shop cut all glass. Nipping glass on job not allowed.
c. Allow for maximum grip on all edges.

JANUARY 2014 08 80 00 - 7
2. Positioning Glass:
a. Set glass with equal bearing on entire width of pane.
b. Position sheets of glass with setting blocks of hardness,
chemically compatible with sealants used, and sizes recommended
by glass and sealant manufacturers.
c. Set tong marks of tempered glass at bottom of installed sheet.
d. Orient pattern and draw of glass pieces in same direction.
e. Place glass waves parallel or horizontal to floor.
f. Set glass with one translucent surface, with smooth surface, on
weather side.
3. Glass shall not move or rattle.
B. Stop Glazing:
1. Set glass on glazing tape.
2. Fill all voids around perimeter and between exterior glass and stop with
glazing compound to provide completely watertight installation.
3. Trim tape and compound flush with sight line.
C. Putty Glazing:
1. Glaze steel sash with galvanized metal glazing clips and glazing
compound.
2. Cut putty off neatly and evenly to sight line of sash with sharply mitered
corners.
3. Installed putty shall present a smooth surface of uniform width.
D. Channel Glazing:
1. Set glass in glazing channel in accordance with manufacturers
installation instructions.
2. Do not stretch channel.
E. Sealant Glazing:
1. Place setting blocks at quarter points of sill rabbet.
2. Install spacers in channel.
3. Install filler rod in channel.
4. Apply sealant to back and bottom of rabbet.
5. Bed glass in position, centered vertically and horizontally, with glazing
points or clips.
6. Apply sealant to face with sufficient force to eliminate voids.
7. Trim sealant to form watershed sloping away from glass.

08 80 00 - 8 JANUARY 2014
F. Tape Glazing:
1. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, horizontal
strips first, extending over width of opening, then vertical strips.
2. Place setting blocks at quarter points.
3. Remove paper backing from tape.
4. Position glass on setting blocks and press against tape for full contact.
5. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glass.
6. Seal butt joints of tape with joint sealant.
7. Install removable stop, avoiding displacement of tape, and exert
pressure on tape for full continuous contact.
G. Gasket Glazing:
1. Cut compression gasket with mitered corners to length of channel
without stretching and install as recommended by gasket and frame
manufacturer.
2. Apply gasket to outside fixed edge of rabbet perimeter.
3. Place setting blocks at quarter points of sill rabbet.
4. Place glass on setting blocks and center horizontally.
5. Apply gasket to inside stop, mitering corners.
3.03 HOSE TEST
A. Use 3/4-inch minimum hose without nozzle. With full stream, flood glazing
from bottom to top.
B. Correct any leaks disclosed by hose test by reglazing and retesting until
eliminated.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Leave glass and glazing in undamaged condition and ready for final cleaning.
B. Remove excess glazing compound from installed glass.
C. Remove labels from glass surface at time of final cleaning.
D. Wash and polish both faces of glass.
3.05 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK
A. Protection:
1. Keep glass free from contamination by materials capable of staining
glass.

JANUARY 2014 08 80 00 - 9
2. Install tape across lights secured to frames or structure.
3. No tape or marking allowed on glass.
B. Replacements and Repairs:
1. Prior to Substantial Completion, replace broken, defective, or scratched
glass and repair damaged compounds.
2. Include patch and repair of existing glass to remain that is damaged or
otherwise disturbed due to this Work.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
JANUARY 2014 09 22 16 - 1
SECTION 09 22 16
NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
a. C645, Standard Specification for Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel
Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw
Application of Gypsum Board.
b. C754, Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing
Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals: Product data for metal framing and fasteners.
A. Deliver materials to Site in manufacturers original, unopened, undamaged
containers, with labels intact clearly indicating manufacturer and material.
B. Storage:
1. Store materials inside, under cover, stacked flat, off floor.
2. Avoid overloading floor system of storage area.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond.
B. Dale/Incor.
C. G-P Gypsum Corporation.
D. United States Gypsum Company.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Furnish materials from a single manufacturer.

NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PW/WBG/475883
09 22 16 - 2 JANUARY 2014
B. Studs, Tracks, Furring Channels, and Accessories:
1. ASTM C645.
2. 25- and 20-gauge galvanized steel C-studs with 1-5/8-inch flanges and
ancillary items.
3. Sizes as shown on Drawings.
4. Furnished curved tracks where required for curved wall surfaces.
C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 16-gauge, free of rust, coated with
factory-applied rust-inhibitive paint, 1-1/2 inches deep, weighing not less than
475 pounds per 1,000 linear feet.
D. Furring Channels: Roll-formed hat shaped section of 25-gauge galvanized
steel with a face width of 1-3/8 inches and a depth of 7/8 inch.
E. Resilient Furring Channels:
1. Roll-formed section of 25-gauge galvanized steel with face width of
1-1/2 inches designed for resilient attachment of gypsum board to
framing.
a. United States Gypsum; RC-1 channel.
b. Gold Bond; resilient channels.
F. Z Furring Channels: U.S. Gypsum or Gold Bond.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION
A. Preparation: Provide, install, and maintain necessary scaffold, staging,
trestles, planking, and temporary heating, lighting, and ventilation as
necessary for the duration of the gypsum board work.
B. Field Measurements: Take and record measurements before fabrication of
assemblies.
C. Layout: Align partitions as shown on Drawings.
D. Tracks:
1. Attach metal runner tracks to floor slabs with suitable fasteners located
2 inches from each end and spaced not more than 24 inches OC.
2. Attach tracks to suspended ceiling with toggle or molly bolts spaced
24 inches OC.

PW/WBG/475883 NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
JANUARY 2014 09 22 16 - 3
E. Studs and Other Framing:
1. ASTM C754.
2. Following manufacturers printed instructions, position studs vertically,
engaging floor and ceiling tracks and spaced as noted on Drawings.
3. Splices: Not allowed.
4. Place in direct contact with doorframe jambs, abutting partitions, and
partition corners. Provide for anchorage of doorframes to studs.
5. Anchor all studs for shelf-walls and those adjacent to window and
doorframes, partition intersections, and corners to ceiling and floor
runner flanges. Securely anchor studs to jamb and head anchor clips of
door or borrowed-light frames by bolt or screw attachment.
6. Over metal door and borrowed-light frames, place horizontally a cut-to-
length section of runner, with a web-flanged bend at each end, and
secure with one positive attachment per flange. Position a cut-to-length
stud (extending to ceiling runner) at vertical panel joints over doorframe
header.
7. Locate studs at abutting construction, partition intersections, and
partition corners.
8. Spacing: 16 inches OC, unless otherwise required by manufacturer.
9. Doorframes and Cased Openings:
a. Full height double studs, No. 20-gauge minimum, secured to jamb
anchors by bolts, screws, or welds.
b. Header Track: Secure to frame head anchors and double studs.
c. Provide double channel stiffeners through studs above frame and
extend at least one stud space beyond each jamb.
10. Windows: Similar framing to door openings with stiffeners both above
and below.
11. Wall Mounting Accessories: Provide channels, horizontal studding,
No. 16-gauge sheet 8 inches by 2 inches greater than stud spacing, or
other members within walls as required to provide secure and adequate
support.
F. Furring:
1. Space furring channels the same as studs or as shown.
2. Around columns and beams construct furring as shown using metal
studs and furring channels securely tied together and anchored in-place.
3. Attach resilient furring channels to wood framing with screws.
G. Leave framing, plumb, aligned, securely anchored, braced, and ready to
receive gypsum board.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 LATH AND PLASTERING
JANUARY 2014 09 22 36 - 1
SECTION 09 22 36
LATH AND PLASTERING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
a. A641, Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Carbon Steel Wire.
b. C28, Standard Specification for Gypsum Plasters.
c. C35, Standard Specification for Inorganic Aggregates for Use in
Gypsum Plaster.
d. C61, Standard Specification for Gypsum Keenes Cement.
e. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
f. C206, Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime.
g. C841, Standard Specification for Installation of Interior Lathing
and Furring.
h. C842, Standard Specification for Application of Interior Gypsum
Plaster.
i. C847, Standard Specification for Metal Lath.
j. C897, Standard Specification for Job-Mixed Portland
Cement-Based Plasters.
k. C926, Standard Specification for Application of Portland
Cement-Based Plaster.
l. C933, Standard Specification for Welded Wire Lath.
m. C1032, Standard Specification for Woven Wire Plaster Base.
n. C1063, Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and
Furring for Portland Cement-Based Plaster.
o. C1396, Specification for Gypsum Board.
p. D226, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt
Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings: Detailed control joint layout.
2. Samples: One each of metal lath and metal accessories.
B. Informational Submittals: Documentation of lath and plaster appliers
successful experience for past 5 years on projects of equal size and scope.

LATH AND PLASTERING PW/WBG/475883
09 22 36 - 2 JANUARY 2014
A. Keep materials dry; store off ground, under cover, and away from damp
places.
B. Protect accessories and metal goods against deformation, breakage, staining,
and rusting.
1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Temperature: Maintain uniform temperature above 55 degrees F for 24 hours
before, during, and after application in areas receiving lathing and plastering.
B. Ventilation:
1. Provide ventilation to properly dry plaster during and after its
application.
2. Use temporary air circulators in enclosed areas lacking natural
ventilation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED CEILINGS
A. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 16-gauge, free of rust, coated with
factory-applied rust-inhibitive paint or zinc, 1-1/2 inches deep, weighing not
less than 475 pounds per 1,000 linear feet.
B. Furring Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 16-gauge, free of rust, coated with
factory-applied rust-inhibitive paint or zinc, 3/4-inch deep, weighing not less
than 300 pounds per 1,000 linear feet.
C. Tie Wire: Galvanized, soft annealed steel, ASTM A641, 18 gauge minimum.
D. Hanger Wire: Galvanized, soft annealed steel, ASTM A641, 8 gauge
minimum.
2.02 LATH
A. Expanded Metal Lath: ASTM C847.
1. Diamond Mesh: Paperbacked steel, 3.4 pounds per square yard.
2. Stucco Mesh: Plain, galvanized steel, 3.6 pounds per square yard.
3. Flat Rib Lath: Galvanized steel, 3.4 pounds per square yard weight.

JANUARY 2014 09 22 36 - 3
B. Wire Lath:
1. Woven Wire (Stucco Netting): ASTM C1032, copper-bearing,
galvanized steel, hexagonal interwoven wire, paperbacked, 18 gauge
minimum with 1-inch openings.
2. Welded Wire: ASTM C933, galvanized steel, paperbacked, 16 gauge
minimum with 2-inch by 2-inch openings.
C. Fasteners for Metal Lath: Galvanized nails or staples of the type
recommended by the lath manufacturer.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. For Portland Cement Plaster-Stucco Systems: Galvanized steel or polyvinyl
chloride, size suitable for the thickness of the stucco.
Accessories for Portland Cement Plaster-Stucco Systems
Material
Metalex
Keene
Vinyl
Tech Fry
Corner bead 1-X #4 PCM-75-75
Casing bead (exposed type) J-Trim #5C JPM 75
Control joint XJ15-3 #20X PCS-75-25
Foundation screed Drip Screed #631 FWS-875
Expansion joint #40 #20 PCS-75-25
B. Vented Channel Screed: Fry Reglet Corp., No. PCS-75-V-300.
C. Channel Screed: Fry Reglet Corp., No. PCS-75-150.
D. Underlayment: ASTM D226, Type I, asphalt-saturated felt.
2.04 GYPSUM BASE COAT PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Gypsum Ready-Mixed Plaster: ASTM C28 with sand aggregate and plaster
suitable for use over lath or masonry bases.
B. Gypsum Wood-Fibered Plaster: ASTM C28.
C. Neat Plaster: ASTM C28, regular, suitable for use with sand aggregate.
D. Bond Plaster: ASTM C28.
E. Bonding Agent: Larsen Products Plaster Weld; Toch Brothers Tok-Bond.

09 22 36 - 4 JANUARY 2014
F. Plaster Sand: ASTM C35.
2.05 GYPSUM FINISH COAT PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Gypsum Neat Plaster: ASTM C28, Type R.
B. Sand for Float Finish: ASTM C35 for use in gypsum-sand float finish.
1. Sand Gradation:
Sieve Size
Retained on Sieve Percent by Weight
Maximum Minimum
No. 16
No. 30 20 50
No. 50 50 70
No. 100 80 100
2. Do not use fine sand; sand having rounded particles uniform in size
(frequently called quicksand).
C. Keenes Cement: ASTM C61. Best Brothers Keenes cement, fast finish; USG
Red Top Keenes Cement.
D. Hydrated Finishing Lime: ASTM C206.
2.06 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.
B. White Cement: True waterproofed white portland cement conforming to
ASTM C150, Type I; Atlas Medusa white.
C. Fiber: Strands of alkaline-resistant chopped Fiberglas or goat or cattle hair
or manila fiber of good quality, 1/2 inch to 2 inches long.
D. Sand: ASTM C897.
E. Integral Waterproofing: Sika Corp.; Sika Red Label liquid water repellant
admixture.

JANUARY 2014 09 22 36 - 5
2.07 MIXES
A. General:
1. Provide suitable mechanical mixers and measuring devices. Hand
mixing will not be permitted.
2. Use potable water.
3. Thoroughly mix plaster ingredients.
4. Use mixed plaster within 1 hour after mixing. Retempering will not be
permitted.
5. Do not allow material to remain overnight in mixers or mixing boxes.
6. Clean machines, boxes, tools, and equipment as required during the
plastering operation.
7. At the end of the working day, clean up all tools and equipment.
B. Preparation of Lime Putty: Prepare lime putty from hydrated lime in
conformance with the manufacturers printed directions.
C. Plaster Mix Proportions:
1. Proportioning Scratch and Brown Coats: Prepare ready-mixed plaster
and wood-fibered plaster for scratch and brown coats in conformance
with the manufacturers printed directions.
2. Proportioning Scratch and Brown Coats: Add sand to gypsum neat
plaster and prepare for scratch and brown coats in conformance with the
manufacturers printed directions.
3. Prepare finish coats as follows:
a. Gypsum-Sand Float Finish: Mix in proportions of 1 part of
gypsum neat unfibered plaster to 2 parts of sand by weight.
b. Keenes Cement-Hard Finish: Mix in proportions of 100 pounds
of Keenes cement to not more than 25 pounds of dry hydrated
finishing lime.
4. Bond Plaster: Follow manufacturers printed directions.
D. Portland Cement Plaster and Stucco Mix Proportions:
1. Portland Cement Plaster for Interior Surfaces (All Coats): 1 part
portland cement by volume, 3 parts sand, 1/4 part lime putty.
2. Scratch Coat (Under Ceramic Tile): 1 part portland cement (by volume),
3 parts sand, 1/4 part lime putty.
3. Portland Cement Stucco for Exterior Surfaces:
a. Proportions: Scratch coat and brown coat, 1 cubic foot portland
cement, 3-1/2 cubic feet base coat sand, 4/10 cubic foot lime
putty. Finish coat, 1 cubic foot portland cement white, 2 cubic feet
selected sand, 4/10 cubic foot lime putty.

09 22 36 - 6 JANUARY 2014
b. Fiber: Add 2 pounds of fiber to each batch of the scratch and
brown coat mix when used on metal lath or stucco mesh.
c. Waterproofing: Add 1 quart of integral waterproofing to each
batch of the brown and finish coats of exterior stucco. Increase
quantity of waterproofing material when necessary to conform
with the manufacturers printed directions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Protection: Protect other portions of the Work.
B. Surface Preparation: Repair defective surfaces prior to starting Work.
C. Prior to beginning mixing operations ensure that dust emissions will be
minimized.
3.02 SUSPENDED CEILING ERECTION
A. General:
1. Securely brace ceiling areas against sway.
2. Prevent runner and furring channel contact with masonry walls.
3. Provide 1-1/2-inch channels around all recessed lighting fixture
openings to support fixtures.
4. Where Work of other trades interferes with normal spacing of hangers
and carrying channels, install additional hangers or channels to properly
suspend the ceiling.
B. Hanger Wires:
1. Space maximum 4 feet 0 inch on center in the direction of runners and
within 6 inches of runner ends.
2. Securely attach to structure above and make full saddle tie to main
carrying channels.
3. Connections shall develop the full strength of the wire.
C. Main Carrying Channels:
1. Space channels maximum 4 feet 0 inch on center and 6 inches from
parallel walls; run channels at right angles to the length of the joists.
2. Overlap splices 12 inches minimum, interlock flanges, and securely tie
near each end of splice with double loops of tie wire.

JANUARY 2014 09 22 36 - 7
D. Furring Channels:
1. Attach furring channels to carrying channels at right angles, space at
16 inches on center.
2. Securely saddle tie furring to the main channels at each crossing.
3. Overlap splices in cross-furring 8 inches minimum, interlock flanges,
and securely tie near each end of splice with two loops of tie wire.
3.03 APPLICATION OF METAL LATH TO FRAMING
A. Apply to framing in strict accordance with ASTM C841 and the
3.04 APPLICATION OF METAL LATH FOR EXTERIOR STUCCO
A. Conform to ASTM C1063.
B. Cover framing with underlayment before application of lath.
C. Install underlayment horizontally with upper sheet overlapping the lower by
3 inches (shingle fashion) to shed moisture.
D. Coordinate Work with metal flashings.
E. Apply metal lath over the underlayment in conformance with manufacturers
printed directions.
F. Install accessories.
3.05 APPLICATION OF METAL LATH FOR CERAMIC TILE
A. Cover the walls with underlayment before lath is applied.
B. Install underlayment horizontally with upper sheet overlapping lower by
3 inches to shed moisture.
C. Apply metal lath where indicated in accordance with the manufacturers
printed directions, except as specified.
D. Secure lath to framing with large-head galvanized nails or galvanized staples.
E. Where metal lath surfaces join surfaces of other materials to be plastered,
extend lath across such surfaces, lapping at least 4 inches.
3.06 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM LATH
A. Conform to ASTM C841, except as specified.

09 22 36 - 8 JANUARY 2014
B. Apply gypsum lath with long dimensions across the studs with end joints
staggered in successive courses.
C. Start application at bottom.
D. Fasten lath securely to supports with clips, screws, or 13-gauge, 1-1/8-inch
blued nails spaced approximately 5 inches on center and from 3/8 inch to
1/2 inch back from edges.
E. Butt lath snugly, but do not force.
F. Stagger end joints in alternate courses, and make joints over supports.
G. Stagger end joints in opposite sides of a partition and do not permit joints in
the same course on opposite sides of the same stud.
H. Fasten gypsum lath at each end and at each intermediate bearing.
I. Drive nails so that underside of head is flush with the lath.
J. Reinforce re-entrant angles with corner reinforcement for the full height or
length, 3 inches wide on each side of angle in all internal horizontal and
vertical corners.
K. Cover all joints between walls of different materials with 6-inch wide strip
lath.
L. Install 6-inch by 18-inch strip lath at corners of openings in walls and of
doorheads set at a 45-degree angle across the corners.
3.07 JOINTS BETWEEN DIFFERENT MATERIALS USED FOR PLASTER BASE
A. Where metal lathed surfaces join surfaces of other materials to be used for a
plaster base, extend metal lath across the junction, lapping at least 4 inches
each side of joint for the entire height or width.
3.08 ACCESSORIES
A. Install accessories plumb or level, straight, and true to line.
B. Tie with wire or nail at 12-inch intervals to metal or gypsum lath as required
to accomplish the construction.
C. Provide corner beads at external angles, casing beads where indicated and
where plaster abuts unplastered surfaces, metal screeds, and other accessories
as shown and required.

JANUARY 2014 09 22 36 - 9
3.09 GYPSUM PLASTER APPLICATION
A. General:
1. Specification Intent: To obtain true, clean, solid, neutral plaster surfaces
ready for the painters finish as specified.
2. Masonry Surfaces: Clean and dry, except wet with a fog spray those
masonry surfaces needing reduced suction.
3. Plaster Coats: Apply in accordance with the plaster manufacturers
printed directions, except as specified.
B. Gypsum Base Coats: Conform to ASTM C842, except as specified.
1. Over Metal Lath: Apply in two operations to 5/8-inch grounds,
measured from the face of lath.
a. Scratch Coat: Apply with sufficient material and pressure to form
good full keys and to cover well, and then cross-scratch to a rough
surface.
b. Brown Coat: Apply after the scratch coat has set firm and hard,
brought out to grounds, and straightened to a true surface.
c. Rod base coat surface with a straightedge, up to 10 feet in length
where space permits, and smooth with a darby.
2. Over Gypsum Lath or Masonry:
a. Apply in one operation to 1/2-inch grounds on gypsum lath and to
5/8-inch grounds on masonry.
b. Use sufficient material and pressure to form a good bond on the
gypsum lath and to cover thoroughly.
c. Double material back to bring plaster out to grounds.
d. Straighten to a true surface with rod and darby.
e. Provide roughened surface ready to receive the finish coat.
f. Surface shall be rodded with a straightedge, up to 10 feet in length
where space permits, and smoothed with a darby.
3. Over Monolithic Concrete: Use bond plaster with only the addition of
water on monolithic concrete surfaces to be plastered.
a. Roughen concrete surfaces by mechanical means.
b. Base Coat: One or more thin coats sufficient to straighten the
areas applied with great pressure to secure a good bond.
1) If necessary to apply in two coats, double back with the
same material.
2) Thickness: Not be less than 1/8 inch nor more than 3/8 inch
in thickness.
3) Broom or otherwise roughen surface to receive the finish
coat.
c. Apply gypsum scratch and brown coats as specified above.

09 22 36 - 10 JANUARY 2014
C. Finish Coats:
1. Gypsum-Sand Float Finish:
a. Apply over partially dry base coat or over a thoroughly dry base
coat that has been wetted by brushing or spraying.
b. Lay on with a trowel and then float with wood float. Use no water
during floating.
c. Finish Surface: Of uniform texture, free from slick spots and other
blemishes.
2. Keenes Cement Troweled Finish:
a. Apply Keenes cement plaster over a partially dry base coat or
over a thoroughly dry base coat which has been evenly wetted by
brushing or spraying.
b. Lay on evenly, double back, and fill out to a true, even surface.
c. Thickness: From 1/16 to 1/8 inch.
d. Allow finish to dry a few minutes and then trowel with water to a
smooth finish, free from blemishes and irregularities.
e. Continue troweling until the finish sets.
3.10 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) APPLICATION
A. Conform to ASTM C926, except as specified.
B. Scratch Coat: Apply with sufficient pressure to completely embed the metal
reinforcement or to force it into the masonry surfaces.
1. Thickness: Full 3/8-inch coat.
2. Cross-scratch and after initial set damp-cure for 48 hours, or until brown
coat is applied.
C. Brown Coat: After scratch coat has set, but not less than 24 hours after
application, apply over the dampened scratch coat with sufficient pressure to
form a good bond.
1. Thickness: Full 3/8-inch coat.
2. Rod and level brown coat and roughen with a broom in preparation for
the finish coat.
3. After the coat has set, damp-cure for a period of 7 days or until the
finish coat is applied.
D. Finish Coat: Apply not less than 7 days after the brown coat, and keep damp
for 2 consecutive days thereafter.
1. Give portland cement plaster a smooth trowel finish.
2. Finish stucco to a true, hard surface texture of the approved sample
panel.

JANUARY 2014 09 22 36 - 11
3. After the coat has set, damp-cure for 48 hours by means of a fog spray
that will keep the surface continuously damp.
E. Bond Plaster (Bonding Agent for Use on Monolithic Concrete): Prepare
surfaces and apply bond plaster scratch coat in accordance with
3.11 APPLICATION THICKNESSES
A. Provide thicknesses in table below, measured from the face of plaster base to
finished plaster surface.
B. Install wood or metal grounds, or plaster screeds, to assure required thickness.
C. Increase plaster thickness where necessary to meet building code
requirements.
Plaster Base
Thickness of Plaster
Including Finish Coat
(Inches)
Metal lath (gypsum plaster) 5/8 minimum
All other types of lath 1/2 minimum
Unit masonry 5/8 minimum
Vertical monolithic concrete surfaces 5/8 maximum
Horizontal monolithic concrete
surfaces
3/8 maximum
1/8 minimum
Metal lath (portland cement plaster) 3/4 minimum
Masonry 5/8 minimum
Metal lath (stucco) 7/8 minimum
A. Engineer will take samples from plaster work in-place to verify conformance
with intent of Contract Documents. Areas represented by samples that show
oversanding will be rejected.
3.13 REPAIRING DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Plaster surfaces containing cracks, blisters, pits, checks, or discolorations will
be considered defective and will not be acceptable.
B. Patching of defective Work will be permitted only when approved by the
Engineer; match existing in texture and color.

09 22 36 - 12 JANUARY 2014
C. Cut and repair plaster for installation of omitted Work.
D. Patch lath and plaster that has been cut or damaged due to installation of
materials or equipment after the plaster has been applied.
3.14 CLEANING
A. Remove excess plaster from building surfaces and clean.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 GYPSUM BOARD
JANUARY 2014 09 29 00 - 1
SECTION 09 29 00
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
a. A641/A641M, Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
b. C208, Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating
Board.
c. C475/C475M, Standard Specification for Joint Compound and
Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.
d. C514, Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of
Gypsum Board.
e. C645, Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing
Members.
f. C665, Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal
Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured
Housing.
g. C754, Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing
Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products.
h. C840, Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of
Gypsum Board.
i. C1002, Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping
Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal
Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.
j. C1047, Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum
Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base.
k. C1177/C1177M, Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum
Substrate for Use as Sheathing.
l. C1178/C1178M, Standard Specification for Glass Mat Water-
Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel.
m. C1396/C1396M, Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.
n. D4977, Standard Test Method for Granule Adhesion to Mineral
Surfaced Roofing by Abrasion.
o. D5420, Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat,
Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by a
Falling Weight (Gardner Impact).
p. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.

GYPSUM BOARD PW/WBG/475883
09 29 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
q. E90, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of
Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and
Elements.
r. E119, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building
Construction and Materials.
s. E413, Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.
t. E695, Standard Test Method of Measuring Relative Resistance of
Wall, Floor, and Roof Construction to Impact Loading.
2. Gypsum Association (GA):
a. 214, Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.
b. 216, Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products.
3. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): UL Fire Resistance Directory.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals:
1. Control joint pattern proposed for gypsum board.
2. Control joint pattern proposed for gypsum soffit.
3. Manufacturers list of items and materials proposed for use, with
descriptive literature for each system used.
A. General: Regardless of the minimum specifications herein, utilize materials
and applications recommended by manufacturer.
B. Applicators Qualifications: Use only workers regularly employed in this type
of work who can show experience in application of similar materials and
specific systems specified.
C. Single Source Responsibility: Use gypsum board and related joint treatment
materials from a single manufacturer for each type used.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in the assembly indicated or scheduled on Drawings,
according to ASTM E119 and or UL Fire Resistance Directory or in listing of
other testing agencies acceptable under local building code.
E. Sound Transmission Characteristics: Provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in the assembly indicated or scheduled on Drawings,
according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413.
A. Delivery: Deliver fire-rated materials bearing testing agency label and
required fire classification numbers.

JANUARY 2014 09 29 00 - 3
B. Storage:
1. Store materials inside, under cover, stacked flat, off floor.
2. Stack gypsum board so that long lengths are not over short lengths.
3. Avoid overloading floor system of storage area.
4. Store adhesives and finishing compounds in dry areas; protect against
freezing at all times.
A. Temperature: In areas receiving gypsum board installation, maintain
minimum temperature of 40 degrees F for 48 hours before, during, and after
gypsum board application. Maintain minimum temperature of 50 degrees F
for 48 hours before, during, and after application of adhesive methods of
attachment and finishing compounds until drying is complete.
B. Ventilation:
1. Provide ventilation during and following adhesives and joint treatment
applications.
2. Use temporary air circulators in enclosed areas lacking natural
ventilation.
3. Under slow drying conditions, allow additional drying time between
coats of joint treatment.
4. Protect installed materials from drafts of ambient air during hot, dry
weather.
5. Protect materials from drying too rapidly during hot and dry weather.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM BOARD
A. Regular Board (GWB): ASTM C1396/C1396M, 5/8-inch thick with tapered
edges.
B. Fire-Rated Board (GWBX): ASTM C1396/C1396M, Type X, 5/8-inch thick
with tapered edges.
C. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board (GMSB):
1. ASTM C1177/C1177M, Type X, 5/8-inch thick.
2. Manufacturer and Product: G-P Gypsum Corp., Dens-Glass Gold.
D. Abuse Resistant Board (ARWB): ASTM C1396/C1396M, Type X, 5/8-inch
thick as manufactured by:
1. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi-Abuse Wallboard.

09 29 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
2. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Brand Abuse-Resistant
Gypsum Panels.
2.02 FASTENERS
A. Gypsum Board:
1. Annular Ring Nail: ASTM C514, GWB-54, 1-1/4 inches long for
1/2-inch gypsum board, and 1-3/8 inches long for 5/8-inch gypsum
board.
2. Smooth Shank Nail: ASTM C514, 1-3/8 inches long for 1/2-inch
gypsum board, and 1-1/2 inches long for 5/8-inch gypsum board.
3. Screws: ASTM C1002, self-drilling, self-tapping, bugle head, for use
with power-driven tool.
a. Type S, 1 inch long for gypsum board to sheet metal.
b. Type W, 1-1/4 inches long for gypsum board to wood.
2.03 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. Tape:
1. General Interior Applications: ASTM C475/C475M, perforated paper
tape.
B. Compound:
1. General Interior Applications: ASTM C475/C475M, all-purpose, ready-
mixed compound.
A. Adhesives: As recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for intended use.
B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I (no facing), 3 inches thick.
C. Acoustical Sealant:
1. Nonsetting and nonstaining.
2. Manufacturers:
a. DAP.
b. United States Gypsum.
c. Tremco.
d. Ohio Sealants, Inc.
2.05 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. ASTM C1047, Zinc-Coated Metal.

JANUARY 2014 09 29 00 - 5
1. Corner Bead:
a. 1-1/4 inches by 1-1/4 inches:
1) United States Gypsum; Dur-A-Bead.
2) Gold Bond; standard corner beads.
2. Edge Trim:
a. United States Gypsum; 200B metal trim.
b. Gold Bond; No. 200 casing bead.
3. Metal Control Joint:
a. United States Gypsum; No. 093.
b. Gold Bond; E-Z strip control joint.
2.06 NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING MEMBERS
A. ASTM C645, galvanized C-studs with 1-5/8-inch flanges.
B. Sizes and Gauge: As noted in wall types on Drawings.
C. Manufacturers:
1. United States Gypsum.
2. Dale/Incor.
3. Gold Bond.
4. Unimast, Inc.
2.07 LIGHT-GAUGE METAL FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A. Cold-Rolled Carrying Channel: Cold-rolled steel, 16-gauge metal with
minimum 1/2-inch wide flange, galvanized 2 inches deep.
B. Cold-Rolled Bridging Channel: Cold-rolled steel, 16-gauge metal with
minimum 1/2 inch wide flange galvanized 1-1/2 inches deep.
C. Cold-Rolled Furring Channel: Cold-rolled steel, 25-gauge metal with
minimum 1/2-inch wide flange, galvanized 3/4 inches deep.
D. Z-Furring: Galvanized 20-gauge, 2-1/2 inch(es) deep.
E. Hat-Shaped Furring Channels: Roll-formed hat shaped section of 20-gauge
galvanized steel with a face width of 1-1/4 inches and a depth of 7/8 inch(es).
F. Resilient Furring Channels: Roll-formed section of 25-gauge galvanized steel
with face width of 1-1/2 inches designed for resilient attachment of gypsum
board to framing.

09 29 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
G. Hanger Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper,
0.162-inch diameter.
H. Tie Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.625-inch
diameter or double strand of 0.0475-inch diameter wire.
2.08 DRY WALL CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Use system of main runners, cross tees, and furring channels.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall.
2. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Drywall Suspension System.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect surfaces to receive gypsum board and related materials before
beginning work and report to Engineer any defects in such work which will
adversely affect the quality of work specified herein.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Provide, install, and maintain necessary scaffold, staging, trestles,
planking, and temporary heating, lighting, and ventilation as necessary for
duration of gypsum board work.
B. Protection: Protect work of other trades.
C. Coordination:
1. Coordinate work with that of other trades. Check specifications and
drawings of other trades to determine parts of work requiring
coordination.
2. Cut and repair gypsum board systems for installation of omitted work.
D. Surface Preparation: Repair defective surfaces prior to starting work. Prepare
as specified for application of specific materials.

JANUARY 2014 09 29 00 - 7
3.03 ERECTION OF SUSPENDED CEILING
A. General:
1. Securely brace all ceiling areas against sway as required by code for
seismic control.
2. Prevent runner and furring channels from contacting masonry walls.
3. Provide 1-1/2-inch channels around recessed lighting fixture openings
to support fixtures.
B. Hangers:
1. Space not over 4 feet on center (OC) in direction of runners and within
6 inches of ends of runners.
2. Securely attach to structure above and provide for full saddle tie to main
runner at indicated height.
3. Install additional hangers at ends of each suspension member and at
light fixtures, 6 inches from vertical surfaces.
4. Do not splay wires more than 5 inches in a 4-foot vertical drop.
5. Provide four-way wire splays at 45 degrees from main runner to support
structure for every 144 square feet of ceiling area to prevent sway.
6. Wrap wire minimum three times horizontally, turning ends upward.
7. Where hanger wires cannot be hung vertically from structure above
because of ducts, pipes, cable trays, or other interferences, provide
trapezes of steel channels (minimum 2-inch deep, 16-gauge cold-rolled
carrying channels) hung on steel rods or 8-gauge wire from structural
members above. Hang ceiling wires from trapezes or similar members
supporting ducts or pipes. Do not hang directly from ducts or pipes.
C. Main Runner Channels:
1. Run main runner channels spaced not more than 4 feet OC, and 6 inches
from parallel walls, at right angles to the length of joists.
2. Overlap splices in main runners 12 inches minimum, interlock flanges,
and securely tie near each end of splice with double loops of tie wire.
D. Furring Channels:
1. Attach furring channels to main runners at right angles, space at
16 inches OC.
2. Securely saddle tie furring to the main runners at each crossing or
equivalent clips or attachments.
3. Splices in Cross-Furring: Lap 8 inches minimum, interlock flanges, and
securely tie near each end of splice with two loops of tie wire.

09 29 00 - 8 JANUARY 2014
3.04 ERECTION OF DRY WALL CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Follow manufacturers printed instructions.
B. Hangers:
1. Space not over 4 feet OC in direction of runners and within 6 inches of
ends of runners.
2. Securely attach to structure above and provide for full saddle tie to main
runner at indicated height.
3. Connections shall develop full strength of hanger wire.
C. Bracing:
1. Securely brace ceiling areas against sway.
2. Where required by code, install for seismic control.
3. Prevent runner and furring channels from contacting masonry walls.
D. Where ducts interfere with normal spacing of hangers and carrying channels,
install additional hangers and channels to properly suspend ceiling.
3.05 ERECTION OF LIGHT-GAUGE NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
A. Layout: Align partitions as shown on Drawings.
B. Tracks:
1. Attach metal runner tracks to floor slabs with suitable fasteners located
2 inches from each end and spaced not more than 24 inches OC.
2. Where partitions terminate at suspended or framed ceilings attach top
tracks to suspended ceiling with toggle or molly bolts spaced
24 inches OC.
3. Where partitions terminate at underside of concrete or metal decking
attach deflection channels to substrate with suitable fasteners located
2 inches from each end and spaced not more than 24 inches OC. Locate
partition top tracks within deflection channels with a minimum top
clearance of 1 inch. Do not attach track to channel.
C. Studs:
1. ASTM C754.
2. Following manufacturers printed instructions, position studs vertically,
engaging floor and ceiling tracks and spaced as noted on Drawings.
3. Splice: When necessary, use 8-inch nested lap and one positive
attachment per stud flange.
4. Place in direct contact with doorframe jambs, abutting partitions, and
partition corners. Provide for anchorage of doorframes to studs.

JANUARY 2014 09 29 00 - 9
5. Anchor studs for shelf-walls and those adjacent to window and
doorframes, partition intersections, and corners to ceiling and floor
runner flanges. Securely anchor studs to jamb and head anchor clips of
door or borrowed-light frames by bolt or screw attachment.
6. Over metal door and borrowed-light frames, place horizontally a
cut-to-length section of runner, with a web-flanged bend at each end,
and secure with one positive attachment per flange. Position a
cut-to-length stud (extending to ceiling runner) at vertical panel joints
over doorframe header.
7. Locate studs at abutting construction, partition intersections, and
partition corners.
8. Spacing: At 24 inches OC, unless otherwise required by manufacturer.
9. At Doorframes and Cased Openings:
a. Full height double studs, No. 20 gauge minimum, secured to jamb
anchors by bolts, screws, or welds.
b. Header Track: Secure to frame head anchors and double studs.
c. Provide double channel stiffeners through studs above frame and
extend at least one stud space beyond each jamb.
10. Windows: Similar framing to door openings with stiffeners both above
and below.
11. Wall Mounting Accessories: Provide channels, horizontal studding,
No. 16 gauge sheet 8 inches by 2 inches greater than stud spacing, or
other members within walls as required to provide secure and adequate
support.
D. Furring:
1. Space furring channels the same as studs or as shown.
2. Around columns and beams construct furring as shown using metal
studs and furring channels securely tied together and anchored in-place.
3. Attach resilient furring channels to wood framing with screws.
3.06 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD
A. Inspection and Preparation:
1. Check framing for accurate spacing and alignment.
2. Verify spacing of installed framing does not exceed maximum
allowable for thickness of gypsum board to be used.
3. Verify frames are set for thickness of gypsum board to be used.
4. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board until deficiencies are
corrected and surfaces to receive gypsum board are acceptable.
5. Repair protrusions of framing, twisted framing members, or unaligned
members before installation of gypsum board is started.

09 29 00 - 10 JANUARY 2014
B. General:
1. Meet requirements of ASTM C840 and GA 216.
2. Joints: Use gypsum board of maximum lengths to minimize end joints.
Stagger end joints when they occur. Locate end joints as far as possible
from center of wall or ceiling. Abut gypsum board without forcing.
Neatly fit ends and edges of gypsum board. Do not place butt ends
against tapered edges.
3. Support ends and edges of gypsum board panels on framing or furring
members except for face layer of double layer and where ends are back
blocked and floated.
4. Use metal edge trim where gypsum board abuts another material, at
corners, and where shown or noted on Drawings.
5. Follow manufacturers recommendation of good practice.
C. Over Framing:
1. Apply gypsum board first to ceiling and then to walls for single layer
horizontal application.
2. Use vertical application for fire-rated walls.
3. Fasten gypsum board securely to framing using double nailing, screw,
or adhesive method.
D. Sound-Rated Partitions:
1. Fabricate and erect in accordance with manufacturers printed
instructions for required rating.
2. Install sound-deadening board and attenuation blankets as detailed.
3. Seal with acoustical sealant perimeter edges of gypsum board, joints
around penetrations, and other joints as noted.
E. Fireproofing:
1. Install fireproofing of columns, beams, and shaft walls as shown.
2. Close tops of duct and pipe shafts, and elevator hoistways with
horizontal metal framing and gypsum board to provide 1-hour rated
assembly.
3.07 JOINT SYSTEM FOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. Interior Gypsum Board: Conform to ASTM C840.
B. Required: On exposed gypsum board, under ceramic tile and wall covering,
and behind casework.
C. Prefill: Fill V-grooves formed by abutting rounded edges of gypsum board
with prefill joint compound. Fill V-joint flush and remove excess compound

JANUARY 2014 09 29 00 - 11
beyond groove. Leave clear depression to receive tape. Permit prefill joint
compound to harden prior to application of tape.
D. Taping and Finishing Joints:
1. Taping or Embedding Coat: Apply compound in thin, uniform layer to
joints and angles to be reinforced. Apply reinforcing tape immediately.
Center tape over joint and seat tape into compound. Leave
approximately 1/64-inch to 1/32-inch compound under tape to provide
bond. Apply skim coat immediately following tape embedment but not
to function as fill or second coat. Fold tape and embed in angles to
provide true angle. Dry embedding coat prior to application of fill coat.
2. Filling Coat: Apply joint compound over embedding coat. Fill taper
flush with surface. Apply fill coat to cover tape. Feather out fill coat
beyond tape and previous joint compound line. For joints with no taper,
feather out at least 4 inches on either side of tape. Do not apply fill coat
on interior angles. Allow fill coat to dry prior to application of finish
coat.
3. Finishing Coat: Spread joint compound evenly over and beyond fill coat
on joints. Feather to smooth uniform finish. Apply finish coat to taped
angles to cover tape and taping compound. Sand final application of
compound to provide surface ready for decoration.
4. Filling and Finishing Depressions: Apply joint compound as first coat to
fastener depressions. Apply at least two additional coats of compound
after first coat is dry. Leave filled and finished depressions level with
plane of surface.
E. Finishing Beads and Trim:
1. First Fill Coat: Apply joint compound to bead and trim. Feather out
from ground to plane of the surface. Dry compound prior to application
of second fill coat.
2. Second Fill Coat: Apply joint compound in same manner as first fill
coat. Extend beyond first coat onto face of gypsum board. Dry
compound prior to application of finish coat.
3. Finish Coat: Apply joint compound to bead and trim. Extend beyond
second fill coat. Feather finish coat from ground to plane of surface.
Sand finish coat to provide flat surface ready for decoration.
3.08 FINAL FINISHES FOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. Levels of Finish: Conform to GA 214.
B. Level 1:
1. Taping or embedding coat only.

09 29 00 - 12 JANUARY 2014
2. Use in concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level is
required for fire-resistive or sound-rated assemblies.
C. Level 2:
1. Taping, filling, and finishing coats.
2. Use on water-resistant gypsum backing board.
D. Level 3:
1. Taping, filling, and finishing coats.
2. Use on surfaces indicated to have spray texture or ceramic tile.
E. Level 4:
1. Taping, filling, and finishing coats plus two separate coats applied over
joints, angles, fastener heads, and trim accessories.
2. Sand between coats and after last coat.
3. Use on surfaces indicated to receive wall coverings.
F. Level 5:
1. Same as Level 4, plus a thin, smooth, uniform skim coat of joint
compound, or product specially formulated for this purpose, over entire
surface.
2. Produce surfaces free of tool marks and ridges, ready for decoration.
3. Use on surfaces not indicated otherwise, those indicated to receive
gloss, semi-gloss, and nontextured flat paints, and where indicated.
3.09 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Clean: Remove droppings or texture overspray from walls, windows, and
floor, leaving room clean for following trades.
B. Nail Pop: Repair nail pop by driving new nail approximately 1-1/2 inches
from nail pop and reseat nail. When face paper is punctured, drive new nail or
screw approximately 1-1/2 inches from defective fastening and remove
defective fastening. Fill damaged surface with compound.
C. Ridging:
1. Do not repair ridging until condition has fully developed, approximately
6 months after installation or one heating season.
a. Sand ridges to reinforcing tape without cutting through tape.
b. Fill concave areas on both sides of ridge with topping compound.
c. After fill is dry, blend in topping compound over repaired area.

JANUARY 2014 09 29 00 - 13
2. Fill cracks with compound and finish smooth and flush.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 TILING
JANUARY 2014 09 30 00 - 1
SECTION 09 30 00
TILING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. A108.1A, Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method
with Portland Cement Mortar.
b. A108.1B, Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland
Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland
Cement Mortar.
c. A108.1C, Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the
Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar - or Installation
of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed
with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar.
d. A108.4, Ceramic Tile installed with Organic Adhesives or Epoxy
Adhesives and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive.
e. A108.5, Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland
Cement Mortar.
f. A108.6, Ceramic Tile Installed with Chemical Epoxy Mortar and
Grout.
g. A108.8, Ceramic Tile Installed with Chemical-Resistant Furan
Resin Mortar and Grout.
h. A108.9, Ceramic Tile Installed with Modified Epoxy Emulsion
Mortar/Grout.
i. A108.10, Installation of Grout in Tilework.
j. A108.11, Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units.
k. A118.1, Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar.
l. A118.3, Chemical Resistant, Water-Cleanable Tile Setting Mortar
and Grouting Epoxy, and Water-Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy
Adhesive.
m. A118.4, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
n. A118.5, Chemical Resistant Furan Mortars and Grouts.
o. A118.6, Standard Ceramic Tile Grouts for Tile Installation.
p. A136.1, Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile.
q. A137.1, Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
a. A497, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric,
Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement.
b. C144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
c. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

TILING PW/WBG/475883
09 30 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
d. C206, Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime.
e. C207, Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry
Purposes.
f. C267, Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of Mortars,
Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings.
g. C395, Standard Specification for Chemical-Resistant Resin
Mortars.
h. C847, Standard Specification for Metal Lath.
i. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
j. D226, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt
Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
3. Tile Council of North America (TCA):
a. Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
b. Handbook for Limitations.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Samples:
a. Two for each color, pattern, and type of tile specified.
b. Size: Approximately 12 inches square.
c. Mark Samples clearly to indicate color or shade, location in which
to be used, and manufacturers name.
1. Certification of Compliance: For tile, mortar, grouts, and adhesives.
2. Manufacturers Instructions: For storage, mixing, application, cleanup,
and use of proposed mortars, grouts, and adhesives.
3. Tile Manufacturers Maintenance Guidelines: For Owners use in
maintaining ceramic tilework specified herein.
A. Set and grout tile in portland cement mortar when ambient temperature is at
least 50 degrees F and rising. Follow ANSI A108.1A.
B. Comply with minimum temperature recommendations of manufacturers for
bonding and grouting materials other than portland cement mortar.
A. Tile: Furnish extra 2 percent of each tile used in clean, marked cartons for
Owners future use.

JANUARY 2014 09 30 00 - 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Materials and products specified in this Section shall be products of:
1. American Olean Tile Co.
2. Dallas Ceramic Co.
3. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
4. United States Ceramic Tile Co.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Tile: Standard grade, ANSI A137.1.
B. Color Body Porcelain: ANSI A137.1, Section 5.3, porcelain type, cushion
edge, minimum thickness 3/8 inch, nominal face size 24 inches by 24 inches
and 12 inches by 12 inches. See Contract Drawings for locations of each size.
C. Ceramic Wall and Floor Tile: Match tile type, size and color in areas of
existing bathrooms where new structural elements are being added.
D. Trim Shapes and Bases: Type, color, and finish to match floor tiles.
E. Portland Cement Mortar:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1.
2. Sand: ASTM C144, fine.
3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206 or ASTM C207, Type S.
4. Water: Clean and potable.
5. Mortar Bed Reinforcement: Either of the following:
a. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A497, size 2-inch by 2-inch mesh,
16/16 wire.
b. Expanded Metal Reinforcement: ASTM C847, galvanized with
minimum weight of 1.8 pounds per square yard.
F. Cleavage Membrane: Either asphalt-saturated organic felt meeting
ASTM D226, Type I, plain, or polyethylene sheeting with minimum thickness
of 0.004 inch.
G. Dry-Set Mortar: ANSI A118.1, TCA Formula 759, gray.
H. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4.
I. Commercial Portland Cement Grout: White, L & M Acid-R or Upco
Hydroment.

09 30 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
J. Sand-Portland Cement Grout:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150.
2. Fine-Graded Sand: ASTM C144.
3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
4. Water: Clean and potable.
5. Mix:
a. For Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1 part portland cement to 1 part fine-
graded sand.
b. For Quarry Tile and Pavers: 1 part portland cement to 2 parts fine-
graded sand, and up to 1/5 part hydrated lime by volume.
K. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: Portland cement grout with latex additive,
commercial quality, ANSI A118.6.
A. Expansion Joints:
1. Sealant: Silicone rubber type, meeting ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P,
Class 25, Use T, color to match grout, with Shore A hardness of
minimum 25 for joints in horizontal surfaces and minimum 35 in traffic
areas.
2. Backup Material: Flexible and compressible type, nonstaining and
compatible with sealants used.
B. Edge Strips: Stainless steel, Alloy 316 flat bar, 1/8 inch by depth of tile and
mortar.
C. Sealer: Hillyard Chemical Co., Cemseal II or Thompsons Water Seal 101.
D. Tile Cleaner: Neutral tile cleaner solution acceptable to tile manufacturer.
E. Construction Paper: Heavy-duty, nonstaining kraft paper.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive ceramic tile, setting beds, or accessories prior to
tile installation.
B. Correct defects or adverse conditions affecting quality and execution of tile
installation.

JANUARY 2014 09 30 00 - 5
C. Tolerances for Surfaces to Receive Tile:
1. Portland Cement, Mortar Methods:
a. Maximum Variation in Subfloor Surface: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
2. Organic Adhesive Method:
a. Maximum Variation in Subfloor Surface: 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
b. Maximum Height of Abrupt Irregularities: 1/32 inch.
D. Grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, bucks, electrical and mechanical work, in
or behind tile, to be installed prior to proceeding with tilework.
E. Protection: Protect adjoining work surfaces before tilework begins.
F. Make substrate firm, dry, clean, and free of oily or waxy films.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Prepare surfaces, fit, set, or bond tile, grout and clean tile in accordance with
applicable requirements of ANSI Standards for setting method specified,
except as otherwise noted.
B. Trim: Provide bases, caps, stops, returns, trimmers, and other shapes to finish
installation.
C. Setting Floor Tile (Thin-Set Application):
1. On Concrete: Meet TCA Method F113 with latex-portland cement
grout.
2. In existing Bathrooms: match methods used for the installation of the
existing tile for all new tile. Use the most current TCA methods that
match the existing installation.
D. Edge Strips:
1. At openings without thresholds and similar discontinuous edges of thin-
set tile floors.
2. Where ceramic tile floors are adjacent to other flooring material at same
level.
3. Where ceramic tile cove base is combined with other types of flooring.
3.03 CLEANING AND SEALING
A. Clean tile surfaces thoroughly on completion of grouting.
B. Remove grout haze, observing tile manufacturers recommendations as to use
of acid and chemical cleaners.

09 30 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
C. Rinse tilework thoroughly with clean water before and after using chemical
cleaners.
D. Polish surface of glazed tilework with soft cloth.
E. After grout has cured for 10 days, clean and seal nonglazed tiles following
sealer manufacturers instructions and recommendations.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. From Construction Dirt:
1. Apply protective coat of neutral cleaner solution, 1 part cleaner to 1 part
water, to clean completed tile walls and floors.
2. Cover tile floors with heavy-duty, nonstaining construction paper,
masked in-place.
3. Just before substantial completion, remove paper and rinse protective
coat of neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
B. From Traffic:
1. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using newly tiled floors for at least
7 days.
2. Place large, flat boards in walkways and wheelways for 7 days where
use of newly tiled floor with cement type grout is unavoidable.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
JANUARY 2014 09 51 23 - 1
SECTION 09 51 23
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
a. A641, Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Carbon Steel Wire.
b. C635, Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance,
and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
Lay-In Panel Ceilings.
c. C636, Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels.
d. E1264, Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
2. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): Fire Resistance.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Detailed layout of grid indicating hanger spacing, fastening and
splicing details, change in level details, and access location.
b. Manufacturers recommendation for installation of system.
c. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and data sheets.
2. Samples:
a. One 12-inch square of each acoustical unit material to illustrate
range of appearance.
b. One full-size Sample of each suspension system member and
molding.
c. Mark with the name of the manufacturer and specific design and
technical data.
A. Deliver materials with manufacturers labels indicating brand name, pattern,
size, thickness, and fire rating.
B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent soiling, physical
damage, or wetting.

ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PW/WBG/475883
09 51 23 - 2 JANUARY 2014
A. Maintain humidity of 65 percent to 75 percent in area where acoustical
materials are to be installed for 25 hours before, during, and 25 hours after
installation.
B. Maintain a uniform temperature of 55 degrees F to 70 degrees F during
installation of materials.
1.05 EXTRA MATERIAL
A. Provide additional acoustical units from the same production run as installed
equal to 1 percent of area.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Components, Materials, and Accessories: Product of a single manufacturer.
B. ASTM C635, Intermediate Duty:
1. Exposed Tee Grid: Fire-rated spaced to fit lay-in panels.
1) Chicago Metallic Corp.; Fire Front 1230 System.
2) Donn Corp.; Donn DXL fire-rated grid.
2. Main and Cross Members:
a. Single web design, cold-rolled steel, minimum thickness of
0.020 inch, electrozinc-coated and factory-painted low-sheen satin
white finish.
b. Exposed flange width of 15/16 inch.
3. Edge Molding:
a. Minimum 0.020-inch steel, channel- or angle-shaped.
b. Minimum flange width of 15/16 inch.
c. Finish to match main members.
4. Hanger Wire: ASTM A641, minimum 12-gauge, galvanized, soft-
annealed, mild steel wire.
5. Wire Ties: ASTM A641, 18-gauge, galvanized, annealed steel wire.
6. Furnish manufacturers hold down clips and accessories required for a
complete system in high seismic zones.
2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. Lay-In Panels (ACT-1):
1. Material: Fire-resistive mineral fiber, Class A.
2. Reference Specification: ASTM E1264, Type N, Form 1 and 2.

JANUARY 2014 09 51 23 - 3
3. Pattern: E,G.
4. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): 0.80.
5. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 35 minimum.
6. Light Reflectance: LR 0.89 or over.
7. Nominal Size: 24 inches by 24 inches by 7/8 inch thick.
8. Edges: SLT/Shadowline.
9. Finish and Color: Painted white, unless scheduled otherwise.
a. U.S.G.; Item 87200, Mars ClimaPlus
B. Lay-In Panels (ACT-2):
1. Material: Fire-resistive mineral fiber, Class A.
2. Reference Specification: ASTM E1264, Type N, Form 1 and 2.
3. Pattern: E,G.
4. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): 0.70.
6. Light Reflectance: LR 0.89.
8. Edges: SQ/Square.
9. Finish and Color: Painted white (factory).
a. U.S.G.; Item 88185, Mars ClimaPlus.
C. Lay-In Panels (ACT-3):
1. Material: Fire-resistive ceramic and mineral fiber, Class A.
2. Reference Specification: ASTM E1264, Type XX.
3. Pattern: G.
4. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): N/A.
6. Light Reflectance: LR 0.88 or over.
8. Edges: Square Lay-in.
9. Finish and Color: White; Scrubbable factory-applied plastic paint finish.
10. Manufacturer and Product:
a. Armstrong; Item 605, Ceramaguard unperforated.
2.03 FIRE RATING
A. Ceiling Systems: Capable of being used in assembly with Underwriters
Laboratories Inc. (UL), fire-resistive rating of 1 hour, in areas noted to receive
1-hour fire-resistive rating.

ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PW/WBG/475883
09 51 23 - 4 JANUARY 2014
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SEQUENCING
A. Remove existing grid and ceiling tiles in areas noted on Drawings.
B. After all above ceiling work is completed, lay out grid.
C. Coordinate with mechanical and electrical equipment in framing and cutting
material around ceiling penetrations.
D. Install suspension systems after mechanical work above is complete.
E. Install acoustical units.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED GRID SYSTEM
A. Hang level and in straight alignment directly from structure following
ASTM C636 and the manufacturers current printed instructions for type of
installation required for this Project.
B. Hanger Wires:
1. Space maximum 4 feet on center each direction and securely attach to
structure above.
2. Install additional hangers at ends of each suspension member and at
light fixtures, 6 inches from vertical surfaces.
3. Do not splay wires more than 5 inches in a 4-foot vertical drop.
4. Provide four-way wire splays at 45 degrees from main runner to support
structure for every 144 square feet of ceiling area.
5. Wrap wire minimum three times horizontally, turning ends upward.
6. Where hanger wires cannot be hung vertically from structure above
because of ducts, pipes, cable trays, or other interferences, provide
trapezes of steel channels (minimum 2-inch deep, 16-gauge cold-rolled
carrying channels) hung on steel rods or 8-gauge wire from structural
members above. Hang ceiling wires from these trapezes or similar
members supporting ducts or pipes. Do not hang directly from ducts or
pipes.
7. Follow suspension system manufacturers instructions for modified
installation required for seismic load shown on Contract Drawings.
C. Edge Molding:
1. Install at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces.
2. Miter corners where moldings intersect or install corner caps.
3. Attach to vertical surface with mechanical fasteners.

JANUARY 2014 09 51 23 - 5
D. Provide additional channels, hangers, and trapezes as required to support
edges of ceiling around and under mechanical and electrical work.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. Install with pattern running in one direction after completion of suspended
grid system and other concealed work.
B. Place material to bear all around on suspension members.
C. Meet acoustical material manufacturers recommendations to achieve the
1 hour fire-resistive rating where noted on Drawings.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean soiled or discolored unit surfaces after installation.
B. Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids, and other defects in painted surfaces.
3.05 SCHEDULE OF CEILING TYPES
A. Areas to Receive Acoustical Ceilings: Indicated on Interior Finish Schedule as
shown on Drawings.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 RESILIENT FLOORING
JANUARY 2014 09 65 00 - 1
SECTION 09 65 00
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
a. D412, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension.
b. D570, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
c. F1066, Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile.
d. F1303, Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering
with Backing.
e. F1344, Standard Specification for Rubber Floor Tile.
f. F1700, Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Floor Tile.
g. F1859, Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Floor Covering
without Backing.
h. F1861, Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base.
i. F2034, Standard Specification for Sheet Linoleum Floor
Covering.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Samples:
a. Two full-size tiles for each type and color or pattern of resilient
flooring.
b. Two 2-1/2-inch wide strips of base material proposed for use.
c. Two 6-inch long strips of trim materials.
1. Manufacturers certificate of compliance.
2. Operation and Maintenance Data: List of recommended maintenance
products, methods, and procedures.
A. Store materials in original containers at not less than 70 degrees F ambient
temperature for not less than 24 hours immediately before installation.

RESILIENT FLOORING PW/WBG/475883
09 65 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
A. Maintain ambient temperature in space to receive flooring between 70 and
90 degrees F for not less than 24 hours before and 48 hours after installation.
B. Maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F after flooring is installed,
except as specified above.
A. Furnish additional floor covering materials from same production run as
installed material at the rate of 45 square feet for each 1,000 square feet.
A. Do not install floor coverings until concrete slab has cured or until primer
material in test patches cannot be scraped or peeled from the slab after drying
24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Flooring products of the following manufacturers, meeting these
Specifications, may be used on this Project:
1. Afco Rubber Corp.
2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
3. Azrock Floor Products.
4. Burke Flooring Products.
5. Congoleum Corp.
6. Endura, Division of the Biltrite Corp.
7. Flintkote Co.
8. Johnsonite, Division of Duramax, Inc.
9. Kentile Floors, Inc.
10. Marley Flexco.
11. Mercer Plastics Co., Inc.
12. Nannington Commercial.
13. National Floor Products Co.
14. Nora Flooring, Division of Robus Products Corp.
15. RCA Rubber Co.
16. R. C. Musson Rubber Co.
17. Roppe.
18. U.S. National Rubber Co., Inc.
19. Vinyl Plastics, Inc.

JANUARY 2014 09 65 00 - 3
2.02 FLOOR COVERING MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish materials uniform in thickness and size with edges cut
accurately and square; uniform color with variations in variegated patterns
kept to a minimum.
B. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT):
1. ASTM F1066, Class 2, through pattern tile.
2. Size: 12 by 12 inches by 1/8 inch thick.
a. Armstrong; Excelon Stonetex.
b. Azrock; Thru-Quartz.
C. Sheet Vinyl (SVIN):
1. ASTM F1303, Type I, Grade 1, Class A backing.
2. Overall Nominal Thickness: 0.080 inch.
3. Manufacturer and Product:
a. Armstrong; Rejuvenations Line, Stone Run, Travertini, No. 34360
Token.
2.03 BASE MATERIALS
A. General: ASTM F1861, uniform in 0.125-inch thickness and in as long
lengths as practicable to suit conditions of installation.
1. Factory premolded internal and external corners to match base when
available. Where resilient base is indicated, use either rubber or vinyl
base.
2. Rubber Base: Type TP, Group 2.
3. Vinyl Base: Type TV, Group 2.
4. Style: A, straight.
5. 4 inches high.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Trim: Furnish in lengths as long as practical to suit conditions of installation.
B. Reducers:
1. Standard rubber or vinyl floor reducer in thickness to suit abutting floor
covering by 1-inch wide, tapered or beveled-edge strip.
a. Johnsonite; Reducer Series RRS.
b. Mercer; 633 Tile Reducer.

09 65 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
C. Adhesive: Type and brands of adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of
floor covering material for conditions of installation.
D. Primer and Crack Filler: Type and brand recommended by floor covering
manufacturer.
E. Floor Filler: Asphalt mastic as manufactured by:
1. Armstrong, Lancaster, PA.
2. National Floor Products Co., Florence, AL.
F. Concrete underlayment as manufactured by:
1. Ardex Inc., Coraopolis, PA; Ardex K-55.
2. Thoro Systems Products; Thoro Underlayment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate for excessive moisture content and unevenness preventing
execution and quality of resilient flooring as specified.
B. Correct defects before installation of resilient flooring.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. In Areas with Existing ACT Tile: Remove existing tile and completely
remove adhesive from existing concrete floor slab.
B. Remove dirt, oil, grease, or other foreign matter from surfaces to receive floor
covering materials.
C. Fill cracks less than 1/16-inch wide and depression less than 1/8 inch deep
with floor filler.
D. Prime surfaces, other than wood, if recommended by floor covering
manufacturer.
3.03 APPLICATION OF ADHESIVES
A. Mix and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B. Provide safety precautions during mixing and applications as recommended
by adhesive manufacturer.

JANUARY 2014 09 65 00 - 5
C. Apply Uniformly Over Surfaces:
1. Cover only amount of area that can be covered by flooring material
within recommended working time of adhesive.
2. Remove any adhesive that dries or films over.
3. Do not soil walls, bases, or adjacent areas with adhesives.
4. Promptly remove any spillage.
D. Apply adhesives with notched trowel or other suitable tool.
E. Clean trowel and rework notches as necessary to ensure proper application of
adhesive.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF TILE MATERIALS
A. Start tile at center of room or space; work toward perimeter.
B. Do not lay tile less than half the width of a field tile except where accepted by
Engineer for irregularly shaped rooms or spaces.
C. Cut border tile neatly and accurately to fit within 1/64 inch of abutting
surfaces.
D. Use reducer edge strip at exposed tile edges.
E. Fit flooring material neatly and tightly into breaks and recesses, against bases,
around pipes and penetrations, under saddles or thresholds, and around
permanent cabinets and equipment.
F. Lay tile parallel to room axis in straight courses with cross joints parallel. Lay
tile with grain or pattern running in opposite direction between adjacent tile.
G. Roll flooring with 75- to 100-pound roller in both directions.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF BASE
A. General: Remove defects in wall and floor that would prevent level and true
installation of base material.
1. Install base around perimeter of room or space, where shown, and at toe
spaces of casework and cabinets.
2. Unroll base material and cut into accurate lengths as desired or as
required for minimum number of joints.
3. Match edges at seams or double cut adjoining lengths to give
continuous appearance.
4. Install with tight butt joints with no joint widths greater than 1/64 inch.

09 65 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
B. Top-Set Base:
1. Apply adhesive and firmly adhere to wall surfaces.
2. Press down so bottom cove edge follows floor profile.
3. Ensure top and bottom edges of base are in firm contact with walls and
floors.
4. Form internal and external corners by using premolded corners. Other
methods, acceptable to Engineer, may be used if premolded corners are
not available.
5. Scribe base accurately to abutting materials.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF TRIM MATERIALS
A. Provide reducers where floor covering terminates exposing edge of covering.
B. Center reducer under door, where floor covering terminates at a door opening.
Fit end edges to door frames and abutting surfaces and other edges to
adjoining materials.
C. Apply adhesives and bond securely to substrates in straight true lines. Meet
visible and related features of building construction with a maximum
deviation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
A. Upon completion of the installation of floor covering and adjacent work, and
after materials have set, clean surfaces with a neutral cleaner as recommended
by manufacturer for type of floor covering material installed.
B. Repair adjacent surfaces damaged by flooring installation.
C. Wax Finishing:
1. Provide wax, cleaner, or other finishing material as recommended by
floor covering manufacturer for the particular type of flooring material.
2. Apply one coat of nonslip wax or other finish as recommended by floor
covering manufacturer; buff to a sheen.
3. Do not wax radial rubber tile.
D. Protect completed work from traffic and damage until Substantial Completion
by covering with plastic sheet, kraft paper, or plywood panels.

JANUARY 2014 09 65 00 - 7
3.08 INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Areas to receive resilient flooring and pattern are noted on the Drawings on
the Room Finish Schedule.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 CARPETING
JANUARY 2014 09 68 00 - 1
SECTION 09 68 00
CARPETING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
2. ASTM International (ASTM): E648, Standard Test Method for Critical
Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy
Source.
3. Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI): Adhesive testing program.
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 258, Standard Research
Test Method for Determining Smoke Generation of Solid Materials.
5. U.S. Department of Commerce (DOC): FF1-70, Pill Test.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Installation drawings showing details of carpet installation, seam
locations, pattern, color, carpet to be used, and other pertinent
details as may be required.
b. Complete list of other materials proposed.
c. Complete carpet specifications indicating conformance with
requirements herein.
2. Samples: Two 12-inch by 12-inch Samples of each color, type, and
pattern of carpet to be used.
1. Manufacturers Statement of Qualification that carpet installer is
approved by manufacturer to install carpeting materials.
2. Certificates: Test certificate for flammability that shows carpet meets
specified requirements.
3. Documentation to show that adhesive meets specified requirements.
a. List of recommended maintenance products, methods, and
procedures.
b. Manufacturers maintenance manual for specified carpet.

CARPETING PW/WBG/475883
09 68 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not begin carpet installation until work of other trades, including painting,
has been completed.
B. Do not install floor covering until concrete slab has cured for 60 days or until
primer material in test patches cannot be scraped or peeled from slab after
drying for 24 hours.
C. Maintain ambient temperature, in space to receive carpet, of 70 degrees F for
not less than 24 hours before and 48 hours after installation.
1.04 EXTRA MATERIAL
A. Furnish additional carpeting materials from same production run as materials
installed, at rate of 45 square feet for each 500 square feet, up to maximum of
100 square feet.
A. Installer: Experienced in installation of carpet floor covering, approved by
manufacturer, employing only experienced personnel, familiar with
manufacturers recommendations for installation of materials, and acceptable
to Engineer.
B. Dimensions shown on Drawings are approximate. Verify measurements and
other conditions of job prior to beginning the Work.
C. Order ample yardage, as no substitutions will be permitted to make up for
shortage of material.
D. Carpet of same type in contiguous areas shall be of same dye lot.
E. Conform to applicable ADA requirements.
A. Manufacturers extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named as
beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall provide
for correction, or at option of Owner, removal and replacement of Work
specified in this Section found defective during period of 10 years after date
of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal
and replacement of defective Work as specified in General Conditions.

JANUARY 2014 09 68 00 - 3
B. Conditions:
1. Delamination: No delamination in normal use (no chair pads required).
2. Wear: No more than 10 percent face fiber loss.
3. Edge Ravel: None in normal use.
4. Static: None for lifetime of carpet.
5. Tuft Bind: No zippering, wet or dry.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CARPET MANUFACTURERS
A. Bentley Mills, Inc., City of Industry, CA.
B. Shaw Contract Group, Dalton, GA.
C. Lees Carpets, Div. Burlington Industries, King of Prussia, PA.
D. Interface Flooring Systems, Inc., LaGrange, GA.
E. Collins & Aikman, Dalton, GA.
F. Prince Street Technologies Ltd., Cartersville, GA.
2.02 MODULAR CARPET (CPT-1)
A. Type: Pattern loop.
B. Face Yarn: Dupont Nylon, Solutia Ultron VIP, Monsanto Nylon, ECO
Solution Q.
C. Gauge: 1/12 inch through 1/8 inch, or higher.
D. Pile Height: 0.119 inch minimum.
E. Yarn Weight: 30 through 32 ounces per square yard.
F. Primary Backing: Synthetic.
G. Secondary Backing: EcoWorx Tile.
H. Flammability: Passes DOC FF1-70, Pill Test.
I. Flame Radiant Panel Test: Meets NFPA Class 1 when tested under
ASTM E648, glue down.
J. Smoke Density: Less than 450 flaming mode when tested under NFPA 258.

09 68 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
K. Wear Warranty: 10 years.
L. Size: 24-inch by 24-inch carpet tile.
M. Basis of Design: Shaw Radiance 59361; color, stardust 60585.
A. Rubber Base: Vinyl, Johnsonite, 4 inches high, 80 Fawn.
B. Seaming Tape: As recommended by carpet manufacturer.
C. Trim:
1. Vinyl, color to match base material.
a. Johnsonite; Edge Guard, EG-XX-H.
b. Mercer Products Co., Inc.; Vinyl No. 8 (800) Imperial Reducer.
D. Adhesive: Synthetic rubber, resin blend, as recommended by Carpet and Rug
Institute. Adhesive shall display CRI green label signifying that it meets
criteria of CRI adhesive testing program, based on maximum emission factor
as follows:
1. Total Volatile Organic Compounds: 10.0 mg per square meter per hour.
2. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg per square meter per hour.
3. 2-Ethyl-1 Hexanol: 3.0 mg per square meter per hour.
E. Floor Filler:
1. Asphalt mastic.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Armstrong, Lancaster, PA.
b. National Floor Products Co., Florence, AL.
F. Concrete Underlayment, Manufacturers and Products:
1. Ardex Inc., Coraopolis, PA; Ardex K-55.
2. Thoro Systems Products; Thoro Underlayment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION OF SURFACES
A. Examine substrate for excessive moisture content or unevenness.

JANUARY 2014 09 68 00 - 5
B. Do not proceed with installation of materials until defects have been
corrected.
C. Carefully check dimensions and other conditions in field and properly fit
carpet in areas indicated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove existing carpet system and adhesives in locations indicated on
Drawings.
B. Level floors having depressions, cracks, or expansion joints, with floor filler
or concrete underlayment.
C. Remove foreign matter, grease, paint, oil, and plaster droppings.
D. Clean floors thoroughly, leaving them dry and structurally firm.
3.03 APPLICATION OF ADHESIVES
A. Mix and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturers instruction.
B. Apply uniformly over surfaces:
1. Cover only that amount of area that can be covered by carpet within
recommended working time of adhesive.
2. Remove adhesive that dries or films over.
3. Do not soil walls, bases, or adjacent areas with adhesives.
4. Promptly remove spillage.
C. Apply adhesives with notched trowel or other suitable tool.
D. Clean trowel and rework notches as necessary to ensure proper application of
adhesive.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF CARPET TILES
A. Install carpet in strict conformance with manufacturers instructions and
recommendations. Do not damage walls or other adjacent work.
B. The starting point of the modular installation must be as near to the center of
the room as possible and must be positioned to utilize the largest perimeter cut
module size.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM MATERIALS
A. Provide where carpet terminates, exposing edge.

09 68 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
B. Center reducer under door, where carpeting terminates at door opening. Fit
end edges to door frames and abutting surfaces, and other edges to adjoining
materials.
C. Apply adhesives and bond trim securely to substrates in straight true lines.
Meet visible and related features of building construction with maximum
deviation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
A. Immediately after completion of floor, remove spots or smears of adhesive
and seam cement from floor surface and other finished Work with cleaner or
solvent recommended by carpeting materials manufacturer.
B. Repair adjacent surfaces damaged by carpet installation.
C. Thoroughly vacuum clean carpet after installation is complete.
D. Protect completed Work from traffic and damage by covering with plastic
sheeting, kraft paper, and plywood panels, until Substantial Completion.
3.07 INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Areas to receive carpeting and carpet pattern are indicated on Drawings.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 ARCHITECTURAL PAINTING
JANUARY 2014 09 90 05 - 1
SECTION 09 90 05
ARCHITECTURAL PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DEFINITIONS
A. Terms used in this Section:
1. Coverage: Total minimum dry film thickness in mils, or square feet per
gallon.
2. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic.
3. HCl: Hydrochloric Acid.
4. MDFT: Minimum Dry Film Thickness.
5. MDFTPC: Minimum Dry Film Thickness Per Coat.
6. mil: Thousandth of an inch.
7. Military Specification-Paint.
8. PSDS: Paint System Data Sheet.
9. SFPG: Square Feet Per Gallon.
10. SFPGPC: Square Feet Per Gallon Per Coat.
11. SP: Surface Preparation.
12. Existing: Those coated surfaces that are cut into, connected to, or
otherwise changed or affected by the work of this contract.
B. Paint Terms: Conform to ASTM D16.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Product Data: Manufacturers descriptive literature for coating materials
and coating application accessories.
a. For each paint system used, furnish a Paint System Data Sheet
(PSDS) and technical data sheet for each product used in the paint
system. PSDS form is appended to the end of this Section.
b. Submit required information on a system by system basis.
c. Provide copies of paint system submittals to applicator.
2. Verification Samples: Two samples, minimum size 6 inches (152 mm)
square, representing actual color and finish of each finish coating type,
color, and finish to be applied.

ARCHITECTURAL PAINTING PW/WBG/475883
09 90 05 - 2 JANUARY 2014
1. List of references substantiating applicators experience.
2. Manufacturers printed application instructions for each product,
including product storage requirements and surface preparation
requirements.
A. Applicators Experience: Minimum 5 years practical experience in
application of specified products and approved by the paint manufacturer.
A. Store products of this Section in manufacturers unopened packaging until
installation.
B. Establish and maintain storage area conditions for products of this Section in
accordance with manufacturers instructions until installation.
C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-
based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction over project.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply coatings to exterior surfaces except under environmental
conditions recommended by coating manufacturer.
B. Establish and maintain environmental conditions recommended by coating
manufacturer before, during, and after application of coatings to interior
surfaces.
C. During application of coating materials, post WET PAINT signs.
D. During application of solvent-based materials, post NO SMOKING signs.
1.06 SEQUENCING
A. Do not allow application of finish coats in an area until moisture-producing
construction activities, dust-producing construction activities, and other
construction activities which could impair performance or appearance of
finish coatings, have been completed in that area.

JANUARY 2014 09 90 05 - 3
A. Supply for each finish coating material, color, and finish specified 2 gallons
(7.75L) of paint material, in sealed 1-gallon (3.875L) containers, marked with
color and finish identification.
B. Custom Colors: Provide details of color formulae and product availability.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, meeting these
specifications, may be used on this project:
1. Ameritone, Long Beach, CA.
2. Fuller/OBrien Paint Company, San Francisco, CA.
3. Benjamin Moore Paint Company, San Francisco, CA.
4. Pratt & Lambert, Inc., Buffalo, NY.
5. Sherwin Williams, Cleveland, OH.
6. Duron, Inc., Beltsville, MD.
B. Unless otherwise specified for an individual product or material, supply
products specified in this Section from the same manufacturer.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, furnish factory-mixed paints. When
required, mix coatings to correct consistency in accordance with
manufacturers instructions before application. Do not dilute or thin
paints, except as instructed.
2. Do not add additives, except as instructed or recommended by paint
manufacturer.
3. Furnish each coating material in quantity required for this Section from
a single production run.
4. Colors: Indicated in Interior Finish Schedule and Color List on
Drawings.
B. Paint Application Accessories: As specified in this Section or as
recommended by paint manufacturers application instructions, including but
not limited to thinners, sealers, primers, cleaning agents, etching agents,
cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials.
C. Oil Stain: Sherwin-Williams; WoodScapes Semi-Transparent A15 Series.

09 90 05 - 4 JANUARY 2014
D. Interior Wood Stain: Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Interior Wood
Stain A48-200 Series.
E. Alkyd Wood Primer: Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Y24
Series.
F. Alkyd Semigloss: Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi-
Gloss B34W200 Series.
G. Acrylic Low Sheen: Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 EgShel B20W200.
H. Acrylic Latex, Semigloss: Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Semi-
Gloss B31W200.
I. Latex Primer Sealer: Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite High-Build B28W600.
J. Sanding Sealer: Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics FastDry Sanding
Sealer B26V43.
K. Varnish: Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classic FastDry Oil Base Varnish
Satin A66-300 Series.
L. Rust-Inhibitive Primer: Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal
Primer B50Z Series.
M. Block Filler: Sherwin-Williams; ProMar Interior/Exterior Block Filler B25.
N. Masonry Primer: Sherwin-Williams; Loxon Interior Acrylic Masonry
Primer B28 Series.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Immediately prior to coating application, ensure that surfaces to receive
coatings are dry.
B. Ensure that moisture-retaining substrates to receive coatings have moisture
content within tolerances allowed by coating manufacturer, using moisture
measurement techniques recommended by coating manufacturer.
C. Immediately prior to coating application, examine surfaces to receive coatings
for surface imperfections and for contaminants which could impair
performance or appearance of coatings, including but not limited to, loose
primer, rust, scale, oil, grease, mildew, algae, or fungus, stains or marks,
cracks, indentations, or abrasions.

JANUARY 2014 09 90 05 - 5
D. Correct the above conditions and other conditions that could impair
performance or appearance of coatings in accordance with specified surface
preparation procedures before proceeding with coating application.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Do not start work until surfaces to be finished are in proper condition to
produce finished surfaces of uniform, satisfactory appearance.
B. Stains and Marks: Remove completely, if possible, using materials and
methods recommended by coating manufacturer; cover stains and marks
which cannot be completely removed with isolating primer or sealer
recommended by coating manufacturer to prevent bleed-through.
C. Mildew, Algae, and Fungus: Remove, using materials and methods
recommended by coating manufacturer.
D. Remove dust and loose particulate matter from surfaces to receive coatings
immediately prior to coating application.
E. Remove or protect hardware, electrical plates, mechanical grilles and louvers,
lighting fixture trim, and other items not indicated to receive coatings that are
adjacent to surfaces to receive coatings.
F. Existing Painted Surfaces: Remove loose and peeling paint. Degloss surface if
recommended by manufacturer. Sand smooth. Clean entire surface prior to
painting.
G. Aluminum Surfaces: Remove surface contamination by steam or high
pressure water. Remove oxidation by phosphoric acid-water solution etching
and solvent washing. Apply specified primer as soon as cleaned surfaces are
dry.
H. Concrete and Concrete Masonry: Clean surfaces free of loose particles, sand,
efflorescence, laitance, form oil, curing compounds, and other substances
which could impair coating performance or appearance.
I. Concrete Floors: Remove contaminants which could impair coating
performance or appearance, acid-etch, flush with clean water; verify alkaline-
acid balance recommended by coating manufacturer; mechanically abrade
surface, if required, to achieve medium-sandpaper texture.
J. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils by solvent
cleaning (SSPC-SP1) and allow to dry. Apply Galvanized Metal Primer in
accordance with manufacturer instructions.

09 90 05 - 6 JANUARY 2014
K. Wood:
1. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sap areas with sealer recommended by
coating manufacturer; fill nail recesses and cracks with filler
recommended by coating manufacturer; sand surfaces smooth.
2. Apply primer coat to back of wood trim and paneling.
L. Gypsum Board: Repair cracks, holes, indentations, and other surface defects
using joint compound to produce surface flush with adjacent undamaged
surface; sand to produce uniform flat surface when dry.
M. Gypsum Plaster: Cut out cracks, holes, indentations, and other surface defects
to extent required for bonding adhesion; apply patching plaster or joint
compound to produce surface flush with adjacent undamaged surface; sand to
produce uniform flat surface when dry; allow to cure 30 days before coating
application.
N. Wood and Metal Doors: Seal top and bottom edges with specified primer.
O. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, rust, scale, and dust from
steel and iron surfaces in accordance with Solvent Cleaning SSPC-SP1.
Where heavy coatings of scale or contaminants are evident, clean in
accordance with Hand Tool Cleaning SSPC-SP2 or other approved SSPC-SP
method as needed.
P. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Remove loose primer and dust. Sand and feather
edges to smooth surface. Clean areas with solvent and spot prime bare metal
surfaces with appropriate primer recommended by manufacturer.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Apply paint where indicated in Interior Finish Schedule.
B. Apply each coat to uniform coating thickness following manufacturers
instructions, not exceeding manufacturers specified maximum spread rate for
indicated surface; thins, brush marks, roller marks, orange-peel, or other
application imperfections are not permitted.
C. For opaque finishes, tint each coat, including primer coat and intermediate
coats, one-half shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as
base color.
D. Allow manufacturers specified drying time, and ensure correct coating
adhesion, for each coat before applying next coat.

JANUARY 2014 09 90 05 - 7
E. Inspect each coat before applying next coat; touch-up surface imperfections
with coating material, feathering, and sanding if required; touch-up areas to
achieve flat, uniform surface without surface defects visible from 5 feet
(1.5 m).
F. Do not apply succeeding coat until previous coat has been approved by
Engineer; only Engineer-approved coats will be considered in determining
number of coats applied.
G. Remove dust and other foreign materials from substrate immediately prior to
applying each coat.
H. Where coating application abuts other materials or other coating color,
terminate coating, making clean sharp termination line without coating
overlap.
I. Where color changes occur between adjoining spaces, through framed
openings that are of same color as adjoining surfaces, change color at outside
stop corner nearest to face of closed door.
J. Re-prepare and recoat unsatisfactory finishes; refinish entire area to corners or
other natural terminations.
3.04 ITEMS NOT TO BE PAINTED
A. Do not paint the following:
1. Items specified or provided with factory finish.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Brick, precast concrete, integrally colored plaster.
5. Concrete masonry in utility, mechanical, and electrical spaces.
6. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, or lead.
7. Equipment nameplates, fire rating labels, and operating parts of
equipment.
8. Acoustical materials.
9. Concealed piping, ductwork, and conduit.
B. Materials and products having factory-applied primer are not considered
factory finished.

09 90 05 - 8 JANUARY 2014
3.05 PAINT SYSTEMS
A. System No. 101 Wood, Stained (Interior or Exterior):
Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover
Wood Oil Stain Transparent 2 coats, 250 SFPGPC
B. System No. 102 Wood, Semigloss (Interior or Exterior):
Wood Alkyd Wood Primer 1 coat, 1.4 MDFT
Alkyd (Semigloss) 2 coats, 3.0 MDFTPC
C. System No. 103 Wood, Flat (Interior or Exterior):
Wood Alkyd Wood Primer 1 coat, 1.4 MDFT
Acrylic Latex
(Semigloss)
2 coats, 1.3 MDFTPC
D. System No. 104 Wood, Natural (Interior or Exterior):
Wood Sanding Sealer 1 coat, 450 SFPG
Lightly Hand Sand Varnish Satin 2 coats, 1.3 MDFTPC
E. System No. 105 Wood, Stained and Varnished (Interior or Exterior):
Wood Interior Wood Stain Match Sample
Sanding Sealer 1 coat, 450 SFPG
Lightly Hand Sand Varnish (Satin) 2 coats, 1.3 MDFTPC

JANUARY 2014 09 90 05 - 9
F. System No. 107 Ferrous Metal:
Abrasive Blast, or
Centrifugal Wheel
Blast (SP 6)
-OR-
Pickle (SP 8)
Rust-Inhibitive Primer 1 coat, 3 MDFT
Alkyd Semigloss 2 coats, 1.7 MDFTPC
G. System No. 109 Concrete Masonry, Low Sheen:
Masonry Block Filler 1 coat, 75 SFPG
Acrylic Low Sheen 2 coats, 1.6 MDFTPC
H. System No. 113 Concrete, Semigloss:
Concrete Masonry Primer 1 coat, 3.0 MDFT
Acrylic Low Sheen 2 coats, 1.6 MDFTPC
I. System No. 115 Gypsum Board and Plaster, Semigloss:
Gypsum Board or
Plaster
Latex Primer/Sealer 1 coat, 3.0 MDFT
Acrylic Latex
Semigloss
2 coats, 1.3 MDFTPC
3.06 COLORS
A. See Room Finish Schedule for Paint Systems and colors to be used in each
space.

09 90 05 - 10 JANUARY 2014
3.07 SUPPLEMENT
Specification:
1. Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS).
END OF SECTION

PAINT SYSTEM DATA SHEET (PSDS)
Complete and attach manufacturers Technical Data Sheet to this PSDS for each coating
system.
Paint System Number (from Spec.):
Paint System Title (from Spec.):
Coating Supplier:
Representative:
Surface Preparation:
Paint Material
(Generic)
Product Name/Number
(Proprietary) Min. Coats, Coverage

PW/WBG/475883 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
JANUARY 2014 10 80 00 - 1
SECTION 10 80 00
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Floor mats and frames.
2. Portable fire extinguishers.
1.02 REFERENCES
1. ASTM International:
a. A591, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-
Coated, for Light Coating Weight [Mass] Applications.
b. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
2. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): Fire Protection Equipment List.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings.
2. Manufacturers descriptions, installation data, color charts, and cleaning
and service instructions for all items proposed for use. Clearly identify
each item.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
A. Mat Frame:
1. Materials: Extruded aluminum 6063 T-5 frame.
2. Composition: Recess mat frame prefabricated at the factory to ensure fit
of mat, furnished complete with corner pins of aluminum and anchor
pins of strap steel.
3. Finish: Mill.

MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PW/WBG/475883
10 80 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
a. American Floor Products Company, Inc., Gaithersburg, MD;
No. MF-153.
b. R. C. Musson Rubber Co., Akron, OH; No. RF-14.
c. Pawling Corporation, Wassaic, NY; No. MRF-1002.
B. Modular Carpet Mat:
1. Material Composition: Minimum 3/8-inch-thick carpet tile. 24-inch by
24-inch tiles.
2. Size: As shown on Drawings.
a. Patcraft, P.O. Box 2128, Dalton, GA 30722. (800) 241-4014.
Walk Right In, Beige 00123.
2.02 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Type: Multipurpose hand fire extinguishers with tri-class dry chemical
extinguishing agent in pressurized, red enameled steel shell cylinder; activated
by top squeeze handle; agent propelled through hose or opening at top of unit;
for use on Class A, B, and C fires; minimum UL rating 4A-60B:C, 10 pound
capacity with semi-recessed stainless steel cabinet.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Allenco.
2. J.L. Industries.
3. Larsens Manufacturing Co.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF SPECIALTIES
A. Follow manufacturers recommendations and printed instructions. Consult
with Engineer so that minor adjustments in the locations can be decided if
necessary.
1. Install materials plumb or level as applicable and attach securely to
adjacent materials with suitable fasteners.
2. Prevent scratching or damaging adjacent materials during installation.

PW/WBG/475883 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
JANUARY 2014 10 80 00 - 3
B. Floor Mats and Frames:
1. Assemble frame to suit mat thickness and securely anchor in-place
following manufacturers instructions. Place cement grout base below
the floor level, screeded into the interior frame area, using the edge of
frame as a guide.
2. Install mat in frame recess as recommended by manufacturer, flat and
without curls or humps.
C. Portable Fire Extinguishers: Install cabinets and place extinguisher securely in
position following manufacturers recommendation, so that top of
extinguisher in the cabinet is no more than 54 inches above floor.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
JANUARY 2014 21 13 13 - 1
SECTION 21 13 13
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Contractor shall refer to Division 01 sections for coordination of the system
shut-down requirements and allowances for the building.
B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to
this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.
2. Fire-protection valves.
3. Sprinklers.
1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The existing spaces of the building are currently served by a wet pipe
sprinkler system. The Work consists of sprinkler head relocations as a result
of the architectural and structural upgrades to the building. Piping and heads
shall be modified to accommodate the new ceiling layout. Use only steel
piping and match the existing piping and fittings.
B. In areas where the ceiling is going to be out for more than 24 hours the
pendant style sprinkler heads shall be replaced with new upright heads with
sprinkler guards placed over the heads. Once the ceiling is replaced the
upright heads shall be replaced with pendant style heads and the new heads
centered in the new tile.
C. For the areas of the building that are being modified to accommodate the
structural upgrades the intent is the Contractor shall minimize the amount of
time the fire suppression system being offline.
D. Provide a new dry pipe sprinkler system that will sever the second floor
parking deck and all ramps. The Work will require the Contractor to change
out the existing sprinkler riser. Work at the riser includes but is not limited to
a new double check valve, dry pipe valve, wet pipe alarm valve, air
compressor, and all other equipment and devices to make the system

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PW/WBG/475883
21 13 13 - 2 JANUARY 2014
operational and FM approved. The intent is the Contractor shall minimize the
amount of time the fire suppression system being offline.
1.04 ADDITIONAL FM REQUIREMENTS
A. All proposed fire protection plans should be forwarded for review and comment
as soon as they become available and prior to installation. At least 2 weeks should
be allowed for review in the construction planning.
B. Design and install automatic sprinkler system per the following FM Global
Property Loss Prevention Data Sheets:
1. Data Sheet 2-0, Installation Guidelines for Automatic Sprinklers.
2. Data Sheet 3-26, Fire Protection Water Demand for Nonstorage
Sprinklered Properties.
C. Use only new, FM approved sprinkler system components. Ensure the
components are compatible with each other and their application is in
accordance with their listing in the Approval Guide.
D. Submit one set of working drawings, sprinkler system hydraulic calculations, and
material data sheets and specifications, to FM Global for review and acceptance
prior to the start of any sprinkler system installation.
E. During the patching of the roofing in the areas where the improvements are to be
made, replace the insulation and roofing materials with the original materials
removed, or like kind materials. Do not mix and match with insulation and
roofing materials.
1.05 FM HOT WORK REQUIREMENTS
A. Strictly manage and take proper precautions for hot work.
1. Avoid hot work of any kind when possible.
2. If there is a practical and safer way to do the job without hot work, use the
alternative method.
3. If hot work is unavoidable, use the FM Global Hot Work Permit System.
Using this system and taking the precautions it requires prevents hot work
fires.
B. Notify the FM Global Customer Service Desk when automatic fire protection
is shut off, regardless of the duration. Use the FM Global Red Tag Permit
System to manage any shutdowns of automatic fire protection. It will provide
a quick review of precautions needed during fire protection impairments and
will provide a followup to ensure protection is restored as soon as possible.
C. Ensure that automatic sprinkler protection is in service prior to introducing
combustibles inside of buildings.

JANUARY 2014 21 13 13 - 3
1.06 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping
designed to operate at working pressure of 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum.
1.07 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping
containing water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve.
Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened.
Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device.
A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175 psig (1200 kPa)
minimum working pressure.
B. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
1. There is no available fire-hydrant flow test. Contractor shall perform a
flow test and verify the capacity of the existing system.
C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent,
including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow
preventers.
2. Maximum Velocity in Sprinkler System Piping: Shall be limited to
20 feet per second.
3. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications, as indicated on Drawings.
4. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design, as indicated
on Drawings.
5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler, as indicated on Drawings.
6. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancies: 250 gpm (15.75 L/s) for 60 minutes.
b. Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies: 500 gpm (31.50 L/s) for 60 to
90 minutes.
c. Extra-Hazard Occupancies: 750 gpm (47.25 L/s) for 120 minutes.
D. Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE/SEI 7.

21 13 13 - 4 JANUARY 2014
1.09 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties
and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
1.10 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from
installers of the items involved:
1. Domestic water piping.
2. HVAC hydronic piping.
3. HVAC ductwork.
4. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Plumbing piping.
B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.
C. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to
NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction,
including hydraulic calculations.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Fire-hydrant flow test report.
F. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13.
Include Contractors Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping.
G. Field quality-control reports.

JANUARY 2014 21 13 13 - 5
1.11 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installers responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing
sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services
needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on
results of fire-hydrant flow test and pump flow test.
a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans,
calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional
engineer.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories,
installation, and testing shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13, Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
2. NFPA 24, Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their
Appurtenances.
1.13 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that
penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition
assemblies.
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged
cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler
wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and

21 13 13 - 6 JANUARY 2014
sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench
for each type of sprinkler used on Project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in Article Piping Schedule for applications of pipe,
tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services,
service locations, and pipe sizes.
2.02 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Pipe System:
1. Standard Weight, Schedule 40 Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M,
Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match
joining method.
2. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M,
standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
3. Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.
4. Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125,
standard pattern.
5. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.
6. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.
7. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.
8. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.
9. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1) Anvil International, Inc.
2) Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
3) Victaulic Company.
b. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
c. Uncoated, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping:
ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536,
ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.
d. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and
UL 213, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe
dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber
gasket, and bolts and nuts. Couplings and fittings shall be from the
same manufacturer.

JANUARY 2014 21 13 13 - 7
B. Dry Pipe Sprinkler System:
1. Standard Weight, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, pipe
ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.
2. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of
ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded
ends.
3. Galvanized, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.
4. Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125,
standard pattern.
5. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.
6. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.
7. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1) Anvil International, Inc.
2) Ward.
3) Star Corporation.
8. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
9. Galvanized, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/
A 47M, malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting;
with dimensions matching steel pipe.
10. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and
UL 213, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe
dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and
bolts and nuts.
2.03 CPVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. The use of CPVC piping or any other type of plastic pipe shall not be used for
this area of the building.
2.04 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm) thick.
1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges:
Full-face gaskets.
2. Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges:
Ring-type gaskets.
B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless
otherwise indicated.

21 13 13 - 8 JANUARY 2014
C. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding
materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe
being welded.
2.05 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
A. General Requirements:
1. Valves shall be FM approved.
2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig
(1200 kPa).
B. Ball Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Anvil International, Inc.
b. Victaulic Company.
2. Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc.
3. Valves NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded
ends.
4. Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2 (DN 50 and DN 65): Bronze body with
threaded ends or ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
5. Valves NPS 3 (DN 80): Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
C. Iron Butterfly Valves:
b. Global Safety Products, Inc.
c. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company.
e. NIBCO INC.
f. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
g. Victaulic Company.
2. Standard: UL 1091.
4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
5. Style: Lug or wafer.
6. End Connections: Grooved.

JANUARY 2014 21 13 13 - 9
D. Check Valves:
a. AFAC Inc.
b. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company
Subsidiary.
c. Anvil International, Inc.
d. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.
e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
g. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
h. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.
i. Fire Protection Products, Inc.
j. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
k. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
l. Milwaukee Valve Company.
m. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.
n. NIBCO INC.
o. Potter Roemer.
p. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
q. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
r. United Brass Works, Inc.
s. Victaulic Company.
t. Viking Corporation.
u. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum.
4. Type: Swing check.
5. Body Material: Cast iron.
6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
E. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:
a. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary.
b. American Valve, Inc.
c. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
g. Hammond Valve.
h. Milwaukee Valve Company.

21 13 13 - 10 JANUARY 2014
i. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.
j. NIBCO INC.
k. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
l. United Brass Works, Inc.
m. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
F. Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves:
b. Global Safety Products, Inc.
c. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company.
e. NIBCO INC.
f. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
g. Victaulic Company.
4. Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
a. Valve Type: Ball or butterfly.
b. Body Material: Bronze.
c. End Connections: Threaded.
5. Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
a. Valve Type: Butterfly.
b. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
c. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer.
6. Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, single-circuit,
supervisory switch indicating device.
G. NRS Gate Valves:
a. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary.
b. American Valve, Inc.
c. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
e. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
f. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.

JANUARY 2014 21 13 13 - 11
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
4. Body Material: Cast iron with indicator post flange.
5. Stem: Non-rising.
2.06 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES
1. Standard: ULs Fire Protection Equipment Directory listing or
Approval Guide, published by FM Global, listing.
B. Angle Valves:
a. Fire Protection Products, Inc.
b. United Brass Works, Inc.
C. Ball Valves:
b. Apollo Valves.
c. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.
d. Fire Protection Products, Inc.
e. Flowserve.
f. FNW.
g. Jomar International, Ltd.
h. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
i. Legend Valve.
j. Milwaukee Valve Company.
k. NIBCO INC.
l. Red-White Valve Corporation.

21 13 13 - 12 JANUARY 2014
2.07 SPECIALTY VALVES
2. Pressure Rating: Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig
(1200 kPa) minimum.
4. Size: Same as connected piping.
B. Sprinkler Riser Valves (Wet System):
1. Alarm valve shall be UL Listed and Factory Mutual Approved. Alarm
valve shall be equipped with a removable cover/clapper assembly.
Alarm valve shall be listed for installation in the vertical or horizontal
position. Alarm valve shall be equipped with gauge connections on the
system side and supply side of the valve clapper. Alarm valve to be
equipped with an external bypass to eliminate false water flow alarms.
Alarm valve trim piping to be galvanized. Valve trim shall include a
connection for a noninterruptible pressure switch. Alarm valve body to
be ductile iron and available with grooved by grooved, flanged by
grooved and flanged by flanged supply and discharge outlets,
respectively. Maximum water working pressure to 250 PSI (17 BAR).
a. AFAC Inc.
b. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
c. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
e. Viking Corporation.
3. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch,
pressure gauges, antiflood device, and fill-line attachment with strainer.
4. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.
C. Sprinkler Riser Valves (Dry System):
1. The dry pipe valve shall be a positive latching clapper, differential type
dry valve. Dry valve shall be UL Listed and Factory Mutual Approved.
Air pressure to water pressure area differential to be approximately 6 to
1. Dry pipe valve trim shall be galvanized.

JANUARY 2014 21 13 13 - 13
a. AFAC Inc.
b. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
c. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
3. Include trim sets for accelerator, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch,
pressure gauges, and air line attachment.
4. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.
D. Double Check Valve:
1. Valve shall feature modular check assemblies with center stem guiding.
Each check module shall have a captured spring and be accessible
through a bolted cover plate. Seats shall be replaceable without special
tools. It shall be a complete assembly including tight-closing resilient
seated shutoff valves, test cocks, and a strainer is recommended. The
assembly shall meet the requirements of ASSE No. 1015;
AWWA C510-92; CSA B64.
2. Double check valve bodies shall be epoxy coated cast iron with bronze
seats.
3. Double check assembly shall be furnished with UL/FM listed outside
stem and yoke resilient seated gate valve.
a. Watts 709.
b. Febco.
c. Ames.
2.08 SPRINKLERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
1. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
2. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
3. Victaulic Company.
4. Viking Corporation.

21 13 13 - 14 JANUARY 2014
B. General Requirements:
1. The intent is to match the existing sprinkler heads as much as possible.
3. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa)
minimum.
C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.
2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) orifice with Discharge
Coefficient K of 5.6, and for Ordinary temperature classification
rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
D. Sprinkler Finishes (Indoor Use, Match Existing):
1. Chrome plated.
2. White.
3. Bronze.
E. Sprinkler Finishes (Outdoor Use):
1. Chrome plated.
2. Bronze.
F. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following
sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and
recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.
1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.
2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.
G. Sprinkler Guards:
a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
c. Victaulic Company.
d. Viking Corporation.
3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

JANUARY 2014 21 13 13 - 15
2.09 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B. Water-Flow Indicators:
a. ADT Security Services, Inc.
b. McDonnell & Miller; ITT Industries.
c. Potter Electric Signal Company.
d. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.
f. Watts Industries (Canada) Inc.
3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for
isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7A, 125V ac and 0.25A, 24V dc;
complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent
false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
5. Type: Paddle operated.
7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.
C. Valve Supervisory Switches:
a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell company.
b. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
c. Potter Electric Signal Company.
d. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.
3. Type: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed
contacts.
5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
2.10 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
1. AMETEK; U.S. Gauge Division.

21 13 13 - 16 JANUARY 2014
2. Ashcroft, Inc.
3. Brecco Corporation.
4. WIKA Instrument Corporation.
B. Standard: UL 393.
C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch (90- to 115-mm) diameter.
D. Pressure Gauge Range: 0 to 250 psig (0 to 1725 kPa) minimum.
E. Water System Piping Gauge: Include WATER or AIR/WATER label on
dial face.
2.11 AIR COMPRESSOR (FOR DRY PIPE SYSTEM):
A. Air supplies provided for sprinkler system from a tank mounted air
compressor shall be equipped with an automatic air pressure maintenance
device. Air maintenance device shall be equipped with a 1/4-inch air supply
bypass with a field adjustable air pressure regulator with a built-in ball check
valve to eliminate air loss when system is in service. Air maintenance device
shall have a factory setting as required by the pre-action valve. Air supply
shall be from an air reservoir or a tank mounted compressor.
B. The air supply must be regulated and of the proper size in order to be able to
restore normal system air pressure within 30 minutes.
C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. General Air Products, Inc.
2. FireFlex.
3. Viking Corporation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use
results for system design calculations required in Article Quality Assurance.
B. Coordinate hydrant flow test with the City of Boise.
C. Report test results in writing before beginning work.

JANUARY 2014 21 13 13 - 17
3.02 EXISTING CONDITION COORDINATION
A. Fire suppression contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the
existing of the piping and sprinkler heads. The Drawings attempt to identify
all devices associated with the fire suppression system. Contractor shall
coordinate the extent of all related architectural and structural work before
beginning any fire suppression work.
3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams
indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as
indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written
approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with
Architect before deviating from approved working plans.
B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping
in NFPA 13.
C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-
restraint device materials and installation in NFPA 13.
D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains,
and reductions in pipe sizes.
E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on
valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end
connections. Piping connections on the inlet side of the sprinkler alarm check
valves shall be flanged or screwed. Piping connections on the outlet side of
the sprinkler alarm check valve shall be flanged, screwed or mechanical
couplings.
G. Install Inspectors Test Connections in sprinkler system piping, complete
with shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13.
H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
I. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-
department connection, to drain piping between fire-department connection
and check valve. Install drain piping to and spill over floor drain or to outside
building.
J. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

21 13 13 - 18 JANUARY 2014
K. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to
NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.
L. Install pressure gauges on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection.
Include pressure gauges with connection not less than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and
with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gauge
and valve. Install gauges to permit removal, and install where they will not be
subject to freezing.
M. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.
3.04 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and
special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than
systems pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on
valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end
connections.
D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel
pipe.
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes and
fittings before assembly.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness
suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to
ASME B31.9.
G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to
ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded
pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as
follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged.

JANUARY 2014 21 13 13 - 19
H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using
qualified processes and welding operators according to Article Quality
Assurance.
1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use
welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
I. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe
according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket,
lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to
AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.
J. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with
materials of both piping systems.
3.05 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and
trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control
sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install
permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each
valve.
C. Specialty Valves: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in
main supply to system.
3.06 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels.
3.07 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to
requirements in NFPA 13. Pipe shall be labeled every 20 feet maximum and at
least once in each room.
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair
leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

21 13 13 - 20 JANUARY 2014
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13,
Systems Acceptance Chapter.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
6. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department
equipment.
C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests
and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.09 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Governments maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain.
3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller,
shall be the following:
1. Standard-weight Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with threaded ends;
uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
B. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, (NPS 2-1/2 and larger), shall
be one of the following:
1. Standard-weight Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with threaded ends;
uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
2. Standard-weight Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends;
uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe
couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
3. Standard-weight Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel
welding fittings; and welded joints.

JANUARY 2014 21 13 13 - 21
3.12 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE
A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:
1. Where possible match the appearance of the existing sprinklers.
2. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.
3. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendant sprinklers.
4. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.
1. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon or
white.
2. Upright Sprinklers: Rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to
view.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
JANUARY 2014 22 07 00 - 1
SECTION 22 07 00
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air-Conditioning
Engineers Inc. (ASHRAE): 90.1, Energy-Efficient Design of New
Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
a. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate.
b. C533, Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe
Thermal Insulation.
c. C534, Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric
Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.
d. C547, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals: Product description, include list of materials, thickness for
each service scheduled, and locations.
1. Proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness,
and compressive strength.
A. Materials furnished under this Specification shall be standard, cataloged
products, new and commercially available, suitable for service requiring high
performance and reliability with low maintenance, and free from all defects.
B. Provide materials by firms engaged in the manufacture of insulation products
of the types and characteristics specified herein, whose products have been in
use for not less than 5 years.

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PW/WBG/475883
22 07 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
C. UL Listing or satisfactory certified test report from an approved testing
laboratory is required to indicate fire hazard ratings for materials proposed for
use do not exceed those specified.
A. Manufacturers Stamp or Label:
1. Every package or standard container of insulation, jackets, cements,
adhesives and coatings delivered to Site shall have manufacturers
stamp or label attached, giving name of manufacturer, brand, and
description of material.
2. Insulation packages and containers shall be marked asbestos-free.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Insulation exterior shall be cleanable, grease-resistant, nonflaking, and
nonpeeling.
B. Insulation shall conform to referenced publications and specified temperature
ranges and densities in pounds per cubic foot.
C. Insulation for fittings, flanges, and valves shall be premolded, precut, or job-
fabricated insulation of same thickness and conductivity as used on adjacent
piping.
D. Fire Resistance:
1. Insulation, adhesives, vapor barrier materials and other accessories,
except as specified herein, shall be noncombustible.
2. Use no fugitive or corrosive treatments to impart flame resistance.
3. Flame proofing treatments subject to deterioration due to effects of
moisture or high humidity are not acceptable.
4. Materials including facings, mastics, and adhesives, shall have fire
hazard rating not to exceed 25 for flame spread without evidence of
continued progressive combustion, and 50 for smoke, developed as per
tests conducted in accordance with NFPA 255 methods.
5. Materials exempt from fire-resistant rating:
a. Nylon anchors.
b. Treated wood inserts.
6. Materials exempt from fire-resistant rating when installed in outside
locations, buried, or encased in concrete:
a. Polyurethane insulation.

JANUARY 2014 22 07 00 - 3
b. PVC casing.
c. Fiberglass-reinforced plastic casing.
2.02 PIPE INSULATION
A. Type P1Fiberglass (ASTM C547, Type 1 (Minus 20 Degrees F to
500 Degrees F):
1. Fiberglass, UL-rated, preformed, sectional rigid, minimum 4 pounds per
cubic foot (PCF) density, K factor 0.23 maximum at 75 degrees F mean,
with factory-applied all-service jacket (ASJ) composed of reinforced
kraft paper and aluminum foil laminate. Jacket shall have self-sealing
lap to facilitate closing longitudinal and end joints.
a. CertainTeed; Preformed Pipe Insulation.
b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok AP-T.
c. Owens/Corning Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
d. Knauf Pipe Insulation; Crown Pipe Insulation.
B. Type P3Elastomeric (ASTM C534, Minus 40 Degrees F to 220 Degrees F):
1. Flexible, closed cell elastomeric.
2. Nominal 6 PCF density, K factor 0.27 maximum at 75 degrees F mean.
3. Water Vapor Transmission: 0.1 perm-inch, or less.
a. Armacell; AP Armaflex.
b. Nomaco; K-Flex LS.
c. Rubatex; R-180-FS.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION
A. Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturers written
instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices.
B. Apply insulation over clean, finish painted, and dry surfaces.
C. Install insulation after piping system has been pressure tested and leaks
corrected.
D. Use insulating cements, lagging adhesives, and weatherproof mastics
recommended by insulation manufacturer.
E. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each
continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with a single cut
piece to complete the run. Do not use cut pieces of scraps abutting each other.

22 07 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
F. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure a complete and tight fit over
surfaces to be covered.
G. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to
prevent puncture or other damage. Seal open ends of insulation with mastic.
Sectionally seal butt ends of chilled water and condensate drain piping
insulation at fittings with white vapor barrier coating.
H. Cover valves, flanges, fittings, and similar items in each piping system with
equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining
pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job-fabricated units. Finish cold
pipe fittings with white vapor barrier coating and hot piping with white vinyl
acrylic mastic, both reinforced with glass cloth.
I. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors, and
similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.
J. Install protective metal shields and foamglass inserts where pipe hangers bear
on outside of insulation.
K. Insulation on piping that is to be heat traced shall be installed after installation
of heat tape.
L. Insulate valve bodies, flanges, and pipe couplings.
M. Insulate and vapor seal hangers, supports, anchors, and other piping
appurtenances that are secured directly to cold surfaces.
N. Do not insulate flexible pipe couplings and expansion joints.
O. Do not allow insulation to cover nameplates or code inspection stamps.
P. Install removable insulation sections on devices that require access for
maintenance of equipment or removal, such as unions and strainer end plates.
Q. Connection to Existing Piping: Cut back existing insulation to remove portion
damaged by piping revisions. Install new insulation.
R. Cold Surfaces: Provide continuous vapor seal on insulation on cold surfaces
where vapor barrier jackets are used.
S. Placement:
1. Slip insulation on pipe or tubing before assembly, when practical, to
avoid longitudinal seams.
2. Insulate valves and fittings with sleeved or cut pieces of same material.
3. Seal and tape joints.

JANUARY 2014 22 07 00 - 5
T. Insulation at Hangers and Supports: Install under piping, centered at each
hanger or support.
U. Roof Drains: Insulate vertical drops from roof drain to horizontal pipe,
exposed and concealed horizontal piping, and 2 feet down on vertical risers
from horizontal pipe.
V. Roof and Overflow Drain Sumps: Insulate underside.
W. Vapor Barrier:
1. Provide continuous vapor barrier at joints between rigid insulation and
pipe insulation.
2. Install vapor barrier jackets with pipe hangers and supports outside
jacket.
3. Do not use staples and screws to secure vapor sealed system
components.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FINISH SYSTEMS
A. Use a continuous friction type joint to hold jacket in-place, providing positive
weatherproof seal over entire length of jacket.
B. Secure circumferential joints with preformed snap straps containing
weatherproof sealant.
C. On exterior piping, apply coating over insulation and vapor barrier to prevent
damage when aluminum fitting covers are installed.
D. Do not use screws or rivets to fasten the fitting covers.
E. Install removable prefabricated aluminum covers on exterior flanges and
unions.
F. Caulk and seal exterior joints to make watertight.
3.03 INSULATION APPLICATIONS
A. Potable Cold Water:
1. Type P3, elastomeric.
2. 1-inch thickness for all pipe sizes.
B. Potable Hot Water:
1. Type P1, fiberglass.
2. 1-inch thickness for all pipe sizes.

22 07 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
C. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Sump (Interior Area Only):
2. 1-inch thickness.
3. Do not insulate piping located outdoors.
D. Pipe Hangers:
1. Type P1, Fiberglass: UL-rated, preformed rigid pipe insulation inserts
of thickness equal to adjoining insulation, 10 inches in length, with
factory-applied, vinyl-coated and embossed vapor barrier jacket with
self-sealing lap.
2. Type P3, Elastomeric: Rigid insulation section with 9-inch-long,
16-gauge galvanized steel saddle.
3.04 INSULATION FINISH APPLICATIONS
A. Piping Insulation: Factory finish.
A. Test factory-applied materials assembled. Field-applied materials may be
tested individually.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 22 10 01
PLUMBING PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
2. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE):
a. 1010, Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters.
b. 1050, Performance Requirements for Stack Air Admittance
Valves for Sanitary Drainage Systems.
a. A47/A47M, Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron
Castings.
b. A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and
Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
c. A74, Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
d. A105/A105M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings
for Piping Applications.
e. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,
Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
f. A179/A179M, Standard Specification for Seamless Cold-Drawn
Low-Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger and Condenser Tubes.
g. A181/A181M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings,
for General-Purpose Piping.
h. A197/A197M, Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron.
i. A234/A234M, Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of
Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High
Temperature Service.
j. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,
60,000 psi Tensile Strength.
k. A518/A518M, Standard Specification for Corrosion-Resistant
High-Silicon Iron Castings.
l. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
m. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
n. A861, Standard Specification for High-Silicon Iron Pipe and
Fittings.
o. A888, Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping
Applications.
p. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
q. B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.

PLUMBING PIPING PW/WBG/475883
r. B62, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce
Metal Castings.
s. B75, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube.
t. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
u. B98/B98M, Standard Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod,
Bar, and Shapes.
v. B127, Standard Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy (UNS
N04400) Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
w. B139/B139M, Standard Specification for Phosphor Bronze Rod,
Bar, and Shapes.
x. B164, Standard Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy Rod, Bar,
and Wire.
y. B194, Standard Specification for Copper-Beryllium Alloy Plate,
Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar.
z. B306, Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).
aa. C564, Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron
Soil Pipe and Fittings.
bb. C1277, Standard Specification for Shielded Couplings Joining
Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
4. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. C104/A21.4, Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron
Pipe and Fittings for Water.
b. C110/A21.10, Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings,
3-In. Through 48-In. (76 mm Through 1219 mm) for Water.
c. C111/A21.11, Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron
Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
d. C115/A21.15, Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with
Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges.
e. C151/A21.51, Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast,
for Water.
f. C203, Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water
Pipelines, Enamel and Tape, Hot-Applied.
g. C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 In.
Through 144 In (100 mm Through 3,600 mm).
h. C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
i. C651, Disinfecting Water Mains.
5. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI): 301, Standard Specification for
Hubless Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain,
Waste, and Vent Piping Applications.
6. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI): WH 201, Water Hammer
Arrester Standard.

A. Where pipe diameter, thickness, pressure class, pressure rating, or thrust
restraint is not shown or specified, design piping system in accordance with
the following:
1. Sanitary Building Drainage and Vent Systems: ICBO/IAPMO Uniform
Plumbing Code.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Product data sheets.
2. Shop Drawings: Showing changes in location of fixtures or equipment
that is advisable in the opinion of Contractor.
3. Isometric riser diagrams.
1. Changes in location of equipment or piping that affect connecting or
adjacent work, before proceeding with the work.
2. Complete list of products proposed for installation.
3. Test records produced during testing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING
A. Piping Schedule: Refer to Plumbing Piping Schedule.
2.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers:
1. Clevis Type: MSS SP 58 and SP 69, Type 1 or 6.
a. Anvil; Figure 104 or 260, sizes 1/2 inch through 30 inches.
b. B-Line; Figure B3198H or B3100, sizes 3/8 inch through
30 inches.
2. Hinged Split-Ring Pipe Clamp: MSS SP 58 and SP 69, Type 6 or 12.
a. Anvil; Figure 104, sizes 3/4 inch through 8 inches.
b. B-Line; Figure B3198H, sizes 3/8 inch through 3 inches.
3. Hanger Rods, Clevises, Nuts, Sockets, and Turnbuckles: In accordance
with MSS SP 58.
4. Attachments:
a. I-Beam Clamp: Concentric loading type, MSS SP 58 and SP 69,
Type 21, 28, 29, or 30, which engage both sides of flange.

b. Concrete Insert: MSS SP 58 and SP 69, Type 18, continuous
channel insert with load rating not less than that of hanger rod it
supports.
B. Saddle Supports:
1. Pedestal Type: Schedule 40 pipe stanchion, saddle, and anchoring
flange.
a. Nonadjustable Saddle: MSS SP 58 and SP 69, Type 37 with
U-bolt.
1) Anvil; Figure 259, sizes 4 inches through 36 inches.
2) B-Line; Figure B3090, sizes 2-1/2 inches through 36 inches.
b. Adjustable Saddle: MSS SP 58 and SP 69, Type 38 without
clamp.
1) Anvil; Figure 264, sizes 2-1/2 inches through 36 inches.
2) B-Line; Figure B3093, sizes 2-1/2 inches through 36 inches.
C. Wall Brackets:
1. Welded Steel Bracket: MSS SP 58 and SP 69, Type 33 (heavy-duty).
a. Anvil; Figure 199, 3,000-pound rating.
b. B-Line; Figure B3067, 3,000-pound rating.
2. One-Hole Clamp: Anvil; Figure 126, sizes 3/8 inch through 4 inches.
3. Channel Type:
a. Unistrut.
b. Anvil; Power-Strut.
c. B-Line; Strut System.
d. Aickinstrut (FRP).
D. Pipe Clamps:
1. Riser Clamp: MSS SP 58 and SP 69, Type 8.
a. Anvil; Figure 261, sizes 3/4 inch through 24 inches.
b. B-Line; Figure B3373, sizes 1/2 inch through 30 inches.
E. Channel Type Support Systems:
1. Channel Size: 12-gauge, 1-5/8-inch wide minimum steel, 1-1/2-inch
wide, minimum FRP.
2. Members and Connections: Design for all loads with safety factor of 5.
3. Manufacturers:
a. B-Line; Strut System.
b. Unistrut.
c. Anvil; Power-Strut.
d. Aickinstrut (FRP System).

F. Accessories:
1. Insulation Shields:
a. Type: Galvanized steel or stainless steel, MSS SP 58 and SP 69,
Type 40.
1) Anvil; Figure 167, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches.
2) B-Line; Figure B3151, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches.
2. Welding Insulation Saddles:
a. Type: MSS SP 58 and SP 69, Type 39.
1) Anvil; Figure Series 160, sizes 1 inch through 36 inches.
2) B-Line; Figure Series B3160, sizes 1/2 inch through
24 inches.
G. Galvanize hangers, rods, clamps, protective shields, and hanger accessories.
H. Trapeze Hangers:
1. Assembly consisting of structure attachments with rod size dependent
upon total weight supported, and spacing of assemblies determined by
minimum pipe size included in group supported.
2. Trapeze Horizontal: Structural angle or channel section of sufficient
size to prevent measurable sag between rods.
3. Manufacturers:
a. Unistrut.
b. B-Line; Strut System.
c. Anvil; Power-Strut.
d. Aickinstrut (FRP System).
2.03 INSULATION
A. As specified in Section 22 07 00, Plumbing Piping Insulation.
2.04 VALVES
A. General:
1. Furnish complete with necessary operating hand wheels, chain wheels,
extension stems, floor stands, worm and gear operators, operating nuts,
chains, and wrenches.
2. Renewable Parts Including Discs, Packing, and Seats: Types as
recommended by valve manufacturer for intended service.
3. Units shall have name of manufacturer and size of valve cast on body or
bonnet or shown on a permanently attached plate in raised letters.

B. Design Features:
1. Brass and bronze components, including appurtenances in contact with
water.
2. Alloys containing less than 16 percent zinc and 2 percent aluminum.
3. Alloys are of the following ASTM designations:
a. B61, B62, B98/B98M (Alloy A, B, or D), B139 (Alloy A), B164,
B194, and B127.
b. Stainless steel Alloy 18-8 may be substituted for bronze as an
option with approval of Engineer.
4. Gland Bolts on Iron Body Valves: Bronze, fitted with brass nuts.
C. Gate Valves:
1. 3 Inches and Smaller for Water and Air Services:
a. All-bronze with screwed bonnet, single solid wedge gate with
nonrising stem, and handwheel operator.
b. Rated 125-pound SWP, 200-pound WOG.
c. Manufacturers and Products for Threaded Ends:
1) Crane; No. 438.
2) Nibco; Model No. T-113.
d. Manufacturers and Products for Soldered Ends:
1) Crane; No. 1701S.
2) Nibco; Model No. S-113.
2. 4 Inches and Larger for Water and Air Services:
a. Iron body, bronze mounted, with flanged ends, solid wedge gate
with nonrising stem, and handwheel operator.
c. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Crane; No. 461.
2) Nibco; Model No. F-619.
D. Ball Valves:
1. 2 Inches and Smaller for General Water and Air Service:
a. Three-piece body type, bronze body and end pieces, hard-chrome
plated bronze or brass ball, full bore port, RTFE seats and
packing, blowout-proof stem, zinc-plated steel hand lever operator
with vinyl grip.
b. Rated 600-pound WOG, 150-psi SWP.
1) Threaded Ends:
a) Milwaukee; BA-300.
b) Nibco; T-595-Y.
c) Conbraco Apollo; 82-100.

2) Soldered Ends:
a) Milwaukee; BA-350.
b) Nibco; S-595-Y.
c) Conbraco Apollo; 82-200.
E. Globe Valves:
1. 3 Inches and Smaller:
a. Bronze body, replaceable composition disc, screwed ends, union
bonnet, inside screw rising stem, and TFE disc.
1) Crane; No. 7TF.
2) Nibco; No. T-235-Y.
F. Plug Valve:
1. 2 Inches and Smaller for Natural Gas and Propane Gas Service:
a. Eccentric type, nonlubricated, cast iron body, and bronze plug
with Buna N elastomer O-ring seal.
b. UL listed and CSA (AGA-CGA) approved.
c. Pressure Rating: ANSI 125, 175 psi.
d. Threaded end connections.
1) Milliken Valve Company, Inc.; Series 625.
2) Key Port Valve; Series 400.
2. 2-1/2 Inches to 4 Inches for Natural Gas and Propane Gas Service:
a. Eccentric type, nonlubricated, cast iron body and nickel plated
cast iron plug with Buna N elastomer O-ring seal.
b. UL listed and CSA (AGA-CGA) approved.
c. Pressure Rating: ANSI 125, 175 psi.
d. End Connections:
1) 2-1/2 Inches to 3 Inches: Threaded.
2) 4 Inches: Flanged, ASME B16.1, Class 125/150.
1) Milliken Valve Company, Inc.; Series 625.
2) Key Port Valve; Series 400.
G. Angle Valves 3 Inches and Smaller:
1. Bronze body, threaded ends, union bonnet, and rising stem.
2. Rated 150-pound SWP and 300-pound WOG.
3. Manufacturers and Products for Threaded End:
a. Crane; No. 17TF.
b. Nibco; No. T-335-Y.

H. Check Valves 3 Inches and Smaller:
1. Bronze body, wye pattern, threaded ends and cap, regrinding seat, and
swing type disc.
2. Rated 125-pound SWP, 200-pound WOG.
a. Crane; No. 37.
b. Walworth Co.; Figure 406.
I. Manual Air Vent Valves:
1. With coin-operated air vent.
a. Bell & Gossett; No. 4V.
b. Dole; No. 9.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Strainers for Water Service:
1. Iron body, Y-pattern, 125-pound rated, with screwed bronze or bolted
iron cap.
2. Screen: Heavy-gauge stainless steel or monel, 30 mesh.
a. Crane; No. 988-1/2.
b. Mueller; No. 751.
B. Water Hammer Arresters:
1. Materials: ASSE 1010 certified, Type L copper tube, HHPP piston with
two lubricated EPDM O-rings, FDA approved lubricant, rolled piston
stop, wrought copper male thread adapter.
a. Sioux Chief Mfg. Co., Inc.; Series 650 and 660.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
C. Flashing Sleeves for Roof Penetrations:
1. Built-Up Bituminous Roofing: Fabricate of lead as specified in
Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
2. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Pipe seals as specified in
Section 07 70 01, Roof Specialties and Accessories.
D. Insulating Dielectric Unions and Flanges:
1. Galvanically compatible with piping to which attached and pressure
ratings suitable for system working pressures.

2. Unions 2 Inches and Smaller: Screwed or solder-joint type.
3. Unions 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Flanged type, complete with bolt
insulators, dielectric gasket, bolts, and nuts.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Epco Sales, Inc., Cleveland, OH.
b. Capitol Insulation Unions.
2.06 MEASURING DEVICES
A. Thermometers:
1. Adjustable angle, red reading mercury type with 9-inch case and scale
range in degrees F, as shown.
2. Furnish with 3-1/2-inch stem length and separable NPT brass
thermowell.
a. Trerice Co.; Model A005.
b. Weksler.
B. Pressure Gauges:
1. Construction: 3-1/2-inch gauge size, 0 to 690 kPa, 0 to 160 psi range,
steel case, glass crystal, brass movement, and 1/4-inch NPT lower
connection.
2. Furnish with 1/4-inch brass gauge cock.
a. Ashcroft; Type 1008.
b. Marsh; J80.
c. Marshalltown.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install plumbing systems to meet the applicable plumbing code.
B. Field Obstructions:
1. Drawings do not attempt to show exact details of piping. Provide offsets
around obstructions.
2. Do not modify structural components, unless approved by Engineer.
C. Sleeves:
1. Pipe sizes shown are nominal sizes, unless shown or specified
otherwise.

2. Provide piping passing through walls, floors, or ceilings with standard-
weight pipe sleeves.
3. Provide pipes passing through finished walls with chrome-plated
canopy flanges.
4. Dry pack sleeves in existing work in-place and provide finished
appearance.
5. Pack holes left by removal of existing piping with grout and finish to
match adjacent surface.
D. Provide unions in piping systems at connections to equipment.
E. Provide insulating dielectric unions and flanges between ferrous and
nonferrous piping and where otherwise required for electrically insulated
connection.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Steel Pipe:
1. Ream, clean, and remove burrs and mill scale from piping before
making up.
2. Seal joints with pipe joint sealer or Teflon tape.
B. Copper Tubing:
1. Cut tubing square and remove burrs.
2. Clean both inside of fittings and outside of tubing with steel wool and
hydrochloric acid before soldering.
3. Prevent annealing of fittings and hard-drawn tubing when making
connections.
4. Do not use mitered joints for elbows or notching of straight runs of pipe
for tees.
C. Water Hammer Arresters:
1. Install in piping systems where shown on Drawings and adjacent to
pieces of equipment where quick closing valves are installed.
2. Install at all emergency safety showers and eyewashes.
3. Size and install in accordance with Plumbing and Drainage Institute
Standard PDI-WH201.
4. Shock arresters to have access panels or to be otherwise accessible.
D. Valves: Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
E. Miscellaneous Piping Specialties: Install in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations.

F. Measuring Devices: Install in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations.
3.03 SANITARY AND WASTE DRAINS AND VENTS PIPING
A. Installation:
1. Set piping above floor slab true and plumb.
2. Set exposed risers as close to walls as possible.
3. Where vent stacks pass through roof slab, fit with flashing sleeve
secured to roof.
4. Extend vents minimum 1 foot above roof.
5. Provide cleanouts where shown and where required by code.
3.04 HVAC CONDENSATE PIPING
A. Set piping true and plumb.
B. Slope piping 1/8 inch per foot minimum.
3.05 WATER SUPPLY PIPING
A. Water supply piping includes potable cold water, hot water, return hot water,
and tempered water systems.
B. Flush water piping systems clean of internal debris, clean faucet aerators, and
adjust plumbing fixture valves for manufacturers recommended flow.
C. Do not run water piping through electrical rooms, stairwells, or immediately
over or within a 3-foot horizontal clearance of electrical panels, motor
starters, or environmental control panels.
D. Provide bypass with globe valve for emergency throttling around each
reducing valve.
E. Protect buried copper and steel pipe and fittings with a single wrap of coal-tar
saturated felt in accordance with AWWA C203.
F. Vacuum Breakers 2 Inches and Smaller: Install minimum 6 inches above
flood line of equipment they serve.
G. Provide manual air vents at high points in domestic hot water system.
3.06 INSULATION
A. As specified in Section 22 07 00, Plumbing Piping Insulation.

3.07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Install pre-engineered support equipment in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations.
B. Hanger Rod Sizing and Spacing for:
1. Steel Pipe:
Pipe Size
Max. Hanger
Spacing Min. Rod Size
1 inch and smaller 6' 1/4"
1-1/4 through 2-1/2 inches 8' 1/4"
3 and 4 inches 10' 3/8"
6 inches 12' 3/8"
8 inches 12' 1/2"
2. Copper Pipe:
a. Rod Size: Same as for steel pipe.
b. Spacing: 2 feet less per size than for steel pipe, except pipe
1-1/4 inches and smaller shall be supported every 6 feet.
3. Cast Iron Pipe:
b. Spacing: Locate hanger rods at each pipe joint and change of
direction, 10-foot maximum spacing.
4. Plastic Pipe:
b. Spacing: As recommended by manufacturer and required by
applicable plumbing code for flow and temperature in pipe.
c. No metal portion of hanger shall contact pipe directly.
C. Attach Support Rods For Horizontal Piping:
1. To steel beams with I-clamps.
2. To concrete with inserts or with flanges fastened with flush shells.
3. To wood with thickness of 2-1/2 inches or more with bolts or angle
clips.
D. Trapeze Hangers:
1. Trapeze hangers may be used in lieu of individual hangers where
horizontal piping is arranged with two or more parallel lines.
2. Attach lines to horizontal with U-bolts or one-hole clamps.

E. Vertical Piping:
1. Support by channel type support system and pipe clamps on 10-foot
maximum centers.
2. Copper, and Plastic Piping: Isolate from channels and pipe clamps with
pipe isolators.
F. Insulated Piping: Furnish galvanized protection shield and oversized hangers
under insulated piping.
3.08 INTERIM CLEANING
A. Prevent accumulation of weld rod, weld spatter, pipe cuttings and filings,
gravel, cleaning rags, and other foreign material within piping during
fabrication and assembly.
B. Examine piping to assure removal of foreign objects prior to assembly.
C. Shop cleaning may employ conventional commercial cleaning method if it
does not corrode, deform, swell, or otherwise alter physical properties of
material being cleaned.
3.09 TESTING
A. General:
1. Conduct pressure and leakage tests on newly installed pipelines.
2. Provide necessary equipment and material, and make taps in pipe, as
required.
3. Owner will monitor tests. Provide 24-hour advance notice of start of
testing.
4. Test Pressures: As specified herein and in Piping Schedule.
5. Test Records: Make records of each piping system installation during
test to document the following:
a. Date of test.
b. Description and identification of piping tested.
c. Test fluid.
d. Test pressure.
e. Remarks, including:
1) Leaks (type, location).
2) Repairs made on leaks.
f. Certification by Contractor and signed acknowledgment by
Owner that tests have been satisfactorily completed.
B. Testing New Pipe Connected to Existing Pipe: Isolate new pipe with grooved
end pipe caps, spectacle blinds, or blind flanges.

C. Hydrostatic Leak Tests:
1. Equipment: Provide the following:
Amount Description
2 Graduated containers
2 Pressure gauges
1 Hydraulic force pump
Suitable hose and suction pipe as required
2. Procedure:
a. Use water as the hydrostatic test fluid.
b. Provide clean test water of such quality as to minimize corrosion
of the materials in the piping system.
c. Open vents at high points of the piping system to purge air
pockets while the piping system is filling.
d. Venting during filling of system may also be provided by
loosening flanges with a minimum of four bolts or by the use of
equipment vents.
e. Test piping systems at test pressure specified in Piping Schedule.
f. Maintain hydrostatic test pressure continuously for 30 minutes
minimum and for such additional time as necessary to conduct
examinations for leakage.
g. Examine joints and connections for leakage.
h. Piping system, exclusive of possible localized instances at pump
or valve packing, shall show no visual evidence of weeping or
leaking.
i. Correct visible leakage and retest to satisfaction of Owner.
3. Gravity Sewers and Drains:
a. Test by water or air exfiltration tests as prescribed by local or
state plumbing codes and visually examine for leaks.
b. Repair leaks and retest system until no further leakage is evident.
D. Pneumatic Leak Tests:
1. Perform on compressed air, natural gas, and vacuum piping.

2. Equipment: Provide the following:
Amount Description
1 Pneumatic compressor separator-dryer system capable of
providing oil-free dry air and equipped with one or more
full capacity safety relief valves set at a pressure of not
more than 105 percent of the required primary test
pressure
1 Calibrated test gauge
3. Procedure:
a. Perform pneumatic testing using accurately calibrated instruments
and oil-free, dry air.
b. Perform tests only on exposed piping, after piping has been
completely installed, including supports, hangers and anchors, and
inspected for proper installation.
c. Test piping system at test pressure specified in Piping Schedule.
d. Take necessary precautions to protect test personnel from hazards
associated with air testing.
e. Secure piping to be tested to prevent damage to adjacent piping
and equipment in event of a joint failure.
f. Prior to test, remove or suitably isolate appurtenant instruments or
devices that could be damaged by test.
g. Apply maximum 25 psig preliminary pneumatic test to piping
system prior to final leak testing, to locate major leaks.
h. Examine joints and connections for leakage with soap bubbles.
i. Correct visible leaks and retest.
j. Gradually increase pressure in system to not more than one-half of
test pressure.
k. Thereafter increase pressure in steps of approximately 1/10 of
maximum test pressure until required test pressure is reached.
l. Maintain pneumatic test pressure continuously for minimum
10 minutes and for such additional time as necessary to conduct a
soap bubble examination for leakage.
m. The piping system, exclusive of possible localized instances at
pump or valve packing, shall show no evidence of leakage.
n. Correct visible leakage retest to satisfaction of Owner.
o. Following pneumatic testing, thoroughly purge lines that are to
carry flammable gases with nitrogen to assure no explosive
mixtures will be present in system during filling process.

3.10 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION
A. Prior to final acceptance, following assembly and testing, flush pipelines with
water, except for plant process air lines and instrument air lines, and remove
accumulated construction debris and other foreign matter.
B. Minimum Flushing Velocity: 5 feet per second.
C. Insert cone strainers in the connections to attached equipment and leave until
cleaning has been accomplished.
D. Remove accumulated debris through drains 2 inches and larger or by dropping
spools and valves.
E. Immediately following drainage of flushed lines, dry piping with compressed
air.
F. Disinfect pipelines intended to carry potable water before placing in service:
1. Meet the requirements of AWWA C651, unless otherwise specified.
2. Disinfecting Mixture:
a. A chlorine-water solution having a free chlorine residual of
40 ppm to 50 ppm.
b. Prepare by injecting one of the following:
1) Liquid chlorine gas-water mixture.
2) Dry chlorine gas.
3) Calcium or sodium hypochlorite and water mixture.
c. Inject mixture into pipeline at a measured rate while freshwater is
allowed to flow through the pipeline at a measured rate so the
combined mixture of freshwater and chlorine solution or gas is of
the specified strength.
d. Apply liquid chlorine gas-water mixture by means of a
chlorinating device.
e. Feed dry chlorine gas through proper devices for regulating the
rate of flow and providing effective diffusion of gas into water
within pipe being treated.
f. Chlorinating devices for feeding solutions of chlorine gas or gas
itself must prevent backflow of water into chlorine cylinder.
g. Calcium Hypochlorite: If this procedure is used, first mix dry
powder with water to make a thick paste, then thin to
approximately a 1 percent solution (10,000 ppm chlorine).
h. Sodium Hypochlorite: If this procedure is used, dilute liquid with
water to obtain a 1 percent solution.

i. The following proportions of hypochlorite to water will be
required:
Product Quantity Water
Calcium Hypochlorite
1

(65 - 70 percent C1)
1 lb. 7.5 gal.
Sodium Hypochlorite
2

(5.25 percent C1)
1 gal. 4.25 gal.
1
Comparable to commercial products known as HTH, Perchloron,
and Pittchlor.
2
Known as liquid laundry bleach, Clorox, and Purex.
G. Point of Application:
1. Inject chlorine mixture into pipeline to be treated at the beginning of the
line through a corporation stop or suitable tap in the top of pipeline.
2. Control clean water from existing system or another source so it flows
slowly into newly installed piping during chlorine application.
3. Manipulate valves so the strong chlorine solution in the line being
treated will not flow back into line supplying the water. Use check
valves, if necessary.
H. Retention Period:
1. Retain treated water in pipeline for a minimum of 24 hours or long
enough to destroy nonspore-forming bacteria.
2. At the end of the retention period, the disinfecting mixture shall have
strength of at least 10 ppm of chlorine.
3. Operate valves, hydrants, and other appurtenances during disinfection to
assure disinfecting mixture is dispersed into all parts of the pipeline
including dead ends, new services, and similar areas that otherwise may
not receive the disinfecting solution.
4. Do not place concentrated quantities of commercial disinfectants in
pipeline before filling with water.
5. After chlorination, flush water from permanent source of supply until
water through pipeline is equal chemically and bacteriologically to
permanent source of supply.
I. Disposal of Disinfecting Water:
1. Dispose of disinfecting water in an acceptable manner that will protect
the public and receiving waters from harmful or toxic concentrations of
chlorine.

2. Do not allow disinfecting water to flow into a waterway without
adequate dilution or other satisfactory method of reducing chlorine
concentrations to a safe level.
A. Protective Covers:
1. Provide over floor and shower drains during construction, to prevent
damage to drain strainers and keep foreign material from entering
drainage system.
2. Cover roof drains and emergency overflow drains during roofing
process so roofing material and gravel do not enter drain piping.
3. Remove at time of Substantial Completion.
3.12 SUPPLEMENTS
A. The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are a part of this
Specification:
1. Plumbing Piping Schedule.
2. Plumbing Piping Data Sheets.
Section
Number Title
22 10 01.02 Copper and Copper Alloy Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
22 10 01.03 Cast Iron Soil Pipe (CISP) and Fittings
END OF SECTION

COPYRIGHT 2014 CH2M HILL 22 10 01 SUPPLEMENT - 1
PLUMBING PIPING SCHEDULE
Legend Service
Size(s)
(in.) Exposure
Piping
Material
Specification
Section
Operating
Pressure
(psig)
Test
Type
Test
Pressure
(psig)
Pipe Colors
and Labels Notes
CD Condensate Drain, HVAC All EXP/BUR COP 22 10 01.02 NA H 5
D Sanitary Drain All EXP/BUR CISP 22 10 01.03 NA H 5
ERW Emergency Rain Water All EXP/BUR CISP 22 10 01.03 NA H 5
RW Rain Water All EXP/BUR CISP 22 10 01.03 NA H 5
V, VTR Sanitary Vent All EXP CISP 22 10 01.03 NA H 5
DCW,
DHW,
DHWR
Cold Water, Potable
Hot Water Potable
Hot Water Recirculation, Potable
All EXP/BUR COP 22 10 01.02 80 PSI H 120
Note:
1. Insulate as specified in Section 22 07 00, Plumbing Piping Insulation.

Legend
Exposure Pressure Test Material
BUR Buried H Hydrostatic ACR Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration
EXP Exposed I In Service CISP Cast Iron Soil Pipe
SUB Submerged P Pneumatic CLDI Cement-Lined Ductile Iron
ENC Concrete Encased NA Not Applicable CMP Corrugated Metal Pipe
COP Copper
DI Ductile Iron
DWV Drain Waste and Vent
GSP Galvanized Steel Pipe
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride
STL Steel

END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 COPPER AND COPPER ALLOY
JANUARY 2014 PIPE, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
COPYRIGHT 2014 CH2M HILL 22 10 01.02 DATA SHEET - 1
SECTION 22 10 01.02
COPPER AND COPPER ALLOY PIPE, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
Item Description
General Materials in contact with potable water shall conform to NSF 61
acceptance.
Pipe Oxygen Service: Red brass, seamless, standard wall thickness,
conforming to ASTM B43.
Tubing
Seamless, conforming to ASTM B88 as follows:
Water (exposed) ..................... Type L, hard drawn
Domestic hot water ................ Type L, hard drawn
Compressed air service .......... Type L, hard drawn
Refrigerant service ................. Type L, hard drawn
P-Trap priming service .......... Type L, soft temper
Fittings Commercially pure wrought copper, socket joint, conforming to
ASTM B75, dimensions conforming to ASME B16.22.
Flanges Commercially pure wrought copper, socket joint, conforming to
ASTM B75, faced and drilled 150-pound ASME B16.24 standard.
Bolting ASTM A307, carbon steel, Grade A hex head bolts, and
ASTM A563 Grade A hex head nuts.
Gaskets 1/16-inch thick nonasbestos compression type, full face, Cranite,
John Manville.
Solder
Joints 2-1/2 Inch and Smaller: Wire solder (95 percent tin),
conforming to ASTM B32 Alloy Grade Sn95. Do not use cored
solder.
Joints Larger Than 2-1/2 Inch: Wire solder, melt range
approximately 440 degrees F to 660 degrees F, conforming to
ASTM B32 Alloy Grade HB or HN. Do not use cored solder.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 CAST IRON SOIL PIPE (CISP)
JANUARY 2014 AND FITTINGS
COPYRIGHT 2014 CH2M HILL 22 10 01.03 DATA SHEET - 1
SECTION 22 10 01.03
CAST IRON SOIL PIPE (CISP) AND FITTINGS
Item Size Description
Pipe 6" and smaller Hubless, CISPI 301, service weight, no-hub
ends.
8" and larger Hub and spigot, ASTM A74, service weight,
single hub and spigot.
Joints 6" and smaller Coupling to conform to ASTM C564,
ASTM C1277 and CISPI 310, Compression:
Neoprene sealing sleeve with 24-gauge
Type 304 stainless steel shield and clamp
assembly.
8" and larger Rubber gaskets, ASTM C564.
Fittings 6" and smaller Conform to ASTM A888 and CISPI 301
8" and larger Conform to ASTM A74
Coating All Bituminous-coated inside and out; marked
with manufacturers name or trademark and
CISPI symbol.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
JANUARY 2014 BALANCING FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. (AMCA): 203, Field
Performance Measurement of Fan Systems.
2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE): HVAC Applications Handbook.
3. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC): National Standards for Field
Management and Instrumentation Total System Balance.
4. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB):
a. Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of
Environmental Systems.
b. Procedural Standards for Measuring Sound and Vibration.
(SMACNA): HVAC Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Manual.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Documentation of experience record of testing authority.
2. Documentation of current AABC or NEBB certifications for those
technicians in responsible charge of the work under this Contract.
3. Submit detailed test and balance procedures, including test conditions
for systems to be tested, prior to beginning the Work.
4. Written verification of calibration of testing and balancing equipment.
5. Balancing Log Report following completion of system adjustments
including test results, adjustments, and rebalancing procedures.
A. Air Balancing and Test Agency Qualifications:
1. Certification by AABC of NEBB for testing, adjusting and balancing of
HVAC systems.
2. Corporately and financially independent organization functioning as an
unbiased testing authority.
3. Professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of
HVAC equipment being tested.
4. Have a proven record of at least five similar projects.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND PW/WBG/475883
BALANCING FOR HVAC JANUARY 2014
5. Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing,
adjusting and balancing of HVAC equipment and systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide materials, tools, test equipment, computers and instrumentation
required to complete the work included.
B. Test Hole Plugs: Plug test holes in ducts with plugs made for that purpose and
replace any insulation removed to specified conditions.
C. Drives for Belt-Driven Fans:
1. Furnish cast iron or flanged steel sheaves.
2. Sheaves and belt combination shall be capable of providing 150 percent
of motor horsepower.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Adjust and balance air and water systems in accordance with standard
procedures and recognized practices of the AABC or NEBB.
B. Adjust and balance the following systems in the annex and the area of new
work on the 3rd floor of CH2:
1. Annex: Perform a full air balance for all inlets and outlets. Perform a
water balance as required by the new heat pump, HP-1.
2. 3rd Floor: Perform an air balance for all inlets and outlets in the area of
new work.
3.02 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING AIR SIDE
A. Preparation:
1. Prior to beginning the Work, perform the following activities:
a. Review Shop Drawings and installed system for adequate and
accessible balancing devices and test points.
b. Recommend to Engineer dampers that need to be added or
replaced in order to obtain proper air control.
c. Verify proper startup procedures have been completed on the
system.
d. Verify controls installation is complete and system is in stable
operation under automatic control.

e. Verify test instruments have been calibrated to a recognized
standard and are within manufacturers recommended calibration
interval before beginning the Work.
B. General:
1. When adjustments are made to a portion of a fan system, reread other
portions of that same system to determine effects imposed by
adjustments. Readjust as necessary.
2. Lock and mark final positions of balancing dampers with permanent felt
pen.
C. Equipment Data:
1. Collect the following data and included in final report:
a. Type of unit.
b. Equipment identification number.
c. Equipment nameplate data (including manufacturer, model, size,
type, and serial number).
d. Motor data (frame, hp, volts, FLA rpm, and service factor).
e. Sheave manufacturer, size, and bore.
f. Belt size and number.
g. Sheave centerline distance and adjustment limits.
h. Starter and motor overload protection data.
i. Include changes made during course of system balancing.
D. Fan Systems:
1. Measure fan system performance in accordance with AMCA 203.
2. In each system at least one airpath from fan to final branch duct
termination shall have dampers fully open. Achieve final air quantities
by adjusting fan speed.
3. Adjust Fan Air Volumes:
a. Adjust fan speeds and motor drives for required equipment air
volumes, with allowable variation of plus 10 percent minus
0 percent.
b. After final adjustments, do not operate motor above nameplate
amperage on any phase.
c. After final adjustments, do not operate fan above maximum rated
speed.
d. Perform airflow test readings under simulated or actual conditions
of full cooling, full heating, minimum outside air, full outside air
and exhaust, and full return air.
e. Provide and make drive and belt changes on motors or fans as
required to adjust equipment to specified conditions. Drives shall
be able to deliver 150 percent of motor horsepower. Provide

written notice to air handling unit manufacturer and Owner if
drive or belt changes were made.
4. Adjust outside air dampers, return air dampers, relief air dampers,
exhaust air dampers, and motorized louvers for maximum and minimum
air requirements.
5. Read and record static pressures at unit inlet and discharge, each filter
set, coils, dampers, plenums, and mixing dual-duct or adjustable-volume
boxes, on every supply, return, and exhaust fan for each test condition.
6. Read and record motor amperage on all phases for each test condition.
E. Air Terminal Devices:
1. Terminal Airflow Calibration: Calibrate and set the flow coefficients in
terminal controller units to ensure controller readings are identical to
measured values. This shall be a one-point calibration at maximum flow
conditions. Record coefficient values.
2. Test each terminal flow device at minimum and maximum flow
conditions. Ensure terminal controller is under control at time of each
test.
3. If airflow of terminal device is derived from two or more flow streams,
the individual air streams shall be measured and recorded independently
for each test.
4. In each terminal system at least one airpath from terminal to final duct
termination shall have dampers fully open.
5. Adjust air volumes on each terminal to quantity shown, with allowable
variation of plus 10 percent minus 5 percent.
F. Air Outlets and Inlets:
1. In each system at least one air path from fan to final branch duct
termination shall have dampers fully open.
2. Adjust air volumes on supply diffusers and grilles, and on return and
exhaust grilles, to the quantity shown, with allowable variation of plus
or minus 10 percent.
3. Adjust diffusers and grilles for proper deflection, throw, and coverage.
Eliminate drafts and noise where possible.
4. After final adjustments are made secure dampers to prevent movement
and mark final positions with permanent felt pen.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING WATER SIDE
A. Preparation: Prior to beginning the Work, perform the following activities:
1. Review Shop Drawings and installed system for adequate and
accessible balancing devices and test ports.

2. Recommend to Engineer devices needed to be added or replaced in
order to obtain proper water control.
3. Verify proper startup procedures have been completed on system.
4. Verify controls installation is complete and system is in stable operation
under automatic control.
5. Verify hydronic systems have been filled and are clean. Examine a
sample of strainers to ensure cleanliness.
6. Verify manual air vents have been bled and expansion tanks and
automatic air vents are functioning.
7. Verify control valves and coil connections are complete and properly
installed.
B. General:
1. When adjustments are made to a portion of a water system, reread other
portions of that same system to determine effects imposed by
adjustments. Readjust as necessary.
2. Correctly adjust water flow readings for mixtures other than pure water.
3. Throttling of butterfly and other nonbalancing device valves shall not be
allowed.
4. Lock and mark final positions of balancing devices with a centerpunch
or permanent felt pen.
C. Equipment Data:
1. Collect the following data and include in final report:
a. Type of pump.
b. Equipment identification number.
c. Equipment nameplate data (including manufacturer, model, size,
type, impeller size and serial number).
d. Pump capacity (flow rate and differential pressure).
e. Drive data.
f. Motor data (frame, hp, volts, FLA rpm, and service factor).
g. Starter and motor overload protection data.
h. Include changes made during course of system balancing.
D. Terminal Flow Devices:
1. Adjust water systems for required flow rates at each coil, connection,
and terminal device.
2. Provide proper flow through individual fin tube sections, evaporator and
condenser circuits, each boiler loop, each pump, and recirculation loops.
3. Measure and adjust flow through valves and valve bypass lines.
4. Record and mark final position of balancing cocks, valves, and
operators with a permanent felt pen or centerpunch.

5. Read and record differential pressures across coils, control valves,
chiller bundles, boilers, and heat exchanges.
E. Tolerances:
1. Heating Water Flow Rate: Plus 10 percent to minus 10 percent.
2. Chilled Water Flow Rate: Plus 10 percent to minus 0 percent.
3. Condenser Water Flow Rate: Plus 10 percent to minus 10 percent.
A. Performance Testing:
1. Electric Heating Coil Testing:
a. Adjust system as required to achieve full output from coil.
b. Read and record amperages and voltages for all phases.
2. Heating or Sensible Cooling Coil Testing:
a. Adjust system as required to achieve design flow conditions for
both air and water sides of coil.
b. Measure and record airflow rate, water flow rate, entering air
temperature, entering water temperature, leaving air temperature
and leaving water temperature.
3. Cooling or Dehumidification Coil Testing:
a. Adjust system as required to achieve design flow conditions for
both air and water sides of coil.
b. Measure and record airflow rate, water flow rate, entering air dry
bulb and wet bulb temperatures, entering water temperature,
leaving air dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures and leaving water
temperature.
B. Balancing Log Report Requirements:
1. Include narrative description for each system explaining TAB
methodology and assumptions used. Clearly identify test conditions for
tests performed. Include control setpoint.
2. Log and record operational information from every test for each system,
as necessary to accomplish services described.
3. Include equipment data for units tested.
4. Include reduced set of HVAC Drawings or system schematic diagrams
with each element uniquely identified and indexed to balance log.
5. Indicate recorded site values, and velocity and mass correction factors
used to provide equivalent standard air quantities.
6. Include separate section in log, if necessary, describing operating
difficulties in air or water systems that could not be eliminated by
specified procedures. Identify these problems by system and location
within building; include outline or summary of condition and its effect

on building, and describe corrective actions attempted and
recommended.
C. Quality Control Verification:
1. After adjustments have been completed and balance logs submitted,
balancing and testing agency shall be available to demonstrate the
following:
a. Air and water balancing procedures.
b. Perform spot tests on a maximum of 20 percent of total diffusers
and grilles, on two air handling fan devices per building, and on
10 percent of total water balance fittings, with measuring
equipment used in original tests, at random points selected by
Engineer.
c. Results of these spot tests shall agree with balance logs within
plus or minus 10 percent. Where this accuracy cannot be verified,
rebalance portions of system as requested by Engineer.
d. At completion of rebalance procedures, perform another spot test
if required to verify results.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 HVAC INSULATION
JANUARY 2014 23 07 00 - 1
SECTION 23 07 00
HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air-Conditioning
Engineers Inc. (ASHRAE): 90.1, Energy Standard for Buildings Except
Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
a. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate.
b. C547, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
c. C553, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal
Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.
d. C1071, Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining
Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material).
e. C1139, Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Thermal
Insulation for Sound Absorbing Blanket and Board for Military
Applications.
f. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
g. G21, Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic
Polymeric Materials to Fungi.
h. G22, Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Plastics to
Bacteria.
3. Association of the Nonwoven Fabric Industry (INDA). IST 80.6, Water
Resistance (Hydrostatic Pressure).
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems.
b. 255, Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics
of Building Materials.
c. 259, Standard Test Method for Potential Heat of Building
Materials.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Cold Air Ductwork: Designed to convey mechanically cooled air or return
ducts in such systems.

HVAC INSULATION PW/WBG/475883
23 07 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
B. Warm Air Ductwork: Designed to convey mechanically heated air or return
ducts in such systems.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals: Product description, list of materials and thickness for
each service or equipment scheduled, locations, and manufacturers
installation instructions.
B. Informational Submittals: Proof of compliance for test of products for fire
rating, corrosiveness, and compressive strength.
A. Materials furnished under this Specification shall be standard, cataloged
products, new and commercially available, suitable for service requiring high
performance and reliability with low maintenance, and free from all defects.
B. Provide materials by firms engaged in the manufacture of insulation products
of the types and characteristics specified herein, whose products have been in
use for not less than 5 years.
C. UL listing or satisfactory certified test report from an approved testing
laboratory is required to indicate fire hazard ratings for materials proposed for
use do not exceed those specified.
A. Manufacturers Stamp or Label:
1. Every package or standard container of insulation, jackets, cements,
adhesives and coatings delivered to Project Site for use must have
manufacturers stamp or label attached, giving name of manufacturer,
brand, and description of material.
2. Insulation packages and containers shall be marked asbestos-free.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Insulation exterior shall be cleanable, grease-resistant, nonflaking, and
nonpeeling.
B. Insulation shall conform to referenced publications and specified temperature
ranges and densities in pounds per cubic foot.

JANUARY 2014 23 07 00 - 3
C. Insulation for fittings, flanges, and valves shall be premolded, precut, or job-
fabricated insulation of same thickness and conductivity as used on adjacent
piping.
D. Fire Resistance:
1. Insulation, adhesives, vapor barrier materials and other accessories,
except as specified herein, shall be noncombustible.
2. Use no fugitive or corrosive treatments to impart flame resistance.
3. Flame proofing treatments subject to deterioration resulting from the
effects of moisture or high humidity are not acceptable.
4. Materials including facings, mastics, and adhesives, shall have fire
hazard rating not to exceed 25 for flame spread without evidence of
continued progressive combustion, and 50 for smoke, developed as per
tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) methods.
E. Materials exempt from fire-resistant rating:
1. Nylon anchors.
2. Treated wood inserts.
F. Materials exempt from fire-resistant rating when installed in outside locations,
buried, or encased in concrete:
1. Polyurethane insulation.
2. PVC casing.
3. Fiberglass-reinforced plastic casing.
2.02 PIPE INSULATION
A. Type P1Fiberglass (ASTM C547, Type 1 (Minus 20 Degrees F to
500 Degrees F):
1. Fiberglass, UL-rated, preformed, sectional rigid, minimum 4 pounds per
cubic foot (pcf) density, K factor 0.23 maximum at 75 degrees F mean,
with factory-applied all-service jacket (ASJ) composed of reinforced
kraft paper and aluminum foil laminate. Jacket shall have self-sealing
lap to facilitate closing longitudinal and end joints.
a. CertainTeed; Preformed Pipe Insulation.
b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok AP-T.
c. Owens/Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
d. Knauf; Crown Pipe Insulation.

23 07 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
B. Type P3Elastomeric (ASTM C534, Minus 40 Degrees F to 220 Degrees F):
1. Flexible, closed cell elastomeric.
2. Nominal 6 pcf density, K factor 0.27 maximum at 75 degrees F mean.
3. Water vapor transmission 0.1 perm-inch, or less.
a. Armacell; AP Armaflex.
b. Nomaco; K-Flex LS.
c. Rubatex; R-180-FS.
2.03 DUCT INSULATION
A. Type D1Blanket (ASTM C553, Type 1, Class B3):
1. Fiberglass, nominal 1 pcf density blanket, K factor 0.31 maximum at
75 degrees F mean, with factory-applied FSK (foil-scrim-kraft) vapor
barrier jacket, for temperatures to 250 degrees F.
a. CertainTeed; Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Microlite.
c. Owens/Corning Fiberglass; Soft R.
d. Knauf; Ductwrap.
B. Type D2Board: Not to be used on this Project. Use only galvanized steel
ductwork.
C. Type D3Liner (ASTM C1071, Type 1):
1. Fiberglass, nominal 1.5 pcf density liner, K factor 0.25 maximum at
75 degrees F mean, black composite coated surface exposed to airstream
to prevent erosion of glass fibers, for temperatures to 250 degrees F.
2. Liquid water repellency rating not less than 4 when tested in accordance
with INDA IST 80.6.
3. Potential heat value not exceeding 3,500 Btu/lb when tested in
accordance with NFPA 259 and meeting the classification of Limited
Combustible as defined by NFPA 90A.
4. Maximum rated velocity not less than 6,000 fpm when tested in
accordance with ASTM C1071.
5. Resistant to microbial growth using a no growth criteria when tested
in accordance with ASTM C1139, ASTM G21, and ASTM G22.
a. CertainTeed; Toughgard.
b. Johns Manville; Linacoustic (rectangular), Spinacoustic (Round).
c. Knauf; Acoustic Duct Liner.

JANUARY 2014 23 07 00 - 5
2.04 INSULATION FINISH SYSTEMS
A. Type F2Paint:
1. Acrylic latex paint, white, and suitable for outdoor use.
a. Armstrong; WB Armaflex finish.
b. Rubatex; 374, white finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION OF PIPING INSULATION
A. Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturers written
instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices.
B. Apply insulation over clean, finish painted, and dry surfaces.
C. Install insulation after piping system has been pressure tested and leaks
corrected.
D. Use insulating cements, lagging adhesives, and weatherproof mastics
recommended by insulation manufacturer.
E. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each
continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with a single cut
piece to complete the run. Do not use cut pieces of scraps abutting each other.
F. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure a complete and tight fit over
surfaces to be covered.
G. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to
prevent puncture or other damage. Seal open ends of insulation with mastic.
Sectionally seal all butt ends of chilled water and condensate drain piping
insulation at fittings with white vapor barrier coating.
H. Cover valves, flanges, fittings, and similar items in each piping system with
equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining
pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job-fabricated units. Finish cold
pipe fittings with white vapor barrier coating and hot piping with white vinyl
acrylic mastic, both reinforced with glass cloth.
I. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors, and
similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.
J. Install protective metal shields and foamglass inserts where pipe hangers bear
on outside of insulation.

23 07 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
K. Insulation on piping that is to be heat traced shall be installed after installation
of heat tape.
L. Insulate valve bodies, flanges, and pipe couplings.
M. Insulate and vapor seal hangers, supports, anchors, and other piping
appurtenances that are secured directly to cold surfaces.
N. Do not insulate flexible pipe couplings and expansion joints.
O. Do not allow insulation to cover nameplates or code inspection stamps.
P. Install removable insulation sections on devices that require access for
maintenance of equipment or removal, such as unions and strainer end plates.
Q. Connection to Existing Piping: Cut back existing insulation to remove portion
damaged by piping revisions. Install new insulation.
R. Cold Surfaces: Provide continuous vapor seal on insulation on cold surfaces
where vapor barrier jackets are used.
S. Placement:
1. Slip insulation on pipe or tubing before assembly, when practical, to
avoid longitudinal seams.
2. Insulate valves and fittings with sleeved or cut pieces of same material.
3. Seal and tape joints.
T. Insulation at Hangers and Supports: Install under piping, centered at each
hanger or support.
U. Vapor Barrier:
1. Provide continuous vapor barrier at joints between rigid insulation and
pipe insulation.
2. Install vapor barrier jackets with pipe hangers and supports outside
jacket.
3. Do not use staples and screws to secure vapor sealed system
components.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with the manufacturers
written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices.
B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces.

JANUARY 2014 23 07 00 - 7
C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulation. Butt insulation joints firmly
together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.
D. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation and protect it to
prevent puncture and other damage. Tape all punctures.
E. Seal longitudinal and circumferential joints with FSK tape, and finish with
fiberglass mesh fabric embedded in vapor barrier mastic.
F. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors, and
similar ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.
G. Except as otherwise indicated, omit insulation on ductwork where internal
insulation or sound absorbing linings have been installed.
H. Refer to Section 23 31 13, Metal Ducts and Accessories, for installation of
internal duct liner.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. Application Requirements: Insulate where external surface temperature of
equipment is below ambient temperature in the space, including surfaces that
have a recognized possibility for condensation.
B. Install equipment thermal insulation products in accordance with
manufacturers written instructions and in compliance with recognized
industry practices to ensure that insulation serves intended purpose.
C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clear and
dry surfaces. Redo poorly fitted joints. Do not use mastic or joint sealer as
filler for gaping joints and excessive voids resulting from poor workmanship.
D. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on equipment insulation and protect it to
prevent puncture and other damage.
E. Provide removable insulation sections to cover parts of equipment that must
be opened periodically for maintenance; include metal vessel covers,
fasteners, flanges, frames, and accessories.
F. Replace damaged insulation that cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including
units with vapor barrier damage and moisture-saturated units.
G. Avoid using scrap pieces of insulation where larger sheets will fit.

23 07 00 - 8 JANUARY 2014
3.04 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FINISH SYSTEMS
A. Use a continuous friction type joint to hold jacket in-place, providing positive
weatherproof seal over entire length of jacket.
B. Secure circumferential joints with preformed snap straps containing
weatherproof sealant.
C. On exterior piping, apply coating over insulation and vapor barrier to prevent
damage when aluminum fitting covers are installed.
D. Do not use screws or rivets to fasten the fitting covers.
E. Install removable prefabricated aluminum covers on exterior flanges and
unions.
F. Caulk and seal all exterior joints to make watertight.
3.05 PIPING INSULATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Heating Hot Water:
2. 1-1/2-inch thickness for pipe sizes up to 4 inches.
3. 2-inch thickness for pipe sizes over 4 inches.
B. Condensate Drain:
1. Type P3, elastomeric.
2. 1/2-inch thickness for pipe sizes up to 2-5/8 inches ID.
3. 3/4-inch thickness for pipe sizes over 2-5/8 inches ID.
3.06 DUCTWORK INSULATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Mechanically Cooled and Heated Supply and Return Air; (Concealed):
1. Type D1, blanket.
B. Mechanically Cooled and Heated Supply and Return Air, and Outside Air
(Exposed to View):
1. Type D2, board.
2. 1-1/2-inch thickness.

JANUARY 2014 23 07 00 - 9
C. Mechanically Cooled and Heated Supply and Return Air; (Within 30 Feet of
Air Handling Unit):
1. Type D3, liner.
D. Mechanically Cooled and Heated Supply and Return Air, and Outside Air
(run in attic with ceiling insulation): Increase specified insulation thickness by
1/2 inch.
E. Mechanically Cooled and Heated Supply Air, Return Air, and Outside Air
(outdoors):
1. Type D3, liner.
F. Outside Air Intake:
1. Type D1, blanket.
G. Mechanically Cooled and Heated Supply Air (within 10 feet of fan-powered
terminal unit discharge):
1. Type D3, liner.
H. Sheetmetal Plenums:
1. Type D3, liner.
I. Transfer Air:
1. Type D3, liner.
2. 1/2-inch thickness.
J. Air Distribution Devices: Refer to Section 23 37 00, Air Outlets and Inlets,
for requirements.
3.07 INSULATION FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Piping, Duct, and Equipment Insulation (Concealed Areas): Factory finish.
B. Ductwork Insulation (Exposed to View, Indoors): Factory finish.

23 07 00 - 10 JANUARY 2014
C. Equipment Insulation (Exposed to View, Indoors): Type F2, paint (for use
with Type P3, elastomeric).
D. Piping Insulation (Outdoors):
1. Type F2, paint (for use with Type P3, elastomeric).
2. Type F3, aluminum.
E. Ductwork Insulation (Outdoors): Type F4, ceramic.
F. Apply coating of insulating cement where needed to obtain smooth and
continuous appearance.
A. Test factory-applied materials assembled. Field-applied materials may be
tested individually.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 METAL DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
JANUARY 2014 23 31 13 - 1
SECTION 23 31 13
METAL DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA): 500, Test Methods
for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning
Engineers (ASHRAE) Handbook.
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): A13.1, Scheme
for the Identification of Piping Systems.
4. Association of the Nonwoven Fabrics Industry (INDA): IST 80.6, Water
Resistance (Hydrostatic Pressure).
a. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
b. A90/A90M, Standard Test Method for Weight (Mass) of Coating
on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings.
c. A480/A480M, Standard Specification for General Requirements
for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet and
Strip.
d. A568/A568M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon,
Structural, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-
Rolled, General Requirements for.
e. A653/A653M, Standard Specifications for Steel Sheet, Zinc-
f. A700, Standard Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading
Methods for Steel Products for Shipment.
g. A924/A924M, Specification for General Requirements for Sheet
Steel, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
h. A1008/A1008M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-
Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-
Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution
Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.
i. A1011/A1011M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and
Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High- Strength Low-Alloy,
High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-
High Strength.
j. C423, Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound
Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.

METAL DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES PW/WBG/475883
23 31 13 - 2 JANUARY 2014
k. C916, Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal
Insulation.
l. C1071, Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining
Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material).
m. C1139, Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Thermal
Insulation for Sound Absorbing Blanket and Board for Military
Applications.
n. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
o. E96/E96M, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission
of Materials.
6. National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA): General
Specifications for the Cleaning of Commercial Heating, Ventilation and
Air Conditioning Systems.
a. 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems.
b. 90B Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-
Conditioning Systems.
c. 96, Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of
Commercial Cooking Operations.
d. 255, Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics
of Building Materials.
e. 259, Standard Test Method for Potential Heat of Building
Materials.
f. 701, Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of
Textiles and Films.
(SMACNA):
a. Duct Construction Standards.
b. Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems.
c. Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards.
d. Fire, Smoke, and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC
Systems.
a. 181, Standard for Safety Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
b. 214, Standard for Tests for Flame-Propagation of Fabrics and
Films.
c. 555, Standard for Safety Fire Dampers.
d. 555S, Standard for Safety Smoke Dampers.

JANUARY 2014 23 31 13 - 3
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. The following is a list of abbreviations which may be used in this Section:
1. CFM: cubic feet per minute.
2. FPM: feet per minute.
3. PCF: pounds per cubic foot.
4. WC: water column.
B. Sealing Requirements: For the purpose of duct systems sealing requirements
specified in this Section, the following definitions apply:
1. Seams: Joining of two longitudinally (in direction of airflow) oriented
edges of duct surface material occurring between two joints. All other
duct surface connections made on perimeter are deemed to be joints.
2. Joints, duct surface connections including:
a. Girth joints.
b. Branch and subbranch intersections.
c. Duct collar tap-ins.
d. Fitting subsections.
e. Louver and air terminal connections to ducts.
f. Access door, and access panel frames and jambs.
g. Duct, plenum, and casing abutments to building structures.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Product Data:
a. Rectangular, Rigid Round, and Oval Ductwork:
1) Schedules of duct systems, materials, joints, sealing, gage
and reinforcement.
2) SMACNA Figure Numbers for each shop fabricated item.
3) Reinforcing details and spacing.
4) Seam and joint construction details.
5) Hangers and supports, including methods for building
attachment, vibration isolation, and duct attachment.
b. Ductwork Accessories:
1) Manufacturers product data including catalog sheets,
diagrams, standard schematic drawings, installation
instructions and details, details of materials, construction,
dimensions of individual components, and finishes,
including the following items:
a) Fittings and volume control damper installation (both
manual and automatic) details.
b) Duct liner.

23 31 13 - 4 JANUARY 2014
c) Sealing materials.
d) Dampers; include leakage, pressure drop, and
maximum back pressure data.
e) Duct-mounted access panels and doors.
f) Flexible ducts.
g) Sheet metal fasteners.
A. Industry Standards:
1. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, sheet metal ductwork shall be
constructed and installed in accordance with SMACNA Duct
Construction Standards relevant to ductwork system being provided.
These standards are herein referenced as the SMACNA Manual, unless
2. Comply with ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook recommendations,
except as otherwise indicated.
3. NFPA Compliance: NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
B. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork products
of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been
satisfactorily used in similar service for not less than 5 years.
C. Suppliers of duct and fitting components shall provide on request the
following information:
1. Laboratory performance data for duct, including leakage rate, bursting
strength, collapse strength, seam strength, and pressure loss.
2. Laboratory performance data for fittings, including zero-length dynamic
losses.
D. Installer shall be a firm with at least 3 years experience of successful
installation on ductwork systems similar to that required for this Project.
E. Changes or alterations to layout or configuration of duct system shall be:
1. Specifically approved in writing by Engineer.
2. Proposed layout shall provide original design results, without increasing
system total pressure.
A. Protect ductwork from dirt, water, and debris. During storage on Job Site,
keep ends of ductwork covered to prevent foreign objects and water from
entering ductwork.

JANUARY 2014 23 31 13 - 5
B. If fabricated sound-lined ductwork or ductboard gets wet during installation,
remove and dispose of ductwork from the Site.
C. Deliver sealant materials to Site in original unopened containers labeled with
manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use,
pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
D. Store and handle sealant materials in compliance with manufacturers
recommendations to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or
low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
E. Deliver and store stainless steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective
paper, maintained through fabrication and installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SCHEDULES
A. Ductwork Schedule: Refer to Article Supplement.
2.02 GENERAL
A. Specified components of this ductwork system, including facings, mastics,
and adhesives, shall have fire hazard rating not to exceed 25 for flame spread
without evidence of continued progressive combustion, and 50 for smoke
developed, as per test conducted in accordance with ASTM E84 and
NFPA 255 methods.
B. Internally Lined Ductwork: Duct sizes indicated for internally lined ducts are
the clear inside dimensions, and shall be increased in both dimensions by
twice the thickness of the liner.
C. Ductwork thinner than 26-gauge will not be allowed.
D. Ductwork Interior Surfaces:
1. Smooth.
2. No sheet metal parts, tabs, angles, or other items may project into air
ducts, unless otherwise specified.
3. Seams and joints shall be external.
4. For ductwork that is required to be reinforced, use only external
reinforcing.
2.03 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Construct metal duct systems from materials as indicated in Article
Supplement, Ductwork Schedule.

23 31 13 - 6 JANUARY 2014
B. Where no specific ductwork materials are indicated in Specifications or on
Drawings, galvanized steel sheet metal shall be basis of Contract.
C. Galvanized Steel Ductwork:
1. Comply with ASTM A653/A653M and ASTM A924/924M.
2. Product Name: Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized Steel).
3. Sheet Designation: CS Type B.
4. Applicable Specification: ASTM A653/A653M.
5. (Zinc) Coating Designation: G90.
6. Coating designation in accordance with Test Method A,
ASTM A90/A90M and ASTM A924/A924M.
7. Provide mill-phosphatized finish for ducts exposed to view and for
ducts scheduled to be painted.
8. Provide sheet metal packaged and marked as specified in ASTM A700.
2.04 DUCT SEALING MATERIALS
A. General: The term sealant used here is not limited to materials of adhesive or
mastic nature, but also includes tapes and combinations of open weave fabric
strips and mastics.
B. Adhesives, Cements, Sealant, and Installation Accessories: As recommended
by duct manufacturer for application.
2.05 DUCTWORK FASTENERS
A. General:
1. Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
2. Ductwork fasteners shall be same metal as duct being supported, unless
otherwise noted.
B. Self-Drilling Screws:
1. Galvanized Steel Ductwork System: Sheet metal screws shall be hex
washer head (HWH) TEKS self-drilling type, formed from heat-
treated carbon steel with zinc electroplated finish.
2.06 DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS
A. Construct duct systems to pressure classifications indicated in Article

JANUARY 2014 23 31 13 - 7
2.07 RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK
A. Fabricate rectangular ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, unless specified otherwise.
B. Crossbreaking or Cross Beading: Crossbreak or bead duct sides that are
19 inches and larger and are 20-gauge or less, with more than 10 square feet
of unbraced panel area, as indicated in SMACNA Manual, unless they are
lined or are externally insulated.
2.08 RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK FITTINGS
A. Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other duct
construction in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards, Metal and Flexible.
B. Elbows:
1. Fit square-turn elbows with vane side rails.
2. Shop fabricate double-blade turning vanes of same material as
ductwork.
3. Fabricate with equal inlet and outlet.
4. Rectangular radius elbows with inside radius of 3/4 of duct width in
direction of turn.
2.09 RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK INSULATION LINER
A. Location: Provide ductwork with internal insulation liner where indicated on
Drawings or in Article Supplement, Ductwork Schedule.
B. Material:
1. Fiberglass, nominal 1.5 pcf density liner, K factor 0.25 maximum at
75 degrees F mean.
2. Black composite coating on surface exposed to airstream to prevent
erosion of glass fibers, for temperatures to 250 degrees F.
3. Liquid water repellency rating not less than 4.0 when tested in
accordance with INDA IST 80.6.
4. Potential heat value not exceeding 3,500 Btu per hour per pound when
tested in accordance with NFPA 259 and meeting classification of
Limited Combustible as defined by NFPA 90A.
5. Maximum rated velocity not less than 6,000 fpm when tested in
accordance with ASTM C1071.
6. Resistant to microbial growth using a no growth criteria when tested
in accordance with ASTM C1139.

23 31 13 - 8 JANUARY 2014
a. CertainTeed; Toughgard.
b. JohnsManville; Linacoustic RC.
c. Knauf; Duct Liner M.
C. Thickness: Minimum 1 inch or as indicated on Drawings or Article
D. Liner Adhesive: In accordance with NFPA 90A and ASTM C916.
E. Mechanical Fasteners:
1. Same material as ductwork, suitable for adhesive attachment,
mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct.
2. Provide fasteners that do not damage liner when applied as
recommended by manufacturer, that do not cause leakage in duct, and
will indefinitely sustain 50-pound tensile dead load test perpendicular to
duct wall.
3. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without
projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream.
4. Adhesive for Attachment of Mechanical Fasteners: In accordance with
Fire Hazard Classification of duct liner system.
F. Liner Application:
1. Ductwork liner shall be applied at time of ductwork manufacture in an
approved sheet metal workshop.
2. Adhere single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent
coverage of adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of
insulation to achieve indicated thickness is prohibited.
3. Apply coat of adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not
receiving metal nosing.
4. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
5. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to
assure butted edge overlapping.
6. Longitudinal Joints:
a. Shall not occur except at corners of ducts, unless size of duct and
standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints
necessary.
b. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts exceeding
2,500 fpm air velocity.
7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at
intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely around perimeter, at
3 inches from transverse joints, and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches
longitudinally.

JANUARY 2014 23 31 13 - 9
8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing airstream with metal
nosing that are either channel or Z profile or are integrally formed
from duct wall at the following locations:
a. Fan discharge.
b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts.
9. Seal insulation edges.
10. Repair abrasions or tears with mastic.
2.10 RIGID ROUND DUCTWORK
A. Construct rigid round ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, unless specified otherwise.
B. Basic Round Diameter: As used in this Article, is inside diameter of size of
round duct.
C. Where space limitations prevent use of round duct or where shown on
Drawings, provide ductwork of flat oval construction hydraulically equivalent
to round ductwork.
D. Fabricate round ducts with spiral seam construction, except where diameters
exceed 72 inches. Fabricate ducts having diameters greater than 72 inches
with longitudinal butt-welded seams.
E. Snaplock seams may only be used for duct systems of pressure classification
less than 2-inch WC and downstream of VAV boxes.
2.11 RIGID ROUND DUCTWORK FITTINGS
A. Construct rigid round ductwork fittings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC
Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, unless otherwise specified.
B. 90-Degree Tees, Laterals, and Conical Tees: Fabricate to conform to
SMACNA manual with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal seam
straight duct.
C. Diverging Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps
with no excess material projecting from body onto branch tap entrance.
D. Elbows:
1. Fabricate in stamped (die-formed), pleated, or segmented (gored)
construction 1.5 times elbow diameter. Two piece segment elbows are
not allowed, except with turning vanes.
2. Segmented Elbows: Fabricate with welded construction.

23 31 13 - 10 JANUARY 2014
3. Round Elbows 8 Inches and Smaller:
a. Stamped elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows
for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees configuration.
b. Fabricate nonstandard bend angle configurations or nonstandard
sized (for example, 3-1/2 inches and 4-1/2 inches) elbows with
segmented construction.
4. Round Elbows 9 Inches Through 14 Inches:
a. Segmented or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees.
b. Fabricate nonstandard bend angle configurations or nonstandard
sized (for example, 9-1/2 inches and 10-1/2 inches) elbows with
segmented construction.
2.12 ROUND DUCTWORK BRANCH CONNECTIONS
A. Branch duct connections (taps) to round duct mains shall be made using
factory fabricated fittings.
2.13 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT
A. Fabricate in accordance with:
1. UL 181, Class 1.
2. NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
B. Construction:
1. Outer Jacket: Fire retardant reinforced metalized vapor barrier jacket
with reinforced cross-hatched scrim having a permeance of not greater
than 0.1 perm when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M,
Procedure A.
2. Inner Liner: Tri-laminate of aluminum foil, fiberglass, and aluminized
polyester.
3. Reinforcing: Galvanized steel wire helix, mechanically locked to and
encapsulated by inner liner fabric.
4. Insulation:
a. Factory insulated with fiberglass insulation.
b. R-value: 6.0 minimum at a mean temperature of 75 degrees F.
5. Internal Working Pressure: Rating shall be minimum 4-inch WC
positive and 5-inch WC negative, with bursting pressure of at least
2-1/2 times working pressure.
6. Air Velocity Rating: 4,000 fpm, minimum.
C. Environment: Suitable for continuous operation at temperature range of minus
20 degrees F to plus 200 degrees F.

JANUARY 2014 23 31 13 - 11
1. Flex-Master; Type 5M.
2. Thermaflex; Type M-KC.
3. Hart & Cooley; Type F216.
2.14 HIGH TEMPERATURE FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
A. Metal flexible ductwork for high heat applications.
B. Fully interlocked, stainless steel, 0.012-inch thickness.
C. Manufacturer and Product: Flexonics; RT-6.
2.15 DUCTWORK HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General:
1. Attachments, hangers, and supports for ductwork shall be in accordance
with SMACNA Manual referenced for type of duct system being
installed.
2. Duct hanging system shall be composed of three elements; upper
attachment to building, hanger itself, and lower attachment to duct.
3. Wire hangers are not acceptable.
4. Hanger Spacing:
a. Ducts Up to 60 inches in Largest Dimension: 10 feet, maximum.
b. Ducts Over 61 inches in Largest Dimension: 8 feet, maximum.
B. Construction Materials: Supporting devices including, but not limited to,
angles used for support and bracing, baseplates, rods, hangers, straps, screws,
bolts shall be as follows:
1. Galvanized Steel Ductwork:
a. Indoors: Carbon steel, zinc electroplated.
b. Outdoors: Carbon steel, hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.
C. Building Attachments:
1. Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural steel fasteners
appropriate for building materials.
2. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight aggregate
concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
3. Upper Attachment (Concrete):
a. Drive pin fastener and expansion nail anchor may be used for
ducts up to 18-inch maximum dimension.

23 31 13 - 12 JANUARY 2014
b. Threaded stud fastener may be used for ducts up to 36-inch
maximum dimension.
c. Concrete attachments shall be made of steel.
D. Duct Fasteners: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials and conforming to requirements of Article
Ductwork Fasteners.
E. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes conforming to ASTM A36/A36M,
hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.
2.16 DUCTWORK FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. General:
1. Factory fabricated metal-edged fabric flexible connectors for
commercial or industrial applications.
2. Sheet metal permanently secured to fabric with double fabric fold,
double metal crimp.
3. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B requirements.
4. Airtight and waterproof.
B. Materials:
1. Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives
complying with UL 181, Class 1.
2. Metal Edges: Construct from same material as ductwork, unless
otherwise noted.
3. Fabric:
a. Comply with NFPA 701 or UL 214 (except teflon coated).
b. Woven polyester or nylon for most applications.
c. Woven fiberglass for high temperature applications.
d. Coating: Vinyl.
C. Construction:
1. Fold and crimp metal edge strips onto fabric as illustrated in SMACNA
Manual.
2. Standard Metal Edged Connectors: Strip of fabric 3 inches wide
attached to two strips of 3-inch-wide sheet metal.
3. Wide Metal Edged Connectors: Strip of fabric 4 inches wide attached to
two strips of 4-inch-wide sheet metal.
4. Extra Wide Metal Edged Connectors: Strip of fabric 6 inches wide
attached to two strips of 6-inch-wide sheet metal.

JANUARY 2014 23 31 13 - 13
D. Manufacturers:
1. Ductmate; PROflex, Commercial.
2. Ventfabrics.
3. Duro-Dyne.
2.17 DUCT INSPECTION DOORS
A. General:
1. Insulated, gasketed, and at least 15 inches by 15 inches when duct
dimensions are large enough.
2. On ductwork where largest side dimension is less than 16 inches,
furnish inspection doors at least 8 inches by 8 inches.
3. Complete with necessary hardware and either Amerlock 10 or Ventlock
No. 100 latches, and Ventlock Series No. 100 hinges.
B. Round Spin-in Type Access Doors:
1. Size: 18-inch and 24-inch diameter will be acceptable in lieu of
comparable size square or rectangular access doors specified herein.
2. Complete with insulation, spin-in frame, inner door, attachment cable,
gaskets, three latches, and pull ring.
3. Manufacturer and Product: Flexmaster; Inspector Series.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Ventlok.
2. Duro-Dyne.
3. Flexmaster.
2.18 MANUAL DAMPERS
A. Butterfly Manual Dampers:
1. Fabricate from two gauges heavier than duct in which installed, of same
material as ductwork.
2. Align operating handle with damper blade.
3. Provide 2-inch standoff bracket for insulated duct systems.
4. Damper Manufacturers:
a. Ruskin.
b. American Warming and Ventilating.
5. Operator Manufacturers:
a. Accessible Ductwork: Ventlok; Type 620 or 635.
b. Accessible Insulated Ductwork: Ventlok; Type 639.
c. Concealed Ductwork: Ventlok; Type 677 with extended operating
rod and concealed regulator with plain cover.

23 31 13 - 14 JANUARY 2014
2.19 FIRE, FIRE/SMOKE, SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Duct Mounted Fire Dampers in Fire Walls with Rating of 2 Hours or Less:
1. NFPA 90A rated for 1-1/2-hour service.
2. Blades, frame, and mounting angles same material as ductwork.
3. Accordion style folded blades.
4. 165 degrees F fusible link.
5. Approved for installation with 2-hour fire rating.
6. Rated, manufactured, tested, and approved in accordance with UL 555.
7. Blades out of airstream when open (Style B).
8. Furnish with sleeved frame for duct connections.
9. Labeled for use in dynamic mode.
10. Furnish dynamic and horizontal mounted dampers with springs for
proper closure.
11. Corrosive Service Dampers: Type 316 stainless steel.
a. Nailor Industries.
b. Ruskin.
B. Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers:
1. General:
a. UL Listed according to UL 555S.
b. UL Listed for 1-1/2 hour rating according to UL 555.
c. As part of UL qualification, smoke dampers shall have
demonstrated capacity to operate (to open and close) under
HVAC system operating conditions, with pressures up to 4-inch
WC in closed position, and 2,000-fpm air velocity in open
position.
2. Fusible Link: Electronically resettable, 165 degrees F.
3. Bearings: Stainless steel sleeve turning in extruded hole in frame.
Galvanized bearings are not acceptable.
4. Controlled Closure: Heat-actuated release device to prevent duct and
HVAC component damage. Instantaneous damper closure is
unacceptable.
5. Leakage Class: In accordance with UL 555S Class I (4 cfm per square
foot at 1-inch WC).
6. Damper Actuator: UL 555S, suitable for 120V ac power supply.
7. Frame and Blades: 16-gauge galvanized steel.
8. Mounting Sleeve: Factory installed, 18-gauge galvanized steel, length to
suit wall or floor application.
9. Manufacturer and Product: Ruskin; FSD Series.

JANUARY 2014 23 31 13 - 15
2.20 EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION
A. Refer to Section 23 07 00, HVAC Insulation.
2.21 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
A. Auxiliary Drain Pans:
1. Dimensions: Minimum 6 inches larger in both dimensions than
equipment it is serving and 2 inches high, minimum.
2. Construction: 16-gauge stainless steel with welded joints. Pans shall be
watertight and have hemmed edges.
3. Drain Connection:
a. Minimum 1-inch IPS or as shown on Drawings.
b. Locate at lowest point of drain pan.
c. In lieu of drain connection, float switch may be installed. Float
switch shall shut down air handling equipment upon sensing
water.
2.22 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION
A. Painted Identification Materials:
1. Stencils: Standard metal stencils, prepared for required applications
with letter sizes generally comply with recommendations of
ASME A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than
1-1/4-inch high letters for ductwork and not less than 3/4-inch-high
letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions.
2. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as
otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray can form
and grade.
3. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated
or in accordance with ASME A13.1 for colors for systems not identified
herein.
B. Nomenclature: Include the following:
1. Direction of air flow.
2. Duct service (supply, return, exhaust).

23 31 13 - 16 JANUARY 2014
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Miscellaneous:
1. Install sheet metal ductwork and flexible ductwork in accordance with
SMACNA Manual, NFPA 90A, and NFPA 90B.
2. Install ductwork using manufacturers recommended adhesives, cement,
sealant, and insulation accessories.
3. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8-inch misalignment
tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth.
4. Interface Between Ductwork and Louvers: At locations where ductwork
is connected to louver for either intake or exhaust purposes, ductwork
shall be installed, sloped, and connected to louver so water entering
ductwork system positively drains back to and out of louver.
B. Ductwork Location:
1. Locate ductwork runs vertically and horizontally, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Avoid diagonal runs wherever possible.
3. As indicated by diagrams, details, and notations or, if not otherwise
indicated, run ductwork in shortest route that does not obstruct usable
space or block access for servicing building and equipment.
4. In general, install as close to bottom of structure as possible.
5. For ductwork concealed above ceiling, maximize clearance between
bottom of ductwork and top of ceiling construction.
6. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other
structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.
7. Ductwork that must transition and drop below piping or other ductwork
shall be transitioned back to bottom of structure immediately adjacent to
obstruction.
C. Penetrations:
1. Provide duct sleeves or prepared openings for duct mains, duct
branches, and ducts passing through roofs, walls and ceilings.
2. Clearances:
a. For uninsulated ducts, allow 1-inch clearance between duct and
sleeve, except at grilles, registers, and diffusers.
b. For insulated ducts, allow 1-inch clearance between insulation and
sleeve, except at grilles, registers, and diffusers.
3. Closure Collars:
a. Minimum 4 inches wide on each side of walls or floors where
sleeves or prepared openings are installed.

JANUARY 2014 23 31 13 - 17
b. Fit collars snugly around ducts and insulation.
c. Same gauge and material as duct.
d. Grind edges of collar smooth to preclude tearing or puncturing
insulation covering or vapor barrier.
e. Use fasteners with maximum 6-inch centers on collars.
4. Packing: Mineral fiber in spaces between sleeve or opening and duct or
duct insulation.
D. Concealment:
1. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork
from view by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction, or
above suspended ceiling.
2. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically
shown.
3. Limit clearance to 1 inch where furring is shown for enclosure or
concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any.
E. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Coordinate duct installation with installation of accessories, dampers,
coil frames, equipment, controls, and other associated work of ductwork
system.
2. Ductwork shall be configured, positioned, and installed to permit
installation of light fixtures as indicated on Drawings.
3. Coordinate ductwork layout with suspended ceiling, lighting and
sprinkler head layouts and similar finished work.
4. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run ductwork through transformer
vaults and other electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
3.02 RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK
A. General:
1. Where possible, install ductwork so seams and joints will not be cut for
installation of grilles, registers, or ceiling outlets.
2. If cutting of seams or joints is unavoidable, reinforce cut portion to
original strength.
B. Low Pressure Taps:
1. Use bell mouth or conical fittings with integral locking quadrant
damper. Spin-in fitting shall be sealed at duct tape with a gasket or
sealed with sealant as specified for medium pressure ductwork.
2. Determine location of spin-in after outlet location is determined.

23 31 13 - 18 JANUARY 2014
3. Fitting shall be securely attached to shaft to prevent damper from
rotating around shaft.
C. Fittings:
1. Use bell-mouth or conical tee fittings for round duct takeoffs from
rectangular mains.
2. Use 45-degree entry fittings conforming to SMACNA requirements for
rectangular takeoffs from rectangular or round mains.
3. Make offsets with maximum angle of 45 degrees.
4. Use fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and
shape, and connections.
D. Rectangular Ductwork Transverse Joints:
1. Install each run with a minimum of joints.
2. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with projections into duct at
connections kept to a minimum.
3. Mechanical Joint Option:
a. Construct transverse joints with Ductmate 25/35 duct connector
systems, Ductmate W.D.C.I. Heavy/Lite duct connector systems,
or Ductlok J/E duct connector system. Slip-on duct flange
connectors shall have integral sealant pocket with permanently
flexible sealant.
b. When using Ductmate W.D.C.I. Heavy/Lite system, construct
ductwork in accordance to the Ductmate W.D.C.I. Heavy J and
Light H Assembly Manual and Duct Construction Standards.
c. When using Ductlok J/E duct connector system, construct
ductwork in accordance with Ductloks Rectangular Duct
Construction Manual for Low, Medium, and High Pressure.
d. For longitudinal seams, use Pittsburgh lock seam sealed internally
with permanently elastic sealer such as Ductmate 5511M mastic.
e. Conform to SMACNA Class A sealing requirements.
3.03 RIGID ROUND OR OVAL DUCTWORK
A. General: Except where interrupted by fittings, install round ducts in lengths as
long as possible to minimize joints.
B. Rigid Round or Oval Ductwork Joints:
1. Rigid round ductwork joints shall be in accordance with SMACNA
HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, unless

JANUARY 2014 23 31 13 - 19
2. Single and Double Wall Supply and Return System Joints:
a. Less than 36 Inches: Slip coupling.
b. 36 Inches and Larger: Flanged connector, Van Stone, or welded
companion flange type.
3. Single and Double Wall Exhaust and Return System Joints:
a. Spiral Seam Duct: Welded flanged connector.
b. Longitudinal Seam Duct: Van Stone flange connector.
3.04 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT
A. Installation:
1. Where shown, between branch duct and ceiling diffusers and grilles.
2. Without sags, kinks, sharp offsets, or elbows.
3. As straight and taut as possible.
B. Connection: Connect flexible ductwork to round collars, air distribution
devices, and terminal units in accordance with flexible duct manufacturers
recommendations.
C. Length: Maximum length of low-pressure flexible duct (construction pressure
class up to 2-inch WC) to be 4 feet.
D. Flexible ductwork shall not pass through wall, floor, or fire resistant rated
assembly.
3.05 DUCTWORK HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Install ductwork with support systems in accordance with SMACNA Manual,
unless otherwise noted.
B. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers, and anchors of type,
which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling.
C. Install additional bracing on ductwork as required, to prevent ballooning or
breathing.
D. Support horizontal ducts within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of each
branch intersection.
E. Support vertical ducts at maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.
F. Upper attachments to structures shall have allowable load not exceeding 1/4
of failure (proof test) load, but are not limited to specific methods indicated.
G. In new construction, install concrete insert prior to placing concrete.

23 31 13 - 20 JANUARY 2014
3.06 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Flexible Collars and Connections:
1. Use between fans and ducts.
2. For round ducts, securely fasten flexible connections by zinc-coated
steel clinch-type draw bands.
3. For rectangular ducts, lock flexible connections to metal collars.
3.07 DAMPERS
A. General:
1. Inspection:
a. Inspect areas to receive dampers.
b. Notify Engineer of conditions that would adversely affect
installation or subsequent utilization of dampers.
c. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
are corrected.
2. Install dampers at locations indicated on Drawings and in accordance
with manufacturers installation instructions.
3. Install square and level.
4. Handle damper using sleeve or frame. Do not lift damper using blades
or jack-shaft.
5. Damper blades and hardware shall operate freely without obstruction.
6. Damper blades and hardware that bind within frame or obstructed by
adjacent construction will not be acceptable.
7. When installed, damper frames shall be gasketed or caulked to eliminate
leakage between duct and damper frames.
8. Head and sill shall have stops.
9. Suitable for installation in mounting arrangement shown.
10. Do not compress or stretch damper frame into duct or opening.
B. Manual Dampers:
1. Provide balancing dampers for grilles and diffusers. Install damper in
branch duct as near main as possible.
2. Add or remove balancing dampers as requested by air balancing firm for
necessary control of air.
C. Back Draft Dampers:
1. Install dampers square and free from racking with blades running
horizontally.
2. Install bracing for multiple section assemblies to support assembly
weight and to hold against system pressure. Install bracing as needed.

JANUARY 2014 23 31 13 - 21
D. Fire Dampers:
1. At ceiling grille and diffuser fire dampers, provide thermal blankets
where required by local authorities.
2. Install 1-1/2-hour rated, unless otherwise indicated, at locations shown
and in accordance with SMACNA Fire, Smoke, and Radiation Damper
Installation Guide for HVAC Systems.
3.08 ACCESS DOORS
A. Ductwork: Install access doors in ductwork, in accordance with
manufacturers instructions, at each:
1. Duct mounted fire damper.
2. Duct mounted smoke or ionization detector.
3. Electric duct heater.
4. Booster coil.
5. Humidifier.
6. Motorized damper.
7. Sail switch.
8. Turning vane.
9. Volume damper.
10. Automatic damper.
11. Temperature controller.
12. Coil, on both upstream and downstream side.
3.09 EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION
A. Refer to Section 22 07 00, Plumbing Piping Insulation.
3.10 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
A. Auxiliary Drain Pans:
1. Under equipment for which pan is shown on Drawings and under all
horizontal air handling units located above ceilings and piping located
in ceiling space directly above computer facility areas; furnish and
install auxiliary drain pans.
2. Route drain lines to nearest floor or hub drain independent of any other
drain.
3. Slope drain pans toward drain connection to promote drainage.
B. Louver and Grille Blank-Off Sections: Attach airtight to louver or grille and
install to allow for easy removal.

23 31 13 - 22 JANUARY 2014
C. Inspection Plates and Test Holes:
1. Where required in ductwork for balance measurements.
2. Test holes shall be airtight and noncorrosive with screw cap and gasket.
3. Extend cap through insulation.
3.11 DUCT SEALING
A. Seal duct seams and joints as follows: As indicated on Article Supplement,
Ductwork Schedule.
B. If no specific duct sealing requirements are specified, requirements of
SMACNA manual shall govern.
C. Seal externally insulated ducts prior to insulation installation.
D. Seal all audible leaks.
3.12 BALANCING OF AIR SYSTEMS
A. Perform air balancing in accordance with requirements of Section 23 05 93,
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.
A. Open ends of installed ductwork systems shall be covered to prevent dust,
foreign objects and water from entering ductwork.
B. Ductwork systems shall not be used for air conveyance until adequate air
filtration devices are installed in air handling equipment, to prevent ingress of
construction dust.
3.14 CLEANING
A. Ductwork shall be cleaned of rust, dust, and debris, both internally and
externally, before placing in operation.
B. Before installing air outlets, use air handler to blow dry air through entire
system at maximum attainable velocity. Provide temporary air filters for this
operation.
C. If duct systems are found to contain construction debris at time of
construction completion Contractor shall provide complete ductwork system
cleaning in accordance with NADCA Standards.

JANUARY 2014 23 31 13 - 23
3.15 SUPPLEMENT
Specification:
1. Ductwork Schedule.
END OF SECTION
SMACNA LEAKAGE TESTING CRITERIA
PRESSURE MATERIALS SEAL QUANTITY TEST LEAKAGE LEAKAGE
CLASS OF CLASS TO TEST PRESSURE CLASS FACTOR (F) APPLICABLE
SYSTEM SERVICE SECTION (IN W.G.) CONSTRUCTION PERCENT IN W.G. (CL) CFM/100 SF REMARKS
Existing
SUPPLY
AIR
AIR HANDLER TO
TERMINAL
4 GALVANIZED STEEL A
AHU-XXX
SUPPLY
AIR
TERMINAL TO
DIFFUSERS
AIR HANDLER
OUTDOOR
AIR
ALL -2 GALVANIZED STEEL A
VARIABLE AIR VOLUME
RETURN
AIR
ALL -2 GALVANIZED STEEL A
ERV-XXX
SUPPLY
AIR
FROM ERV TO HEAT
PUMPS
ENERGY RECOVERY
OUTDOOR
AIR
FROM OUTSIDE
LOUVER TO ERV
-2 GALVANIZED STEEL A
UNIT
EXHAUST
AIR
FROM ERV TO
OUTSIDE LOUVER
RETURN
AIR
FROM GRILLE TO
ERV
EF-XXX
EXHAUST
AIR
FROM EXHAUST
GRILLE TO FAN
EXHAUST FAN
EXHAUST
AIR
FROM FAN TO
OUTLET
SYSTEMS NOT
ADDRESSED ABOVE
ALL ALL 2 GALVANIZED STEEL A

SMACNA DUCT CONSTRUCTION CRITERIA
DUCTWORK SCHEDULE
PW/WBG/475883
JANUARY 2014
METAL DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
23 31 13 SUPPLEMENT - 1

PW/WBG/475883 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
JANUARY 2014 23 37 00 - 1
SECTION 23 37 00
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI): 880, Air
Terminals.
2. ASTM International (ASTM): C636/C636M, Standard Practice for
Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile
and Lay-in Panels.
3. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL).
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Noise Criteria; background sound rating method for indoor sound.
B. VAV: Variable air volume.
C. WC: Water column.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Manufacturers data and descriptive literature for products
specified.
b. Furnish the following information for each type of diffuser,
register, and grille furnished.
1) NC sound data.
2) Static pressure loss data.
3) Throw data.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES
A. Refer to Drawings.

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PW/WBG/475883
23 37 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
2.02 CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. General: The intent is to match the appearance of the existing grilles,
registers, and diffusers.
B. Premium Louvered Face Diffusers (CD1):
1. The intent is to match the existing diffusers for appearance. Based on
visual observation the existing diffusers match the appearance of the
Manufacturers and models selected or identified.
2. Construction: Refer to Equipment Schedule.
a. Material: Welded steel or aluminum.
b. Finish: Baked white enamel.
c. Neck: Round or square/rectangular.
3. Removable core section of louvers.
4. Continuous sponge rubber gasket at face flange.
5. Performance: Refer to Equipment Schedule.
a. Maximum Pressure Drop: 0.1 inches WC.
b. Sound: Maximum NC 30.
a. Krueger; Model SHR (steel).
b. Carnes; Type SK (steel) or SE (aluminum).
c. Titus; Model TDC or TDCA.
2.03 RETURN, EXHAUST AND TRANSFER GRILLES AND REGISTERS
A. High Capacity Return, Exhaust and Transfer Grilles and Registers (RG3,
RR3, EG3, ER3, TG3):
1. Construction: Refer to Equipment Schedule.
a. Square aluminum eggcrate construction.
b. Baked white enamel finished frame.
2. Extruded 1-1/4-inch flat frame with concealed fasteners.
3. Fixed louver grid with 1/2-inch by 1/2-inch by 1/2-inch louver spacing.
a. Krueger; Model EGC5.
b. Carnes; Type RAPAF.
c. Titus; 50F.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to architectural reflected ceiling plans for coordination of locations of
ceiling-mounted air outlets and inlets with ceiling grids and lighting. Where
locations of devices shown on mechanical drawings do not agree with

PW/WBG/475883 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
JANUARY 2014 23 37 00 - 3
locations that are shown on architectural reflected ceiling plans, reflected
ceiling plans shall take precedence. If air outlets or inlets are shown on
mechanical drawings, but are not shown on architectural reflected ceiling
plans, devices shall be located as near as possible to locations shown on
mechanical drawings when coordinating with ceiling.
B. Install diffusers, grilles, and registers tight on their respective mounting
surfaces, level, plumb, and true with room dimensions.
C. Provide appropriate frame to adapt to mounting surface. Provide a 24-inch by
24-inch lay-in ceiling module for diffusers, registers, and grilles in lay-in
ceilings.
D. Support air inlets and outlets where installed in metal suspension systems for
acoustical tile and lay-in panel ceilings.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 AIR-CONDITIONING
JANUARY 2014 EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 81 00
AIR-CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI): 210/240,
Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment.
2. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA): Bulletin 300,
Setup No. 1.
3. American Gas Association (AGA).
4. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning
Engineers (ASHRAE):
a. 52.2, Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning
Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size.
b. 90.1, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings.
5. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): Section IX,
Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
a. B117, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog)
Apparatus.
b. D2370, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Organic
Coatings.
c. D4060, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic
Coatings by the Taber Abraser.
d. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
e. G154, Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light
Apparatus for UV Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials.
7. Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
8. ETL Testing Laboratories (ETL).
9. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):
a. 9001, Quality Management Systems - Requirements.
b. 13256-1, Water-Source Heat PumpsTesting and Rating for
PerformancePart 1: Water-to-Air and Brine-to-Air Heat Pumps.
10. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
12. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 94-5V, Standard for Tests for
Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances.

AIR-CONDITIONING PW/WBG/475883
EQUIPMENT JANUARY 2014
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. The following is a list of abbreviations which may be used in this Section:
1. AC: Air Conditioning.
2. COP: Coefficient of Performance.
3. EER: Energy Efficiency Ratio.
4. DX: Direct Expansion.
5. HP: Heat Pump.
6. IR: Infra Red.
7. LED: Light Emitting Diode.
8. PSC: Permanent Split Capacitor.
9. PTAC: Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner.
10. SPST: Single Pole, Single Throw.
11. TXV: Thermostatic Expansion Valve.
12. UV: Ultraviolet.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings.
2. Complete specifications, descriptive drawings, catalog cuts, and
descriptive literature which shall include make, model, dimensions,
weight of equipment, and electrical schematics for all products
specified.
3. Manufacturers standard finish color selection for enclosure finishes.
4. Complete performance data that will indicate full compliance with the
specifications:
a. Include fan sound power level data (ref. 10 to 12 watts) at design
operating point, based on AMCA Bulletin 300, Setup No. 1.
b. Include heating and cooling performance data at design operating
conditions.
5. Air Pressurization Unit: Documentation that media filter modules are
UL rated Class 1.
1. Detailed information on structural, mechanical, electrical, or other
modifications necessary to adapt arrangement or details shown to
equipment furnished.
2. Sample copy of guarantee.
3. Test reports.
a. Include wiring and control diagrams for equipment.
b. Include as-built version of equipment schedules.

A. Heating and Cooling Equipment: Minimum operating efficiencies, defined as
COP and EER, as specified in ASHRAE 90.1.
B. Unit shall be rated (when matched with appropriate outdoor unit) per
AHRI 210/240.
C. Units shall be certified by UL and CSA, and shall be UL or ETL listed and
labeled.
D. Cooling performance rated in accordance with AHRI testing procedures.
A. Storage: Products shall be carefully stored in a manner that will prevent
damage and in an area that is protected from the elements.
B. Protection of Equipment:
1. Box, crate, or otherwise protect from damage and moisture during
shipment, handling, and storage.
2. Protect from exposure to corrosive fumes and keep thoroughly dry at all
times.
3. Store motors, drives, electrical equipment, and other equipment with
anti-friction or sleeve bearings in weathertight and heated storage
facilities prior to installation.
4. For extended storage periods, plastic equipment wrappers shall not be
used to prevent accumulation of condensate in gears and bearings.
A. Refrigerant Compressors: Furnish manufacturers extended guarantee or
warranty, with Owner named as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee.
Special guarantee shall provide for correction, or at the option of the Owner,
removal and replacement of compressors specified in this Section found
defective during a period of 5 years after the date of Substantial Completion.
Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective
Work as specified in the General Conditions.

A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following materials:
Item Quantity
Fan Belts One complete set for each
belt-driven fan.
Filters Two complete set per unit.
B. Delivery: In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product
Requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Specified components of this Section, including insulation, facings, mastics,
and adhesives, shall have fire hazard rating not to exceed 25 for flame spread
without evidence of continued progressive combustion, and 50 for smoke
developed, as per test conducted in accordance with ASTM E84 and
NFPA 255 methods.
2.02 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES
A. Refer to Drawings.
2.03 ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT
A. General:
1. The unit shall be a packaged static plate energy recovery ventilator.
RenewAire shall be the basis of design.
2. The energy recovery core shall be certified by ARI under its
Standard 1060 for Energy Recovery Ventilators. Products not currently
ARI Certified will not be accepted.
3. Unit shall be listed under UL 1812, Standard for Ducted Air to Air Heat
Exchangers.
4. The energy recovery core shall meet NFPA 90A and 90B requirements
for flame spread, not to exceed 25, and smoke generation, not to
exceed 50, through an ongoing testing and verification program using
UL Standard 723.
5. The energy recovery core shall be warranted to be free of manufacturing
defects and to retain its functional characteristics, under circumstances
of normal use, for a period of 10 years from the date of purchase.
Balance of Unit shall be warranted to be free of manufacturing defects

and to retain its functional characteristics, under circumstances of
normal use, for a period of 2 years from the date of purchase.
6. The energy recovery core shall be capable of transferring both sensible
and latent energy between air streams. Latent energy transfer shall be
accomplished through molecular transport by hydroscopic resin.
7. The energy recovery core shall perform without the occurrence of
condensation or frosting under normal operating conditions (defined as
outside temperatures above minus 10 degrees F and inside relative
humidity below 40 percent). Occasional extreme conditions shall not
affect the usual function or performance of the energy recovery core.
8. Exhaust and fresh air streams shall at all times travel in separate
passages, and air streams shall not mix. The exhaust air transfer ratio
(EATR) shall be ARI-1060 certified as 0 percent at balanced pressure.
9. Air flow through the energy recovery core shall be laminar, avoiding
deposition of particulates on the interior of the exchange plate material.
10. Provide 24-volt unit mounted digital time clock controller. Unit shall be
capable of up to 8 ON/OFF cycles per day. Unit shall incorporate
battery back-up.
B. Construction:
1. The energy recovery core shall be of static plate, cross-flow
construction, with no moving parts.
2. The unit shall be capable of operating in winter and summer conditions
without generating condensate. No condensate pan or drain shall be
required.
3. The unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized, 20-gauge steel, with
lapped corners.
4. Flange components shall be provided suitable for connection of
ductwork.
5. The exhaust and fresh air streams shall both be protected by MERV 8
rated, 2-inch pleated, disposable filters positioned before the ERV core.
6. The unit shall have single-point power connection.
7. Motors shall comply with the U.S. Energy Policy Act (EPACT)
minimum efficiency standards. Motors shall have internal thermal
protection or be provided with appropriately sized motor starters with
over current protection.
1. Renewaire; HE3X.
2. Mitsubishi; Lossnay.

2.04 SINGLE DUCT VARIABLE VOLUME AIR TERMINAL UNIT
A. General:
1. Single duct terminal control unit with pressure independent automatic
damper operation.
2. Cabinet Materials: 22-gauge, zinc-coated steel with factory applied
enamel paint finish, or galvanized sheet steel.
3. Insulate internal surfaces acoustically and thermally with 1/2-inch-thick,
2-pound density, matte-faced insulation.
4. Automatic Dampers: Factory install and test.
5. Access panel in bottom panel.
B. Controls:
1. Adjustable for a maximum reduction of air volume to 30 percent of the
design air volume.
2. Furnish with a factory installed damper operators and a 110- to 24-volt
transformer.
3. The unit shall be capable of modulating, in response to the space
thermostat.
1. Trane; Model VC.
2. Carnes; Model AV.
3. Titus; Model ESV.
2.05 WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMP
A. General:
1. Factory assembled, packaged indoor water-source heat pump unit
suitable for installation indoors above lay in ceilings.
2. Contained within unit enclosure shall be factory wiring, piping,
controls, compressor, and holding charge of R-410 refrigerant.
3. Factory run-tested in both heating and cooling modes with full water
flow.
4. Unit capable of starting with 40 degrees F entering air temperature and
40 degrees F entering water temperature in heating mode with AHRI
water and airflow rates.
5. Unit Configuration: Packaged, configuration as indicated in Equipment
Schedules.

B. Unit Cabinet:
1. Fabricated from G-90 galvanized steel, phosphatized, and coated with
baked enamel finish.
2. Insulated sheet metal panel separating fan compartment from
compressor compartment.
3. Removable access panels providing full access to compressor, and
control and fan sections.
4. Separate openings and knockouts for entrance of line voltage,
condensate piping, and low voltage control wiring.
5. Water connections and electrical knockouts located so as to not interfere
with serviceability of unit.
6. Interior insulated with 1-inch thick, 1.5-pound per cubic foot density,
coated glass fiber insulation, attached with adhesive material.
7. Fiberglass insulation exposed edges tucked under flanges to prevent
introduction of glass fibers into airstream.
8. Provide duct flanges for connection of supply and return ductwork, and
filter racks.
9. Factory-mounted, heavy steel hanger brackets secured to top of unit
complete with rubber isolators to suspend unit from ceiling.
C. Evaporator Fan:
1. Double-inlet, double-width, forward-curved fan.
2. Direct-drive or belt-drive as standard with unit.
3. Motor:
a. Totally enclosed and permanently lubricated, with integral
overload protection.
b. Three speed.
D. Compressor:
1. Fully hermetic reciprocating or scroll type.
2. Equipped with oil system, operating oil charge, and motor.
3. Internal overload and over-temperature protection.
4. Motor shall be NEMA rated, Class F, suitable for operation in a
refrigerant atmosphere.
5. Scroll compressors shall have high discharge gas temperature
protection.
6. Compressor assembly shall be installed on rubber vibration isolators.
E. Refrigerant to Air Coil:
1. Constructed of aluminum, fins mechanically bonded to internally
enhanced seamless copper tubes, with galvanized steel tube sheets.

2. Condensate Drain Pan: Plastic, extending full length of air coil,
insulated, with primary and secondary drain fittings, minimum 3/4-inch
copper drain tube, extending outside unit casing.
F. Water to Refrigerant Coil:
1. Co-axial tube-within-a-tube or shell-and-tube water-cooled type.
2. Supply and return water connections with female NPT copper fittings
located outside cabinet for connection to flexible hoses.
G. Refrigeration Components:
1. Brass liquid line and suction line service valves with service gauge port
connections.
2. Accumulator.
H. Controls:
1. Factory selected, assembled, and tested.
2. Refrigerant Metering:
a. Reverse flow bypass metering device with internal check valves.
b. Heating mode metering device.
3. Control box within unit cabinet containing 24-volt transformer, 24-volt
activated two-pole or three-pole compressor contactor, low voltage
terminal junction block.
4. Time delay restart to prevent compressor reverse rotation on single-
phase scroll compressors.
5. Automatic restart on power failure.
6. Safety lockout if any outdoor unit safety is open.
7. Start capacitor and relay (single-phase units without scroll
compressors).
8. Safeties:
a. Reversing valve shall be energized in cooling mode, with fail-
safe to heating mode.
b. Circuit-breaker protected control circuit.
c. High condensing temperature protection.
d. Compressor motor current and temperature overload protection.
e. Low voltage protection.
f. High voltage protection.
g. Unit shutdown on high or low refrigerant pressures. Low-pressure
switch shall not be monitored for first 90 seconds after
compressor start command to prevent nuisance safety trips.
h. Unit shutdown on low water temperature.
i. Air coil freeze protection (check filter switch).
j. Condensate overflow shutdown.

k. Automatic intelligent reset. Unit shall automatically reset
5 minutes after trip if fault has cleared. Should fault reoccur three
times sequentially then permanent lockout will occur.
l. Selectable 24-volt or pilot duty dry contact alarm output.
m. 24-volt output to cycle a motorized water valve with compressor
contactor. No valve to be installed at this time.
I. Filters:
1. Rack mounted.
2. One-inch thick strainer type with pleated nonwoven fabric media.
3. Rated at 30 percent efficiency and 90 percent average arrestance in
accordance with ASHRAE 52.2.
4. Manufacturer and Product: Farr; 30/30.
J. Factory Wall-Mount Thermostat:
1. Provide a Factory Wall-Mount Thermostat: 7-day automatic changeover
programmable thermostat with ON-AUTO fan switch and AUTO-OFF
system switch.
K. Accessories:
1. Condenser Specialties:
a. Combination shut-off/balancing ball valves on supply and return
water connections.
b. Flexible Piping Connectors:
1) Minimum 24-inch long stainless steel braided supply and
return water hoses with male NPT brass fittings and a
swivel at one end.
2) Hoses rated at minimum 300-psig working pressure.
3) Hose shall be plenum rated.
L. Manufacturers:
1. Florida Heat Pump.
2. Trane.
3. Water Furnace.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Mechanical contractor shall be responsible for running all control wiring and
associated conduit to make the systems complete system complete and
operational. Mechanical contractor shall coordinate with the Owner the tie-in
points for the building control system.

B. Mechanical contractor shall coordinate the temperature setpoints of all
equipment with the Owner and shall coordinate the start times for all
equipment.
C. Set and install equipment so that equipment is level and properly supported.
D. Make certain that piping connections to equipment do not cause any strain on
equipment.
E. Make certain that vibration isolation has been installed per manufacturers
instructions and isolation devices are performing satisfactorily.
F. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers recommendations, and
these Specifications.
G. Install all safety devices as recommended by manufacturer and/or required by
code in these Specifications.
H. Initial equipment startup shall be made by an authorized representative of the
unit manufacturer.
I. Air-cooled outdoor unit shall not be started without complete prestart
checkout of entire refrigerant piping system and charging of system with
refrigerant as recommended by equipment manufacturer.
J. Factory Checkout:
1. This service engineer shall forward a report in three copies to Engineer
when the unit is in safe and proper operating condition. This report shall
contain all pressure and control settings, meg readings, voltage readings
per phase during START and RUN, suction temperature and pressure,
liquid temperature and pressure, and shall list minor discrepancies to be
corrected which do not affect safe and reliable operation.
2. One additional copy of report shall be left in unit control panel. One
copy of bound installation operation and maintenance service, and parts
brochures, including applicable serial numbers, full unit description,
parts ordering sources, shall be placed in the unit control panel at the
time of starting.
K. Locate units to provide access for filter changing; motor, drive, and bearing
servicing; and fan shaft and coil removal.
L. Seal outside air intake watertight to roof curb.
M. Isolate sheet metal duct connections from all portions of the unit not internally
spring-isolated from fans, or other vibrating or rotating equipment.

N. Inspect internal casing insulation, seal all exposed edges, and butt joints with
mastic to ensure insulation will not be loosened during operation.
3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Air System Balancing: As specified in Section 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting,
and Balancing for HVAC.
B. Lubricate unsealed bearings prior to startup.
C. Do not operate units until filters are installed. If operated without filters,
completely clean ductwork, coils, and interior of units.
3.03 FILTERS
A. Install a complete set of filters in each unit before operating, and leave in
place during startup and testing to keep the equipment and ductwork clean.
B. Install a complete set of filters at the time of final cleaning.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
JANUARY 2014 26 05 02 - 1
SECTION 26 05 02
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Requirements specified within this Section apply to Division 26, Electrical.
Work specified herein shall be performed as if specified in the individual
sections.
1.02 REFERENCES
1. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): National
Electrical Installation Standards.
2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
b. Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels.
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC).
1.03 DATA DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY
A. Interior telecommunications central and station equipment (telephone
instruments, telephone switches, data switches, data cabling, and hubs,
servers, software, etc.) is work provided outside this Contract. Under this
Contract provide raceways, outlet and junction boxes, cover plates, pull wires,
as indicated.
1.04 SECURITY/ACCESS CONTROL DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY
A. Security and access control equipment (cabling, card readers, emergency exit
buttons, PIRs, Request to Exit devices, panic buttons, door contacts, CCTV
cameras, etc.) is work provided outside this Contract. Under this Contract
provide raceways, outlet and junction boxes, cover plates, pull wires, as
indicated.
A. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by Authority
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be labeled or listed
by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable
to the AHJ, in order to provide a basis for approval under the NEC.

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PW/WBG/475883
26 05 02 - 2 JANUARY 2014
B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards
published by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. shall conform to those standards
and shall have an applied UL listing mark or label.
A. The following areas are classified nonhazardous and wet. Use materials and
methods required for such areas.
1. Outdoor abovegrade areas not covered above.
2. Access ramps to belowgrade parking structures.
B. The following areas are classified as indoor and dry:
1. City Hall interior.
2. Electrical rooms.
3. Parking areas.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Where two or more units of the same class of material or equipment are
required, provide products of a single manufacturer. Component parts of
materials or equipment need not be products of the same manufacturer.
B. Material and equipment installed in heated and ventilated areas shall be
capable of continuous operation at their specified ratings within an ambient
temperature range of 40 degrees F to 104 degrees F.
C. Materials and equipment installed outdoors shall be capable of continuous
operation at their specified rating within the ambient temperature range stated
in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.
2.02 EQUIPMENT FINISH
A. Manufacturers standard finish color, except where specific color is indicated.
If manufacturer has no standard color, finish equipment with light gray color
finish as approved by Owner.
2.03 NAMEPLATES
A. Material: Laminated plastic.
B. Attachment Screws: Stainless steel.
C. Color: Black, engraved to a white core.

JANUARY 2014 26 05 02 - 3
D. Letter Height:
1. Pushbuttons/Selector Switches or Similarly-sized Equipment: 1/8 inch.
2. Other electrical equipment: 1/4 inch.
2.04 SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Sign size, lettering, and color shall be in accordance with NEMA Z535.4.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Electrical Drawings show general locations of equipment, devices, and
raceway, unless specifically dimensioned. Contractor shall be responsible for
actual location of equipment and devices and for proper routing and support
of raceways, subject to approval of Engineer.
B. Coordinate in advance of all Work, system requirements of Owners data
cabling and security/access control contractors. Provide all raceway and
backboxes as required for these systems complete, per Contractor
requirements.
C. Check approximate locations of light fixtures, switches, electrical outlets,
equipment, and other electrical system components shown on Drawings for
conflicts with openings, structural members, and components of other systems
and equipment having fixed locations. In the event of conflicts, notify
Engineer in writing.
D. Install work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation, unless
E. Keep openings in boxes and equipment closed during construction.
F. Lay out work carefully in advance. Do not cut or notch any structural member
or building surface without specific approval of Engineer. Carefully perform
cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings,
paving, or other surfaces required for the installation, support, or anchorage of
conduit, raceways, or other electrical materials and equipment. Following
such work, restore surfaces to original condition.
3.02 ANCHORING AND MOUNTING
A. Equipment anchoring and mounting shall be in accordance with
manufacturers requirements for seismic zone criteria given in
Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PW/WBG/475883
26 05 02 - 4 JANUARY 2014
3.03 NAMEPLATES, SIGNS, AND LABELS
A. Equipment Nameplates:
1. Provide a nameplate to label electrical equipment including existing
panelboards that have been altered or reused, disconnect switches, and
control stations.
2. Disconnect switch, starter, and control station nameplates shall include
name and number of equipment powered or controlled by that device.
3. Panelboard nameplates shall include equipment designation, service
voltage, and phases.
3.04 LOAD BALANCE
A. Drawings and Specifications indicate circuiting to electrical loads and
distribution equipment.
B. Balance electrical load between phases as nearly as possible on panelboards.
C. When loads must be reconnected to different circuits to balance phase loads,
maintain accurate record of changes made, and provide circuit directory that
lists final circuit arrangement.
3.05 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Cleaning: Throughout the Work, clean interior and exterior of devices and
equipment by removing debris and vacuuming.
B. Touchup Paint:
1. Touchup scratches, scrapes and chips on exterior and interior surfaces
of devices and equipment with finish matching type, color, and
consistency and type of surface of original finish.
2. If extensive damage is done to equipment paint surfaces, refinish entire
equipment in a manner that provides a finish equal to or better than
factory finish, that meets requirements of Specification, and is
acceptable to Engineer.
3.06 PROTECTION FOLLOWING INSTALLATION
A. Protect materials and equipment from corrosion, physical damage, and effects
of moisture on insulation and contact surfaces.

JANUARY 2014 26 05 02 - 5
B. When equipment intended for indoor installation is installed at Contractors
convenience in areas where subject to dampness, moisture, dirt or other
adverse atmosphere until completion of construction, ensure adequate
protection from these atmospheres is provided and acceptable to Engineer.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
JANUARY 2014 AND METHODS
SECTION 26 05 04
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
b. A1011/A1011M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, and
Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low Alloy
and High-Strength Low Alloy Formability.
c. E814, Method of Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts
Maximum).
b. AB 1, Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and
Circuit-Breaker Enclosures.
c. ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors,
and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts.
d. ICS 5, Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot
Devices.
e. KS 1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Switches
(600 Volts Maximum).
Code (NEC).
a. 98, Standard for Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.
b. 248, Standard for Low Voltage Fuses.
c. 486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with
Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors.
d. 489, Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case
Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures.
e. 508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.
f. 943, Standard for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.
g. 1479, Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Provide manufacturers data for the following:
a. Control devices.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS PW/WBG/475883
AND METHODS JANUARY 2014
b. Circuit breakers.
c. Fused switches.
d. Nonfused switches.
e. Timers.
f. Fuses.
g. Magnetic contactors.
h. Firestopping.
i. Enclosures: Include enclosure data for products having
enclosures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER THERMAL MAGNETIC, LOW
VOLTAGE
A. General:
1. Type: Molded case.
2. Trip Ratings: 15 to 800 amps.
3. Voltage Ratings: 120, 240, 277, 480, and 600V ac.
4. Suitable for mounting and operating in any position.
5. NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.
B. Operating Mechanism:
1. Overcenter, trip-free, toggle type handle.
2. Quick-make, quick-break action.
3. Locking provisions for padlocking breaker in open position.
4. ON/OFF and TRIPPED indicating positions of operating handle.
5. Operating handle to assume a center position when tripped.
C. Trip Mechanism:
1. Individual permanent thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole.
2. Variable magnetic trip elements with a single continuous adjustment 3X
to 10X for frames greater than 100 amps.
3. Two and three pole, common trip.
4. Automatically opens all poles when overcurrent occurs on one pole.
5. Test button on cover.
6. Calibrated for 40 degrees C ambient, unless shown otherwise.
7. Do not provide single-pole circuit breakers with handle ties where
multi-pole circuit breakers are shown.
D. Short Circuit Interrupting Ratings: Equal to rating of existing equipment.

E. Connections:
1. Supply (line side) at either end.
2. Mechanical wire lugs, except crimp compression lugs where shown.
3. Lugs removable/replaceable for breaker frames greater than
100 amperes.
4. Suitable for 75 degrees C rated conductors without derating breaker or
conductor ampacity.
5. Use bolted bus connections, except where bolt-on is not compatible with
existing breaker provisions.
F. Enclosures for Independent Mounting:
1. See Article Enclosures.
2. Service Entrance Use: Breakers in required enclosure and required
accessories shall be UL 489 listed.
3. Interlock: Enclosure and switch shall interlock to prevent opening cover
with switch in the ON position. Provide bypass feature for use by
qualified personnel.
2.02 FUSED SWITCH, INDIVIDUAL, LOW VOLTAGE
A. UL 98 listed for use and location of installation.
B. NEMA KS 1.
C. Short Circuit Rating: 200,000 amps RMS symmetrical with Class R, Class J,
or Class L fuses installed.
D. Quick-make, quick-break, motor rated, load-break, heavy-duty (HD) type with
external markings clearly indicating ON/OFF positions.
E. Connections:
1. Mechanical lugs, except crimp compression lugs where shown.
2. Lugs removable/replaceable.
3. Suitable for 75 degrees C rated conductors at NEC 75 degrees C
ampacity.
F. Fuse Provisions:
1. 30-amp to 600-amp rated shall incorporate rejection feature to reject all
fuses except Class R.
2. 601-amp rated and greater shall accept Class L fuses, unless otherwise
shown.
G. Enclosures: See Article Enclosures.

H. Interlock: Enclosure and switch to prevent opening cover with switch in ON
position. Provide bypass feature for use by qualified personnel.
2.03 NONFUSED SWITCH, INDIVIDUAL, LOW VOLTAGE
A. NEMA KS 1.
B. Quick-make, quick-break, motor rated, load-break, heavy-duty (HD) type with
external markings clearly indicating ON/OFF positions.
C. Lugs: Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at NEC 75 degrees C ampacity.
D. Enclosures: See Article Enclosures.
E. Interlock: Enclosure and switch to prevent opening cover with switch in ON
position. Provide bypass feature for use by qualified personnel.
2.04 FUSE, 250-VOLT AND 600-VOLT
A. Power Distribution, General:
1. Current-limiting, with 200,000 ampere rms interrupting rating.
2. Provide to fit mountings specified with switches.
3. UL 248.
B. Power Distribution, Ampere Ratings 1 Amp to 600 Amps:
1. Class: RK-1.
2. Type: Dual element, with time delay.
a. Bussmann; Types LPS-RK (600 volts) and LPN-RK (250 volts).
b. Littelfuse; Types LLS-RK (600 volts) and LLN-RK (250 volts).
C. Ferrule:
1. 600V or less, rated for applied voltage, small dimension.
2. Ampere Ratings: 1/10 amp to 30 amps.
3. Dual-element time-delay, time-delay, or nontime-delay as required.
4. Provide with blocks or holders as indicated and suitable for location and
use.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Bussmann.
b. Littlefuse, Inc.
2.05 MAGNETIC LIGHTING CONTACTOR
A. Comply with NEMA ICS 2; provide UL 508 listing.

B. Electrically operated by dual-acting, single coil mechanism.
C. Inherently interlocked and mechanically held in both OPEN and CLOSED
position.
D. Main Contacts:
1. Double-break, continuous-duty, rated 30 amperes, 600 volts, withstand
rating of 22,000 amps rms symmetrical at 250 volts.
2. Marked for electric discharge lamps, tungsten, and general purpose
loads.
3. Position not dependent on gravity, hooks, latches, or semipermanent
magnets.
4. Capable of operating in any position.
5. Visual indication for each contact.
E. Auxiliary contact relay for two-wire control.
F. Fully rated neutral terminal.
G. Provision for remote pilot lamp with use of auxiliary contacts.
H. Clamp type, self-rising terminal plates for solderless connections.
I. Enclosures: See Article Enclosures.
J. Manufacturers and Products:
1. ASCO.
2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Class A202.
3. General Electric Co.; Class CR360 (mechanically held).
4. Square D; Class 8903, Type LL (mechanically held).
2.06 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNELS
A. Carbon Steel Framing Channel:
1. Material: Rolled, mild strip steel, 12-gauge minimum,
ASTM A1011/A1011M, Grade 33.
2. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
B. Paint Coated Framing Channel: Carbon steel framing channel with electro-
deposited rust inhibiting acrylic or epoxy paint.
C. PVC Coated Framing Channel: Carbon steel framing channel with 40-mil
polyvinyl chloride coating.

D. Stainless Steel Framing Channel: Rolled, ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless
steel, 12-gauge minimum.
E. Extruded Aluminum Framing Channel:
1. Material: Extruded from Type 6063-T6 aluminum alloy.
2. Fittings fabricated from Alloy 5052-H32.
F. Nonmetallic Framing Channel:
1. Material: Fire retardant, fiber reinforced vinyl ester resin.
2. Channel fitting of same material as channel.
3. Nuts and bolts of long glass fiber reinforced polyurethane.
G. Manufacturers:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.
2. Unistrut Corp.
3. Aickinstrut.
2.07 FIRESTOPS
A. General:
1. Provide UL 1479 classified hourly fire-rating equal to, or greater than,
the assembly penetrated.
2. Prevent the passage of cold smoke, toxic fumes, and water before and
after exposure to flame.
3. Sealants and accessories shall have fire-resistance ratings as established
by testing identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E814, by
Underwriters Laboratories Inc., or other testing and inspection agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.08 ENCLOSURES
A. Finish: Sheet metal structural and enclosure parts shall be completely painted
using an electrodeposition process so interior and exterior surfaces as well as
bolted structural joints have a complete finish coat on and between them.
B. Color: Manufacturers standard color (gray) baked-on enamel, unless
otherwise shown.
C. Barriers: Provide metal barriers within enclosures to separate wiring of
different systems and voltage.

D. Enclosure Selections: Except as shown otherwise, provide electrical
enclosures according to the following table:
Enclosures
Location Finish Environment NEMA 250 Type
Indoor Finished Dry 1
Indoor Unfinished Dry 1
Indoor Unfinished Industrial Use 12
Indoor and Outdoor Any Denoted WP 3R
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
3.02 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNEL
A. Install where required for mounting and supporting electrical equipment,
raceway, and cable tray systems.
B. Channel Type:
1. Interior, Wet or Dry (Noncorrosive) Locations:
a. Aluminum Raceway: Extruded aluminum.
b. PVC-Coated Conduit: PVC coated.
c. Steel Raceway and Other Systems Not Covered: Carbon steel or
paint coated.
2. Interior, Corrosive (Wet or Dry) Locations:
a. Aluminum Raceway: Extruded aluminum.
b. PVC Conduit: Type 316 stainless steel or nonmetallic.
c. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit and Other Systems Not Covered:
Type 316 stainless steel, nonmetallic, or PVC-coated steel.
3. Outdoor, Noncorrosive Locations:
a. Steel Raceway: Carbon steel or paint coated framing channel,
except where mounted on aluminum handrail, then use aluminum
framing channel.
b. Aluminum Raceway and Other Systems Not Covered: Aluminum
framing channel.
4. Outdoor Corrosive Locations:
a. PVC Conduit: Type 316 stainless steel or nonmetallic.
b. Aluminum Raceway: Aluminum.
c. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit and Other Systems Not Covered:
Type 316 stainless steel, nonmetallic, or PVC coated steel.

C. Paint cut ends prior to installation with the following:
1. Carbon Steel Channel: Zinc-rich primer.
2. Painted Channel: Rust-inhibiting epoxy or acrylic paint.
3. Nonmetallic Channel: Epoxy resin sealer.
4. PVC-Coated Channel: PVC patch.
3.03 FIRESTOPS
A. Install in strict conformance with manufacturers instructions. Comply with
installation requirements established by testing and inspecting agency.
B. Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing, and other accessory
materials, to fill openings around electrical services penetrating floors and
walls, to provide firestops with fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or
wall assembly in which penetration occurs.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 CONDUCTORS
JANUARY 2014 26 05 05 - 1
SECTION 26 05 05
CONDUCTORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
b. B3, Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.
c. B8, Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper
Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft.
d. B496, Standard Specification for Compact Round Concentric-
Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors.
2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): WC 70,
Standard for Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the
Distribution of Electrical Energy.
a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
b. 262, Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of
Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces.
4. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): TIA-568-C,
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
a. 13, Standard for Safety for Power-Limited Circuit Cables.
b. 44, Standard for Safety for Thermoset-Insulated Wires and
Cables.
c. 62, Standard for Safety for Flexible Cord and Cables.
d. 486A-486B, Standard for Safety for Wire Connectors.
e. 486C, Standard for Safety for Splicing Wire Connectors.
f. 510, Standard for Safety for Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene,
and Rubber Insulating Tape.
g. 854, Standard for Safety for Service-Entrance Cables.
h. 1569, Standard for Safety for Metal-Clad Cables.
i. 1581, Standard for Safety for Reference Standard for Electrical
Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords.

CONDUCTORS PW/WBG/475883
26 05 05 - 2 JANUARY 2014
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Product Data:
a. Wire and cable.
b. Wire and cable accessories.
2. Manufactured Wire Systems: Product data.
A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):
1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by the
AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally
recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the
AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC.
published by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. shall conform to those
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW
A. Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 70.
B. Conductor Type:
1. 120-Volt and 277-Volt Lighting, 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper.
2. 120-Volt Receptacle Circuits, 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper.
3. All Other Circuits: Stranded copper.
C. Insulation: Type THHN/THWN-2.
2.02 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Equipment: Stranded copper with green, Type USE/RHH/RHW-XLPE or
THHN/THWN, insulation.
2.03 ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW
A. Tape:
1. General Purpose, Flame Retardant: 7-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch
Brand 33+, rated for 90 degrees C minimum, meeting requirements of
UL 510.

JANUARY 2014 26 05 05 - 3
2. Flame Retardant, Cold and Weather Resistant: 8.5-mil, vinyl plastic,
Scotch Brand 88.
3. Arc and Fireproofing:
a. 30-mil, elastomer.
1) 3M; Scotch Brand 77, with Scotch Brand 69 glass cloth
tapebinder.
2) Plymouth; 53 Plyarc, with 77 Plyglas glass cloth tapebinder.
B. Identification Devices:
1. Sleeve:
a. Permanent, PVC, yellow or white, with legible machine-printed
black markings.
1) Raychem; Type D-SCE or ZH-SCE.
2) Brady, Type 3PS.
2. Heat Bond Marker:
a. Transparent thermoplastic heat bonding film with acrylic pressure
sensitive adhesive.
b. Self-laminating protective shield over text.
c. Machine printed black text.
d. Manufacturer and Product: 3M Co.; Type SCS-HB.
3. Marker Plate: Nylon, with legible designations permanently hot
stamped on plate.
4. Tie-On Cable Marker Tags:
a. Chemical-resistant white tag.
b. Size: 1/2 inch by 2 inches.
c. Manufacturer and Product: Raychem; Type CM-SCE.
5. Grounding Conductor: Permanent green heat-shrink sleeve, 2-inch
minimum.
C. Connectors and Terminations:
1. Nylon, Self-Insulated Crimp Connectors:
1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon.
2) Burndy; Insulug.
3) ILSCO.
2. Nylon, Self-Insulated, Crimp Locking-Fork, Torque-Type Terminator:
a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70,
75 degrees C ampacity.
b. Seamless.

26 05 05 - 4 JANUARY 2014
1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon.
2) Burndy; Insulink.
3) ILSCO; ILSCONS.
3. Self-Insulated, Freespring Wire Connector (Wire Nuts):
a. UL 486C.
b. Plated steel, square wire springs.
1) Thomas & Betts.
2) Ideal; Twister.
4. Self-Insulated, Set Screw Wire Connector:
a. Two piece compression type with set screw in brass barrel.
b. Insulated by insulator cap screwed over brass barrel.
c. Manufacturers:
1) 3M Co.
2) Thomas & Betts.
3) Marrette.
D. Cable Lugs:
1. In accordance with NEMA CC 1.
2. Rated 600 volts of same material as conductor metal.
3. Uninsulated Crimp Connectors and Terminators:
a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70,
75 degrees C ampacity.
1) Thomas & Betts; Color-Keyed.
2) Burndy; Hydent.
3) ILSCO.
4. Uninsulated, Bolted, Two-Way Connectors and Terminators:
1) Thomas & Betts; Locktite.
2) Burndy; Quiklug.
3) ILSCO.
E. Cable Ties:
1. Nylon, adjustable, self-locking, and reusable.
2. Manufacturer and Product: Thomas & Betts; TY-RAP.
F. Heat Shrinkable Insulation:
1. Thermally stabilized cross-linked polyolefin.
2. Single wall for insulation and strain relief.
3. Dual Wall, adhesive sealant lined, for sealing and corrosion resistance.

JANUARY 2014 26 05 05 - 5
a. Thomas & Betts; SHRINK-KON.
b. Raychem; RNF-100 and ES-2000.
G. Data Cable Accessories: Terminators, connectors, and junctions necessary for
a complete system.
2.04 MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS
A. System Rating:
1. 20 amperes load-carrying capacity each phase with final assemblies
consisting of maximum of three-phase conductors.
2. Composition: Type MC cable with 90 degrees C insulation and stranded
copper conductors.
B. Cable Configuration: Three, single-phase, five-wire circuit with standard
color wire coding:
1. 208/120 Volt: Black, red, blue, white, green.
2. 480/277 Volt: Brown, orange, yellow, white, green.
C. Locking Mechanism: Latch/strike with voltage clearly marked on latch.
D. NFPA 262 listed for use in air handling plenums, listed to connect or
disconnect under load, and manufactured in accordance with NFPA 70,
Article No. 604.
A. Conductors 600 Volts and Below: Test in accordance with UL 44 and
UL 854.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Conductor installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations.
B. Conductor and cable sizing shown is based on copper conductors, unless
noted otherwise.
C. Do not exceed cable manufacturers recommendations for maximum pulling
tensions and minimum bending radii.
D. Terminate conductors and cables, unless otherwise indicated.

26 05 05 - 6 JANUARY 2014
E. Tighten screws and terminal bolts in accordance with UL 486A-486B for
copper conductors.
F. Cable Lugs: Provide with correct number of holes, bolt size, and center-to-
center spacing as required by equipment terminals.
G. Ream, remove burrs, and clear interior of installed conduit before pulling
wires or cables.
3.02 POWER CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING
A. Conductors 600 Volts and Below:
1. 6 AWG and Larger: Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each
end, and at accessible locations wrapped at least six full overlapping
turns, covering area 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches wide.
2. 8 AWG and Smaller: Provide colored conductors.
3. Colors:
System Conductor Color
All Systems Equipment
Grounding
Green
240/120 Volts,
Single-Phase, Three-
Wire
Grounded Neutral
One Hot Leg
Other Hot Leg
White
Black
Red
208Y/120 Volts,
Three-Phase, Four-
Wire
Grounded Neutral
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
White
Black
Red
Blue
240/120 Volts, Three-
Phase, Four-Wire,
Delta, Center Tap,
Ground on Single-
Phase
Grounded Neutral
Phase A
High (wild) Leg
Phase C
White
Black
Orange
Blue
480Y/277 Volts,
Three-Phase, Four-
Wire
Grounded Neutral
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
White
Brown
Orange
Yellow
Note: Phase A, B, C implies direction of positive phase rotation.
4. Tracer: Outer covering of white with identifiable colored strip, other
than green, in accordance with NFPA 70.

JANUARY 2014 26 05 05 - 7
3.03 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify conductors at each termination, and in accessible locations such as
panels, pull boxes, and junction boxes.
B. Circuits Appearing in Circuit Schedules: Identify using circuit schedule
designations.
C. Circuits Not Appearing in Circuit Schedules:
1. Assign circuit name based on device or equipment at load end of circuit.
2. Where this would result in same name being assigned to more than one
circuit, add number or letter to each otherwise identical circuit name to
make it unique.
D. Method:
1. Conductors 3 AWG and Smaller: Identify with sleeves or heat bond
markers.
2. Cables and Conductors 2 AWG and Larger:
a. Identify with marker plates or tie-on cable marker tags.
b. Attach with nylon tie cord.
3. Taped-on markers or tags relying on adhesives not permitted.
3.04 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW
A. Install 10 AWG or 12 AWG conductors for branch circuit power wiring in
lighting and receptacle circuits.
B. Connections and Terminations:
1. Install wire nuts only on solid conductors. Wire nuts are not allowed on
stranded conductors.
2. Install self-insulated, set screw wire connectors for two-way connection
of power circuit conductors 12 AWG and smaller.
3. Install uninsulated crimp connectors and terminators for conductors
4 AWG through 2/0 AWG.
4. Install uninsulated, bolted, two-way connectors and terminators for
conductors 3/0 AWG and larger.
5. Install uninsulated terminators bolted together on motor circuit
conductors 10 AWG and larger.
6. Place no more than one conductor in any single-barrel pressure
connection.
7. Install crimp connectors with tools approved by connector
manufacturer.
8. Install terminals and connectors acceptable for type of material used.

26 05 05 - 8 JANUARY 2014
9. Compression Lugs:
a. Attach with a tool specifically designed for purpose. Tool shall
provide complete, controlled crimp and shall not release until
crimp is complete.
b. Do not use plier type crimpers.
C. Do not use soldered mechanical joints.
D. Splices and Terminations:
1. Insulate uninsulated connections.
2. Indoors: Use general purpose, flame retardant tape or single wall heat
shrink.
3. Below Grade and Wet or Damp Locations: Use dual wall heat shrink.
E. Cap spare conductors with UL listed end caps.
F. Cabinets and Panels:
1. Remove surplus wire, bridle and secure.
2. Where conductors pass through openings or over edges in sheet metal,
remove burrs, chamfer edges, and install bushings and protective strips
of insulating material to protect the conductors.
G. Extra Conductor Length: For conductors to be connected by others, install
minimum 6 feet of extra conductor in freestanding panels and minimum 2 feet
in other assemblies.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 GROUNDING AND BONDING
JANUARY 2014 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
Code (NEC).
approval under NEC.
published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUND CONDUCTORS
A. As specified in Section 26 05 05, Conductors.
2.02 CONNECTORS
A. Compression Type:
1. Compress-deforming type; wrought copper extrusion material.
2. Single indentation for conductors 6 AWG and smaller.
3. Double indentation with extended barrel for conductors 4 AWG and
larger.
4. Barrels prefilled with oxide-inhibiting and antiseizing compound and
sealed.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Burndy Corp.
b. Thomas and Betts Co.
c. ILSCO.

GROUNDING AND BONDING PW/WBG/475883
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS JANUARY 2014
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Grounding shall be in compliance with NFPA 70.
3.02 WIRE CONNECTIONS
A. Ground Conductors: Install in conduit containing conductors above 50 volts.
B. Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install equipment grounding
conductor connected at both ends to noncurrent-carrying grounding bus.
C. Connect ground conductors to raceway grounding bushings.
D. Extend and connect ground conductors to ground bus in all equipment
containing a ground bus.
E. Connect enclosure of equipment containing ground bus to that bus.
F. Bolt connections to equipment ground bus.
G. Bond grounding conductors to metallic enclosures at each end, and to
intermediate metallic enclosures.
H. Junction Boxes: Furnish materials and connect to equipment grounding
system with grounding clips mounted directly on box, or with 3/8-inch
machine screws.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Compression Type:
1. Install in accordance with connector manufacturers recommendations.
2. Install connectors of proper size for grounding conductors and ground
rods specified.
3. Install using connector manufacturers compression tool having proper
sized dies.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 RACEWAY AND BOXES
JANUARY 2014 26 05 33 - 1
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAY AND BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
a. A123/123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dipped
Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
b. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting
c. A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and
Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for
Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.
d. D149, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage
and Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at
Commercial Power Frequencies.
2. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): 569B, Commercial
Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
3. National Electrical Contractors Association, Inc. (NECA): Installation
standards.
b. C80.1, Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC).
c. C80.3, Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).
d. TC 2, Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit.
e. TC 3, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC
Conduit and Tubing.
Code (NEC).
a. 1, Standard for Safety for Flexible Metal Conduit.
b. 5, Standard for Safety for Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings.
c. 6, Standard for Safety for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit Steel.
d. 514B, Standard for Safety for Conduit, Tubing, and Cable
Fittings.
e. 651, Standard for Safety for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC
Conduit and Fittings.
f. 797, Standard for Safety for Electrical Metallic Tubing Steel.

RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/475883
26 05 33 - 2 JANUARY 2014
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturers Literature:
a. Rigid galvanized steel conduit.
b. Electric metallic tubing.
c. PVC Schedule 40 conduit.
d. Flexible metal conduit.
e. Flexible, nonmetallic conduit.
f. Conduit fittings.
g. Surface metal raceway.
h. Large junction and pull boxes.
be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other
organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for
approval under NEC.
2. Materials and equipment manufactured within scope of standards
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS):
1. Meet requirements of NEMA C80.1 and UL 6.
2. Material: Hot-dip galvanized with chromated protective layer.
B. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT):
1. Meet requirements of NEMA C80.3 and UL 797.
2. Material: Hot-dip galvanized with chromated and lacquered protective
layer.
C. PVC Conduit:
1. Meet requirements of NEMA TC 2 and UL 651.
2. UL listed for concrete encasement, underground direct burial, concealed
or direct sunlight exposure, and 90 degrees C insulated conductors.

JANUARY 2014 26 05 33 - 3
D. Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit:
1. UL 360 listed for 105 degrees C insulated conductors.
2. Material: Galvanized steel with extruded PVC jacket.
E. Flexible Metal, Nonliquid-Tight Conduit:
1. Meet requirements of UL 1.
2. Material: Galvanized steel.
F. Flexible, Nonmetallic, Liquid-Tight Conduit:
1. Material: PVC core with fused flexible PVC jacket.
2. UL 1660 listed for:
a. Dry Conditions: 80 degrees C insulated conductors.
b. Wet Conditions: 60 degrees C insulated conductors.
a. Carlon; Carflex or X-Flex.
b. T & B; Xtraflex LTC or EFC.
G. Innerduct: Resistant to spread of fire, per requirements of UL 2024.
2.02 FITTINGS
A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit:
1. General:
a. Meet requirements of UL 514B.
b. Type: Threaded, galvanized. Set screw and threadless
compression fittings not permitted.
2. Bushing:
a. Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat, rated for
150 degrees C.
1) Appleton; Series BU-I.
2) O-Z/Gedney; Type HB.
3. Grounding Bushing:
a. Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat rated for
150 degrees C, with solderless lugs.
1) Appleton; Series GIB.
2) O-Z/Gedney; Type HBLG.
4. Conduit Bodies:
a. Sized as required by NFPA 70.
b. Manufacturers and Products (For Normal Conditions):
1) Appleton; Form 35 threaded unilets.
2) Crouse-Hinds; Form 7 or Form 8 threaded condulets.

26 05 33 - 4 JANUARY 2014
3) Killark; Series O electrolets.
4) Thomas & Betts; Form 7 or Form 8.
5. Couplings: As supplied by conduit manufacturer.
6. Unions:
a. Concrete tight, hot-dip galvanized malleable iron.
1) Appleton; Series SCC bolt-on coupling or Series EC three-
piece union.
2) O-Z/Gedney; Type SSP split coupling or Type 4 Series,
three-piece coupling.
7. Expansion Fitting:
1) Deflection/Expansion Movement:
a) Appleton; Type DF.
b) Crouse-Hinds; Type XD.
2) Expansion Movement Only:
a) Appleton; Type XJ.
b) Crouse-Hinds; Type XJ.
c) Thomas & Betts; XJG-TP.
8. Cable Sealing Fitting:
a. To form watertight nonslip cord or cable connection to conduit.
b. For Conductors with OD of 1/2 inch or Less: Neoprene bushing at
connector entry.
1) Appleton; CG-S.
2) Crouse-Hinds; CGBS.
B. Electric Metallic Tubing:
1. Meet requirements of UL 514B.
2. Type: Steel body and locknuts with steel or malleable iron compression
nuts. Set screw and drive-on fittings not permitted.
3. Electro zinc-plated inside and out.
4. Raintight.
5. Coupling Manufacturers and Products:
a. Appleton; Type 95T.
b. Crouse-Hinds.
c. Thomas & Betts.
6. Connector Manufacturers and Products:
a. Appleton; Type ETP.
b. Crouse-Hinds.
c. Thomas & Betts.

JANUARY 2014 26 05 33 - 5
C. PVC Conduit and Tubing:
1. Meet requirements of NEMA TC 3.
2. Type: PVC, slip-on.
D. Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit:
1. Metal insulated throat connectors with integral nylon or plastic bushing
rated for 105 degrees C.
2. Insulated throat and sealing O-rings.
a. Thomas & Betts; Series 5331.
b. O-Z/Gedney; Series 4Q.
E. Flexible Metal, Nonliquid-Tight Conduit:
2. Body: Galvanized steel.
3. Throat: Nylon insulated.
4. 1-1/4-Inch Conduit and Smaller: One screw body.
5. 1-1/2-Inch Conduit and Larger: Two screw body.
6. Manufacturer and Product: Appleton; Series 7400.
F. Flexible, Nonmetallic, Liquid-Tight Conduit:
2. Type: High strength plastic body, complete with lock nut, O-ring,
threaded ferrule, sealing ring, and compression nut.
3. Body/compression nut (gland) design to ensure high mechanical pullout
strength and watertight seal.
a. Carlon; Type LT.
b. O-Z/Gedney; Type 4Q-P.
c. Thomas & Betts; Series 6300.
2.03 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES
A. Sheet Steel: One-piece drawn type, zinc-plated or cadmium-plated.
B. Nonmetallic:
1. Box: PVC.
2. Cover: PVC, weatherproof, with stainless steel screws.
3. Manufacturer and Product: Carlon; Type FS or Type FD, with Type E98
or Type E96 covers.

26 05 33 - 6 JANUARY 2014
2.04 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Outlet Box Used as Junction or Pull Box: As specified under Article Outlet
and Device Boxes.
B. Conduit Bodies Used as Junction Boxes: As specified under Article Fittings.
C. Large Sheet Steel Box:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Box: Code-gauge, galvanized steel.
3. Cover: Full access, screw type.
4. Machine Screws: Corrosion-resistant.
D. Large Cast Aluminum Box:
1. NEMA 250 Type 4.
2. Box: Cast copper-free aluminum, with drilled and tapped conduit
entrances and exterior mounting lugs.
3. Cover: Nonhinged.
4. Gasket: Neoprene.
5. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.
6. Manufacturers and Products, Surface Mounted Type:
a. Crouse-Hinds; Series W-SA.
b. O-Z/Gedney; Series YS-A, YL-A.
c. Killark.
2.05 TELEPHONE AND DATA OUTLET
A. Provide outlet boxes and cover plates meeting requirements of TIA 569B.
2.06 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A. General:
1. Meet requirements of UL 5.
2. Material: Two-piece, code-gauge steel.
3. Finish: Factory applied rust inhibiting primer and gray semi-gloss finish
suitable for field painting.
4. Configuration: Single, 1-17/32-inch by 2-3/4-inch section, unless
B. Fittings and Accessories:
1. Wire clips at 30 inches on center.
2. Couplings, cover clips, supporting clips, ground clamps, and elbows as
required; to comply with manufacturers recommendations.

JANUARY 2014 26 05 33 - 7
C. Outlets:
1. Provide bracket or device covers as required to support wiring devices
indicated.
2. Wiring Devices and Device Plates: In accordance with
Section 26 27 26, Wiring Devices.
3. Manufacturers:
a. The Wiremold Co.
b. Walker.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Conduit and tubing sizes shown are based on use of copper conductors.
Reference Section 26 05 05, Conductors, concerning conduit sizing for
aluminum conductors.
B. Comply with NECA Installation Standards.
C. Crushed or deformed raceways not permitted.
D. Maintain raceway entirely free of obstructions and moisture.
E. Immediately after installation, plug or cap raceway ends with watertight and
dust-tight seals until time for pulling in conductors.
F. Avoid moisture traps where possible. When unavoidable in exposed conduit
runs, provide junction box and drain fitting at conduit low point.
G. Group raceways installed in same area.
H. Proximity to Heated Piping: Install raceways minimum 12 inches from
parallel runs.
I. Follow structural surface contours when installing exposed raceways. Avoid
obstruction of passageways.
J. Run exposed raceways parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members,
or intersections of vertical planes.
K. Block Walls: Do not install raceways in same horizontal course or vertical cell
with reinforcing steel.
L. Install watertight fittings in outdoor, underground, or wet locations.

26 05 33 - 8 JANUARY 2014
M. Paint threads and cut ends, before assembly of fittings, or galvanized conduit
installed in exposed or damp locations with zinc-rich paint or liquid
galvanizing compound.
N. Metal conduit shall be reamed, burrs removed, and cleaned before installation
of conductors, wires, or cables.
O. Horizontal raceways installed in floor topping slabs shall lie completely at the
bottom of the slab. Install conduits embedded in topping slabs at right angles
to the building lines of construction.
P. Install concealed or embedded raceways so that they emerge at right angles to
surface and have no curved portion exposed.
Q. Install conduits for fiber optic cables, telephone cables, and Category 6 data
cables in strict conformance with the requirements of TIA 569B.
3.02 REUSE OF EXISTING CONDUITS
A. Where existing conduits may be reused, they may be reused only where they
meet the following criteria.
1. Conduit is in useable condition with no deformation, corrosion, or
damage to exterior surface.
2. Conduit is sized per the NEC.
3. Conduit is of the type specified in Contract Documents.
4. Conduit is supported as specified in Contract Documents.
B. Conduit shall be reamed with wire brush, then with a mandrel approximately
1/4 inch smaller than raceway inside diameter then cleaned prior to pulling
new conductors.
3.03 INSTALLATION IN CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
A. Minimum Cover: 2 inches, including fittings.
B. Conduit placement shall not require changes in reinforcing steel location or
configuration.
C. Provide nonmetallic support during placement of concrete to ensure raceways
remain in position.
D. Conduit larger than 1 inch shall not be embedded in concrete slabs, walls, or
soffits unless approved by Engineer.
E. Existing conduits shall be rerouted around new structural beams.

JANUARY 2014 26 05 33 - 9
3.04 CONDUIT APPLICATION
A. Diameter: Minimum 1/2 inch.
B. Interior, Exposed:
1. Rigid galvanized steel.
2. Electric metallic tubing for ceiling portion of lighting circuits.
3. PVC Schedule 80.
C. Interior, Concealed (Not Embedded in Concrete): Electric metallic tubing.
D. Aboveground, Embedded in Concrete Walls, Ceilings, or Floors:
1. Rigid galvanized steel.
2. PVC Schedule 40.
3. Electric metallic tubing.
3.05 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. For motors, wall or ceiling mounted fans and unit heaters, dry type
transformers, and other locations approved by Engineer where flexible
connection is required to minimize vibration:
1. Conduit Size 4 Inches or Less: Flexible, liquid-tight conduit.
2. Conduit Size Over 4 Inches: Nonflexible.
3. Wet or Corrosive Areas: Flexible, nonmetallic or flexible metal liquid-
tight.
4. Dry Areas: Flexible, metallic liquid-tight.
B. Suspended Lighting Fixtures in Dry Areas: Flexible steel, nonliquid-tight
conduit.
C. Flexible Conduit Length: 18 inches minimum, 60 inches maximum; sufficient
to allow movement or adjustment of equipment.
3.06 PENETRATIONS
A. Make at right angles, unless otherwise shown.
B. Notching or penetration of structural members, including beams, is not
permitted.
C. Fire-Rated Walls, Floors, or Ceilings: Firestop openings around penetrations
to maintain fire-resistance rating as specified in Section 26 05 04, Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods.

26 05 33 - 10 JANUARY 2014
D. Concrete Walls, Floors, or Ceilings (Aboveground): Provide nonshrink grout
dry-pack, or use watertight seal device.
3.07 SUPPORT
A. Support from structural members only, at intervals not exceeding NFPA 70
requirements. Do not exceed 10 feet in any application. Do not support from
piping, pipe supports, or other raceways.
B. Multiple Adjacent Raceways: Provide ceiling trapeze.
C. Application/Type of Conduit Strap:
1. Rigid Steel or EMT Conduit: Zinc coated steel, pregalvanized steel or
malleable iron.
2. Nonmetallic Conduit: Nonmetallic or PVC-coated metal.
D. Provide and attach wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze as follows:
1. Wood: Wood screws.
2. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts.
3. Concrete or Brick: Expansion shields, or threaded studs driven in by
powder charge, with lock washers and nuts.
4. Steelwork: Machine screws.
5. Location/Type of Hardware:
a. Dry, Noncorrosive Areas: Galvanized.
b. Wet, Noncorrosive Areas: Stainless steel.
E. Nails or wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry for attaching raceway
not permitted. Do not weld raceways or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not
use wire in lieu of straps or hangers.
3.08 BENDS
A. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical
distance.
B. Make bends and offsets of longest practical radius. Bends in conduits and
ducts being installed for fiber optic cables shall be not less than 20 times cable
diameter, 15 inches minimum.
C. Install with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings.
D. Avoid field-made bends and offsets, but where necessary, make with
acceptable hickey or bending machine. Do not heat metal raceways to
facilitate bending.

JANUARY 2014 26 05 33 - 11
E. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same center or centerline with
same radius so that bends are parallel.
F. Factory elbows may be installed in parallel or banked raceways if there is
change in plane of run, and raceways are same size.
G. PVC Conduit:
1. Bends 30 Degrees and Larger: Provide factory-made elbows.
2. Use manufacturers recommended method for forming smaller bends.
H. Flexible Conduit: Do not make bends that exceed allowable conductor
bending radius of cable to be installed or that significantly restricts conduit
flexibility.
3.09 EXPANSION/DEFLECTION FITTINGS
A. Provide on raceways at structural expansion joints and in long tangential runs.
B. Provide expansion/deflection joints for 50 degrees F maximum temperature
variation.
C. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
3.10 PVC CONDUIT
A. Solvent Welding:
1. Apply manufacturer recommended solvent to joints.
2. Install in order that joint is watertight.
B. Adapters:
1. PVC to Metallic Fittings: PVC terminal type.
2. PVC to Rigid Metal Conduit or IMC: PVC female adapter.
C. Belled-End Conduit: Bevel unbelled end of joint prior to joining.
3.11 TERMINATION AT ENCLOSURES
A. Sheet Metal Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures:
1. General:
a. Install insulated bushing on ends of conduit where grounding is
not required.
b. Provide insulated throat when conduit terminates in sheet metal
boxes having threaded hubs.

26 05 33 - 12 JANUARY 2014
c. Utilize sealing locknuts or threaded hubs on sides and bottom of
NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 enclosures.
d. Terminate conduits at threaded hubs at the tops of NEMA 3R and
NEMA 12 boxes and enclosures.
e. Terminate conduits at threaded conduit hubs at NEMA 4 and
NEMA 4X boxes and enclosures.
2. Rigid Galvanized Conduit:
a. Provide one lock nut each on inside and outside of enclosure.
b. Install grounding bushing at source enclosure.
c. Provide bonding jumper from grounding bushing to equipment
ground bus or ground pad.
3. Electric Metallic Tubing: Provide gland compression, insulated
connectors.
4. Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide two screw type, insulated, malleable
iron connectors.
5. Flexible, Nonmetallic Conduit: Provide nonmetallic, liquid-tight strain
relief connectors.
6. PVC Schedule 40 Conduit: Provide PVC terminal adapter with lock nut,
except where threaded hubs required above.
3.12 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES
A. General:
1. Install plumb and level.
2. Install suitable for conditions encountered at each outlet or device in
wiring or raceway system, sized to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
3. Open no more knockouts in sheet steel device boxes than are required;
seal unused openings.
4. Install galvanized mounting hardware in industrial areas.
B. Size:
1. Depth: Minimum 2 inches, unless otherwise required by structural
conditions. Box extensions not permitted.
a. Hollow Masonry Construction: Install with sufficient depth such
that conduit knockouts or hubs are in masonry void space.
2. Ceiling Outlet: Minimum 4-inch octagonal device box, unless otherwise
required for installed fixture.
3. Switch and Receptacle: Minimum 2-inch by 4-inch device box.
C. Locations:
1. Drawing locations are approximate.
2. To avoid interference with mechanical equipment or structural features,
relocate outlets as required.

JANUARY 2014 26 05 33 - 13
3. Light Fixture: Install in symmetrical pattern according to room layout,
unless otherwise shown.
D. Mounting Height:
1. General:
a. The guidelines shown below apply where new construction
doesnt conflict with existing construction in appearance,
functionality, or code requirements. Otherwise, mounting heights
shall match those of similar, adjacent devices.
b. Dimensions given to centerline of box.
c. Where specified heights do not suit building construction or
finish, adjust up or down to avoid interference.
d. Do not straddle CMU block or other construction joints.
2. Light Switch:
a. 48 inches above floor.
b. When located next to door, install on lock side of door.
3. Thermostat: 54 inches above floor.
4. Telephone Outlet:
a. 15 inches above floor.
b. 6 inches above counter tops.
c. Wall Mounted: 52 inches above floor.
5. Convenience Receptacle:
a. General Interior Areas: 15 inches above floor.
b. General Interior Areas (Counter Tops): Install device plate bottom
or side flush with top of backsplash, or 6 inches above counter
tops without backsplash.
6. Switch, Motor Starting: 48 inches above floor, unless otherwise
E. Flush Mounted:
1. Install with concealed conduit.
2. Install proper type extension rings or plaster covers to make edges of
boxes flush with finished surface.
3. Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive
box.
F. Supports:
1. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building
structure or structural member.
2. Install bar hangers in frame construction or fasten boxes directly as
follows:
a. Wood: Wood screws.
b. Concrete or Brick: Bolts and expansion shields.

26 05 33 - 14 JANUARY 2014
c. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts.
d. Steelwork: Machine screws.
3. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock
washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields.
4. Provide plaster rings where necessary.
5. Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally
supported.
G. Install separate junction boxes for flush or recessed lighting fixtures where
required by fixture terminal temperature.
H. Boxes Supporting Fixtures: Provide means of attachment with adequate
strength to support fixture.
3.13 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. General:
2. Installed boxes shall be accessible.
3. Do not install on finished surfaces.
4. Use outlet boxes as junction and pull boxes wherever possible and
allowed by applicable codes.
5. Use conduit bodies as junction and pull boxes where no splices are
required and allowed by applicable codes.
6. Install pull boxes where necessary in raceway system to facilitate
conductor installation.
7. Install where shown and where necessary to terminate, tap-off, or
redirect multiple conduit runs.
8. Install in conduit runs at least every 150 feet or after the equivalent of
three right-angle bends.
B. Flush Mounted:
1. Install with concealed conduit.
2. Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive
box.
3. Make edges of boxes flush with final surface.
C. Mounting Hardware:
1. Noncorrosive Dry Areas: Galvanized.
2. Noncorrosive Wet Areas: Stainless steel.

JANUARY 2014 26 05 33 - 15
D. Supports:
1. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building
structure or structural member.
2. Install bar hangers in frame construction or fasten boxes directly as
follows:
a. Wood: Wood screws.
b. Concrete or Brick: Bolts and expansion shields.
c. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts.
d. Steelwork: Machine screws.
3. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock
washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields.
4. Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally
supported.
3.14 TELEPHONE, DATA, AND SECURITY OUTLET
A. Provide empty 4-inch square, 3-1/2-inch deep outlet box.
B. Provide blank single gang raised device cover if cables are not installed.
C. Provide mudrings as coordinated with Owners contractors.
3.15 EMPTY RACEWAYS
A. Provide permanent, removable cap over each end.
B. Provide PVC plug with pull tab for underground raceways with end bells.
C. Provide nylon pull cord.
D. Identify with waterproof tags attached to pull cord at each end, and at
intermediate pull point.
3.16 ABANDONED RACEWAYS
A. Raceways made abandoned as a part of this work shall be dismantled and
removed.
B. Abandoned underfloor raceways shall be cut flush to the floor to allow new
floor finishes to be installed.
A. Protect products from effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage
during construction.

26 05 33 - 16 JANUARY 2014
B. Provide and maintain manufactured watertight and dust-tight seals over
conduit openings during construction.
C. Touch up painted conduit threads after assembly to cover nicks or scars.
D. Touch up coating damage to PVC-coated conduit with patching compound
approved by manufacturer. Compound shall be kept refrigerated according to
manufacturers instructions until time of use.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 PANELBOARDS
JANUARY 2014 26 24 16 - 1
SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
a. C62.1, Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits.
b. C62.11, Standards for Metal-Oxide Surge Arrestors for AC Power
Circuits.
2. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 407,
Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards.
b. 289, Application Guide for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters.
c. AB 1, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and
Circuit-Breaker Enclosures.
d. KS 1, Enclosed Switches.
e. LA 1, Surge Arrestors.
f. PB 1, Panelboards.
g. PB 1.1, General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
Code (NEC).
a. 67, Standard for Panelboards.
b. 98, Standard for Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.
c. 486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with
Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors.
d. 489, Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case
Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures.
e. 508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.
f. 870, Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings.
g. 943, Standard for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturers data sheets for each type of panelboard, protective
device, accessory item, and component.

PANELBOARDS PW/WBG/475883
26 24 16 - 2 JANUARY 2014
2. Manufacturers Shop Drawings including dimensioned plan, section,
and elevation for each panelboard type, enclosure, and general
arrangement.
3. Tabulation of features for each panelboard to include the following:
a. Protective devices with factory settings.
b. Provisions for future protective devices.
c. Space for future protective devices.
d. Voltage, frequency, and phase ratings.
e. Enclosure type.
f. Bus and terminal bar configurations and current ratings.
g. Provisions for circuit terminations with wire range.
h. Short circuit current rating of assembled panelboard at system
voltage.
i. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of auxiliary
components.
B. Informational Submittals: Manufacturers recommended installation
instructions.
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed
and labeled as defined in NEC Article 100.
A. Extra Materials: Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following
material:
Item Quantity
Touch-up paint for panelboards One half-pint container
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
products of:
1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer.
2. General Electric Co.
3. Square D Co.

JANUARY 2014 26 24 16 - 3
2.02 GENERAL
A. Provide low voltage panelboards for application at 600V or less in accordance
with this Section.
B. Provide equipment in accordance with NEMA PB 1, NFPA 70, and UL 67.
C. Wire Terminations:
1. Panelboard assemblies, including protective devices, shall be suitable
for use with 75 degrees C or greater wire insulation systems at NEC
75 degrees C conductor ampacity.
2. In accordance with UL 486E.
D. Load Current Ratings:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, load current ratings for panelboard
assemblies, including bus and circuit breakers, are noncontinuous as
defined by NEC. Continuous ratings shall be 80 percent of
noncontinuous rating.
2. Where indicated continuous, 100 percent, etc., selected components
and protective devices shall be rated for continuous load current at value
shown.
E. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): Integrated equipment short circuit
rating for each panelboard assembly shall be no less than the following:
1. Minimum SCCR at 208Y/120 or 120/240 volts shall be 10,000 amperes
rms symmetrical.
F. Overcurrent Protective Devices:
1. In accordance with NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, UL 98, and UL 489.
2. Protective devices shall be adapted to panelboard installation.
a. Capable of device replacement without disturbing adjacent
devices and without removing main bus.
b. Spaces: Cover openings with easily removable cover.
3. Series-Connected Short Circuit Ratings: Devices shall be fully rated;
series-connected ratings unacceptable.
G. Circuit Breakers:
1. General: Thermal-magnetic unless otherwise indicated, quick-make,
quick-break, molded case, of indicating type showing ON/OFF and
TRIPPED positions of operating handle.
2. Noninterchangeable: In accordance with NEC.

26 24 16 - 4 JANUARY 2014
3. Bus Connection: Bolt-on circuit breakers in 480Y/277-volt, and plug-in
circuit breakers in 208Y/120 and 240/120-volt branch circuit
panelboards.
4. Trip Mechanism:
a. Individual permanent thermal and magnetic trip elements in each
pole.
b. Variable magnetic trip elements with a single continuous
adjustment 3X to 10X for frames greater than 100 amps.
c. Two and three pole, common trip.
d. Automatically opens all poles when overcurrent occurs on one
pole.
e. Test button on cover.
f. Calibrated for 40 degrees C ambient, unless shown otherwise.
5. Unacceptable Substitution:
a. Do not substitute single-pole circuit breakers with handle ties for
multi-pole breakers.
b. Do not use tandem or dual circuit breakers in normal single-pole
spaces.
6. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI): Where indicated, equip
breaker as specified above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on
5-mA ground fault within 0.025 second (UL 943, Class A sensitivity,
for protection of personnel).
a. Ground fault sensor shall be rated same as circuit breaker.
b. Push-to-test button.
c. Reset button.
H. Enclosures:
1. Provide as specified in Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods.
2. Material: Type 1, Type 3R, and Type 3S shall be code-gauge, hot-dip
galvanized sheet steel with reinforced steel frame.
3. Finish: Rust inhibitor prime followed by manufacturers standard gray
baked enamel or lacquer.
I. Bus:
1. Material: Copper full sized throughout length.
2. Provide for mounting of future protective devices along full length of
bus regardless of number of units and spaces shown. Machine, drill, and
tap as required for current and future positions.
J. Feeder Lugs: Main, feed-through, and neutral shall be replaceable, bolted
mechanical or crimp compression type.

JANUARY 2014 26 24 16 - 5
K. Equipment Ground Terminal Bus: Copper with suitably sized provisions for
termination of ground conductors, and bonded to box.
1. Provide individual mechanical termination points no less than the
quantity of breaker pole positions.
2. Provide individual termination points for all other grounding conductors
such as feeder, grounding electrode, etc.
L. Neutral Terminal Bus: Copper with suitably sized provisions for termination
of neutral conductors, and isolated from box.
1. Provide individual mechanical termination points no less than the
quantity of breaker pole positions.
2. Provide individual termination points for all other neutral conductors.
M. Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections,
and necessary appurtenances for future protective device ampere ratings
indicated.
2.03 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Protective Device Locking: Furnish provisions for handle padlocking for main
and subfeed devices; also provide for branch devices where indicated.
B. NEMA 250 Type 1 Branch Panelboard Enclosure:
1. Front trim shall be secured to box with concealed trim clamps.
2. Surface-mount panelboard front trim shall have same dimensions as
box.
3. Flush panelboards front trims shall overlap box nominal 3/4 inch on all
sides.
4. Door in panelboard front trim, with concealed hinges, shall provide
access to protective device operating handles.
5. Doors over 30 inches in height shall have multi-point latching.
6. Door lock shall be secure with flush catch and tumbler lock; all
panelboards keyed alike, with two milled keys each lock.
7. Circuit Directory: Metal frame with transparent plastic face and
enclosed card, mounted inside each panel door.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install in accordance with NECA 407, NEMA PB 1.1 and manufacturers
written installation instructions.
B. Install securely, plumb, in-line and square with walls.

26 24 16 - 6 JANUARY 2014
C. Install top of cabinet trim78 inches above floor, unless otherwise shown.
Install cabinet so tops of protective device operating handles are no more than
78 inches above the floor.
D. Ground Fault Protection: Install panelboard ground fault circuit interrupter
devices in accordance with installation guidelines of NEMA 289.
E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
F. Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups; bundle, and wrap
with nylon wire ties.
3.02 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARD
A. Mount flush panels uniformly flush with wall finish.
B. Provide typewritten circuit directory for each panelboard.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 WIRING DEVICES
JANUARY 2014 26 27 26 - 1
SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. ASTM International (ASTM): A167, Standard Specification for
Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip.
2. Federal Specifications (FS):
a. W-C-596G, General Specification for Connector, Electrical,
Power.
b. W-S-896F, Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted
(General Specification).
3. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 1, Standard
Practice of Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting.
b. WD 1, General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices.
c. WD 6, Wiring Devices Dimensional Specifications.
Code (NEC).
a. 498, Standard for Safety for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.
b. 508, Standard for Safety for Industrial Control Equipment.
c. 943, Standard for Safety for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals: Manufacturers product data for wiring devices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SWITCHES
A. Switch, General Purpose:
1. NEMA WD 1 and FS W-S-896F.
2. Totally enclosed, ac type, with quiet tumbler switch and screw terminal.
3. Rivetless one-piece brass or copper alloy contact arm with silver alloy
contact.
4. Capable of controlling 100 percent tungsten filament and fluorescent
lamp loads.

WIRING DEVICES PW/WBG/475883
26 27 26 - 2 JANUARY 2014
5. Rating: 20 amps, 120/277 volts.
6. Automatic grounding clip and integral grounding terminal on mounting
strap.
7. Special Features: Provide the following features in comparable devices
where indicated:
a. Three-way and four-way.
8. Manufacturers and Products, Commercial Grade:
a. Cooper Arrow Hart; CSB120 Series.
b. Bryant; CSB120 Series.
c. Hubbell; CSB120 Series.
d. Leviton; CSB1-20 Series.
B. Switch, Motor Rated:
1. Type: Two-pole or three-pole, manual motor starting/disconnect switch
without overload protection.
2. UL 508 listed.
3. Totally enclosed snap-action switch. Quick-make, slow-break design
with silver alloy contacts.
4. Minimum General Purpose Rating: 30 amperes, 600V ac.
5. Minimum Motor Ratings:
a. 2 horsepower for 120V ac, single-phase, two-pole.
b. 3 horsepower for 240V ac, single-phase, two-pole.
c. 15 horsepower for 480V ac, three-phase, three-pole.
6. Screw-type terminal.
a. Cooper Arrow Hart.
b. Hubbell Bryant: HBL78 Series.
c. Leviton.
2.02 RECEPTACLES
A. Receptacle, General Purpose:
1. NEMA WD 1 and FS W-C-596G.
2. Duplex, two-pole, three-wire grounding type with screw type wire
terminals.
3. Impact resistant nylon cover and body, with finder grooves in face,
unless otherwise indicated.
4. One-piece mounting strap with integral ground contact (rivetless
construction).
5. Contact Arrangement: Contact to be made on two sides of each inserted
blade without detent.
6. Rating: 125 volts, NEMA WD 1, Configuration 5-20R, 20 amps, unless
7. Size: For 2-inch by 4-inch outlet box.

JANUARY 2014 26 27 26 - 3
8. Special Features: Provide the following features in comparable devices
where indicated:
a. Listed weather-resistant per NEC 406.8.
b. Isolated ground.
9. Commercial Grade Manufacturers and Products:
a. Cooper Arrow Hart; CR20 Series.
b. Hubbell Bryant; BR201 Series.
c. Leviton; BR20 Series.
B. Receptacle, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter:
1. Meet requirements of general-purpose receptacle.
2. Listed Class A to UL 943, tripping at 5 mA.
3. Rectangular smooth face with push-to-test and reset buttons.
4. Listed weather-resistant per NEC 406.8.
5. Feed-through Capability: 20 amps.
a. Hubbell Bryant; GFTR20 Series.
b. Cooper Arrow Hart WRVGF20 Series.
c. Leviton; 7899 Series.
2.03 MULTIOUTLET SURFACE RACEWAY SYSTEM
A. Three-wire grounding simplex receptacles, spaced on 12-inch centers with
insulated grounding conductor to each receptacle.
1. Color: Gray with ivory receptacles.
2. Receptacles shall meet applicable requirements of Article Receptacles.
3. Manufacturer and Product: The Wiremold Co.; Prewired Type 3000.
2.04 DEVICE PLATES
A. Sectional type plate not permitted.
B. Nylon:
1. Material: Specification grade, 0.10-inch minimum thickness,
noncombustible, thermosetting.
2. Color: To match associated wiring device.
3. Mounting Screw: Oval-head metal, color matched to plate.
C. Metal:
1. Material: Specification grade, one-piece, 0.040-inch nominal thickness
stainless steel.
2. Finish: ASTM A167, Type 302/304, satin.
3. Mounting Screw: Oval-head, finish matched to plate.

26 27 26 - 4 JANUARY 2014
D. Sheet Steel:
1. Finish: Zinc electroplate.
2. Screws: Oval-head stainless steel.
3. Manufacturers:
a. Appleton.
b. Crouse-Hinds.
E. Weatherproof:
1. Receptacle, Weatherproof Type 2:
a. UL listed for wet location while in use.
b. Die cast metal cover.
c. Manufacturer and Product: TayMac; Type Multi-Mac.
2. Switch:
a. Gasketed, cast-metal or cast-aluminum, incorporating external
operator for internal switch.
b. Mounting Screw: Stainless steel.
1) Crouse-Hinds; DS-181 or DS-185.
2) Appleton; FSK-1VTS or FSK-1VS.
F. Raised Sheet Metal: 1/2-inch high zinc- or cadmium-plated steel designed for
one-piece drawn type sheet steel box.
G. Sheet Steel: Formed sheet steel or Feraloy designed for installation on cast-
metal box.
2.05 OCCUPANCY SENSOR, WALL SWITCH
A. Description:
1. Dual-technology type, 120/277-volt, adjustable time delay up to
30 minutes, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of
900 square feet (84 square meters).
2. Provide dual switch unit where indicated.
3. Color: Manufacturers standard white.
1. Hubbell; AD1277.
2. Leviton; ODSMD.
3. Watt Stopper (The); DW-100.

JANUARY 2014 26 27 26 - 5
2.06 FINISHES
A. Wiring device catalog numbers specified in this Section do not designate
device color. Unless otherwise indicated, or required by code, provide colors
as specified below.
B. Wiring Device Connected to Normal Power System:
1. Office Areas: Ivory.
2. Other Areas: Ivory.
3. Isolated ground receptacle shall be orange.
C. Wiring Device Connected to Emergency Power System: Red except isolated
ground receptacle which shall be orange.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Ensure device and its box are protected. Do not place wall finish
materials over device box and do not cut holes for box with router that
is guided by riding against outside of box.
2. Keep outlet box free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar,
cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate
raceway system, conductors, and cables.
3. Install device box in brick or block wall such that cover plate does not
cross a joint, unless otherwise indicated. Where indicated or directed to
cross joint, trowel joint flush with face of wall.
4. Install wiring device after wall preparation, including painting, is
complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced
or terminated on devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around conductor using tools designed for the
purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from
stranded wire.
3. Length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of
NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace damaged conductors.

26 27 26 - 6 JANUARY 2014
b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and
foreign matter.
c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided outlet box is
large enough.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction or
that show signs they were installed before building finishing operations
were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is
time to connect conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge
covers, until last possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than
6 inches (150 mm) in length.
5. Use torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by
manufacturer.
6. When conductors larger than 12 AWG are installed on 15-amp or
20-amp circuits, splice 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
7. Tighten unused terminal screws on device.
8. Device Plates:
a. Do not use oversized or extra deep plate.
b. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet box when standard device
plate does not fit flush or does not cover rough wall opening.
3.02 SWITCH INSTALLATION
A. Switch, General Purpose:
1. Mounting Height: See Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes.
2. Install with switch operation in vertical position.
3. Install single-pole, two-way switch such that toggle is in up position
when switch is on.
B. Switch, Motor Rated:
1. Mounting Height: See Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes.
2. Install with switch operation in vertical position such that toggle is in up
position when ON.
3. Install within sight of motor when used as disconnect switch.
C. Occupancy Sensor, Wall Switch: Install in accordance with manufacturers
instructions.

JANUARY 2014 26 27 26 - 7
3.03 RECEPTACLE INSTALLATION
A. Duplex Receptacle:
1. Install with grounding slot down, except where horizontal mounting is
shown, in which case install with neutral slot up.
2. Ground receptacle to box with grounding wire only.
3. Weatherproof Receptacle:
a. Install in cast metal box.
b. Install such that hinge for protective cover is above receptacle
opening.
4. Ground Fault Interrupter: Install feed-through model at locations where
ground fault protection is specified for downstream conventional
receptacles.
5. Special-Purpose Receptacle: Install in accordance with manufacturers
instructions.
B. Multioutlet Surface Raceway System: Install in accordance with
manufacturers instructions.
3.04 DEVICE PLATE INSTALLATION
A. Securely fasten to wiring device; ensure tight fit to box.
B. Flush Mounted: Install with all four edges in continuous contact with finished
wall surface without use of mat or similar material. Plaster fillings will not be
acceptable.
C. Surface Mounted: Plate shall not extend beyond sides of box, unless plate has
no sharp corners or edges.
D. Install with alignment tolerance to box of 1/16 inch.
E. Type (Unless Otherwise Shown):
1. Interior: Match the cover plate material and color to those of adjacent
devices.
2. Exterior:
a. Switch: Weatherproof.
b. Receptacle in Damp Location: Weatherproof Type 1.
c. Receptacle in Wet Location: Weatherproof Type 2.
F. Interior:
1. Flush Mounted Box: Nylon or metal to match adjacent boxes.

26 27 26 - 8 JANUARY 2014
2. Surface Mounted, Metal Box:
a. General Purpose Areas: Sheet Steel.
b. Other Areas: Cast.
3. Surface Mounted, Aluminum Box:
a. General Purpose Areas: Stamped.
b. Other Areas: Cast.
4. Surface Mounted, Sheet Steel Box: Raised sheet steel.
5. Surface Mounted, Nonmetallic Box: Manufacturers standard.
6. Receptacle Shown as Weatherproof on Drawings: Weatherproof Type 1.
3.05 IDENTIFICATION
A. Use tape labels for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles
in dry indoor locations.
1. Degrease and clean device plate surface to receive tape labels.
2. Use 3/16-inch Kroy black letters on white background, unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Identify panelboard and circuit number from which item is served on
face of plate.
B. Identify conductors with durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes
where more than one circuit is present.
A. Perform tests and inspections, and prepare test reports.
B. Test Instrument for 125-Volt 20-Amp Receptacle: Digital wiring analyzer
with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
C. Using test plug, verify device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
D. Line Voltage Range: 105 volts to 132 volts.
E. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-Amp Load: Less than 6 percent; 6 percent or
higher is not acceptable.
F. Ground Impedance: 2 ohms, maximum.
G. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
H. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at
circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective
devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove
malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 LIGHTING
JANUARY 2014 26 50 00 - 1
SECTION 26 50 00
LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
1. Certified Ballast Manufacturer (CBM).
2. Federal Communications Commission (FCC).
3. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA).
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250,
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
Code (NEC) Softbound Version.
6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 924, Emergency Lighting and
Power Equipment.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Interior Luminaires:
1) Catalog data sheets and pictures.
2) Luminaire finish and metal gauge.
3) Lens material, pattern, and thickness.
4) Candle power distribution curves in two or more planes.
5) Candle power chart 0 degree to 90 degrees.
6) Lumen output chart.
7) Average maximum brightness data in foot lamberts.
8) Coefficients of utilization for zonal cavity calculations.
9) Mounting or suspension details.
b. Lamps:
1) Voltages.
2) Colors.
3) Approximate life (in hours).
4) Approximate initial lumens.
5) Lumen maintenance curve.
6) Lamp type and base.
7) Copy of lamp order, including individual quantities, for
Project.

LIGHTING PW/WBG/475883
26 50 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
c. Ballasts:
1) Type.
2) Wiring diagram.
3) Nominal watts and input watts.
4) Input voltage and power factor.
5) Starting current, line current, and restrike current values.
6) Sound rating.
7) Temperature rating.
8) Efficiency ratings.
9) Low temperature characteristics.
10) Emergency ballasts rating and capacity data.
d. Photo-Time Control:
1) Wiring diagram.
2) Contact ratings.
e. Photocells:
1) Voltage, and power consumption.
2) Capacity.
3) Contacts and time delay.
4) Operating levels.
5) Enclosure type and dimensions.
6) Temperature range.
f. Occupancy Sensors:
1) Type.
2) Switching capacity.
3) Coverage.
4) Time delay AUTO/OFF adjustment.
g. Low Voltage Remote Control Wiring System:
1) Type.
2) Switching capacity.
3) Voltage rating.
4) Wiring diagrams.
2. Samples: Submit Samples of each substituted luminaire if requested by
Engineer.
approval under NEC.

JANUARY 2014 26 50 00 - 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMINAIRES
A. Specific requirements relative to execution of the Work of this Section are
located in Luminaire Schedule on Drawings.
B. Feed-through type, or separate junction box.
C. Ballasts: Two-lamp when possible.
D. Tandem wired for three-lamp, fluorescent fixtures.
E. Wire Leads: Minimum 18 AWG.
F. Component Access: Accessible and replaceable without removing luminaire
from ceiling.
G. Emergency Lighting:
1. Power Pack: Self-contained, 120/277-volt dual voltage transformer,
inverter/charger, sealed nickel cadmium battery, and indicator switch in
accordance with UL 924.
2. Lighted, push-to-test indicator.
3. Capable of providing full illumination for 1-1/2 hours in emergency
mode.
4. Capable of full recharge in 24 hours, automatically upon resumption of
normal line voltage.
5. Capable of protecting against excess charging and discharging.
2.02 LAMPS
A. Fluorescent:
1. Type Efficiency: Energy.
2. Color: 3500k, or as required to match adjacent fixtures.
B. Light Emitting Diode (LED):
1. Type Efficiency: Energy Star.
2. Color: 3500k, CRI>80 percent.
3. High-brightness LEDs mounted to a metal-core circuit board.

26 50 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
2.03 BALLASTS/DRIVERS
A. General:
1. Meet requirements for fixture light output, reliable starting, radio
interference, total harmonic distortion, electromagnetic interference, and
dielectric rating.
2. Certified by electrical testing laboratory to conform to CBM
specifications.
B. Fluorescent (Electronic):
1. Provide in 1 lamp, 2 lamp, or 3 lamp models.
2. High frequency ballast of 20k Hz or greater; rapid-start.
3. Meets FCC Part 18.
4. UL listed, Class P, sound rating A.
5. Power factor of 95 percent or greater.
6. Total harmonic distortion THD shall be less than 10 percent.
7. Shall withstand line transients per IEEE C62.41, Cat A.
8. Shall not contain PCBs and shall carry a minimum 3-year
manufacturers warranty.
9. Ballast shall start lamp at a minimum temperature of 50 degrees F.
C. LED Driver: High-efficiency, electronic LED driver integral to the luminaire.
2.04 LIGHTING CONTROL
A. Time Switch:
1. Provide digital electronic time switches with number of channels
required. Each channel shall be independently programmable and shall
have a Form C dry contact, output rated for 10 amps at 120V ac. Time
switches shall have, as a minimum, the following features:
a. Selectable am/pm or 24-hour format.
b. 1-minute time resolution.
c. Programmable up to 48 events per channel.
d. Weekly or 365-day capability.
e. Holiday capability.
f. User-programmable daylight savings time adjustment option.
g. Automatic leap year compensation.
h. Battery backup with rechargeable batteries and 72-hour capacity.
i. Individual manual ON/OFF override control for each channel.
j. Manufacturers:
1) Tork.
2) Paragon Electric Company.

JANUARY 2014 26 50 00 - 5
B. Photocell:
1. Automatic ON/OFF switching photo control.
2. Housing: Self-contained, die-cast aluminum, unaffected by moisture,
vibration, or temperature changes.
3. Setting: ON at dusk and OFF at dawn.
4. Time delay feature to prevent false switching.
5. Field adjustable to control operating levels.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Tork.
b. Paragon Electric Company.
C. Dimming System:
1. Fluorescent dimmer capable of dimming from one to ten 40-watt rapid-
start lamps.
2. Size: Fit in a single gang wall box.
3. Positive OFF switching and low intensity trim adjustment without
removing dimmer from box.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.
b. Pass and Seymour/LeGrand.
c. Lithonia Lighting Co.
D. Low Voltage Remote Control Wiring System:
1. Provide a complete low-voltage, remote control wiring system for
control of lighting fixtures as indicated on Drawings and Schedules.
System shall be complete with transformers, rectifiers, relays, switches,
master switches, electronic controls, enclosures, wall plates, and wiring.
System and components shall be of same manufacturer.
2. Remote control wiring shall be in accordance with Article 725, Class 2
of NFPA 70.
3. Provide for direct-wired connection of:
a. Standard of pilot light switches for individual control of relays.
b. Two independent master override inputs which allow ON/OFF
control of all relays while still supporting individual control of
each relay.
4. Relay panels shall be configured to allow future addition of up to two
master controls of programmable control of all relays.

26 50 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
E. Occupancy Sensors:
1. Passive Infrared:
a. Wall switch sensors shall be capable of detection of motion at
desk top level up to 300 square feet and gross motion up to
1,000 square feet.
b. Wall switch sensors shall accommodate loads from 0 to 800 watts
at 120 volts; 0 to 1,200 watts at 277 volts and shall have
180-degree coverage capability.
c. Bi-level wall switch sensors shall accommodate up to two loads
from 0 to 800 watts at 120 volts; 0 to 1,200 at 277 volts, for each
load.
d. Passive infrared sensors shall have a multiple segmented lens, in a
multiple-tier configuration, with grooves-in to eliminate dust and
residue build-up.
e. Wall switches shall be compatible with electronic ballasts.
2. Dual Technology Units:
a. Unit to be ceiling mounted for 360-degree coverage.
b. Unit shall utilize both passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies
and be easily programmed to accommodate different
environmental and architectural conditions.
c. Unit must detect up to 2,000 square feet with no blind spots.
d. No audio dual technology units will be accepted.
3. Circuit Control HardwareCU Power Packs:
a. Control Units: Able to mount through a 1/2-inch knock-out in a
standard electrical enclosure and be an integrated, self-contained
unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control
relay and a transformer to provide low-voltage power.
Transformer shall provide power to a minimum of two sensors.
b. Relay contacts shall have ratings of:
1) 13A, 120V ac tungsten.
2) 20A, 120V ac ballast.
4. Wiring: Control wiring between sensors and control units shall be
Class II, 14-AWG, stranded, UL Classified, PVC insulated or Teflon
jacketed cable approved for use in plenums, where applicable.
5. General:
a. Sensors shall be capable of operating normally with any electronic
ballast and PL lamp systems.
b. Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control
has been set. No automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due
to cycling of air conditioner or heating fans.
c. Sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable controls for
time delay and sensitivity.
d. In event of failure, bypass manual OVERRIDE ON key shall be
provided on each sensor. When bypass is utilized, lighting shall

JANUARY 2014 26 50 00 - 7
remain on constantly or control shall divert to a wall switch until
sensor is replaced. This control shall be recessed to prevent
tampering.
e. Units shall have an extra Form C (1-NO-1-NC) contact for
interface with building system. Units shall be designed to be
mountable in standard electrical box.
f. Units shall have capability of being ordered with integral power
pack.
g. Manufacturers:
1) Unenco, Inc.
2) The Watt Stopper, Inc.
2.05 EMERGENCY BALLAST
A. In accordance with UL 924.
B. Nickel cadmium battery, charger, and electronic circuitry in metal case.
C. Solid state charging indicator monitoring light and double-pole test switch.
D. Capable of operating two fluorescent lamps for a period of 90 minutes with
output of 1,100 to 1,200 lumens.
E. Manufacturers:
1. MagneTek Lighting Products.
2. The Bodine Co., Inc.
3. Lithonia.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 LUMINAIRES
A. General:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
2. Provide proper hangers, pendants, and canopies as necessary for
complete installation.
3. Provide additional ceiling bracing, hanger supports, and other structural
reinforcements to building required to safely mount.
5. Install each luminaire outlet box with galvanized stud.

26 50 00 - 8 JANUARY 2014
B. Mounting:
1. General:
a. Mounting, fastening, and environmental conditions shall be
coordinated with Section 26 05 02, Basic Electrical Requirements.
b. Refer to Fastener Schedule in Section 05 50 00, Metal
Fabrications.
2. Wall Mounted: Measure mounting heights from center of mounting
plate to finished floor or finished grade, whichever is applicable.
3. Pendant Mounted:
a. Provide swivel type hangers and canopies to match luminaires,
unless otherwise noted.
b. Space single-stem hangers on continuous-row fluorescent
luminaires nominally 48 inches apart.
c. Provide twin-stem hangers on single luminaires.
d. Measure mounting heights from bottom of luminaire to finished
floor or finished grade, whichever is applicable.
C. Swinging Type: Provide, at each support, safety cable capable of supporting
four times vertical load from structure to luminaire.
D. Finished Areas:
1. Install symmetrically with tile pattern.
2. Locate with centerlines either on centerline of tile or on joint between
adjacent tile runs.
3. Install recessed luminaires tight to finished surface such that no spill
light will show between ceilings and sealing rings.
4. Combustible Low Density Cellulose Fiberboard: Provide spacers and
mount luminaires 1-1/2 inches from ceiling surface, or use fixtures
suitable for mounting on low density ceilings.
5. Junction Boxes:
a. Flush and Recessed Luminaires: Locate minimum 1-foot from
luminaire.
b. In concealed locations, install junction boxes to be accessible by
removing luminaire.
6. Wiring and Conduit:
a. Provide wiring of temperature rating required by luminaire.
b. Provide flexible steel conduit.
7. Provide plaster frames when required by ceiling construction.
8. Independent Supports:
a. Provide each recessed fluorescent luminaire with two safety
chains or two No. 12 soft-annealed galvanized steel wires of
length needed to secure luminaire to building structure
independent of ceiling structure.

JANUARY 2014 26 50 00 - 9
b. Tensile strength of chain or wire, and method of fastening to
structure shall be adequate to support weight of luminaire.
c. Fasten chain or wire to each end of luminaire.
E. Unfinished Areas: Locate luminaires to avoid conflict with other building
systems or blockage of luminaire light output.
1. Fixture Suspension: Provide 1/4-inch threaded steel hanger rods. Scissor
type hangers not permitted.
2. Attachment to Steel Beams: Provide flanged beam clips and straight or
angled hangers.
3.02 LAMPS
A. Provide in each fixture, number and type for which fixture is designed, unless
otherwise noted.
B. Dispose of demolished lamps in accordance with Boise City codes.
3.03 BALLASTS
A. Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
B. Utilize all ballast mounting holes to fasten securely within luminaire.
C. Replace noisy or defective ballasts.
A. Dimming Systems:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
2. Do not connect ballasts or equipment to dimming system unless
acceptable to dimming system manufacturer.
B. Occupancy Sensors: Locate and aim sensors in correct location required for
complete and proper volumetric coverage within range of coverage(s) of
controlled areas per manufacturers recommendations. Rooms shall have 90 to
100 percent coverage to completely cover controlled area to accommodate all
occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within
room(s). Locations and quantities of sensors shown on Drawings are
diagrammatic and indicate only rooms which are to be provided with sensors.
Provide additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover
respective room. Do not locate sensors directly over occupant chairs in office
areas.

26 50 00 - 10 JANUARY 2014
3.05 EMERGENCY BALLAST
A. Install battery, charger, and electronic circuitry metal case inside fluorescent
fixture housing adjacent to ac ballast.
B. Install monitoring light and double-pole switch adjacent to light fixture.
C. Wire in accordance with manufacturers wiring diagrams.
3.06 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNIT
A. Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
B. Provide permanent circuit connections with conduit and wire.
C. Connect to branch circuit feeding normal lighting in area ahead of all local
switches.
D. Provide separate circuit wiring to luminaire.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Remove labels and markings, except UL listing mark.
B. Wipe luminaires inside and out to remove construction dust.
C. Clean luminaire plastic lenses with antistatic cleaners only.
D. Touch up painted surfaces of luminaires and poles with matching paint
ordered from manufacturer.
E. Replace defective lamps at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
JANUARY 2014 26 56 00 - 1
SECTION 26 56 00
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
a. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip
Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
b. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)
c. A572/A572A, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-
Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel.
d. A588/A588M, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-
Alloy Structural Steel, with 50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield
Point to 4-in. [100-mm] Thick.
e. A595/A595M, Standard Specification for Steel Tubes, Low-
Carbon or High-Strength Low-Alloy, Tapered for Structural Use.
f. A615/A615M, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain
g. A1011/A1011M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and
Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy,
High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-
High Strength.
h. D6576, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Rubber
Chemically Blown.
i. G154, Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light
Apparatus for UV Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials.
2. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA): M6, Brands Used on
Forest Products.
3. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA): HB-9,
Lighting Handbook.
4. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): C2,
National Electrical Safety Code.
5. Military Specification (MIL): DTL-83420M, Wire Rope, Flexible, for
Aircraft Control, General Specification for.
b. ICS 6, Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures.
7. National Energy Policy Act.
Code.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING PW/WBG/475883
26 56 00 - 2 JANUARY 2014
9. Rural Utilities Service (RUS): 1728F-700, Specification for Wood
Poles, Stubs and Anchor Logs.
10. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a. 595, Standard for Safety Marine-Type Electric Lighting Fixtures.
b. 844, Standard for Luminaires for Use in Hazardous (Classified)
Locations.
11. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and U.S. Department of Energy:
Energy Star.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Exterior Luminaires:
1) Catalog data sheets and pictures.
2) Luminaire material, finish, metal gauge, and dimensions.
3) IESNA classification and isolux diagram.
4) Distribution data according to classification type as defined
in IESNA HB-9. Computerized horizontal illumination
levels in footcandles at ground level, taken every 10 feet.
Include average maintained footcandle level and maximum
and minimum ratio.
5) Fastening details.
6) For light poles, submit wind loading, complete dimensions,
pole deflection with fixture attached, finish, and catalog
sheet.
7) Lens material, pattern, and thickness.
8) Data indicating lumens per watt efficiency and color
rendition index of light source.
b. Lamps:
1) Voltage.
2) Approximate life (in hours).
3) Approximate initial lumens.
4) Lamp type and base.
5) Color.
c. Ballasts:
1) Type.
2) Wiring diagram.
3) Nominal watts and input watts.
4) Input voltage and power factor.
5) Starting current, line current, and restrike current values.
6) Sound rating.
7) Temperature rating.
8) Efficiency ratings.
9) Low temperature characteristics.

JANUARY 2014 26 56 00 - 3
d. Photocells:
1) Voltage, and power consumption.
2) Capacity.
3) Contacts and time delay.
4) Operating levels.
5) Enclosure type and dimensions.
6) Temperature range.
1. Manufacturers printed installation instructions.
2. Operation and Maintenance Data.
be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other
organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for
approval under NEC.
B. Standard Products:
1. Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship.
2. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for
2 years prior to Bid opening. The 2-year period shall include
applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances
and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the
commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period.
3. Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date: Products manufactured
more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to Site shall not be used.
A. Aluminum Poles:
1. Manufacturers standard provision shall be made for protecting the
finish during shipment and installation. Minimum protection shall

26 56 00 - 4 JANUARY 2014
consist of spirally wrapping each pole shaft with protective paper
secured with tape, and shipping small parts in boxes.
2. Do not store poles on ground.
3. Support poles so they are at least 1 foot above ground level and growing
vegetation.
4. Do not remove factory-applied pole wrappings until just before
installing pole.
5. Ship poles with bolt circle template, base cover, handhold cover, and
shaft cap or tenon.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All products shall conform to the latest Idaho Standards for Public Works
Construction (ISPWC), with Supplementary Conditions, and the Boise City
Standard Revisions for ISPWC Division 1102 Street Lights.
2.02 LUMINAIRES
A. General:
1. Specific requirements relative to the Work of this Section are located in
Luminaire Schedule on Drawings.
2. Component Access: Accessible and replaceable without removing
luminaire from its mounting.
B. Exterior Installations:
1. UL Labeled: SUITABLE FOR WET LOCATIONS.
2. Ballast: Removable, prewired.
3. When factory-installed photo cells are provided, entire assembly shall
have UL label.
C. Lamps:
1. LED lamps, wattage and color as indicated in Luminaire Schedule.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Holophane.
b. Cooper Lighting.
c. Lithonia/Acuity.

JANUARY 2014 26 56 00 - 5
2.03 LIGHTING CONTACTOR
A. Features:
1. Electrically held contactor.
2. Contacts shall be rated 600 volts, 30 amperes, and 3 poles.
3. Silver alloy double-break contacts.
4. Coils shall be rated 277 volts.
5. Enclosure: NEMA 4X conforming to NEMA ICS 6.
6. Provide contactor with hand-off-automatic selector switch.
A. Time Switch:
1. Provide digital electronic time switches with number of channels as
required. Each channel shall be independently programmable and shall
have a Form C dry contact, output rated for 10 amps at 120V ac. Time
switches shall have, as a minimum, the following features:
a. Selectable am/pm or 24-hour format.
b. 1 minute time resolution.
c. Programmable up to 48 events per channel.
d. Weekly or 365-day capability.
e. Holiday capability.
f. User-programmable daylight savings time adjustment option.
g. Automatic leap year compensation.
h. Battery backup with rechargeable batteries and 72-hour capacity.
i. Individual manual ON/OFF override control for each channel.
j. Manufacturers:
1) Tork.
2) Paragon Electric Company.
2.05 PHOTOCELL SWITCH
A. Features:
1. Automatic ON/OFF switching photo control.
2. Housing: Self-contained, die-cast aluminum, unaffected by moisture,
vibration, or temperature changes.
3. Setting: ON at dusk and OFF at dawn.
4. Time delay feature to prevent false switching.
5. Field adjustable to control operating levels.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Tork.
b. Paragon Electric Company.

26 56 00 - 6 JANUARY 2014
2.06 POLES
A. General:
1. Design for wind load as specified in Section 01 61 00, Common Product
Requirements, while supporting luminaires and other appurtenances.
The effective projected areas (EPA) of luminaires and appurtenances
used in calculations shall be specific for the actual products provided on
each pole.
2. Poles 40 feet and shorter shall be one piece construction.
3. Pole Height: As indicated on Luminaire Schedule.
4. Scratched, stained, chipped, or dented poles shall not be installed.
B. Historical Poles:
1. Historical style metal poles shall be true copies, approved by Boise City,
Department of Public Works, of the original Old Boise Historical Pole.
The new historical poles shall have the same surface texture and have
the same Dark Green or Black Green color finish that matches the
existing Historical poles in the Historical Lighting District. Metal poles
shall have a powder coat finish in accordance with ASTM B117.
2. Historical poles for the City of Boise shall be cast aluminum, in style
and texture of the original Old Boise Historical Pole.
3. Approved Products:
a. Antique Street Lamp, PA B-120 12-6 CLD107811 FG-S
BI 601810, Capitol-B1113641CS.
b. Continental Pole & Lighting, ID20-FT12-ID21, Fluted-Cast
Aluminum Pole with capitol integral to the pole (no capitol
required).
4. Color: To match existing poles, approved color mix for Valspar Anti-
Rust gloss, oil enamel paint, base #4, #49437: mixture formula;
114-1Y29.44, 101-4Y42.9, 103-4Y14.55. Color designate for Antique is
DGRG, for Continental it is RAL 6009.
5. Provide Capitol top adaptor to accept Holophane Boisean fixture, if
required.
6. Additional pole requirements for historic lights installed within the
Capitol City Development Corporation (CCDC) shall be:
a. Poles shall be supplied with a block out for an electrical outlet.
b. Poles shall be supplied with a manufacturers adaptor for
installation of the approved banner arms; Continental Pole &
Lighting pole number ID20-FT-12-ID21-BA or Antique Street
Lamps BAB25B4BBA ANDG.

JANUARY 2014 26 56 00 - 7
2.07 BRACKETS AND SUPPORTS
A. Features:
1. Not less than 1-1/4-inch aluminum secured to pole.
2. Slip-fitter or pipe-threaded brackets may be used, but brackets shall be
coordinated to luminaires provided, and brackets for use with one type
of luminaire shall be identical.
3. Brackets for pole-mounted street lights shall correctly position
luminaire no lower than mounting height indicated.
4. Mount brackets not less than 24 feet above street.
5. Special mountings or brackets shall be as indicated on Drawings and
shall be of metal which will not promote galvanic reaction with
luminaire head.
2.08 POLE FOUNDATIONS
A. Anchor Bolts: Steel rod having a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi; the
top 12 inches of the rod shall be galvanized.
B. Concrete: As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2.09 LIGHT FIXTURES
A. Fixture wattage as required by Boise City Public Works.
B. Light Source:
1. Overhead lights: Multi-tapped ballast for voltage, high pressure sodium
light source.
2. Historic lights: Light Emitting Diode with wattage specific driver light
source. Lights shall be 70 watt LED. The following units are approved:
a. Holophane GV1A73N/GV3N/LED 70W E350 MVOLT (match
with Holophane fixture).
b. Cooper Lighting GRANVIL-50-E-1.
C. Approved Fixture Types as Follows:
1. Shoe Box Fixture:
a. Lithonia Lighting, Contour series, KAD 1005 TB.
b. GE Decashield series.
c. Or approved equal.
2. Decorative fixtures to be approved prior to installation and may be used
only in certain situations consistent with Public Works policy:
a. EMCO, Ecoround Model, ERA201-3H100HPSMT-BLP-PCR
b. Cooper Lighting, Epic series, ECM-100-HPS-MT-3S-FG-SO-BL-
BK-L-VA6154-BK-R.

26 56 00 - 8 JANUARY 2014
c. Eurotique, Model EH22RT-100S-MOG-GCF-SR3-TB-ANBK
with bracket EAG-4/1-PNIP6PER(ANBK).
3. Historic Fixtures:
a. Holophane BOISELED070ASRTRN MVOLT (match with
Holophane light).
b. Cooper Lighting GRANVIL-50-E-1 (light and fixture are
integral).
4. Historic globes shall be Holophane Granville GV3N Glass or
Continental ID21-C445 Type V.
2.10 EXTERNAL FUSE DISCONNECT
A. Provide for each pole, in adjacent or integral junction box to pole, between
power source and light pole.
B. Fuse shall be 100k RMS amps, fast-acting, 600V ac.
2.11 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Manufacturers Nameplate: Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate
bearing manufacturers name, address, model number, and serial number
securely affixed in a conspicuous place; nameplate of distributing agent will
not be acceptable.
B. Markings shall be clear and located to be readily visible to service personnel.
2.12 FACTORY FINISH
A. Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall,
as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall conform to the latest Idaho Standards for Public Works
Construction (ISPWC), with Supplementary Conditions, and the Boise City
Standard Revisions for ISPWC Division 1102 Street Lights.
B. Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 and requirements specified
herein.
C. Pole Setting:
1. Depth shall be as indicated on Drawings or footing detail.
2. Poles in straight runs shall be in a straight line.

JANUARY 2014 26 56 00 - 9
C. Aluminum Poles: Install according to pole manufacturers instructions.
1. Provide cast-in-place concrete base.
2. Provide branch circuit in-line fuses in pole base handhole.
D. Photocell Switch Aiming: Mount and aim switch according to manufacturers
recommendations.
E. Grounding: Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including metal
poles, luminaires, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures as
specified in Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper,
provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose.
3.02 FIELD FINISHES
A. Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or
to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as specified
in Section 09 90 05, Architectural Painting.
A. Upon completion of installation, verify equipment is properly installed,
connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test to show equipment
operates in accordance with the requirements of this Section.
B. Coordinate lighting and controls installation and testing with City of Boise
Municipal Lighting Technician, Mike Hedge.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove labels and markings, except UL listing mark.
B. Wipe luminaries inside and out to remove construction dust.
C. Clean luminaire plastic lenses with antistatic cleaners only.
D. Touchup painted surfaces of luminaries and poles with matching paint ordered
from manufacturer.
E. Replace defective lamps at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
JANUARY 2014 31 23 13 - 1
SECTION 31 23 13
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
a. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft
3

(600 kN-m/m
3
)).
b. D1557, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics
of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft
3
(2,700 kN-m/m
3
)).
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Optimum Moisture Content: As defined in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.
B. Proof-Rolling: Testing of subgrade by compactive effort to identify areas that
will not support the future loading without excessive settlement.
C. Relative Compaction: As defined in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.
D. Relative Density: As defined in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.
E. Subgrade: Ground surface after completion of excavation to grade and proof-
rolling of ground surface.
A. Complete applicable Work specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition, and
Section 31 23 16, Excavation, prior to subgrade preparation.
A. Prepare subgrade when unfrozen and free of ice and snow.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Keep subgrade free of water, debris, and foreign matter during proof-rolling.

SUBGRADE PREPARATION PW/WBG/475883
31 23 13 - 2 JANUARY 2014
B. Bring subgrade to proper grade and cross-section and uniformly compact
surface.
C. Protect prepared subgrade from foot and equipment traffic.
D. Maintain subgrade in finished condition until next course is placed.
3.02 TESTING
A. Proof-roll subgrade with walk-behind vibratory equipment to detect soft or
loose subgrade or unsuitable material, as determined by Engineer.
3.03 CORRECTION
A. Soft or Loose Subgrade: Over excavate as specified in Section 31 23 16,
Excavation, and replace with suitable material from the excavation or crushed
aggregate, as specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.
B. Unsuitable Material: Over excavate as specified in Section 31 23 16,
Excavation, and replace with suitable material from the excavation or crushed
aggregate, as specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 EXCAVATION
JANUARY 2014 31 23 16 - 1
SECTION 31 23 16
EXCAVATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
1. Excavation Plan, Detailing:
a. Methods and sequencing of excavation.
b. Proposed locations of stockpiled excavated material.
A. Provide adequate survey control to avoid unauthorized overexcavation.
1.03 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
A. Material excavated when frozen or when air temperature is less than
32 degrees F shall not be used as fill or backfill until material completely
thaws.
B. Material excavated during inclement weather shall not be used as fill or
backfill until after material drains and dries sufficiently for proper
compaction.
A. Demolition: Complete applicable Work specified in Section 02 41 00,
Demolition, prior to excavating.
B. Excavation Support: Install and maintain excavation support as necessary to
support sides of excavations and prevent detrimental settlement and lateral
movement of existing facilities, adjacent property, and completed Work.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Excavate to lines, grades, and dimensions shown and as necessary to
accomplish Work. Excavate to within tolerance of plus or minus 0.1 foot,
except where dimensions or grades are shown or specified as maximum or
minimum. Allow for forms, working space, granular base, topsoil, and similar

EXCAVATION PW/WBG/475883
31 23 16 - 2 JANUARY 2014
items, wherever applicable. Trim to neat lines where concrete is to be
deposited against earth.
B. Do not overexcavate without written authorization of Engineer.
C. Remove or protect obstructions as shown and as specified in Section 01 50 00,
Temporary Facilities and Controls, Article Protection of Work and Property.
3.02 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION
A. Excavation is unclassified. Complete all excavation regardless of the type,
nature, or condition of the materials encountered.
3.03 STOCKPILING EXCAVATED MATERIAL
A. Stockpile excavated material that is suitable for use as fill or backfill until
material is needed.
B. Confine stockpiles to approved stockpile areas. Do not obstruct Work.
C. Do not stockpile excavated material adjacent to excavations, unless
excavation side slopes and excavation support systems are designed,
constructed, and maintained for stockpile loads.
3.04 DISPOSAL OF SPOIL
A. Dispose of excavated materials, which are unsuitable or exceed quantity
needed for fill or backfill, offsite.
B. Dispose of debris resulting from removal of underground facilities as
specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition, for demolition debris.
END OF SECTION

PW/WBG/475883 FILL AND BACKFILL
JANUARY 2014 31 23 23 - 1
SECTION 31 23 23
FILL AND BACKFILL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
a. C117, Standard Test Method for Materials Finer Than
75-Micrometers (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by
Washing.
b. C136, Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates.
c. D75, Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates.
d. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft
3

(600 kN-m/m
3
)).
e. D1556, Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of
Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.
f. D1557, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics
of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft
3
(2,700 kN-m/m
3
)).
g. D4253, Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and
Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table.
h. D4254, Standard Test Method for Minimum Index Density and
Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density.
i. D6938, Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water
Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow
Depth).
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Relative Compaction:
1. Ratio, in percent, of as-compacted field dry density to laboratory
maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D1557.
2. Apply corrections for oversize material to either as-compacted field dry
density or maximum dry density, as determined by Engineer.
B. Optimum Moisture Content:
1. Determined in accordance with ASTM Standard specified to determine
maximum dry density for relative compaction.
2. Determine field moisture content on basis of fraction passing 3/4-inch
sieve.

FILL AND BACKFILL PW/WBG/475883
31 23 23 - 2 JANUARY 2014
C. Relative Density: Calculated in accordance with ASTM D4254 based on
maximum index density determined in accordance with ASTM D4253 and
minimum index density determined in accordance with ASTM D4254.
D. Subgrade: Ground surface after completion of required demolition, excavation
to grade, and preparation of ground surface.
E. Completed Course: A course or layer that is ready for next layer or next phase
of Work.
F. Lift: Loose (uncompacted) layer of material.
G. Well-Graded:
1. A mixture of particle sizes with no specific concentration or lack thereof
of one or more sizes.
2. Does not define numerical value that must be placed on coefficient of
uniformity, coefficient of curvature, or other specific grain size
distribution parameters.
3. Used to define material type that, when compacted, produces a strong
and relatively incompressible soil mass free from detrimental voids.
H. Influence Area: Area within planes sloped downward and outward at
60-degree angle from horizontal measured from:
1. 1 foot outside outermost edge at base of foundations or slabs.
2. 1 foot outside outermost edge at surface of roadways or shoulder.
3. 0.5 foot outside exterior at spring line of pipes or culverts.
I. Borrow Material: Material from required excavations or from designated
borrow areas on or near Site.
J. Selected Backfill Material: Materials available onsite that Engineer
determines to be suitable for specific use.
K. Imported Material: Materials obtained from sources offsite, suitable for
specified use.
L. Granular Fill: Fill materials as required under structures, pavements, and other
facilities.
M. Crushed Aggregate: Alternate fill material under pavements.

JANUARY 2014 31 23 23 - 3
A. Notify Engineer when:
1. Soft or loose subgrade materials are encountered wherever embankment
or site fill is to be placed.
2. Fill material appears to be deviating from Specifications.
A. Complete applicable Work specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition,
Section 31 23 16, Excavation, and Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation,
prior to placing fill or backfill.
B. Backfill against concrete structures only after concrete has attained
compressive strength, specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
Obtain Engineers acceptance of concrete work and attained strength prior to
placing backfill.
C. Do not place fill material until after subgrade has been prepared as specified
in Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Gradation Tests: As necessary to locate acceptable sources of imported
material.
2.02 GRANULAR FILL
A. 1-inch minus crushed coarse-grained material from required excavations or
imported as necessary.
B. Free from dirt, clay balls, and organic material.
C. Well-graded from coarse to fine and containing sufficient fines to bind
material when compacted, but with maximum 8 percent by weight passing
No. 200 sieve.

FILL AND BACKFILL PW/WBG/475883
31 23 23 - 4 JANUARY 2014
2.03 CRUSHED AGGREGATE
A. 3/4-inch, 60 percent crushed or fractured (at least one side) gravel and sand
with the following gradation requirements:
Sieve Size Percent Passing
1 inch 100
3/4 inch 80 - 100
3/8 inch 20 - 70
No. 4 5 - 20
No. 8 0 - 5
No. 200 0 - 3
B. Free from dirt, clay balls, and organic material.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Keep placement surfaces free of water, debris, and foreign material during
placement and compaction of fill and backfill materials.
B. Place and spread fill and backfill materials in horizontal lifts of uniform
thickness, in a manner that avoids segregation, and compact each lift to
specified densities prior to placing succeeding lifts.
C. During filling and backfilling, keep level of fill and backfill around each
structural feature.
D. Do not place fill or backfill, if fill or backfill material is frozen, or if surface
upon which fill or backfill is to be placed is frozen.
E. Tolerances:
1. Final Lines and Grades: Within a tolerance of 0.1 foot unless
dimensions or grades are shown or specified otherwise.
F. Settlement: Correct and repair any subsequent damage to structures,
pavements, curbs, slabs, piping, and other facilities, caused by settlement of
fill or backfill material.

JANUARY 2014 31 23 23 - 5
3.02 BACKFILL UNDER AND AROUND STRUCTURES
A. Under Facilities: Within influence area beneath structures and other facilities,
backfill with granular fill, unless otherwise shown. Place granular fill in lifts
of 9-inch maximum thickness and compact each lift to minimum of 95 percent
relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D1557.
B. Under Slabs: Granular fill as described above or alternate crushed aggregate
base settled into place using a plate compactor.
3.03 SITE TESTING
A. Gradation:
1. One sample from each source (native or import) or more often as
determined by Engineer, if variation in gradation is occurring, or if
material appears to depart from Specifications.
2. If test results indicate material does not meet Specification
requirements, terminate material placement until corrective measures
are taken.
3. Remove material placed in Work that does not meet Specification
requirements.
B. In-Place Density Tests: In accordance with ASTM D6938. During placement
of materials, test as follows:
1. Granular Fill: One test per lift per foundation location.
3.04 REPLACING OVEREXCAVATED MATERIAL
A. Replace excavation carried below grade lines shown or established by
Engineer as follows:
1. Beneath Footings: Granular fill.
2. Beneath Fill or Backfill: Same material as specified for overlying fill or
backfill.
3. Beneath Slabs-On-Grade: Granular fill or crushed aggregate.
END OF SECTION

PART 2
DRAWINGS
(BOUND SEPARATELY)

Attachment 3323

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Attachment 3323

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

PURCHASING CONTRACT NUMBER_______________

APPROVED AS TO FORM AND CONTENT:

Você também pode gostar